TDI O&M - Chiller 2 PDF

CENTRIFUGAL LIQUID CHILLERS
OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE Supersedes: 160.75-O1 (508) Form 160.75-O1 (211)
MODEL YK (STYLE G)
R-134a
WITH OPTIVIEWTM CONTROL CENTER
FOR ELECTRO-MECHANICAL STARTER,
SOLID STATE STARTER AND VARIABLE SPEED DRIVE
LD15222
FORM 160.75-O1 (211)
IMPORTANT!
READ BEFORE PROCEEDING!
GENERAL SAFETY GUIDELINES
This equipment is a relatively complicated apparatus. which it is situated, as well as severe personal injury or
During installation, operation maintenance or service, death to themselves and people at the site.
individuals may be exposed to certain components or
conditions including, but not limited to: refrigerants, This document is intended for use by owner-authorized
materials under pressure, rotating components, and operating/service personnel. It is expected that this in-
both high and low voltage. Each of these items has the dividual posseses independent training that will enable
potential, if misused or handled improperly, to cause them to perform their assigned tasks properly and safe-
bodily injury or death. It is the obligation and respon- ly. It is essential that, prior to performing any task on
sibility of operating/service personnel to identify and this equipment, this individual shall have read and un-
recognize these inherent hazards, protect themselves, derstood this document and any referenced materials.
and proceed safely in completing their tasks. Failure This individual shall also be familiar with and comply
to comply with any of these requirements could result with all applicable governmental standards and regula-
in serious damage to the equipment and the property in tions pertaining to the task in question.
SAFETY SYMBOLS
The following symbols are used in this document to alert the reader to specific situations:
Indicates a possible hazardous situation Identifies a hazard which could lead to

which will result in death or serious injury damage to the machine, damage to other
if proper care is not taken. equipment and/or environmental pollu-
tion if proper care is not taken or instruc-
tions and are not followed.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situa- Highlights additional information useful

tion which will result in possible injuries to the technician in completing the work
or damage to equipment if proper care is being performed properly.
not taken.
External wiring, unless specified as an optional connection in the manufacturer’s product line, is
not to be connected inside the OptiView cabinet. Devices such as relays, switches, transducers and
controls and any external wiring must not be installed inside the micro panel. All wiring must be in
accordance with Johnson Controls’ published specifications and must be performed only by a qualified
electrician. Johnson Controls will NOT be responsible for damage/problems resulting from improper
connections to the controls or application of improper control signals. Failure to follow this warning
will void the manufacturer’s warranty and cause serious damage to property or personal injury.
2 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.75-O1 (211)
CHANGEABILITY OF THIS DOCUMENT

In complying with Johnson Controls’ policy for contin- Operating/service personnel maintains the responsi-
uous product improvement, the information contained bility of the applicability of these documents to the
in this document is subject to change without notice. competitive equipment the kit is installed on. If there
While Johnson Controls makes no commitment to up- is any question regarding the applicability of these
date or provide current information automatically to documents, the technician should verify whether the
the manual owner, that information, if applicable, can equipment has been modified and if current literature
be obtained by contacting the nearest Johnson Controls is available with the owner of the equipment prior to
Service office. performing any work on the chiller.
ASSOCIATED LITERATURE
MANUAL DESCRIPTION FORM NUMBER
Variable Speed Drive – Operation 160.00-O1
Solid State Starter – Operation and Maintenance 160.00-O2
Floor Mounted MV SSS – Operation 160.00-O5
Unit Mounted MV SSS – Operation 160.00-O7
Installation – Unit 160.75-N1
Optiview™ Control Center – Operation and Maintenance 160.54-O1
Wiring Diagram – Field Connections for YK Chiller (Style G) OptiView Control Center with Remote Low
160.75-PW1
or Medium Voltage EMS or Unit Mounted Low or Medium Voltage SSS
Wiring Diagram – Field Connections for YK Chiller (Style G) OptiView Control Center with Remote
160.75-PW2
Medium Voltage SSS
Wiring Diagram – Field Connections for YK Chiller (Style G) OptiView Control Center with Remote
160.75-PW3
Medium Voltage VSD
Wiring Diagram – Field Control Modifications for YK Chiller (Style G) 160.75-PW4
Wiring Diagram – YK Chiller (Style G) OptiView Control Center with Remote Low or Medium Voltage EMS 160.75-PW5
Wiring Diagram – YK Chiller (Style G) OptiView Control Center with Unit Mounted Low or Medium
160.75-PW6
Voltage SSS, Unit Mounted Low Voltage VSD with Modbus, or Remote Medium Voltage VSD
Wiring Diagram – YK Chiller (Style G) OptiView Control Center with LTC I/O Board with Remote Low or
160.75-PW7
Medium Voltage EMS
Wiring Diagram – YK Chiller (Style G) OptiView Control Center w/ LTC I/O Board with Unit Mounted Low
160.75-PW8
or Medium Voltage SSS, Unit Mounted Low Voltage VSD with Modbus or Remote Medium Voltage VSD
Renewal Parts – Unit 160.75-RP1
Renewal Parts – OptiView Control Center 160.54-RP1
JOHNSON CONTROLS 3
FORM 160.75-O1 (211)
NOMENCLATURE
YK KC K4 H9 – CY G
STYLE (Design Level)
MOTOR CODE
POWER SUPPLY
– for 60 Hz
5 for 50 Hz
COMPRESSOR CODE*
CONDENSER CODE*
EVAPORATOR CODE*
* Refer to YK Engineering Guide for (Form 160.75-EG1)
MODEL* Shell/Motor/Compressor combinations.
4 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.75-O1 (211)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 1 - DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM AND FUNDAMENTALS OF OPERATION........................................... 7

System Operation Description .......................................................................................................................... 7
Capacity Control................................................................................................................................................ 8
SECTION 2 - SYSTEM OPERATING PROCEDURES............................................................................................ 11
Oil Heaters...................................................................................................................................................... 11
Oil Heater Operation....................................................................................................................................... 11
Checking The Oil Level In The Oil Reservoir.................................................................................................. 11
Start-Up Procedure......................................................................................................................................... 11
Start-Up........................................................................................................................................................... 11
Chiller Operation............................................................................................................................................. 13
Condenser Water Temperature Control........................................................................................................... 13
Operating Log Sheet....................................................................................................................................... 13
Operating Inspections..................................................................................................................................... 13
Need For Maintenance Or Service.................................................................................................................. 15
Stopping The System...................................................................................................................................... 15
Prolonged Shutdown....................................................................................................................................... 15
SECTION 3 - SYSTEM COMPONENTS DESCRIPTION........................................................................................17
General............................................................................................................................................................ 17
Compressor..................................................................................................................................................... 17
Capacity Control.............................................................................................................................................. 17
Compressor Lubrication System .................................................................................................................... 17
Oil Pump.......................................................................................................................................................... 17
Oil Heater........................................................................................................................................................ 21
Motor Driveline................................................................................................................................................ 21
Heat Exchangers............................................................................................................................................. 21
Refrigerant Flow Control................................................................................................................................. 22
Optional Service Isolation Valves.................................................................................................................... 22
Optional Hot Gas Bypass................................................................................................................................ 22
OptiView Control Center.................................................................................................................................. 22
Solid State Starter (Optional).......................................................................................................................... 22
Variable Speed Drive (Optional)...................................................................................................................... 22
SECTION 4 - OPERATIONAL MAINTENANCE......................................................................................................23
Oil Return System........................................................................................................................................... 23
Changing The Dehydrator............................................................................................................................... 23
The Oil Charge................................................................................................................................................ 24
Oil Charging Procedure................................................................................................................................... 24
SECTION 5 - TROUBLESHOOTING.......................................................................................................................25
SECTION 6 - MAINTENANCE.................................................................................................................................27
Renewal Parts................................................................................................................................................. 27
Checking System For Leaks........................................................................................................................... 27
Conducting R-22 Pressure Test...................................................................................................................... 27
Vacuum Testing............................................................................................................................................... 28
Vacuum Dehydration....................................................................................................................................... 29
Operation......................................................................................................................................................... 29
Refrigerant Charging....................................................................................................................................... 29
Checking The Refrigerant Charge During Unit Shutdown............................................................................... 30
Handling Refrigerant For Dismantling And Repairs......................................................................................... 30
JOHNSON CONTROLS 5
FORM 160.75-O1 (211)
TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT'D)

Megging The Motor.......................................................................................................................................... 30
Compressor..................................................................................................................................................... 33
Electrical Controls........................................................................................................................................... 34
SECTION 7 - PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE.........................................................................................................35
Compressor..................................................................................................................................................... 35
Compressor Motor........................................................................................................................................... 35
Greased Bearings .......................................................................................................................................... 35
Leak Testing.................................................................................................................................................... 36
Evaporator And Condenser............................................................................................................................. 36
Oil Return System........................................................................................................................................... 36
Electrical Controls........................................................................................................................................... 36
LIST OF FIGURES
FIGURE 1 - Model YK Chiller��7
FIGURE 2 - Compressor Prerotation Vanes��8
FIGURE 3 - Refrigerant Flow-Thru Chiller (Falling Film Evaporator)�� 9
FIGURE 4 - Refrigerant Flow-Thru Chiller (Flooded Evaporator)��10
FIGURE 5 - Oil Level Indicator �� 11
FIGURE 6 - Chiller Starting Sequence And Shutdown Sequence (Em Starter And Solid State Starter)�� 12
FIGURE 7 - Chiller Starting Sequence And Shutdown Sequence (Variable Speed Drive)�� 12
FIGURE 8 - Liquid Chiller Log Sheets��14
FIGURE 9 - System Components Front View��18
FIGURE 10 - System Components Rear View��19
FIGURE 11 - Schematic Drawing – (YK) Compressor Lubrication System�� 20
FIGURE 12 - Oil Return System��23
FIGURE 13 - Charging Oil Reservoir With Oil��24
FIGURE 14 - Evacuation Of Chiller��27
FIGURE 15 - Saturation Curve��29
FIGURE 16 - Diagram, Megging Motor Windings��30
FIGURE 17 - Motor Starter Temperature And Insulation Resistances�� 31
LIST OF TABLES
TABLE 1 - Operation Analysis Chart��25
TABLE 2 - System Pressures��28
TABLE 3 - Bearing Lubrication��35
6 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.75-O1 (211)
SECTION 1 - DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM AND

FUNDAMENTALS OF OPERATION
SYSTEM OPERATION DESCRIPTION nent to operation of the chiller are automatically dis-
played and read on a graphic display. Other displays
The YORK Model YK Chiller is commonly applied
to large air conditioning systems, but may be used
can be observed by pressing the keys as labeled on the 1
Control Center. The chiller with the OptiView Control
on other applications. The chiller consists of an open
Center is compatible with an electro-mechanical start-
motor mounted to a compressor (with integral speed
er, YORK Solid State Starter (optional), or Variable
increasing gears), condenser, evaporator and variable
Speed Drive (optional).
flow control.
In operation, a liquid (water or brine to be chilled)
The chiller is controlled by a modern state of the art
flows through the evaporator, where boiling refrigerant
Microcomputer Control Center that monitors its opera-
absorbs heat from the liquid. The chilled liquid is then
tion. The Control Center is programmed by the opera-
piped to fan coil units or other air conditioning terminal
tor to suit job specifications. Automatic timed start-ups
units, where it flows through finned coils, absorbing
and shutdowns are also programmable to suit night-
heat from the air. The warmed liquid is then returned to
time, weekends, and holidays. The operating status,
the chiller to complete the chilled liquid circuit.
temperatures, pressures, and other information perti-
COMPRESSOR
CONTROL
CENTER
MOTOR
CONDENSER
LD15222
EVAPORATOR
Figure 1 - MODEL YK CHILLER
JOHNSON CONTROLS 7
SECTION 1 - DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM AND FUNDAMENTALS OF OPERATION FORM 160.75-O1 (211)
from the refrigerant vapor, causing it to condense. The

condenser water is supplied to the chiller from an ex-
ternal source, usually a cooling tower. The condensed
refrigerant drains from the condenser into the liquid
return line, where the variable orifice meters the flow
of liquid refrigerant to the evaporator to complete the
refrigerant circuit.
The major components of a chiller are selected to han-
dle the refrigerant, which would be evaporated at full
load design conditions. However, most systems will be
called upon to deliver full load capacity for only a rela-
tively small part of the time the unit is in operation.
CAPACITY CONTROL
The major components of a chiller are selected for full
load capacities, therefore capacity must be controlled
to maintain a constant chilled liquid temperature leav-
ing the evaporator. Prerotation vanes (PRV), located at
the entrance to the compressor impeller, compensate
for variation in load (Refer to Figure 2 on Page 8).
7619A(D)
The position of these vanes is automatically controlled

Figure 2 - COMPRESSOR PREROTATION VANES
through a lever arm attached to an electric motor lo-
cated outside the compressor housing. The automatic
The refrigerant vapor, which is produced by the boil- adjustment of the vane position in effect provides the
ing action in the evaporator, flows to the compressor performance of many different compressors to match
where the rotating impeller increases its pressure and various load conditions from full load with vanes wide
temperature and discharges it into the condenser. Wa- open to minimum load with vanes completely closed.
ter flowing through the condenser tubes absorbs heat
8 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.75-O1 (211) SECTION 1 - DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM AND FUNDAMENTALS OF OPERATION
Refrigerant Flow-Thru Chiller

YK Mod G
(Falling Film Evaporator)
Refrigerant Flow-Thru Cross-Section Diagram
(Falling-Film Evaporator)
COMPRESSOR
HOT GAS PRE-ROTATION

BYPASS VALVE VANES
SUCTION
OPTIONAL HOT GAS

DISCHARGE BYPASS LINE
OPTIONAL LIQUID LEVEL

ISOLATION VALVE
VALVE
EVAPORATOR
CONDENSER
SUCTION
BAFFLE
LIQUID LEVEL
LIQUID LEVEL
SUB-COOLER
OPTIONAL
ISOLATION LD00924A
VALVE
Rev. 2 (10-11-2010)
Figure 3 - REFRIGERANT FLOW-THRU CHILLER (FALLING FILM EVAPORATOR) Dan Sowers
[email protected]
(717) 771-7535
JOHNSON CONTROLS 9
SECTION 1 - DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM AND FUNDAMENTALS OF OPERATION FORM 160.75-O1 (211)

(Flooded Evaporator)
YK Mod G
(Flooded Evaporator)
COMPRESSOR

BYPASS VALVE VANES
SUCTION
DISCHARGE OPTIONAL HOT GAS

BYPASS LINE
OPTIONAL
ISOLATION
VALVE MESH ELIMINATORS or
SUCTION BAFFLE
EVAPORATOR
CONDENSER
LIQUID LEVEL
LIQUID LEVEL
SUB-COOLER

ISOLATION VALVE
LD00924B
VALVE
Rev. 2 (12-09-2010)
Dan Sowers
[email protected]
Figure 4 - REFRIGERANT FLOW-THRU CHILLER (FLOODED EVAPORATOR) (717) 771-7535
10 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.75-O1 (211)
SECTION 2 - SYSTEM OPERATING PROCEDURES
OIL HEATERS • If the oil level during operation is in the OVER

FULL region of the oil level indicator, oil should
If the oil heater is de-energized during a shutdown pe-
be removed from the oil reservoir, This reduces
riod, it must be energized for 12 hours prior to starting
the oil level to the OPERATING RANGE.
compressor, or remove all oil and recharge compres-
sor with new oil. (Refer to Oil Charging Procedure on • If the oil level during operation is in the LOW
Page 24.) OIL region of the oil level indicator, oil should be
added to the oil reservoir. (Refer to Oil Charging
OIL HEATER OPERATION Procedure on Page 24.)
The oil heater operation is controlled by the OptiV-
Comply with EPA and local regulations
iew™ Control Center. The heater is turned on and off
when removing or disposing of refrigera-
to maintain the oil temperature differential to a value
tion system oil!
50°F (27.8°C) above the condenser saturation tem-
perature. This target value is maintained by the control
panel. 2
If the target value is greater than 160°F (71°C), the tar-
get defaults to 160°F (71°C). If the target value is less START-UP PROCEDURE
than 110°F (43.3°C), it defaults to 110°F (43.3°C).
Pre-Starting
To prevent overheating of the oil in the event of a con-
Prior to starting the chiller, observe the Optiview™
trol center component failure, the oil heater thermostat
Control Center – Operation and Maintenance (Form
(1HTR) is set to open at 180°F (82°C).
160.54-O1). Make sure the display reads SYSTEM
CHECKING THE OIL LEVEL IN THE READY TO START.
OIL RESERVOIR Vent any air from the chiller waterboxes
Proper operating oil level – During operation, the oil prior to starting the water pumps. Failure
level should fall to the OPERATING RANGE identified to do so will result in pass baffle damage.
on the vertical oil level indicator label (Refer to Figure 5
on Page 11).
START-UP
1. If the chilled water pump is manually operated,
start the pump. The Control Center will not al-
low the chiller to start unless chilled liquid flow is
established through the unit. If the chilled liquid
pump is wired to the Microcomputer Control Cen-
ter the pump will automatically start, therefore,
this step is not necessary.
2. To start the chiller, press the COMPRESSOR
START switch. This switch will automatically
spring return to the RUN position. (If the unit
was previously started, press the STOP/RESET
side of the COMPRESSOR switch and then press
the START side of the switch to start the chill-
LD08647
er.) When the start switch is energized, the Con-
Figure 5 - OIL LEVEL INDICATOR trol Center is placed in an operating mode and
any malfunction will be noted by messages on a
graphic display.
JOHNSON CONTROLS 11
SECTION 2 - SYSTEM OPERATING PROCEDURES FORM 160.75-O1 (211)
LD15609
** Not for all shutdowns. Refer to “Display Messages” in manual Optiview™ Control Center – Operation and Maintenance (Form 160.54-O1).
Figure 6 - CHILLER STARTING SEQUENCE AND SHUTDOWN SEQUENCE (EM STARTER AND SOLID
STATE STARTER)
LD15610
** Not for all shutdowns. Refer to “Display Messages” in manual Optiview™ Control Center – Operation and Maintenance (Form 160.54-O1).
Figure 7 - CHILLER STARTING SEQUENCE AND SHUTDOWN SEQUENCE (VARIABLE SPEED DRIVE)
12 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.75-O1 (211) SECTION 2 - SYSTEM OPERATING PROCEDURES
For display messages and information pertaining to the At start-up, the entering condenser water temperature
operation refer to Optiview™ Control Center – Opera- may be as much as 25°F (14°C) colder than the stand-
tion and Maintenance (Form 160.54-O1). by return chilled water temperature. Cooling tower fan
Any malfunctions which occur during cycling will normally provide adequate control of the
STOP/RESET are also displayed. entering condenser water temperature on most instal-
lations.
Heat recovery chillers and chillers using optional head
pressure control would use a signal provided by the
microprocessor to control main condenser bundle heat
CHILLER OPERATION rejection or pressure, respectively.
The unit capacity will vary to maintain the leaving OPERATING LOG SHEET
CHILLED LIQUID TEMPERATURE setpoint by the
Pre-rotation Vanes which are modulated by an actua- A permanent daily record of system operating condi-
tor under the control of the Microprocessor Board. The tions (temperatures and pressures) recorded at regular
vane control routine employs proportional plus deriva- intervals throughout each 24 hour operating period
tive (rate) control action. A drop in chilled liquid tem- should be kept.
2
perature will cause the actuator to close the Prerotation An optional status printer is available for this purpose
Vanes to decrease chiller capacity. When the chilled or Figure 8 on Page 14 shows a log sheet used by
liquid temperature rises, the actuator will open the Pre- Johnson Controls Personnel for recording test data on
rotation Vanes to increase the capacity of the chiller. chiller systems. It is available from the factory in pads
However, the current draw (amperes) by the compres- of 50 sheets each under Form 160.44-F7 and may be
sor motor is also limited to FLA setpoint by the micro- obtained through the nearest Johnson Controls office.
processor. Automatic data logging is possible by connecting the
optional printer and programming the DATA LOG-
If the load continues to decrease, after the Prerotation GER function.
Vanes are entirely closed, the chiller will be shut down
by the Leaving Chilled Liquid – Low Temperature An accurate record of readings serves as a valuable ref-
Control. erence for operating the system. Readings taken when
a system is newly installed will establish normal condi-
CONDENSER WATER TEMPERATURE tions with which to compare later readings.
CONTROL For example, an increase in condenser approach tem-
The YORK chiller is designed to use less power by tak- perature (condenser temperature minus leaving con-
ing advantage of lower than design temperatures that denser water temperature) may be an indication of
are naturally produced by cooling towers throughout dirty condenser tubes.
the operating year. Exact control of condenser water
such as a cooling tower bypass, is not necessary for OPERATING INSPECTIONS
most installations. The minimum entering condenser By following a regular inspection using the display
water temperature for full and part load conditions is readings of the Microcomputer Control Center, and
specified in the chiller engineering guide. maintenance procedure, the operator will avoid serious
where: operating difficulty. The following list of inspections
and procedures should be used as a guide.
% Load
Min. ECWT = LCWT – C RANGE + 5ºF + 12 ( 100 )
% Load Daily
Min. ECWT = LCWT – C RANGE + 2.8ºC + 6.6 ( 100 )
1. Check OptiView™ Control Center displays.
ECWT = Entering Condensing Water Temperature
2. If the compressor is in operation, check the bear-
LCWT = Leaving Chilled Water Temperature ing oil pressure on the SYSTEM Screen. Also
check the oil level in the oil reservoir. Operating
C Range = Condensing water temperature range at the
oil level should be operating range of oil indicator.
given load condition.
Drain or add oil if necessary.
JOHNSON CONTROLS 13
3. Check entering and leaving condenser water pres- Weekly

sure and temperatures for comparison with job 1. Check the refrigerant charge. (Refer to Checking
design conditions. Condenser water temperatures The Refrigerant Charge During Unit Shutdown
can be checked on the SYSTEM Screen. on Page 30.)
4. Check the entering and leaving chilled liquid tem-
Monthly
peratures and evaporator pressure for compari-
son with job design conditions on the SYSTEM 1. Leak check the entire chiller.
Screen.
Quarterly
5. Check the condenser saturation temperature
1. Perform chemical analysis of oil.
(based upon condenser pressure sensed by the
condenser transducer) on the SYSTEM Screen. Semi-Annually (or more often as required)
6. Check the compressor discharge temperature on 1. Change and inspect compressor oil filter element.
the SYSTEM Screen. During normal operation
2. Oil return system.
discharge temperature should not exceed 220°F
(104°C). A. Change dehydrator.
7. Check the compressor motor current on the B. Check nozzle of eductor for foreign par-
SYSTEM Screen. ticles.
8. Check for any signs of dirty or fouled condenser 3. Check controls and safety cutouts.
tubes. (The temperature difference between water
leaving condenser and saturated condensing tem-
perature should not exceed the difference recorded
for a new unit by more than 4°F (2.2°C)).
LD00467
23889A
*NOTE: These items can be printed by an electronic printer connected to the Microboard
and pressing the PRINT key on the Keypad, or automatically using the Data Logger feature.
Figure 8 - LIQUID CHILLER LOG SHEETS
14 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.75-O1 (211) SECTION 2 - SYSTEM OPERATING PROCEDURES
Annually (more often if necessary) 1. Push the soft shutdown key on the homescreen on
1. Drain and replace the oil in the compressor oil the OptiView panel or rapid stop with the COM-
sump. (Refer to Oil Charging Procedure on Page PRESSOR STOP/RESET switch. The compressor
24.) will stop automatically. The oil pump will contin-
ue to run for coastdown period. The oil pump will
2. Evaporator and Condenser. then stop automatically.
A. Inspect and clean water strainers. 2. Stop the chilled water pump (if not wired into the
B. Inspect and clean tubes as required. Microcomputer Control Center, in which case it
will shut off automatically simultaneously with the
C. Inspect end sheets. oil pump.) (The actual water pump contact opera-
3. Compressor Drive Motor (See motor manufactur- tion is dependent upon the position of Microboard
ers maintenance and service instruction supplied jumper J54.)
with unit) 3. Open the switch to the cooling tower fan motors,
A. Clean air passages and windings per manu- if used.
facturers instructions.
4. The compressor sump oil heater is energized when
B. Meg motor windings – Refer to Figure 16 on the unit is stopped. 2
Page 30 for details.
PROLONGED SHUTDOWN
C. Lubricate per motor manufacturer recom-
mendations. If the chiller is to be shut down for an extended period
of time (for example, over the winter season), the fol-
4. Inspect and service electrical components as neces- lowing paragraphs outline the procedure to be followed.
sary.
1. Test all system joints for refrigerant leaks with a
5. Perform refrigerant analysis. leak detector. If any leaks are found, they should
If quarterly inspection indicates oil is fine, be repaired before allowing the system to stand
replacing the oil is not necessary for a long period of time.
During long idle periods, the tightness of the sys-
tem should be checked periodically.
2. If freezing temperatures are encountered while
the system is idle, carefully drain the cooling wa-
NEED FOR MAINTENANCE OR SERVICE
ter from the cooling tower, condenser, condenser
If the system is malfunctioning in any manner or the pump, and the chilled water system-chilled water
unit is stopped by one of the safety controls, consult pump and coils.
the Operation Analysis Chart, Table 1 on Page 25 of
this manual. After consulting this chart, if you are un- Open the drains on the evaporator and condenser
able to make the proper repairs or adjustments to start liquid heads to assure complete drainage. (If a
the compressor or the particular trouble continues to Variable Speed Drive, drain its cooling system.
hinder the performance of the unit, please call the near- If Solid State Starter equipped drain liquid from
est Johnson Controls District Office. Failure to report starter cooling loop.)
constant troubles could damage the unit and increase 3. If freezing temperatures are encountered for peri-
the cost of repairs. ods longer than a few days, the refrigerant should
be recovered to containers to prevent leakage from
STOPPING THE SYSTEM O-ring joints.
The Optiview™ Control Center can be programmed to 4. On the SETUP Screen, disable the clock. This
start and stop automatically (maximum, once each day) conserves the battery.
whenever desired. Refer to the Optiview™ Control
Center – Operation and Maintenance (Form 160.54- 5. Open the main disconnect switches to the com-
O1). To stop the chiller, proceed as follows: pressor motor, condenser water pump and the
chilled water pump. Open the 115 volt circuit to
the Control Center.
JOHNSON CONTROLS 15
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
16 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.75-O1 (211)
SECTION 3 - SYSTEM COMPONENTS DESCRIPTION
GENERAL C. Low speed thrust bearing (forward and re-

verse).
The YORK Model YK Centrifugal Liquid Chiller is
completely factory-packaged including evaporator, 2. Compressor Driven Shaft (High Speed)
condenser, compressor, motor, lubrication system,
A. Forward and reverse high speed thrust
OptiView Control Center, and all interconnecting unit
bearing.
piping and wiring.
B. Two journal bearings.
COMPRESSOR
3. Speed Increasing Gears
The compressor is a single-stage centrifugal type pow-
ered by an open-drive electric motor. A. Meshing surfaces of drive and pinion gear
teeth.
The rotor assembly consists of a heat-treated alloy steel
drive shaft and impeller shaft with a cast aluminum, To provide the required amount of oil under the neces-
fully shrouded impeller. The impeller is designed for sary pressure to properly lubricate these parts, a motor
balanced thrust and is dynamically balanced and over- driven submersible oil pump is located in a remote oil
speed tested. The inserted type journal and thrust bear- sump.
ings are fabricated of aluminum alloy. Single helical Upon pressing of the COMPRESSOR START switch
gears with crowned teeth are designed so that more
than one tooth is in contact at all times. Gears are inte-
on the Control Center, the oil pump is immediately en- 3
ergized. After a 50 second pre-lube period, the com-
grally assembled in the compressor rotor support and pressor motor will start. The oil pump will continue to
are film lubricated. Each gear is individually mounted run during the entire operation of the compressor, and
in its own journal and thrust bearings. for 150 seconds during compressor coastdown.
The open-drive compressor shaft seal is a double bel- The submerged oil pump takes suction from the sur-
lows cartridge style with ceramic internal and atmo- rounding oil and discharges it to the oil cooler where
spheric seal faces. The seal is oil-flooded at all times heat is rejected. The oil flows from the oil cooler to
and is pressure-lubricated during operation. the oil filter. The oil leaves the filter and flows to the
emergency oil reservoir where it is distributed to the
CAPACITY CONTROL
compressor bearings. The oil lubricates the compressor
Prerotation vanes (PRV) modulate chiller capacity rotating components and is returned to the oil sump.
from 100% to as low as 15% of design for normal air
conditioning applications. Operation is by an external, There is an emergency oil reservoir located at the high-
electric PRV actuator which automatically controls the est point in the lubrication system internally in the com-
vane position to maintain a constant leaving chilled liq- pressor. It provides an oil supply to the various bear-
uid temperature. ings and gears in the event of a system shutdown due
to power failure. The reservoir, located on the top of
COMPRESSOR LUBRICATION SYSTEM the compressor, allows the oil to be distributed through
the passages by gravity flow, thus providing necessary
The chiller lubrication system consists of the oil pump, lubrication during the compressor coastdown.
oil filter, oil cooler and all interconnecting oil piping
and passages. There are main points within the com- OIL PUMP
pressor which must be supplied with forced lubrication
as follows: For normal operation, the oil pump should operate at
all times during chiller operation.
1. Compressor Drive Shaft (Low Speed)
On shutdown of the system for any reason, the oil
A. Shaft seal. pump operates and continues to run for 150 seconds.
The system cannot restart during that time interval.
B. Front and rear journal bearings – one on each
side of driving gear.
JOHNSON CONTROLS 17
SECTION 3 - SYSTEM COMPONENTS DESCRIPTION FORM 160.75-O1 (211)
OPTIVIEW CONTROL
CENTER
COMPRESSOR
SUCTION
RELIEF
VARIABLE
VALVES
SPEED
DRIVE
EVAPORATOR
LD15222
VARIABLE SPEED
SIGHT
OIL PUMP
GLASS
CONTROL BOX
FRONT VIEW
Figure 9 - SYSTEM COMPONENTS FRONT VIEW
18 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.75-O1 (211) SECTION 3 - SYSTEM COMPONENTS DESCRIPTION
MOTOR
COMPRESSOR
DISCHARGE
LINE
LD15223
LIQUID LINE
CONDENSER OIL PUMP
HOUSING
REAR VIEW
Figure 10 - SYSTEM COMPONENTS REAR VIEW
JOHNSON CONTROLS 19
COMPRESSOR ROTOR
SUPPORT SECTION
H.S.
SHAFT
SEAL
EMERGENCY
OIL RESERVE
HIGH
PRESSURE
TRANSDUCER
MAIN JOURNAL
AND THRUST
BEARING
IMPELLER
THRUST COLLAR BEARING

(PINION GEAR
HIGH SPEED SHAFT)
THRUST COVER
(PRV)
DOUBLE INLET
BELLOWS VALVES
SHAFT SEAL
LOW SPEED- THRUST

GEAR REAR COLLAR
BEARING BEARING
LOW LOW SPEED

SPEED GEAR THRUST
COVER
REFRIG.
SIGHT
HOT GLASSES
THERMISTOR
OIL OIL
HEATER COOLER
LOW OIL
ANGLE PRESSURE
DRAIN VALVE TRANSDUCER
OIL OIL SUBMERSIBLE

SUMP OIL TEMP.
PUMP OIL PUMP CONTROL
OIL SUCTION WITH 3-PHASE MOTOR
FILTER
OIL
LD15200
Figure 11 - SCHEMATIC DRAWING – (YK) COMPRESSOR LUBRICATION SYSTEM
20 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.75-O1 (211) SECTION 3 - SYSTEM COMPONENTS DESCRIPTION
OIL HEATER ant charge, and maintain reliable control. A specifically

designed spray distributor provides uniform distribu-
During long idle periods, the oil in the compressor oil
tion of refrigerant over the entire length to yield opti-
reservoir tends to absorb as much refrigerant as it can
mum heat transfer. The hybrid falling film evaporator
hold, depending upon the temperature of the oil and
design has suction baffles around the sides and above
the pressure in the reservoir. As the oil temperature is
the falling film section to prevent liquid refrigerant car-
lowered, the amount of refrigerant absorbed will be
ryover into the compressor.
increased. If the quantity of refrigerant in the oil be-
comes excessive, violent oil foaming will result as the Evaporators codes M* thru Z* are flooded type, with a
pressure within the system is lowered on starting. This liquid inlet distributor trough underneath the tube bun-
foaming is caused by refrigerant boiling out of the oil dle which provides uniform distribution of refrigerant
as the pressure is lowered. If this foam reaches the oil over the entire shell length to yield optimum heat trans-
pump suction, the bearing oil pressure will fluctuate fer. Flooded evaporator designs have a suction baffle
with possible temporary loss of lubrication, causing the on M* shells with H9 compressors and an aluminum
oil pressure safety cutout to actuate and stop the sys- mesh eliminator on K* - Z* shells with K compressors
tem. Refer to Optiview™ Control Center – Operation located above the tube bundle to prevent liquid refrig-
and Maintenance (Form 160.54-O1). erant carryover into the compressor.
MOTOR DRIVELINE A 1-1/2" (38 mm) liquid level sight glass is conve-
niently located on the side of the shell to aid in deter-
The compressor motor is an open-drip-proof, squir-
mining proper refrigerant charge. The evaporator shell
rel cage, induction type constructed to YORK design
specifications. 60 hertz motors operate at 3570 rpm. 50
contains a dual refrigerant relief valve arrangement set 3
at 180 psig (12.4 barg) on H and K compressor models;
hertz motors operate at 2975 rpm.
235 psig (16.2 barg) on P and Q compressor models;
The open motor is provided with a D-flange, cast iron or single-relief valve arrangement, if the chiller is sup-
adapter mounted to the compressor and supported by a plied with optional refrigerant isolation valves. A 1"
motor support. (25.4 mm) refrigerant charging valve is provided. The
condenser is a shell and tube type, with a discharge
Motor drive shaft is directly connected to the compres- gas baffle to prevent direct high velocity impingement
sor shaft with a flexible disc coupling. This coupling on the tubes. The baffle is also used to distribute the
has all metal construction with no wearing parts to as- refrigerant gas flow properly for most efficient heat
sure long life, and no lubrication requirements to pro- transfer. An optional cast steel condenser inlet diffuser
vide low maintenance. may be offered, on "M" and larger condensers, in lieu
For units utilizing remote Electro-Mechanical starters, of the baffle, to provide dynamic pressure recovery and
a terminal box is provided for field connected conduit. enhanced chiller efficiency. An integral sub‑cooler is
Motor terminals are brought through the motor cas- located at the bottom of the condenser shell providing
ing into the terminal box. Jumpers are furnished for highly effective liquid refrigerant subcooling to pro-
three-lead type of starting. Motor terminal lugs are not vide the highest cycle efficiency. The condenser con-
furnished. Overload/over current transformers are fur- tains dual refrigerant relief valves set at 235 psig (16.2
nished with all units. barg).
The removable waterboxes are fabricated of steel. The
HEAT EXCHANGERS design working pressure is 150 psig (10.3 barg) and
Evaporator and condenser shells are fabricated from the boxes are tested at 225 psig (15.5 barg). Integral
rolled carbon steel plates with fusion welded seams. steel water baffles are located and welded within the
waterbox to provide the required pass arrangements.
Heat exchanger tubes are internally enhanced type. Stub‑out water nozzle connections with ANSI/AWWA
The evaporator is a shell and tube type with customer C-606 grooves are welded to the waterboxes. These
process fluid flowing inside the tubes and refriger- nozzle connections are suitable for ANSI/AWWA
ant removing heat on the shell side via evaporation. C-606 couplings, welding or flanges, and are capped
Evaporator codes A* to K* utilize a hybrid falling film for shipment. Plugged 3/4" (19 mm) drain and vent
design. It contains a balance of flooded and falling film connections are provided in each waterbox.
technology to optimize efficiency, minimize refriger-
JOHNSON CONTROLS 21
REFRIGERANT FLOW CONTROL OPTIONAL HOT GAS BYPASS

Refrigerant flow to the evaporator is controlled by a Hot gas bypass is optional and is used to eliminate
variable orifice. compressor surge during light load or high head op-
eration. The OptiView control panel will automatically
A level sensor senses the refrigerant level in the con- modulate the hot gas valve open and closed as required.
denser and outputs an analog voltage to the Microboard Adjustment of the hot gas control valve must be per-
that represents this level (0% = empty; 100% = full). formed by a qualified service technician following the
Under program control, the Microboard modulates a Hot Gas Set-up procedure.
variable orifice to control the condenser refrigerant
level to a programmed setpoint. Other setpoints affect Changes in chilled water flow will require
the control sensitivity and response. These setpoints re-adjustment of the hot gas control to
must be entered at chiller commissioning by a qualified insure proper operation.
service technician. Only a qualified service technician
may modify these settings.
While the chiller is shut down, the orifice will be in the
fully open position causing the sensed level to be ap- OPTIVIEW CONTROL CENTER
proximately 0%. When the chiller is started, after the The OptiView Control Center is factory-mounted,
vane motor end switch (VMS) opens when entering wired and tested. The electronic panel automatically
SYSTEM RUN, if actual level is less than the level controls the operation of the unit in meeting system
setpoint, a linearly increasing ramp is applied to the lev- cooling requirements while minimizing energy usage.
el setpoint. This ramp causes the setpoint to go from the For detailed information on the Control Center, refer to
initial refrigerant level (approximately 0%) to the pro- SECTION 2 - SYSTEM OPERATING PROCEDURES
grammed setpoint over a programmable period of time. of this manual.
If the actual level is greater than the setpoint when the SOLID STATE STARTER (OPTIONAL)
VMS opens, there is no pulldown period, it immedi-
ately begins to control to the programmed setpoint. The Solid State Starter is a reduced voltage starter that
controls and maintains a constant current flow to the
While the chiller is running, the refrigerant level is nor- motor during start-up. It is mounted on the chiller. Pow-
mally controlled to the level setpoint. However, any- er and control wiring between the starter and chiller
time the vanes fully close (VMS closes), normal level are factory installed. The starter enclosure is NEMA-1
control is terminated, any refrigerant level setpoint in with a hinged access door with lock and key. Electrical
effect is cancelled and the outputs to the level control lugs for incoming power wiring are provided.
will be constant open.
VARIABLE SPEED DRIVE (OPTIONAL)
OPTIONAL SERVICE ISOLATION VALVES
A Variable Speed Drive can be factory packaged with
If your chiller is equipped with optional service isola- the chiller. It is designed to vary the compressor mo-
tion valves on the discharge and liquid line, these valves tor speed and prerotation vane position by controlling
must remain open during operation. These valves are the frequency and voltage of the electrical power to
used for isolating the refrigerant charge in either the the motor. Operational information is contained in the
evaporator or condenser to allow service access to the Variable Speed Drive – Operation (Form 160.00-O1).
system. A refrigerant pump-out unit will be required to The control logic automatically adjusts motor speed
isolate the refrigerant. and compressor prerotation vane position for maxi-
Isolation of the refrigerant in this system mum part load efficiency by analyzing information fed
must be performed by a qualified service to it by sensors located throughout the chiller.
technician.
22 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.75-O1 (211)
SECTION 4 - OPERATIONAL MAINTENANCE
OIL RETURN SYSTEM CHANGING THE DEHYDRATOR

The oil return system continuously maintains the To change the dehydrator, use the following procedure:
proper oil level in the compressor oil sump (Refer to
Figure 12 on Page 23). 1. Isolate the dehydrator at the stop valves.
2. Remove the dehydrator (Refer to Figure 12 on
High pressure condenser gas flows continuously Page 23).
through the eductor inducing the low pressure, oil rich
3. Assemble the new filter-drier.
liquid to flow from the evaporator, through the dehy-
drator to the compressor sump. 4. Open evaporator stop valve and check dehydrator
connections for refrigerant leaks.
5. Open all the dehydrator stop valves.
COMPRESSOR
SOLENOID VALVE
CHECK VALVE OIL EDUCTOR BLOCK
SOLENOID VALVE
STOP VALVE DEHYDRATOR
STOP VALVE
LD08578
Figure 12 - OIL RETURN SYSTEM
JOHNSON CONTROLS 23
SECTION 4 - OPERATIONAL MAINTENANCE FORM 160.75-O1 (211)
THE OIL CHARGE ing valve (A) located on the remote oil reservoir
cover plate. (Refer to Figure 13 on Page 24) Do
The nominal oil charge for all H, K, and P8-P9 YK
not tighten the connection at the charging valve
compressors is 20 gallons, and for Q3-Q7 YK compres-
until after the air is forced out by pumping a few
sors is 10 gallons of type YORK K or YORK H oil.
strokes of the oil pump. This fills the lines with
New YORK Refrigeration oil must be used in the cen- oil and prevents air from being pumped into the
trifugal compressor. Since oil absorbs moisture when system.
exposed to the atmosphere, it should be kept tightly 3. Open the oil charging valve and pump oil into the
capped until used. system until oil level in the compressor oil reser-
voir is in the OVER FULL region of the oil level
OIL CHARGING PROCEDURE
indicator label. Close the charging valve and dis-
During operation the compressor oil level must be connect the hand oil pump.
maintained in the OPERATING RANGE identified
on the vertical oil level indicator. If the oil level falls 4. As soon as oil charging is complete, close the
into the lower sight glass, it is necessary to add oil to power supply to the starter to energize the oil
the compressor oil reservoir. The oil should be charged heater. This will keep the concentration of refrig-
into the oil reservoir using the YORK Oil Charging erant in the oil to a minimum.
Pump – YORK Part No. 070-10654. To charge oil into When the oil reservoir is initially charged with oil, the
the oil reservoir, proceed as follows: oil pump should be started manually to fill the lines,
passages, oil cooler and oil filter. This will lower the
1. The unit must be shut down.
oil level in the reservoir. It may then be necessary to
2. Immerse the suction connection of the oil charging add oil to bring the level back into the OPERATING
pump in a clean container of new oil and connect RANGE of the oil level indicator label.
the pump discharge connection to the oil charg-
LD08648 LD08579
OIL CHARGING VALVE
Figure 13 - CHARGING OIL RESERVOIR WITH OIL
24 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.75-O1 (211)
SECTION 5 - TROUBLESHOOTING
Table 1 - OPERATION ANALYSIS CHART

RESULTS POSSIBLE CAUSE REMEDY
1. SYMPTOM: ABNORMALLY HIGH DISCHARGE PRESSURE
Temperature difference between
condensing temperature and water off Air in condenser.
condenser higher than normal.
Clean condenser tubes. Check water
Condenser tubes dirty or scaled.
conditioning.
High discharge pressure. Reduce condenser water inlet tempera-
High condenser water temperature. ture. (Check cooling tower and water
circulation.)
Temperature difference between con-
denser water on and water off higher Increase the quantity of water through
Insufficient condensing water flow.
than normal, with normal evaporator the condenser to proper value.
pressure.
2. SYMPTOM: ABNORMALLY LOW SUCTION PRESSURE
Temperature difference between leaving Check for leaks and charge refrigerant
Insufficient charge of refrigerant.
chilled water and refrigerant in evapo- into system.
rator greater than normal with high
Variable orifice problem. Remove obstruction.
discharge temperature.
Temperature difference between leav-
ing chilled water and refrigerant in the
Evaporator tubes dirty or restricted. Clean evaporator tubes.
evaporator greater than normal with
normal discharge temperature.
Check prerotation vane motor operation
Temperature of chilled water too low
with with low motor amperes.
Insufficient load for system capacity. and setting of low water temperature 5
cutout.
3. SYMPTOM: HIGH EVAPORATOR PRESSURE
Check the prerotation vane motor posi-
Prerotation vanes fail to open.
tioning circuit.
High chilled water temperature. Be sure the vanes are wide open (with-
System overload. out overloading the motor) until the load
decreases.
4. SYMPTOM: NO OIL PRESSURE WHEN SYSTEM START BUTTON PUSHED
Check rotation of oil pump (Electrical
Oil pump running in wrong direction.
Low oil pressure displayed on control Connections).
center; compressor will not start. Troubleshoot electrical problem with oil
Oil pump not running.
pump VSD.
5. SYMPTOM: UNUSUALLY HIGH OIL PRESSURE DEVELOPS WHEN OIL PUMP RUNS
Unusually high oil pressure is dis-
played when the oil pressure display High oil pressure. Transducer defec- Replace low or high oil pressure trans-
key is pressed when the oil pump is tive. ducer.
running.
JOHNSON CONTROLS 25
SECTION 5 - TROUBLESHOOTING FORM 160.75-O1 (211)
TABLE 1 - OPERATION ANALYSIS CHART (CONT'D)
RESULTS POSSIBLE REMEDY

6. SYMPTOM: OIL PUMP VIBRATES OR IS NOISY
Oil pump vibrates or is extremely noisy
Oil not reaching pump suction inlet in
with some oil pressure when pressing Check oil level.
sufficient quantity.
OIL PRESSURE display key.
When oil pump is run without
an oil supply it will vibrate
and become extremely noisy.
Worn or failed oil pump. Repair/Replace oil pump.
7. SYMPTOM: REDUCED OIL PUMP CAPACITY

Excessive end clearance pump.
Inspect and replace worn parts.
Oil pump pumping capacity. Other worn pump parts.
Partially blocked oil supply inlet. Check oil inlet for blockage.
8. SYMPTOM: OIL PRESSURE GRADUALLY DECREASES (Noted by Observation of Daily Log Sheets)
When oil pump VSD frequency in-
creases to 55 + hz to maintain target oil Oil filter is dirty. Change oil filter.
pressure.
9. SYMPTOM: OIL PRESSURE SYSTEM CEASES TO RETURN AN OIL/REFRIGERANT SAMPLE
Filter-drier in oil return system dirty. Replace old filter-drier with new.
Oil refrigerant return not functioning. Remove jet, inspect for dirt.
Jet or orifice of oil return jet clogged.
Remove dirt using solvent and replace.
10. SYMPTOM: OIL PUMP FAILS TO DELIVER OIL PRESSURE
No oil pressure registers when pressing
Faulty oil pressure transducer.
OIL PRESSURE display key when oil Replace oil pressure transducer.
Faulty wiring/connectors.
pump runs.
26 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.75-O1 (211)
SECTION 6 - MAINTENANCE
RENEWAL PARTS To test with R-22, proceed as follows:

For any required Renewal Parts, refer to the Renewal 1. With no pressure in the system, charge R-22 gas
Parts – Unit (Form 160.75-RP1). into the system through the charging valve to a
pressure of 2 PSIG (14 kPa).
CHECKING SYSTEM FOR LEAKS
2. Build up the system pressure with dry nitrogen to
Leak Testing During Operation approximately 75 to 100 PSIG (517 to 690 kPa).
The refrigerant side of the system is carefully pressure To be sure that the concentration of refrigerant has
tested and evacuated at the factory. reached all part of the system, slightly open the oil
charging valve and test for the presence of refrig-
After the system has been charged, the system should erant with a leak detector.
be carefully leak tested with a R-134a compatible leak
detector to be sure all joints are tight. 3. Test around each joint and factory weld. It is im-
portant that this test be thoroughly and carefully
If any leaks are indicated, they must be repaired im- done, spending as much time as necessary and us-
mediately. Usually, leaks can be stopped by tightening a good leak detector.
ing flare nuts or flange bolts. However, for any major
repair, the refrigerant charge must be removed. (Refer 4. To check for refrigerant leaks in the evaporator
to Handling Refrigerant For Dismantling And Repairs and condenser, open the vents in the evaporator
on Page 30) and condenser heads and test for the presence of
refrigerant. If no refrigerant is present, the tubes
CONDUCTING R-22 PRESSURE TEST and tube sheets may be considered tight. If refrig-
erant is detected at the vents, the heads must be
With the R-134a charge removed and all known leaks
removed, the leak located (by means of soap test
repaired, the system should be charged with a small
or leak detector) and repaired.
amount of R-22 mixed with dry nitrogen so that a ha-
lide torch or electronic leak detector can be used to de-
tect any leaks too small to be found by the soap test.
6
EVACUATION AND DEHYDRATION OF UNIT
27385A(D)
LD00949
Figure 14 - EVACUATION OF CHILLER
JOHNSON CONTROLS 27
SECTION 6 - MAINTENANCE FORM 160.75-O1 (211)
Table 2 - SYSTEM PRESSURES
*GAUGE ABSOLUTE
BOILING
INCHES OF TEMPERATURES
MERCURY (HG) OF
MILLIMETERS OF
BELOW ONE PSIA MICRONS WATER
MERCURY (HG)
STANDARD °F
ATMOSPHERE
0 14.696 760. 760,000 212
10.24" 9.629 500. 500,000 192
22.05" 3.865 200. 200,000 151
25.98" 1.935 100. 100,000 124
27.95" .968 50. 50,000 101
28.94" .481 25. 25,000 78
29.53" .192 10. 10,000 52
29.67" .122 6.3 6,300 40
29.72" .099 5. 5,000 35
29.842" .039 2. 2,000 15
29.882" .019 1.0 1,000 +1
29.901" .010 .5 500 –11
29.917" .002 .1 100 –38
29.919" .001 .05 50 –50
29.9206" .0002 .01 10 –70
29.921" 0 0 0
*One standard atmosphere = 14.696 PSIA NOTES: PSIA = Lbs. per sq. in. gauge pressure
= 760 mm Hg. absolute pressure at 32°F = Pressure above atmosphere
= 29.921 inches Hg. absolute at 32°F PSIA = Lbs. per sq. in. absolute pressure
= Sum of gauge plus atmospheric pressure
VACUUM TESTING DO NOT USE STEAM. A suggested method is

After the pressure test has been completed, the vacuum to connect a hose between the source of hot water
test should be conducted as follows: under pressure and the evaporator head drain con-
nection, out the evaporator vent connection, into
1. Connect a high capacity vacuum pump, with in- the condenser head drain and out the condenser
dicator, to the system charging valve as shown in vent. To avoid the possibility of causing leaks, the
Figure 14 on Page 27 and start the pump. (Re- temperature should be brought up slowly so that
fer to Vacuum Dehydration on Page 29.) the tubes and shell are heated evenly.
2. Open wide all system valves. Be sure all valves to 5. Close the system charging valve and the stop valve
the atmosphere are closed. between the vacuum indicator and the vacuum
pump. Then disconnect the vacuum pump leaving
3. Operate the vacuum pump in accordance with
the vacuum indicator in place.
VACUUM DEHYDRATION until a wet bulb
temperature of +32°F or a pressure of 5 mm Hg is 6. Hold the vacuum obtained in Step 3 in the system
reached. Refer to Table 2 on Page 28 for cor- for 8 hours; the slightest rise in pressure indicates a
responding values of pressure. leak or the presence of moisture, or both. If, after 24
hours the wet bulb temperature in the vacuum indi-
4. To improve evacuation circulate hot water (not
cator has not risen above 40°F (4.4°C) or a pressure
to exceed 125°F, 51.7ºC) through the evaporator
of 6.3 mm Hg, the system may be considered tight.
and condenser tubes to thoroughly dehydrate the
shells. If a source of hot water is not readily avail- 7. If the vacuum does not hold for 8 hours within the
able, a portable water heater should be employed. limits specified in Step 6 above, the leak must be
found and repaired.
28 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.75-O1 (211) SECTION 6 - MAINTENANCE
Be sure the vacuum indicator is valved off taken place the pressure and temperature will continue
while holding the system vacuum and be to drop until eventually a temperature of 35°F (1.6°C)
sure to open the valve between the vacuum or a pressure of 5 mm Hg. is reached.
indicator and the system when checking
the vacuum after the 8 hour period. When this point is reached, practically all of the air has
been evacuated from the system, but there is still a small
amount of moisture left. In order to provide a medium
VACUUM DEHYDRATION for carrying this residual moisture to the vacuum pump,
To obtain a sufficiently dry system, the following in- nitrogen should be introduced into the system to bring
structions have been assembled to provide an effective it to atmospheric pressure and the indicator temperature
method for evacuating and dehydrating a system in the will return to approximately ambient temperature. Close
field. Although there are several methods of dehydrating off the system again, and start the second evacuation.
a system, we are recommending the following, as it pro- The relatively small amount of moisture left will be
duces one of the best results, and affords a means of ob- carried out through the vacuum pump and the tem-
taining accurate readings as to the extent of dehydration. perature or pressure shown by the indicator should
The equipment required to follow this method of dehy- drop uniformly until it reaches a temperature of 35°F
dration consists of a wet bulb indicator or vacuum gauge, (1.6°C) or a pressure of 5 mm Hg.
a chart showing the relation between dew point tempera- When the vacuum indicator registers this temperature
ture and pressure in inches of mercury (vacuum), (Refer or pressure, it is a positive sign that the system is evac-
to Table 2 on Page 28) and a vacuum pump capable of uated and dehydrated to the recommended limit. If this
pumping a suitable vacuum on the system. level cannot be reached, it is evident that there is a leak
somewhere in the system. Any leaks must be corrected
OPERATION
before the indicator can be pulled down to 35°F or 5
Dehydration of a refrigerant system can be obtained mm Hg. in the primary evacuation.
by this method because the water present in the system
reacts much as a refrigerant would. By pulling down During the primary pulldown, keep a careful watch on
the pressure in the system to a point where its satu- the wet bulb indicator temperature, and do not let it fall
ration temperature is considerably below that of room below 35°F (1.6°C). If the temperature is allowed to
temperature, heat will flow from the room through the fall to 32°F (0°C), the water in the test tube will freeze,
walls of the system and vaporize the water, allowing and the result will be a faulty temperature reading.
a large percentage of it to be removed by the vacuum 6
pump. The length of time necessary for the dehydra-
tion of a system is dependent on the size or volume of
the system, the capacity and efficiency of the vacuum
pump, the room temperature and the quantity of water
present in the system. By the use of the vacuum indi-
cator as suggested, the test tube will be evacuated to
the same pressure as the system, and the distilled water
will be maintained at the same saturation temperature
as any free water in the system, and this temperature
can be observed on the thermometer.
If the system has been pressure tested and found to be
tight prior to evacuation, then the saturation tempera- LD00474
ture recordings should follow a curve similar to the typ-
ical saturation curve shown as Figure 15 on Page 29. Figure 15 - SATURATION CURVE
The temperature of the water in the test tube will drop

as the pressure decreases, until the boiling point is REFRIGERANT CHARGING
reached, at which point the temperature will level off To avoid the possibility of freezing liquid within the
and remain at this level until all of the water in the evaporator tubes when charging an evacuated system,
shell is vaporized. When this final vaporization has only refrigerant vapor from the top of the drum or cyl-
JOHNSON CONTROLS 29
inder must be admitted to the system pressure until the The refrigerant charge level must be checked after the
system pressure is raised above the point correspond- pressure and temperature have equalized between the
ing to the freezing point of the evaporator liquid. For condenser and evaporator. This would be expected to be
water, the pressure corresponding to the freezing point 4 hours or more after the compressor and water pumps
is 8.54 PSIG (58.9 kPa) for R-134a (at sea level). are stopped. The level should visible in the sight glass.
While charging, every precaution must be taken to pre- Charge the refrigerant in accordance with the meth-
vent moisture laden air from entering the system. Make od shown under the REFRIGERANT CHARGING,
up a suitable charging connection from new copper tub- above. The refrigerant level should be observed and
ing to fit between the system charging valve and the fit- the level recorded after initial charging.
ting on the charging drum. This connection should be
HANDLING REFRIGERANT FOR DISMANTLING
as short as possible but long enough to permit sufficient
AND REPAIRS
flexibility for changing drums. The charging connection
should be purged each time a full container of refrigerant If it becomes necessary to open any part of the refriger-
is connected and changing containers should be done as ant system for repairs, it will be necessary to remove
quickly as possible to minimize the loss of refrigerant. the charge before opening any part of the unit. If the
chiller is equipped with optional valves, the refrigerant
Refrigerant may be furnished in cylinders containing can be isolated in either the condenser or evaporator /
either 30, 50, 125, 1,025 or 1750 lbs. (13.6, 22.6, 56.6, compressor while making any necessary repairs.
464 or 794 kg) of refrigerant.
MEGGING THE MOTOR
The nameplate on the chiller contains the
correct refrigerant charge information While the main disconnect switch and compressor mo-
for the chiller. tor starter are open, meg the motor as follows:
1. Using a megohm meter (megger), meg between
phases and each phase to ground (Refer to Figure 16
on Page 30); these readings are to be interpreted
CHECKING THE REFRIGERANT CHARGE using the graph shown in Figure 17 on Page 31.
DURING UNIT SHUTDOWN 2. If readings fall below shaded area, remove exter-
The refrigerant charge is specified for each chiller model. nal leads from motor and repeat test.
Charge the correct amount of refrigerant and record the Motor is to be megged with the starter at
level in the evaporator sight glass. ambient temperature after 24 hours of
idle standby.
The refrigerant charge should always be checked and
trimmed when the system is shut down.
LD00475
Figure 16 - DIAGRAM, MEGGING MOTOR WINDINGS
30 JOHNSON CONTROLS
Minimum Insulation Resistance vs. Temperature (per IEEE Std 43)

Open Motors
MEGOHMS
6
LD00476
TEMPERATURE – °F
Figure 17 - MOTOR STARTER TEMPERATURE AND INSULATION RESISTANCES
JOHNSON CONTROLS 31
Condensers And Evaporators General Tube Fouling

Maintenance of condenser and evaporator shells is im- Fouling of the tubes can be due to deposits of two types
portant to provide trouble free operation of the chiller. as follows:
The water side of the tubes in the shell must be kept
clean and free from scale. Proper maintenance such as 1. Rust or sludge – which finds its way into the
tube cleaning, and testing for leaks, is covered on the tubes and accumulates there. This material usu-
following pages. ally does not build up on the inner tube surfaces
as scale, but does interfere with the heat transfer.
Chemical Water Treatment Rust or sludge can generally be removed from the
tubes by a thorough brushing process.
Since the mineral content of the water circulated
through evaporators and condensers varies with almost 2. Scale – due to mineral deposits. These deposits,
every source of supply, it is possible that the water be- even though very thin and scarcely detectable
ing used may corrode the tubes or deposit heat resistant upon physical inspection, are highly resistant to
scale in them. Reliable water treatment companies are heat transfer. They can be removed most effec-
available in most larger cities to supply a water treat- tively by circulating an acid solution through the
ing process which will greatly reduce the corrosive and tubes.
scale forming properties of almost any type of water.
Tube Cleaning Procedures
As a preventive measure against scale and corrosion
and to prolong the life of evaporator and condenser Brush Cleaning of Tubes
tubes, a chemical analysis of the water should be made If the tube consists of dirt and sludge, it can usually be
preferably before the system is installed. A reliable wa- removed by means of the brushing process. Drain the
ter treatment company can be consulted to determine water sides of the circuit to be cleaned (cooling wa-
whether water treatment is necessary, and if so, to fur- ter or chilled water) remove the heads and thorough-
nish the proper treatment for the particular water con- ly clean each tube with a soft bristle bronze or nylon
dition. brush. DO NOT USE A STEEL BRISTLE BRUSH. A
steel brush may damage the tubes.
Cleaning Evaporator And Condenser Tubes
Improved results can be obtained by admitting water
Evaporator into the tube during the cleaning process. This can be
It is difficult to determine by any particular test wheth- done by mounting the brush on a suitable length of 1/8"
er possible lack of performance of the water evaporator pipe with a few small holes at the brush end and con-
is due to fouled tubes alone or due to a combination necting the other end by means of a hose to the water
of troubles. Trouble which may be due to fouled tubes supply.
is indicated when, over a period of time, the cooling
The tubes should always be brush cleaned before acid
capacity decreases and the split (temperature differ-
cleaning.
ence between water leaving the evaporator and the
refrigerant temperature in the evaporator) increases. A Acid Cleaning Of Tubes
gradual drop-off in cooling capacity can also be caused
by a gradual leak of refrigerant from the system or by a If the tubes are fouled with a hard scale deposit, they
combination of fouled tubes and shortage of refrigerant may require acid cleaning. It is important that before
charge. An excessive quantity of oil in the evaporator acid cleaning, the tubes be cleaned by the brushing
can also contribute to erratic performance. process described above. If the relatively loose foreign
material is removed before the acid cleaning, the acid
Condenser solution will have less material to dissolve and flush
from the tubes with the result that a more satisfactory
In a condenser, trouble due to fouled tubes is usually
cleaning job will be accomplished with a probable sav-
indicated by a steady rise in head pressure, over a pe-
ing of time.
riod of time, accompanied by a steady rise in condens-
ing temperature, and noisy operation. These symptoms
may also be due to foul gas buildup. Purging will re-
move the foul gas revealing the effect of fouling.
32 JOHNSON CONTROLS
Acid cleaning should only be performed 3. With nitrogen or dry air, blow out the tubes to
by an expert. Please consult your local clear them of traces of refrigerant laden moisture
water treatment representative for as- from the circulation water. As soon as the tubes
sistance in removing scale buildup and are clear, a cork should be driven into each end
preventative maintenance programs to of the tube. Pressurize the dry system with 50 to
eliminate future problems. COMMER- 100 PSIG (345 to 690 kPa) of nitrogen. Repeat
CIAL ACID CLEANING this with all of the other tubes in the suspected
section or, if necessary, with all the tubes in the
In many major cities, commercial organizations now evaporator or condenser. Allow the evaporator or
offer a specialized service of acid cleaning evaporators condenser to remain corked up to 12 to 24 hours
and condensers. If acid cleaning is required, YORK before proceeding. Depending upon the amount
recommends the use of this type of organization. The of leakage, the corks may blow from the end of a
Dow Industries Service Division of the Dow Chemical tube, indicating the location of the leakage. If not,
Company, Tulsa, Oklahoma, with branches in principal if will be necessary to make a very thorough test
cities is one of the most reliable of these companies. with the leak detector.
Testing For Evaporator And Condenser Tube 4. After the tubes have been corked for 12 to 24
Leaks hours, it is recommended that two men working
at both ends of the evaporator carefully test each
Evaporator and condenser tube leaks in R-134a sys-
tube – one man removing corks at one end and
tems may result in refrigerant leaking into the water
the other at the opposite end to remove corks and
circuit, or water leaking into the shell depending on the
handle the leak detector. Start with the top row of
pressure levels. If refrigerant is leaking into the water,
tubes in the section being investigated. Remove
it can be detected at the liquid head vents after a period
the corks at the ends of one tube simultaneously
of shutdown. If water is leaking into the refrigerant,
and insert the exploring tube for 5 seconds – this
system capacity and efficiency will drop off sharply. If
should be long enough to draw into the detec-
a tube is leaking and water has entered the system, the
tor any refrigerant gas that might have leaked
evaporator and condenser should be valved off from
through the tube walls. A fan placed at the end of
the rest of the water circuit and drained immediately to
the evaporator opposite the detector will assure
prevent severe rusting and corrosion. The refrigerant
that any leakage will travel through the tube to
system should then be drained and purged with dry ni-
the detector.
trogen to prevent severe rusting and corrosion. If a tube
leak is indicated, the exact location of the leak may be 5. Mark any leaking tubes for later identification. 6
determined as follows:
6. If any of the tube sheet joints are leaking, the leak
1. Remove the heads and listen at each section of should be indicated by the detector. If a tube sheet
tubes for a hissing sound that would indicate gas leak is suspected, its exact location may be found
leakage. This will assist in locating the section of by using a soap solution. A continuous buildup of
tubes to be further investigated. If the probable bubbles around a tube indicates a tube sheet leak.
location of the leaky tubes has been determined,
treat that section in the following manner (if the COMPRESSOR
location is not definite, all the tubes will require Maintenance for the compressor assembly consists
investigations). of checking the operation of the oil return system and
2. Wash off both tube heads and the ends of all tubes changing the dehydrator, checking and changing the oil,
with water. checking and changing the oil filters, checking the op-
eration of the oil heater, checking the operation of the oil
Do not use carbon tetrachloride for this pump, and observing the operation of the compressor.
purpose since its fumes give the same
flame discoloration that the refrigerant
does.
JOHNSON CONTROLS 33
Internal wearing of compressor parts could be a seri- of operation. However, if aluminum particles continue
ous problem caused by improper lubrication, brought to accumulate and the same conditions continue to stop
about by restricted oil lines, passages, or dirty oil fil- the unit operation after a new filter is installed, notify
ters. If the unit is shutting down on (HOT) High Oil the nearest Johnson Controls office to request the pres-
Temperature or Low Oil Pressure (OP), change the oil ence of a Johnson Controls Service Technician.
filter element. Examine the oil filter element for the
presence of aluminum particles. Aluminum gas seal ELECTRICAL CONTROLS
rings can contact the impeller and account for some For information covering the OptiView™ Control Cen-
aluminum particles to accumulate in the oil filter, espe- ter operation, refer to the Optiview™ Control Center –
cially during the initial start up and first several months Operation and Maintenance (Form 160.54-O1).
34 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.75-O1 (211)
SECTION 7 - PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
It is the responsibility of the owner to provide the nec- RAM Motor Lubrication
essary daily, monthly and yearly maintenance require- Frame 143T thru 256T are furnished with double
ments of the system. sealed ball bearings, pre-lubricated prior to installa-
IMPORTANT – If a unit failure occurs tion. Grease fittings are not supplied and bearings are
due to improper maintenance during the designed for long life under standard conditions.
warranty period; Johnson Controls will
not be liable for costs incurred to return Frames 284T thru 587UZ are furnished with double
the system to satisfactory operation. shielded or open ball or roller bearings. It is necessary
to re-lubricate anti-friction bearings periodically. (Re-
fer to Table 3 on Page 35.)
In any operating system it is most important to pro-
vide a planned maintenance and inspection of its func- Table 3 - BEARING LUBRICATION
tioning parts to keep it operating at its peak efficiency. FRAME STANDARD CONTINUOUS GREASE
Therefore, the following maintenance should be per- SIZE 8HR/DAY 24HR DAY QUANTITY
formed when prescribed. OZ.
143T-256T *7 Years *3 Years *1
COMPRESSOR 284TS-286TS 210 Days 70 Days 1
1. Oil Filter – When oil pump VSD frequency in- 324TS-587USS 150 Days 50 Days 2
creases to 55 hz to maintain target oil pressure.
* On frame sizes 143T - 256T, changing bearings at these
intervals is recommended. However, removing the seal, clean-
When the oil filter is changed, it should be inspect-
ing and refilling the bearing and the cavity with recommended
ed thoroughly for any aluminum particles which grease can re-lubricate these bearings.
would indicate possible bearing wear. If alumi-
num particles are found this should be brought Recommended greases for standard applications:
to the attention of the nearest Johnson Controls
office for their further investigation and recom- OPERATING AMBIENT TEMP. -30ºC to 50ºC
mendations. Chevron SRI (Chevron)
Exxon Unirex #2 (Exxon Corp.)
2. Oil Changing – The oil in the compressor must
be changed annually or earlier if it becomes dark Exxon Polyrex (Exxon Corp.)
or cloudy. However, quarterly oil analysis can Shell Dolum R (Shell Oil Co.)
eliminate the need for an annual change provided
Westinghouse Motor Lubrication:
the analysis indicates there is no problem with the
oil. • Re-greasing should occur at 1000 operating hour 7
intervals.
COMPRESSOR MOTOR
• Westinghouse recommends using Westinghouse
1. Check motor mounting screws frequently to in-
Grease No. 53701.
sure tightness.
• Motors with shaft diameters less than 2 3/8 inch
2. Meg motor windings annually to check for dete-
require 1 oz of grease per bearing while motors
rioration of windings.
with shaft diameters between 2 3/8 and 3 inches
GREASED BEARINGS require 1.5 oz.
Mixing different greases is not recom-
Motor Operation and Maintenance manuals are sup-
mended
plied with the chillers providing maintenance sched-
ules and instructions for the specific motors. The fol-
lowing are lubrication schedules for the most common
motors:
JOHNSON CONTROLS 35
SECTION 7 - PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE FORM 160.75-O1 (211)
Additional information on motor lubrica- a new unit, it is a good indication that the con-
tion and other service issues can be found denser tubes require cleaning. Refer to SECTION
in the A-C Motors Instruction Manual. 6 - MAINTENANCE of this manual for condenser
tube cleaning instructions.
2. The evaporator tubes under normal circumstances
will not require cleaning. If the temperature dif-
LEAK TESTING ference between the refrigerant and the chilled
water increases slowly over the operating season,
The unit should be leak tested monthly. Any leaks
it is an indication that the evaporator tubes may be
found must be repaired immediately.
fouling or that there may be a water bypass in the
EVAPORATOR AND CONDENSER waterbox requiring gasket replacement or refrig-
erant may have leaked from the chiller.
The major portion of maintenance on the condenser
and evaporator will deal with the maintaining the wa- 3. Heat recovery condenser tubes should be evalu-
ter side of the condenser and evaporator in a clean ated similiar to evaporator tubes when the heating
condition. circuit is a treated, closed loop. Fouling could be
detected as ability to meet heat load requirements
The use of untreated water in cooling towers, closed decreases.
water systems, etc. frequently results in one or more of
the following: OIL RETURN SYSTEM
1. Scale Formation. 1. Change the dehydrator in the oil return system

semi-annually or earlier if the oil return system
2. Corrosion or Rusting. fails to operate.
3. Slime and Algae Formation. 2. When the dehydrator is changed, the nozzle of the
It is therefore to the benefit of the user to provide for eductor should be checked for any foreign par-
proper water treatment to provide for a longer and ticles that may be obstructing the jet.
more economical life of the equipment. The following
ELECTRICAL CONTROLS
recommendation should be followed in determining
the condition of the water side of the condenser and 1. All electrical controls should be inspected for ob-
evaporator tubes. vious malfunctions.
1. The condenser tubes should be cleaned annually 2. It is important that the factory settings of controls
or earlier if conditions warrant. If the temperature (operation and safety) not be changed. If the set-
difference between the water off the condenser tings are changed without Johnson Controls ap-
and the condenser liquid temperature is more than proval, the warranty will be jeopardized.
4°F (2°C) greater than the difference recorded on
36 JOHNSON CONTROLS
MA INT E NA NC E R E QUIR E ME NT S F OR Y OR K Y K C HIL L E R S
FORM 160.75-O1 (211)
JOHNSON CONTROLS
P R OC E DUR E DA IL Y WE E K L Y MONT HL Y YE AR LY OT HE R
Record operating conditions (on applicable Log Form) X

Check oil levels X
Check refrigerant levels X
Check oil return system operation X
Check operation of motor starter X
Check sump heater and thermostat operation X
Check three-phase voltage and current balance X
Verify proper operation/setting/calibration of safety controls1 X
Verify condenser and evaporator water flows X
Leak check and repair leaks as needed1 X
Check and tighten all electrical connections X
Megohm motor windings X
Replace oil filter and oil return filter/driers X
Clean or backflush heat exchanger (VSD, SSS Applications) X
Replace starter coolant (VSD, SSS Applications) X
Replace or clean starter air filters if applicable X2
1
Perform oil analysis on compressor lube oil X
Perform refrigeration analysis1 X
Perform vibration analysis X
Clean tubes X2
Perform Eddy current testing and inspect tubes 2 - 5 Years
Lubricate motor Refer to motor manufacturer’s recommentations
For operating and maintenance requirements listed above, refer to appropriate service literature, or contact your local YORK Service Office.
1
This procedure must be performed at the specified time interval by an Industry Certified Technician who has been trained and qualified to work on this type of YORK
equipment. A record of this procedure being successfully carried out must be maintained on file by the equipment owner should proof of adequate maintenance be required
at a later date for warranty validation purposes.
2
More frequent service may be required depending on local operating conditions.
Form 160.54-MR1 (801)
37
LD13598
FORM 160.75-O1 (111)
NOTES
38 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.75-O1 (211)
The following factors can be used to convert from

English to the most common SI Metric values.
Table 4 - SI METRIC CONVERSION
MEASUREMENT MULTIPLY ENGLISH UNIT BY FACTOR TO OBTAIN METRIC UNIT
Capacity Tons Refrigerant Effect (ton) 3.516 Kilowatts (kW)
Power Horsepower 0.7457 Kilowatts (kW)
Flow Rate Gallons / Minute (gpm) 0.0631 Liters / Second (l/s)
Feet (ft) 304.8 Meters (m)

Length
Inches (in) 25.4 Millimeters (mm)
Weight Pounds (lbs) 0.4538 Kilograms (kg)
Velocity Feet / Second (fps) 0.3048 Meters / Second (m/s)
Feet of Water (ft) 2.989 Kilopascals (kPa)

Pressure Drop
Pounds / Square Inch (psi) 6.895 Kilopascals (kPa)
TEMPERATURE
To convert degrees Fahrenheit (°F) to degrees Celsius
(°C), subtract 32° and multiply by 5/9 or 0.5556.
Example: (45.0°F - 32°) x 0.5556 = 27.2°C
To convert a temperature range (i.e., a range of 10°F)
from Fahrenheit to Celsius, multiply by 5/9 or 0.5556.
Example: 10.0°F range x 0.5556 = 5.6 °C range
JOHNSON CONTROLS 39
P.O. Box 1592, York, Pennsylvania USA 17405-1592 Tele. 800-861-1001 Subject to change without notice. Printed in USA
Copyright © by Johnson Controls 2011 www.york.com ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Form 160.75-O1 (211)
Supersedes: 160.75-O1 (309)
OPTIVIEW™ CONTROL CENTER
OPERATION MANUAL Supersedes: 160.54-O1 (1013) Form 160.54-O1 (914)
MODEL YK (THROUGH STYLE G)

R-134a COOLING ONLY
WITH OPTIVIEW™ CONTROL CENTER
LD15222
Issue Date:
September 10, 2014
FORM 160.54-O1
ISSUE DATE: 9/10/2014
IMPORTANT!
materials under pressure, rotating components, and operating/service personnel. It is expected that these
both high and low voltage. Each of these items has the individuals possess independent training that will en-
potential, if misused or handled improperly, to cause able them to perform their assigned tasks properly and
bodily injury or death. It is the obligation and respon- safely. It is essential that, prior to performing any task
sibility of operating/service personnel to identify and on this equipment, this individual shall have read and
recognize these inherent hazards, protect themselves, understood this document and any referenced mate-
and proceed safely in completing their tasks. Failure rials. This individual shall also be familiar with and
to comply with any of these requirements could result comply with all applicable governmental standards and
in serious damage to the equipment and the property in regulations pertaining to the task in question.
SAFETY SYMBOLS


not taken.
connections to the controls or application of improper control signals. Failure to follow this warning
will void the manufacturer’s warranty and cause serious damage to property or personal injury.
2 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.54-O1

In complying with Johnson Controls’ policy for con- these documents, the technician should verify whether
tinuous product improvement, the information con- the equipment has been modified and if current litera-
tained in this document is subject to change without ture is available from the owner of the equipment prior
notice. Johnson Controls makes no commitment to to performing any work on the chiller.
update or provide current information automatically to
the manual owner. Updated manuals, if applicable, can CHANGE BARS
be obtained by contacting the nearest Johnson Controls
Service office. Revisions made to this document are indicated with a
line along the left or right hand column in the area the
Operating/service personnel maintain responsibility for revision was made. These revisions are to technical in-
the applicability of these documents to the equipment. formation and any other changes in spelling, grammar
If there is any question regarding the applicability of or formatting are not included.
Installation 160.54-N1
OptiView Control Center – Service Instructions 160-54-M1
Wiring Diagram – Unit Style E with Electro-Mechanical Starter 160.54-PW1
Wiring Diagram – Unit Style E with Mod “A” Solid State Starter 160.54-PW2
Wiring Diagram – Unit Style E with Mod “B” Solid State Starter 160.54-PW2.1
Wiring Diagram – Unit Style E with Variable Speed Drive 160.54-PW3
Wiring Diagram – Unit Style E (P Compressors) with Electro-Mechanical Starter 160.54-PW8
Wiring Diagram – Unit Style E (P Compressors) with Mod “B” Solid State Starter 160.54-PW9
Wiring Diagram – Unit Style E (P Compressors) with Variable Speed Drive 160.54-PW10
JOHNSON CONTROLS 3
FORM 160.54-O1
NOMENCLATURE
MOTOR CODE
POWER SUPPLY
– for 60Hz
5 for 50Hz
COMPRESSOR CODE*
CONDENSER CODE*
EVAPORATOR CODE*
* Refer to YK Engineering Guide (Form 160.75-EG1)
MODEL* for Shell/Motor/Compressor combinations.
4 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.54-O1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 1 - DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM AND FUNDAMENTALS OF OPERATION........................................... 9

System Operation Description........................................................................................................................... 9
Capacity Control.............................................................................................................................................. 10
SECTION 2 - OPTIVIEW CONTROL CENTER INTRODUCTION...........................................................................13

Optiview Control Center.................................................................................................................................. 15
Home Screen.................................................................................................................................................. 21
System Screen................................................................................................................................................ 25
Evaporator Screen.......................................................................................................................................... 27
Condenser Screen.......................................................................................................................................... 31
Heat Recovery Screen.................................................................................................................................... 35
Head Pressure Control Screen....................................................................................................................... 39
Heat Pump Screen.......................................................................................................................................... 41
Refrigerant Level Control Screen.................................................................................................................... 45
Refrigerant Level Control Setpoints Screen.................................................................................................... 49
Compressor Screen........................................................................................................................................ 53
Compressor Screen........................................................................................................................................ 57
Proximity Probe Calibration Screen................................................................................................................ 61
Hot Gas Bypass Screen.................................................................................................................................. 63
Surge Protection Screen................................................................................................................................. 65
Variable Geometry Diffuser Screen................................................................................................................. 69
Variable Geometry Diffuser Setpoints Screen................................................................................................. 71
Pre-Rotation Vanes Calibration Screen........................................................................................................... 75
VSD Tuning Screen......................................................................................................................................... 77
Oil Sump Screen............................................................................................................................................. 79
Electro-Mechanical Starter Screen.................................................................................................................. 83
Mod “A” Solid State Starter Screen................................................................................................................. 85
Mod “B” Solid State Starter Screen................................................................................................................. 87
Medium Voltage Solid State Starter Screen.................................................................................................... 89
Variable Speed Drive Screen.......................................................................................................................... 91
Medium Voltage Variable Speed Drive Screen............................................................................................... 93
Variable Speed Drive (VSD) Details Screen................................................................................................... 97
Variable Speed Drive (VSD) Details Screen................................................................................................... 99
Adaptive Capacity Control Details Screen.................................................................................................... 101
Surge Map Screen - Table View.................................................................................................................... 109
Surge Map Screen - List View....................................................................................................................... 111
Harmonic Filter Details Screen...................................................................................................................... 113
Motor Lubrication Screen.............................................................................................................................. 115
Motor Details Screen..................................................................................................................................... 119
Motor Setpoints Screen................................................................................................................................. 123
Setpoints Screen........................................................................................................................................... 127
Setup Screen................................................................................................................................................. 131
Quick Start Screen........................................................................................................................................ 137
Schedule Screen........................................................................................................................................... 141
User Screen.................................................................................................................................................. 143
JOHNSON CONTROLS 5
FORM 160.54-O1
TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT'D)
COMMS Screen............................................................................................................................................ 145

Printer Screen............................................................................................................................................... 147
Sales Order Screen....................................................................................................................................... 149
Operations Screen........................................................................................................................................ 151
History Screen............................................................................................................................................... 153
History Details Screen................................................................................................................................... 155
Security Log Screen...................................................................................................................................... 157
Security Log Details Screen.......................................................................................................................... 159
Custom View Screen..................................................................................................................................... 161
Custom View Setup Screen.......................................................................................................................... 163
Trend Screen................................................................................................................................................. 165
Trend Setup Screen...................................................................................................................................... 167
Advanced Trend Setup Screen..................................................................................................................... 169
Common Slots Screen.................................................................................................................................. 171
SECTION 3 - DISPLAY MESSAGES.....................................................................................................................175

Status Messages........................................................................................................................................... 175
Run Messages.............................................................................................................................................. 176
Start Inhibit Messages................................................................................................................................... 177
Warning Messages........................................................................................................................................ 177
Routine Shutdown Messages........................................................................................................................ 181
Cycling Shutdown Messages........................................................................................................................ 181
Mod “B” Solid State Starter Cycling Shutdown Messages............................................................................ 184
Compressor Motor Variable Speed Drive: Cycling Shutdown Messages...................................................... 186
Safety Shutdown Messages.......................................................................................................................... 191
Mod “B” Solid State Starter Safety Shutdown Messages.............................................................................. 198
Compressor Motor Variable Speed Drive: Safety Shutdown Messages....................................................... 199
SECTION 4 - PRINTING........................................................................................................................................203
Printing Overview.......................................................................................................................................... 203
Acceptable Printers....................................................................................................................................... 204
Printer Connections....................................................................................................................................... 204
Printer Setup................................................................................................................................................. 205
Control Center Setup..................................................................................................................................... 205
Downloading System Prints to a Laptop....................................................................................................... 205
6 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.54-O1
LIST OF FIGURES

FIGURE 2 - Compressor Pre-rotation Vanes��10
FIGURE 3 - Refrigerant Flow-Thru Chiller�� 11
FIGURE 4 - Optiview Control Center��15
FIGURE 5 - Home Screen��21
FIGURE 6 - System Screens��25
FIGURE 7 - Evaporator Screen��27
FIGURE 8 - Condenser Screen��31
FIGURE 9 - Heat Recovery Screen (Software Version C.Opt.01.21.307)�� 35
FIGURE 10 - Head Pressure Control Screen (Software Version C.Opt.01.21.307)�� 39
FIGURE 11 - Heat Pump Screen (Software Version C.OPT.01.23.307 and later)�� 41
FIGURE 12 - Refrigerant Level Control Screen (Flash Memory Card Versions C.Mlm.01.06.XXX and Earlier)�� 45
FIGURE 13 - Refrigerant Level Control Screen
(Software Version C.Mlm.01.07.XXX to C.Mlm.01.10d.XXX or C.Opt.01.10d (and Earlier))�� 47
FIGURE 14 - Refrigerant Level Control Setpoints Screen (Software Version C.Mlm.01.07.XXX to C.Mlm.01.10d.
XXX or C.Opt.01.10d (and Earlier))��49
FIGURE 15 - Refrigerant Level Control Screen (Software Versions C.Mlm.01.14.XXX and Later or
C.Opt.01.14.306 and Later)��51
FIGURE 16 - Compressor Screen (All “P” Compressors and Style F and Later Chillers with G, Q or H5-8 Com-
pressors)��53
FIGURE 17 - Compressor Screen (Style E and Earlier Chillers with G, H, or J Compressors and Style G Chillers
with K Compressors)��57
FIGURE 18 - Proximity Probe Calibration Screen (Style E and Earlier Chillers with G, H, or J Compressors and
Style F and Later Chillers with J or H3 Compressors)��61
FIGURE 19 - Hot Gas Bypass Screen��63
FIGURE 20 - Surge Protection Screen��65
FIGURE 21 - Variable Geometry Diffuser Screen��69
FIGURE 22 - Variable Geometry Diffuser Setpoints Screen��71
FIGURE 23 - Pre-Rotation Vanes Calibration Screen��75
FIGURE 24 - VSD Tuning Screen��77
FIGURE 25 - Oil Sump Screen��79
FIGURE 26 - Electro-Mechanical Starter Screen��83
FIGURE 27 - Mod “A” Solid State Starter Screen��85
FIGURE 28 - Mod “B” Solid State Starter Screen��87
FIGURE 29 - Medium Voltage Solid State Starter Screen��89
FIGURE 30 - Variable Speed Drive Screen��91
FIGURE 31 - Medium Voltage Variable Speed Drive Screen (Software Version C.Opt.01.16.XXX and Later)�� 93
FIGURE 32 - Variable Speed Drive (VSD) Details Screen (Style D VSD and VSD with Part
Number 371-03789-XXX (503 Hp 60Hz; 410hp 50Hz)) �� 97
FIGURE 33 - Variable Speed Drive (VSD) Details Screen (VSD with
Part Number 371-02767-XXX (60Hz) or 371-03700-XXX (50Hz))�� 99
FIGURE 34 - Adaptive Capacity Control Details Screen (Software Version C.Opt.01.18.307 and Earlier)
(VSD and MV VSD)��101
FIGURE 35 - Adaptive Capacity Control Details Screen York Protocol Configuration
(Software Version C.Opt.01.19.307 and Later)��103
FIGURE 36 - Adaptive Capacity Control Details Screen Modbus Protocol Configuration
(Software Version C.Opt.01.19.307 and Later)��105
FIGURE 37 - Surge Map Screen - Table View (Software Version C.Opt.01.19.307 and Later)�� 109
FIGURE 38 - Surge Map Screen - List View (Software Version C.Opt.01.19.307 and Later)�� 111
FIGURE 39 - Harmonic Filter Details Screen (Style D VSD and VSD with
Part Number 371-03789-XXX (503hp 60Hz; 419hp 50Hz) �� 113
FIGURE 40 - Motor Lubrication Screen�� 115
FIGURE 41 - Motor Details Screen (Software Version C.Opt.01.22.307 and Later)�� 119
FIGURE 42 - Motor Setpoints Screen (Software Version C.Opt.01.22.307 and Later)�� 123
JOHNSON CONTROLS 7
FORM 160.54-O1
LIST OF FIGURES (CONT'D)
FIGURE 43 - Setpoints Screen��127

FIGURE 44 - Setup Screen��131
FIGURE 45 - Quick Start Screen (Software Version C.Opt.01.21.307 and Later)�� 137
FIGURE 46 - Schedule Screen��141
FIGURE 47 - User Screen��143
FIGURE 48 - COMMS Screen��145
FIGURE 49 - Printer Screen��147
FIGURE 50 - Sales Order Screen��149
FIGURE 51 - Operations Screen��151
FIGURE 52 - History Screen��153
FIGURE 53 - History Details Screen��155
FIGURE 54 - Security Log Screen��157
FIGURE 55 - Security Log Details Screen��159
FIGURE 56 - Custom View Screen��161
FIGURE 57 - Custom View Setup Screen��163
FIGURE 58 - Trend Screen��165
FIGURE 59 - Trend Setup Screen��167
FIGURE 60 - Advanced Trend Setup Screen��169
FIGURE 61 - Common Slots Screen��171
FIGURE 62 - Printer��203
FIGURE 63 - Breckman Printer��207
FIGURE 64 - Communications Block Diagram��207
FIGURE 65 - Sample Printout (Status)��208
FIGURE 66 - Sample Printout (Setpoints)��210
FIGURE 67 - Sample Printout (Schedule)��212
FIGURE 68 - Sample Printout (Sales Order)��212
FIGURE 69 - Sample Printout (History)��214
FIGURE 70 - Sample Printout (Security Log Report)��216
FIGURE 71 - Sample Printout (Trend Data New or Existing Points)��216
FIGURE 72 - Sample Printout (Custom Screen Report)��216
FIGURE 73 - Sample Printout (Adaptive Capacity Control New Map Point Report)�� 217
FIGURE 74 - Sample Printout (Adaptive Capacity Control Existing Map Points Report)�� 217
LIST OF TABLES
TABLE 1 - Addresses and Associated Data��19

TABLE 2 - Voltage (V)��94
TABLE 3 - Condenser Temperature Range��134
TABLE 4 - Master Slot Numbers List for Use with Trend Feature��172
TABLE 5 - OKIDATA OKIPOS 441��204
TABLE 6 - Brecknell CP130��207
TABLE 7 - SI Metric Conversion��219
8 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.54-O1
SECTION 1 - DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM AND FUNDAMENTALS

1
OF OPERATION
SYSTEM OPERATION DESCRIPTION on a graphic display. Other displays can be observed

by pressing the keys as labeled on the Control Center.
The YORK Model YK Chiller is commonly applied to The chiller with the OptiView Control Center is applied
large air conditioning systems, but may be used on oth- with an Electro-Mechanical Starter, YORK Solid State
er applications. The chiller consists of an open motor Starter (optional), or Variable Speed Drive (optional).
mounted to a compressor (with integral speed increasing
gears), condenser, evaporator and variable flow control. When the compressor motor is driven by a YORK Solid
State Starter, one of three different starters could be ap-
The chiller is controlled by a modern state of the art plied. Later production chillers are equipped with either
Microcomputer Control Center that monitors its opera- the Style B Liquid Cooled Solid State Starter (LCSSS)
tion. The Control Center is programmed by the opera- or the Medium Voltage Solid State Starter (MVSSS).
tor to suit job specifications. Automatic timed start-ups Earlier vintage chillers are equipped with the Mod “A”
and shutdowns are also programmable to suit nighttime, Solid State Starter. This starter contains a Trigger Board
weekends, and holidays. The operating status, tempera- that interfaces to a Logic Board that is installed inside of
tures, pressures, and other information pertinent to oper- the Control Center.
ation of the chiller are automatically displayed and read
COMPRESSOR
CONTROL
CENTER
MOTOR
CONDENSER
LD15222
EVAPORATOR
JOHNSON CONTROLS 9
FORM 160.54-O1
SECTION 1 - DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM AND FUNDAMENTALSOF OPERATION
The refrigerant vapor, which is produced by the boil-

ing action in the cooler, flows to the compressor where
the rotating impeller increases its pressure and tem-
perature and discharges it into the condenser. Water
flowing through the condenser tubes absorbs heat from
the refrigerant vapor, causing it to condense. The con-
denser water is supplied to the chiller from an external
source, usually a cooling tower. The condensed refrig-
erant drains from the condenser into the liquid return
line, where the variable orifice meters the flow of liq-
uid refrigerant to the cooler to complete the refrigerant
circuit.
The major components of a chiller are selected to han-
dle the refrigerant, which would be evaporated at full
load design conditions. However, most systems will
be called upon to deliver full load capacity for only a
relatively small part of the time the unit is in operation.
CAPACITY CONTROL
The major components of a chiller are selected for full
7619A(D)
load capacities, therefore capacity must be controlled
Figure 2 - COMPRESSOR PRE-ROTATION VANES to maintain a constant chilled liquid temperature leav-
ing the cooler. Pre-rotation Vanes (PRV), located at the
entrance to the compressor impeller, compensate for
When the compressor motor is driven by a YORK
variation in load (Refer to Figure 2 on Page 10).
Variable Speed Drive, there could be a Variable Speed
Drive (VSD) or a Medium Voltage Variable Speed The position of these vanes is automatically controlled
Drive (MV VSD) applied. through a lever arm attached to an electric motor lo-
cated outside the compressor housing. The automatic
In operation, a liquid (water or brine to be chilled) flows
adjustment of the vane position in effect provides the
through the cooler, where boiling refrigerant absorbs
performance of many different compressors to match
heat from the liquid. The chilled liquid is then piped to
various load conditions from full load with vanes wide
fan coil units or other air conditioning terminal units,
open to minimum load with vanes completely closed.
where it flows through finned coils, absorbing heat
from the air. The warmed liquid is then returned to the
chiller to complete the chilled liquid circuit.
10 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.54-O1

1
(Falling Film Evaporator)
YK Mod G
(Falling-Film Evaporator)
LEGEND
High Pressure Vapor
High Pressure Liquid Refrigerant
Low Pressure Liquid Refrigerant
Low Pressure Vapor
COMPRESSOR

BYPASS VALVE VANES
SUCTION
OPTIONAL HOT GAS

DISCHARGE BYPASS LINE

ISOLATION VALVE
VALVE
EVAPORATOR
CONDENSER
SUCTION
BAFFLE
LIQUID LEVEL
LIQUID LEVEL
SUB-COOLER
LD00924A
OPTIONAL
ISOLATION
VALVE
Figure 3 - REFRIGERANT FLOW-THRU CHILLER Rev. 2 (10-11-2010)

Dan Sowers
[email protected]
(717) 771-7535
JOHNSON CONTROLS 11
FORM 160.54-O1
12 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.54-O1
SECTION 2 - OPTIVIEW CONTROL CENTER INTRODUCTION
The OptiView Control Center is a microprocessor trol Center – Service Instructions (Form 160.54-M1).
based control system for R-22 or R134a centrifugal These parameters affect chiller operation and should
chillers. It controls the leaving chilled liquid tempera- never be modified by anyone other than a qualified
ture via Pre-rotation Vane controls and has the ability Service Technician. They are shown in this manual for 2
to limit motor current via control of the Pre-rotation reference only.
Vanes. It is compatible with YORK Solid State Starter
(optional), Variable Speed Drive (optional), and Elec- Advanced diagnostics and troubleshooting informa-
tro-Mechanical Starter applications. tion for Service Technicians are included in OptiView
Control Center – Service Instructions (Form 160.54-
The panel comes configured with a full screen LCD M1). Also included in the service manual are detailed
Graphic Display mounted in the middle of a keypad descriptions of chiller features, such as the Refrigerant
interface. The graphic display allows the presentation Level Control, Variable Speed Drive Oil Pump, Hot
of several operating parameters at once. In addition, Gas Bypass, High Speed Thrust Bearing Proximity
the operator may view a graphical representation of the Probe, Remote Setpoints, Smart Freeze Protection, and
historical operation of the chiller as well as the present Standby Lubrication.
operation. For the novice user, the locations of various
chiller parameters are clearly and intuitively marked. The Control Center expands the capabilities of remote
Instructions for specific operations are provided on control and communications. By providing a common
many of the screens. networking protocol through the Building Automation
System (BAS), YORK Chillers not only work well in-
The graphic display also allows information to be rep- dividually, but also as a team. This new protocol al-
resented in both English (temperatures in °F and pres- lows increased remote control of the chiller, as well
sures in PSIG) and Metric (temperatures in °C and pres- as 24-hour performance monitoring via a remote site.
sures in kPa) mode. The advantages are most apparent, In addition, compatibility is maintained with the pres-
however, in the ability to display many languages. ent network of BAS communications. The chiller also
maintains the standard digital remote capabilities as
The Control Center continually monitors the system well. Both of these remote control capabilities allow
operation and records the cause of any shutdowns for the standard Energy Management System (EMS)
(Safety, Cycling or Normal). This information is re- interface:
corded in memory and is preserved even through
a power failure condition. The user may recall it for 1. Remote Start
viewing at any time. During operation, the user is con-
2. Remote Stop
tinually advised of the operating conditions by vari-
ous status and warning messages. In addition, it may 3. Remote Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature Set-
be configured to notify the user of certain conditions point adjustment (0 to 10VDC, 2 to 10VDC, 0 to
via alarms. A complete listing of shutdown, status, and 20mA or 4 to 20mA) or Pulse Width Modulation
warning messages is detailed in the DISPLAY MES-
4. Remote Current Limit Setpoint adjustment
SAGES portion of this manual.
(0 to 10VDC, 2 to 10VDC, 0 to 20mA or 4 to
There are certain screens, displayed values, program- 20mA) or Pulse Width Modulation
mable setpoints and manual control shown in this man-
5. Remote READY TO START Contacts
ual that are for Service Technician use only. They are
only displayed when logged in at SERVICE access lev- 6. Safety Shutdown Contacts
el or higher. The setpoints and parameters displayed on
7. Cycling Shutdown Contacts
these screens are explained in detail in OptiView Con-
JOHNSON CONTROLS 13
FORM 160.54-O1
The chiller operating program resides in the OptiView BRAM configuration, requires software ver-
Control Center Microboard. The Control Center could sion C.OPT.01.15.xxx (or later). This board is
be equipped with either of the following Microboards: backward compatible with YK chillers presently
using the 031-01730-000 or 031-02430-000 mi-
• 031-01730-000 – shipped in new production chill- croboard.
ers until January 2004. The program resides in a
replaceable Flash Memory Card. The software Earlier vintage chillers could be equipped with a later
version (C.MLM.01.xx.yzz) is printed on label Microboard due to service replacement.
adhered to card. Program can be upgraded by re-
Software versions (C.MLM.01.xx.yzz or C.OPT.01.
placing the card.
xx.yzz) are alpha-numeric codes that represent the ap-
• 031-02430-000 – shipped in new production chill- plication, language package and revision levels per be-
ers between January 2004 and June 2006. The pro- low. Each time the controls portion or language section
gram resides in non-removable onboard memory. is revised, the respective revision level increments.
The software version is C.OPT.01.xx.yzz, and is
viewable on the DIAGNOSTICS Screen in SER- • C – Commercial chiller
VICE access level. The program can be upgrad- • MLM – Used on Microboard 031-01730-000
ed by downloading a new program from a Pro-
gram Card. Program Cards are shirt-pocket-size • OPT – Used on Microboard 031-02430-000
portable memory storage devices available from • 01 – YK chiller
YORK.
• xx – controls revision level (00, 01, etc)
• 031-02430-001 – Shipped in new production
chillers after June 2006. This is an upgraded ver- • y – language package (0 equals English only, 1
sion of the 031-02430-000 microboard. The up- equals NEMA, 2 equals CE, 3 equals NEMA/CE )
grade is necessary to operate with the Medium • zz – language package revision level (00, 01, etc)
Voltage Solid State Starter, Medium Voltage Vari-
able Speed Drive and those Variable Speed Drives Throughout this manual, reference is made to functions
and Style B Solid State Starters that serially com- and features that are only available in certain Flash
municate with the microboard using Modbus Pro- Memory Card revision levels (C.MLM.01.xx.xxx). To
tocol. Variable Speed Drive Modbus applications cross reference C.MLM software to C.OPT software,
require software version C.OPT.01.16.307 (or refer to the controls revision level. Software version
later). Style B Solid State Starter Modbus appli- C.OPT.01.08A.300 is of the same controls revision
cations require software version C.OPT.01.18.307 level as C.MLM.01.08.105A/.206A. From this starting
(or later). point, both receive the same updates at each revision.
Software upgrades should only be performed by a Ser-
The upgrade includes a larger BRAM (U38) and vice Technician.
an additional RS-485 port on COM2 serial port
for Modbus communications. When used in larger
14 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.54-O1
OPTIVIEW CONTROL CENTER
29348A
Figure 4 - OPTIVIEW CONTROL CENTER
The OptiView™ Control Center display is highlighted Cursor Arrow keys are pro-
by a full screen graphics display. This display is nested vided to allow movement on
within a standard keypad, and is surrounded by SOFT screens which contain a large
keys which are redefined based on the currently dis- amount of entry data. In addi-
played screen. Eight buttons are available on the right tion, these keys can be used
side of the panel, and are primarily used for navigation to scroll through history and
between the system screens. At the base of the display event logs.
are 5 additional buttons. The area to the right of the
keypad is used for data entry with a standard numer- The Start/Stop control is operated via a three-position
ic keypad provided for entry of system setpoints and rocker switch. When toggled all the way to the right, it
limits. is considered in the STOP/RESET position. When in
the middle position, this is considered the RUN state.
The DECIMAL key provides accurate entry When toggled to the left-most position, it is considered
of setpoint values. in the START state. Each state is described in detail
below:
A +/- key has also been provided to allow en- • STOP / RESET (O)
try of negative values and AM/PM selection
during time entry. When in this position, the chiller will not run un-
der any condition. For safety reasons, this posi-
I n order to accept changes made to the chiller tion is required for many maintenance tasks to be
setpoints, the CHECK key is provided as a completed (such as proximity probe and vane cal-
universal ‘Enter’ key or ‘Accept’’ symbol. ibration). In addition, the switch must be placed
in this state following a safety shutdown before
the chiller is allowed to restart. This guarantees
In order to reject entry of a setpoint or dis-
that manual intervention has taken place and the
miss an entry form, the ‘X’ key is provided as
shutdown has been acknowledged.
a universal ‘Cancel’ symbol.
JOHNSON CONTROLS 15
FORM 160.54-O1
• START (◄ ) PROGRAMMABLE
The switch can only remain in this position when Values in this group are available for change by the
being acted upon by a manual force. Once the user user. In order to program any setpoints on the system,
has released the switch, it automatically reverts to the user must first be logged in with the appropriate ac-
the RUN position. Generally, this state only oc- cess level. Each of the programmable values requires
curs momentarily as the operator attempts to lo- a specific access level which will be indicated beside
cally start the unit. Once this position has been the specified value. All of the programmable controls
sensed, if all fault conditions are cleared, the unit in the system fall into one of the categories described
will enter the System Prelube (start sequence). below:
• RUN ( ▀ ) Access Level
When in this position, the chiller is able to oper- In order to program any setpoints on the system, the
ate. The switch spring-returns to this state after it user must first login with an appropriate access level.
has been toggled to the START position. When in When power is applied to the chiller, the system begins
this state, the chiller is allowed to function nor- with an access level of VIEW. This will allow the user
mally, and will also allow the chiller to automati- to navigate to most screens and observe the values dis-
cally restart following a cycling shutdown. The played there. However, the user will not be allowed to
switch must be in this state to receive a valid re- change any values. To change any values, the user must
mote start signal when operating under a remote return to the HOME Screen (shown by default when
control source. power is applied to the system), and use the LOGIN
button or utilize the CHANGE SETPOINTS key de-
INTERFACE CONVENTIONS OVERVIEW scribed below. At this point, the user will be prompted
The new graphical display on each control panel al- to enter a User ID and the corresponding password. By
lows a wide variety of information to be presented to default, the User ID is zero (0). In order to gain stan-
the user. Each screen description in this document will dard OPERATOR level access, the password would be
begin with a section entitled OVERVIEW which will entered as 9 6 7 5, using the numeric keypad. OPERA-
describe the graphical elements on the screen and give TOR access reverts to the VIEW level after 10 continu-
a short summary of the functions available. Each ele- ous minutes without a keypress. If a custom User ID
ment on the screen will then be categorized into three and password have been defined (refer to User Screen
distinct groups: Display Only, Programmable, and on Page 143), the user may enter that User ID and the
Navigation. Below is a short description of what types corresponding password value.
of information are included in these groups.
If the correct password is received, the user is autho-
The Programmable values and Navigation commands rized with the appropriate access level. If an incorrect
are also subject to access level restrictions as described password is entered, the user is notified of the failure
below. For each of these elements, an indication is and prompted again. At this point the user may retry
given to show the minimum access level required to the password entry, or cancel the login attempt.
program the value or navigate to the subscreen.
Change Setpoints
DISPLAY ONLY On screens containing setpoints programmable at the
Values in this group are read-only parameters of in- OPERATOR access level, a key with this label will be
formation about the chiller operation. This type of in- visible if the present access level is VIEW. This key
formation may be represented by a numerical value, a brings up the access level prompt described above. It
text string, or an LED image. For numerical values, if allows the user to login at a higher access level without
the monitored parameter is above the normal operat- returning to the HOME Screen. After login, the user
ing range, the high limit value will be displayed along may then modify setpoints on that screen.
with the ‘>’ symbol; if it is below the normal operating
range, the low limit value will be displayed along with Setpoints
the ‘<’ symbol. In some cases, the value may be ren- The Control Center uses the setpoint values to control
dered invalid by other conditions and the display will the chiller and other devices connected to the chiller
use X’s to indicate this. system. Setpoints can fall into several categories. They
16 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.54-O1
could be numeric values (such as 45.0°F for the Leav- Manual Controls
ing Chilled Liquid Temperature), or they could enable Some keys are used to perform manual control func-
or disable a feature or function. tions. These may involve manual control of items such
Regardless of which setpoint is being programmed, the as the Pre-rotation Vanes, variable orifice or oil pump
following procedure applies: speed. Other keys in this category are used to initiate/
terminate processes such as calibrations or reports.
1. Press the desired setpoint key. A dialog box ap- 2
pears displaying the present value, the upper and Free Cursor
lower limits of the programmable range, and the On screens containing many setpoints, a specific
default value. SOFT key may not be assigned to each setpoint value.
2. If the dialog box begins with the word ENTER, A SOFT key will be assigned to enable the cursor ar-
use the numeric keys to enter the desired value. row keys below the numeric keypad which are used to
Leading zeroes are not necessary. If a decimal HIGHLIGHT the desired setpoint field. At this point,
point is necessary, press the ‘•’ key (i.e. 45.0). the () key is pressed to bring up a dialog prompt-
ing the user to enter a new setpoint value. The (X) key
Pressing the ▲ key, sets the entry value to the de- cancels cursor mode. (Refer to the Schedule Screen on
fault for that setpoint. Pressing the ▼ key, clears Page 141 for an example.)
the present entry. The ◄ key is a backspace key
and causes the entry point to move back one NAVIGATION
space.
In order to maximize the amount of values which the
If the dialog box begins with SELECT, use the panel can display to the user, and in order to place
◄ and ► keys to select the desired value. those values in context, multiple screens have been
designed to describe the chiller operation. In order
If the previously defined setpoint is desired, press
to move from one screen to the next, navigation keys
the ‘X’ (Cancel) key to dismiss the dialog box.
have been defined. These keys allow the user to either
3. Press the ‘’ (Enter) key. move FORWARD to a subscreen of the present screen,
or move BACKWARD to the previous screen. Except
4. If the value is within range, it is accepted and the
for the HOME Screen display, the upper-right SOFT
dialog box disappears. The chiller will begin to
key will always return the user to the HOME Screen.
operate based on the new programmed value. If
Navigating with SOFT keys is as simple as pressing
out of range, the value will not be accepted and
the key next to the label containing the name of the de-
the user is prompted to try again.
sired screen. The system will immediately refresh the
display with the graphics for that screen. Following is
a layout of all the screens and how they are connected.
JOHNSON CONTROLS 17
FORM 160.54-O1
Home Screen (Page 21)

System Screen (Page 25)
Evaporator (Page 27)
Heat Pump (Page 41) History (Page 153)
Condenser (Page 31) History Details (Page 155)
Level Control (Page 45 - 51) Security Log Screen (Page 157)
Heat Recovery (Page 35) Security Log Details Screen (Page 159)
Heat Pump (Page 41) Custom View (Page 161)
Head Pressure Control (Page 39) Custom Setup (Page 163)
Compressor (Page 53) Trend (Page 165)
Proximity Probe Calibration (Page 61) Trend Setup (Page 167)
Hot Gas Bypass (Page 63) Advanced Trend Setup (Page 169)
Surge Protection Screen (Page 65) Common Slots (Page 171)
Variable Geometry Diffuser (Page 69)
Pre-rotation Vanes Calibration (Page 75) LANGUAGES
VSD Tuning (Page 77) The Screens can be displayed in various languages. Lan-
Oil Sump (Page 79) guage selection is done on the USER Screen. The desired
Motor (Page 83) language is selected from those available. Not all lan-
Electro-Mechanical Starter Version (Page 83) guages are available. English is the default language. If a
language other than English is being displayed, an Eng-
Mod “A” Solid State Starter (Page 85) lish-only speaking person should navigate to the USER
Mod “B” Solid State Starter (Page 87) Screen using the preceding navigation chart and select
Medium Voltage Solid State Starter (Page 89) English per the USER Screen instructions in this manual.
VSD (Page 91)
VSD Details (Page 97)
ACC Details (Page 101)
Surge Map (Page 109 - 111)
Harmonic Filter Details (Page 113)
Motor Lubrication (Page 115)
Motor Details Screen (Page 119)
Motor Setpoints Screen (Page 123)
Setpoints (Page 127)
Setup (Page 131)
Schedule (Page 141)
User (Page 143)
Comms (Page 145)
Printer (Page 147)
Sales Order (Page 149)
Operations (Page 151)
Diagnostics (Refer to OptiView Control
Center - Service Instructions (Form
160.54-M1))
Quick Start (Page 137)
18 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.54-O1
ANALOG INPUT RANGES
The following table indicates the valid display range the < or > symbols will be displayed beside the mini-
for each of the analog input values. In the event that the mum or maximum value, respectively.
input sensor is reading a value outside of these ranges,
Table 1 - ADDRESSES AND ASSOCIATED DATA 2

ENGLISH RANGE METRIC RANGE
ANALOG INPUT
LOW HIGH UNITS LOW HIGH UNITS
Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature 0.0 82.0 °F -17.7 27.7 °C
Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature – Heat Pump Duty 0.0 136.4 °F -17.7 58.0 °C
Return Chilled Liquid Temperature 0.0 94.1 °F -17.7 34.5 °C
Return Chilled Liquid Temperature – Heat Pump Duty 0.0 133.9 °F -17.7 56.6 °C
Leaving Condenser Liquid Temperature 8.0 133.5 °F -13.3 56.3 °C
Return Condenser Liquid Temperature 8.0 133.5 °F -13.3 56.3 °C
Evaporator Refrigerant Temperature (Optional) 0.0 126.1 °F -17.7 52.3 °C
Discharge Temperature 31.8 226.3 °F -0.1 107.9 °C
Oil Temperature 31.8 226.3 °F -0.1 107.9 °C
Condenser Pressure (R22 and R134a) ***0.0 315.0 PSIG 0.0 2172.4 KPAG
Condenser Temperature (R22)* -122.1 130.9 °F -85.6 54.9 °C
Condenser Temperature (R134a)* -98.7 160.1 °F -72.6 71.7 °C
Evaporator Pressure (R22 – water) 49.4 128.8 PSIG 340.6 888.2 KPAG
Evaporator Pressure (R22 – brine) 25.0 100.0 PSIG 172.4 689.6 KPAG
Evaporator Pressure (R134a) 5.5 77.4 PSIG 37.9 533.7 KPAG
Evaporator Pressure (R134a) – Heat Pump Duty 0.0 125.0 PSIG 0.0 861.8 KPAG
Evaporator Temperature (R22 – water)* 13.0 67.0 °F -10.5 19.4 °C
Evaporator Temperature (R22 – brine)* -18.0 51.4 °F -27.7 10.7 °C
Evaporator Temperature (R134a)* -44.9 64.7 °F -42.7 18.1 °C
Oil Sump Pressure (R22) 23.2 271.8 PSIG 160.0 1874.4 KPAG
Oil Sump Pressure (R134a) 0.0 315.0 PSIG 0.0 2172.4 KPAG
Oil Pump Pressure (R22 and R134a) 0.0 315.0 PSIG 0.0 2172.4 KPAG
High Speed Thrust Bearing Proximity Position
(Style E and earlier chillers with G, H, or J
8.0 99.0 Mils -7.1 148.8 °C
compressors and Style F and later chillers
with J or H3 compressors)
High Speed Thrust Bearing Drain Temperature** 19.1 300.0 °F -7.1 148.8 °C
Refrigerant Level 0.0 100.0 % 0.0 100.0 %
Drop Leg Refrigerant Temperature 0.0 121.7 °F -17.7 49.8 °C
Motor Winding Temperature – RTD
32.0 399.5 °F 0.0 204.2 °C
(Phase A, B, C)
Motor Winding Temperature – 50K Ohm
31.2 412.5 °F -0.5 211.4 °C
Transmitter (Phase A, B, C)
Motor Bearing Temperature – RTD (Shaft End
32.0 399.5 °F 0.0 204.2 °C
and Opposite End)
Motor Bearing Vibration – Accelerometer
0.0 30.0 _ _ _ _
(Shaft End and Opposite End)
*Saturation temperatures are calculated values. They will display XXX if the pressure used for the calculation is out of range.
**Not applicable to chillers equipped with Flash Memory Card version C.MLM.01.03 and later.
***7.5 PSIG Flash Memory Card version C.MLM.01.04 and later.
JOHNSON CONTROLS 19
FORM 160.54-O1
20 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.54-O1
HOME SCREEN
LD14331
Figure 5 - HOME SCREEN
OVERVIEW Motor Run (LED)

When the chiller system is powered on, the above de- Is ON when the digital output controlling the motor
fault display appears. The primary values which must starter contact is on.
be monitored and controlled are shown on this screen.
Input Power (kW)
The HOME Screen display depicts a visual represen-
tation of the chiller itself. Animation indicates chilled Available only if the chiller system is utilizing a Variable
liquid flow. Speed Drive (VSD), Medium Voltage Variable Speed
Drive (MV VSD), Mod “B” Solid State Starter or Me-
dium Voltage Solid State Starter motor controller. This
DISPLAY ONLY displays the total input power used by the system.
Chilled Liquid Temperature – Leaving % Full Load Amps
Displays the temperature of the liquid as it leaves the This displays the percentage of Full Load Amps uti-
evaporator. lized by the system.
Chilled Liquid Temperature – Return Operating Hours
Displays the temperature of the liquid as it enters the Displays the cumulative operating hours of the chiller.
evaporator.
Heating Condenser Liquid Temperature –
Condenser Liquid Temperature – Leaving Leaving
Displays the temperature of the liquid as it leaves the (Software version C.OPT.01.21.307 and later)
condenser. Displays the temperature of the liquid as it leaves the
heating condenser tube bundle. Only appears when the
Condenser Liquid Temperature – Return Heat Recovery is enabled.
Displays the temperature of the liquid as it enters the
condenser.
JOHNSON CONTROLS 21
FORM 160.54-O1
Heating Condenser Liquid Temperature – Logout

Return Access Level Required: OPERATOR
(Software version C.OPT.01.21.307 and later) This key is displayed when a user is logged in at any
Displays the temperature of the liquid as it enters the level other than VIEW. Pressing it will return the ac-
heating condenser tube bundle. Only appears when the cess level to VIEW.
Heat Recovery is enabled.
Print
For fields requiring access level of SER-
Access Level Required: VIEW
VICE. Service Technicians refer to the
OptiView Control Center - Service Instruc- Use this key to generate a hard-copy report of the
tions (Form 160.54-M1) for operation present system status. This provides a snapshot of the
instructions and explanation of all pro- primary operating conditions at the time the key is
grammable setpoints and displayed values. pressed. The History page provides enhanced report-
ing capability. (Refer to History on Page 23.) This
option will not be present if the chiller is presently con-
PROGRAMMABLE figured to log any incoming Adaptive Capacity Control
map points. (Refer to the Adaptive Capacity Control
Login Details Screen on Page 105.)
The OptiView Panel restricts certain operations based Message Clear
on password entry by the operator. Three different ac- Access Level Required: SERVICE
cess levels are provided as follows: VIEW: The panel When certain safety or cycling conditions have been
defaults to the lowest access level which is termed detected and the chiller has been shutdown, the main
VIEW. In this mode, the chiller operating values and status display of the chiller will continue to display a
setpoints can be observed, but no changes can be made. message indicating the cause of the shutdown. Using
OPERATOR: The second access level is termed OP- this key, the message can be cleared once the condition
ERATOR and will allow the customer to change all has been removed.
of the setpoints required to operate the chiller system.
The OPERATOR access level reverts to the VIEW Warning Reset
level after 10 continuous minutes without a keypress. Access Level Required: OPERATOR
SERVICE: In the event that advanced diagnostics are Use of this key acknowledges a warning condition and
necessary, a SERVICE access level has been provided. resets the message display associated with it.
Only qualified service personnel utilize this access lev-
el. This level provides advanced control over many of Soft Shutdown
the chiller functions and allows calibration of many of (Flash Memory Card version C.MLM.01.06.xxx and
the chiller controls. The access levels are listed above later)
in hierarchical order beginning with the lowest level Access Level Required: OPERATOR
and proceeding to the highest level. Users logged in This key, available only when the compressor is run-
under higher access levels may perform any actions ning, is used to initiate a Soft Shutdown. A Soft
permitted by lower access levels. Shutdown fully closes the Pre-rotation Vanes prior
to shutting down the compressor. This reduces bear-
The OPERATOR access level is accompanied by a ing wear by eliminating compressor backspin at shut-
10-minute timeout. After ten (10) successive minutes down. Pressing this key causes the vanes to be driven
without a keypress, the panel will revert to the VIEW to the fully closed position. While the vanes are clos-
access level. This prevents unauthorized changes to the ing, Vanes Closing Before Shutdown is displayed on
chiller if a user was logged in at a higher access level the System Status Line. When the Vane Motor Switch
and failed to logout. Proper procedure requires that (VMS) closes, indicating the vanes have fully closed
after making necessary setpoint adjustments the user (or 3.5 minutes have elapsed, whichever occurs first),
return to the HOME Screen and logout. the Run signal is removed from the compressor motor
22 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.54-O1
starter and a System Coastdown is performed. While Oil Sump

the vanes are closing, if a Local Stop is initiated with A detailed view of all the oil pump and oil sump pa-
the Compressor Switch or any fault other than Leav- rameters. This includes the Variable Speed Oil Pump
ing Chilled Liquid Temp – Low Temperature, Remote when installed. It also controls the Seal Lubrication
Stop, Multi-Unit Cycling – Contacts Open, System functionality.
Cycling – Contacts Open Or Control Panel – Schedule
occur, it will immediately enter System Coastdown. To Motor 2
restart the chiller after an operator initiated Soft Shut- A detailed view of the motor controller parameters,
down, the Compressor Switch must be placed in the specific to the controller type presently utilized on the
Stop/Reset position (O) and then the Start position (3). chiller system. This allows programming of the current
limit and the pulldown demand limit values. For a VSD
system, the Adaptive Capacity Control and Harmonic
NAVIGATION
Filter information is controlled under this screen.
System
Setpoints
Used to provide additional system information.
This screen provides a single location to program the
Evaporator most common system setpoints. It is also the gateway
A detailed view of all evaporator parameters, including to many of the general system setup parameters such as
the programmable Leaving Chilled Liquid Setpoints. Date/Time, Display Units, Scheduling, Printer Setup,
etc.
Condenser
History
A detailed view of all condenser parameters, including
control of the liquid level functions. This screen provides access to a snapshot of system
data at each of the last 10 shutdown conditions.
Compressor
A detailed view of all the compressor parameters. This
includes Pre-rotation Vane control, Hot Gas Bypass
Control, Proximity Probe Calibration, and PRV Calibra-
tion.
JOHNSON CONTROLS 23
FORM 160.54-O1
24 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.54-O1
SYSTEM SCREEN
2
HEAD PRESSURE
AND
HEAT RECOVERY
ENABLED
LD14332
HEAT PUMP
DUTY ENABLED
LD15424
Figure 6 - SYSTEM SCREENS
OVERVIEW Chilled Liquid Temperature – Leaving

This screen gives a general overview of common chill- Displays the temperature of the liquid as it leaves the
er parameters for both shells. evaporator.
Chilled Liquid Temperature – Return

DISPLAY ONLY Displays the temperature of the liquid as it enters the
evaporator.
Discharge Temperature
Displays the temperature of the refrigerant in its gas- Chilled Liquid Temperature – Setpoint
eous state at discharge of the compressor as it travels Displays the active temperature setpoint to which the
to the condenser. chiller is controlling the evaporator liquid. This value
JOHNSON CONTROLS 25
FORM 160.54-O1
could come from a 0 to 20mA, 4 to 20mA, 0 to 10VDC Delta P

or 2 to 10VDC input in Analog Remote mode, PWM (Software version C.OPT.01.21.307 and later)
signal in Digital Remote mode, E-Link Gateway inter- Displays the pressure difference between the condens-
face in ISN mode, or a locally programmed value. er and evaporator (condenser minus evaporator). This
is also called the Head Pressure. Only appears when
Evaporator Pressure Head Pressure Control is enabled.
Displays the present refrigerant pressure in the evapo-
rator. Head Pressure Setpoint
(Software version C.OPT.01.21.307 and later)
Evaporator Saturation Temperature Displays the active Head Pressure Setpoint to which
Displays the present saturation temperature in the the head pressure is being controlled. Only appears
evaporator. when Head Pressure Control is enabled.
Condenser Liquid Temperature – Leaving Condenser Pressure
Displays the temperature of the liquid as it leaves the Displays the refrigerant pressure in the condenser.
condenser.
Condenser Saturation Temperature
Condenser Liquid Temperature – Return Displays the saturation temperature in the condenser.
condenser. Oil Sump Temperature
Displays the temperature of the oil in the sump.
Condenser Liquid Temperature – Setpoint
(Software version C.OPT.01.23.307 and later) Oil Pressure
Displays the active setpoint to which the Heat Pump Displays the pressure differential between the high side
is controlling the Leaving Condenser Liquid Tempera- oil pressure transducer (output of oil filter) and the low
ture. Only displayed when Heat Pump is enabled on side oil pressure transducer (compressor housing). The
the SETUP Screen and the Operation mode is set to displayed value includes offset pressure derived from
Heating mode on the HEAT PUMP Screen. auto-zeroing during the System Prelube. If either of the
transducers used to calculate this differential is out of
Heating Condenser Liquid Temperature – range, the display field will show XX.X.
Leaving
(Software version C.OPT.01.21.307 and later) % Full Load Amps
Displays the temperature of the liquid as it leaves the This displays the percentage of Full Load Amps uti-
heating condenser tube bundle. Only appears when the lized by the system.
Current Limit
Heating Condenser Liquid Temperature – Displays the current limit value in use. This value could
Return come from a 0 to 20mA, 4 to 20mA, 0 to 10VDC or 2
(Software version C.OPT.01.21.307 and later) to 10VDC input in Analog Remote mode, PWM signal
Displays the temperature of the liquid as it enters the in Digital Remote mode, E-Link Gateway interface in
heating condenser tube bundle. Only appears when the ISN mode, or a locally programmed value.
Heating Condenser Liquid Temperature – PROGRAMMABLE

Active Hot Water Setpoint
None
Displays the Hot Water Setpoint to which the Leaving
Heating Condenser Liquid Temperature is being con- NAVIGATION
trolled. Only appears when Heat Recovery is enabled
and Hot Water Control is enabled. Home
Returns user to HOME Screen.
26 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.54-O1
EVAPORATOR SCREEN
LD15433
Figure 7 - EVAPORATOR SCREEN
OVERVIEW Return Chilled Liquid Temperature

This screen displays a cutaway view of the chiller Displays the temperature of the liquid as it enters the
evaporator. All setpoints relating to the evaporator side evaporator.
of the chiller are maintained on this screen. Animation
Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature
of the evaporation process indicates whether the chiller
is presently in a RUN condition. Animation of the liq- Displays the temperature of the liquid as it leaves the
uid flow indicates chilled liquid flow. evaporator.
Evaporator Refrigerant Temperature

DISPLAY ONLY Displays the temperature of the refrigerant in the evap-
orator, if the sensor is present.
Chilled Liquid Flow Switch (Open / Closed)
Displays whether the liquid flow is present in the evap- Small Temperature Difference
orator. Displays the difference between the Leaving Chilled
Liquid temperature and the Evaporator Refrigerant
Chilled Liquid Pump Temperature. The Evaporator Refrigerant Temperature
Displays the command presently sent by the Control will be represented by the Refrigerant Temperature
Center to the Chilled Liquid Pump (RUN or STOP). sensor input if the sensor is present, otherwise it will be
represented by the Evaporator Saturation Temperature.
Evaporator Pressure
Displays the present refrigerant pressure in the evapo- Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature Setpoints
rator. – Setpoint
Displays the present setpoint to which the chiller is op-
Evaporator Saturation Temperature erating, whether controlled locally or remotely.
Displays the present saturation temperature in the
evaporator.
JOHNSON CONTROLS 27
FORM 160.54-O1
Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature Setpoints the Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature Setpoint over
– Shutdown the range of 45.0° to 55.0°F.
Displays the Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature at
Local Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature –
which the chiller will shutdown on Leaving Chilled
Setpoint
Liquid – Low Temperature. This temperature is en-
tered as an offset with the Leaving Chilled Liquid Access Level Required: OPERATOR
Temperature Cycling Offset – Shutdown Setpoint be- This value allows the user to define the Leaving
low. Although the offset setpoint is changed manually, Chilled Liquid Temperature that is to be maintained
the offset being used can change automatically to pre- by the chiller. It is programmable over the range of
vent the Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature from go- 38.0°F to 70.0°F (water) or 10.0°F to 70.0°F (brine).
ing below the minimum allowed value: 36°F (water), If Smart Freeze (refer to Page 29) is enabled, the
34°F (water with smart freeze enabled) or 6°F (brine). range is 36.0°F to 70.0°F (water). The maximum al-
The offset being used is displayed as Effective Offset. lowed setpoint with Heat Pump duty enabled is 86.0°F
With software versions earlier than C.OPT.01.18.307, (software version C.OPT.01.23.307 and later). A re-
the value is displayed as OFFSET and reflects the pro- mote device can provide an analog signal (0 to 20mA,
grammed value only, not the offset being used. Refer to 4 to 20mA, 0 to 10VDC or 2 to 10VDC) in Analog
setpoint description below. Remote mode, or PWM signal in Digital Remote mode
that changes the setpoint by creating an offset above
Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature Setpoints the operator programmed BASE Leaving Chilled
– Restart Liquid Temperature Setpoint. This offset may be de-
Displays the Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature at fined as 10 to 20°F above the BASE Setpoint (refer
which the chiller will restart after it has shutdown on to the Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature Setpoints
LEAVING CHILLED LIQUID – LOW TEMPERA- – Setpoint on Page 27 description). Additionally,
TURE cycling shutdown. This temperature is set as an E-Link Gateway (in ISN Remote mode) can define the
offset using the Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature setpoint through a serial data stream. In this case, the
Cycling Offset – Restart Setpoint, displayed as OFF- incoming setpoint is not an offset that is applied to the
SET adjacent to this value. locally programmed BASE Setpoint value, but rather is
the setpoint value itself.
VICE. Service Technicians refer to the Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature Cycling
OptiView Control Center - Service Instruc- Offset – Shutdown
tions (Form 160.54-M1) for operation Access Level Required: OPERATOR
instructions and explanation of all pro- This value allows the user to specify the Leaving
grammable setpoints and displayed values. Chilled Liquid Temperature at which the chiller will
shut down on a LEAVING CHILLED LIQUID – LOW
TEMPERATURE cycling shutdown. This is done by
PROGRAMMABLE defining an offset below the Leaving Chilled Liq-
Local Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature – uid Temperature Setpoint. It is programmable over
Range a range of 1°F to 64°F below the setpoint, to a mini-
Access Level Required: OPERATOR
mum cutout of 36°F (water), 34°F (water with Smart
Freeze enabled) or 6°F (brine). Anytime the Leaving
This is the range over which an analog (0 to 20mA,
Chilled Liquid Temperature Setpoint is increased, the
4 to 20mA, 0 to 10VDC or 2 to 10VDC) in Analog
shutdown threshold is 36.0°F (water) or 6.0°F (brine)
Remote mode or a digital signal (PWM) in Digital
for the next ten (10) minutes. If Smart Freeze (refer to
Remote mode can reset the Leaving Chilled Liquid
Page 29) is enabled, the threshold is 34.0°F for the
Temperature Setpoint above the operator programmed
next 10 minutes. After ten (10) minutes have elapsed,
BASE Setpoint. Programmable as 10, 20, 30 or 40°F
the shutdown threshold becomes the programmed
(software version C.OPT.01.18.307 (or later); 10°F
setpoint value.
or 20°F with earlier software versions). It is added to
the BASE value to create a range over which the re- With software version C.OPT.01.18.307 (or later), the
mote device can reset the setpoint. For example, if this offset being used is displayed as Effective Offset in the
setpoint is programmed for 10°F and the operator pro- upper right area of the display. Usually, the Offset used
grammed value is 45°F, then the remote device can set is the same as the value programmed for the Shutdown
28 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.54-O1
Setpoint. However, the Offset being used will auto- Sensitivity

matically change based on the values programmed for Access Level Required: SERVICE
the Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature Setpoint and This value allows the user to adjust the sensitivity of
the Shutdown Setpoint, to prevent the Leaving Chilled the Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature control.
Liquid Temperature from going below the minimum
allowed value: 36°F (water), 34°F (water with smart Smart Freeze (Off / On)
freeze enabled) or 6°F (brine). For example, if the Access Level Required: SERVICE 2
Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature Setpoint is set to This value is only available if the chiller is not in Brine
45°F (water) and the Shutdown Setpoint is set to 4°F, mode. It allows the user to enable the Smart Freeze
the Effective Offset is displayed as 4°F. If the leaving Point Operation which allows the chiller to run closer
setpoint is lowered to 38°F, the Effective Offset will to the freeze point without shutting down.
change to 2°F. If the leaving chilled setpoint is raised
back to 45°F, the Effective Offset will revert back to Refrigerant (Enabled / Disabled)
the Shutdown Setpoint. With software versions prior Access Level Required: SERVICE
to C.OPT.01.18.307, the value is displayed as Offset When an Evaporator Refrigerant Sensor has been in-
and reflects the programmed value only, not the offset stalled it must be enabled via this toggle before the
being used. system will utilize the new, enhanced resolution input.
Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature Cycling

Offset – Restart NAVIGATION
Home
This value allows the user to specify the Leaving
Chilled Liquid Temperature at which the chiller will
restart after a shutdown on a LEAVING CHILLED Returns user to HOME Screen.
LIQUID – LOW TEMPERATURE cycling shutdown.
Heat Pump
This is done by defining an offset above the Leaving
Chilled Liquid Temperature Setpoint. It is program-
mable over a range of 0°F to 70°F above the setpoint,
to a maximum restart value of 80°F. The chiller will Moves to a sub screen allowing programming and
automatically restart when this temperature is reached. viewing of the Heat Pump Setpoints and parameters.
This setpoint can be used to reduce chiller cycling by Only appears when Heat Pump is enabled on the SET-
delaying the chiller restart until the cooling load has UP Screen.
increased.
Brine Low Evaporator Cutout

Access Level Required: SERVICE
This value is only available in Brine mode. It allows
the user to specify the Evaporator Pressure at which a
safety shutdown is initiated.
JOHNSON CONTROLS 29
FORM 160.54-O1
30 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.54-O1
CONDENSER SCREEN
LD15434
Figure 8 - CONDENSER SCREEN
OVERVIEW Leaving Condenser Liquid Temperature

Setpoint
This screen displays a cutaway view of the chiller con-
denser. All setpoints relating to the condenser side of
the chiller are maintained on this screen. Animation Displays the active setpoint to which the Heat Pump
indicates condenser liquid flow. With software version is controlling the Leaving Condenser Liquid Tempera-
C.OPT.01.21.307 and later, when Heat Recovery is en- ture. Only displayed when Heat Pump is enabled on
abled, the condenser flow animation will show flow the SETUP Screen and the Operation mode is set to
when either the Condenser Liquid Flow Switch or the Heating mode on the HEAT PUMP Screen.
Heating Condenser Liquid Flow Switch says flow is
Return Condenser Liquid Temperature
present. When Heat Recovery is disabled, the condens-
er flow animation is based on the standard Condenser Displays the water temperature as it enters the condenser.
Flow Switch. This screen also serves as a gateway to
Condenser Saturation Temperature
controlling the Refrigerant Level, Heat Recovery and
Head Pressure Control. Displays the saturation temperature in the condenser.
Small Temperature Difference

DISPLAY ONLY Displays the difference between the Condenser Refrig-
erant temperature and the Leaving Condenser Liquid
Leaving Condenser Liquid Temperature temperature. The Condenser Refrigerant temperature
Displays the water temperature as it leaves the con- will be represented by the Condenser Saturation tem-
denser. perature.
JOHNSON CONTROLS 31
FORM 160.54-O1
Condenser Pressure High Pressure Switch (Open / Closed)

Displays the refrigerant pressure in the condenser. Displays the present position of the high pressure
switch. This will indicate whether a high pressure fault
Heating Condenser Liquid Temperature – is present.
Leaving
(Software version C.OPT.01.21.307 and later) Condenser Liquid Flow Switch
Displays the temperature of the liquid as it leaves the Indicates whether flow is present in the condenser.
Heat Recovery is enabled. Condenser Liquid Pump (Run / Stop)
Indicates whether condenser liquid pump is operating.
Heating Condenser Liquid Temperature –
Return Refrigerant Level Position
(Software version C.OPT.01.21.307 and later) Displays the present position of the refrigerant level if
Displays the temperature of the liquid as it enters the this function is enabled.
Heat Recovery is enabled. Refrigerant Level Setpoint
Displays the setpoint to which the refrigerant level is
Heating Condenser Liquid Flow Switch (LED) being controlled.
Displays the status of the flow switch in the heating Ramp Up Time Remaining
condenser tube bundle. Illuminates when liquid flow Displays the time remaining in the period in which the
is present. Otherwise, it is extinguished. Only appears Refrigerant Level Setpoint is being ramped to a Refrig-
when the Heat Recovery is enabled. erant Level Target Setpoint. This is only displayed if
the Refrigerant Ramp is enabled and the value is non-
Condenser Liquid Flow Switch (LED) zero.
Displays the status of the flow switch in the standard VICE. Service Technicians refer to the
condenser tube bundle. Illuminates when liquid flow OptiView Control Center - Service Instruc-
is present. Otherwise, it is extinguished. Only appears tions (Form 160.54-M1) for operation
when the Heat Recovery is enabled. instructions and explanation of all pro-
grammable setpoints and displayed values.
Drop Leg Refrigerant Temperature
Displays the temperature of the refrigerant in the drop
leg between the condenser and evaporator shells, if the PROGRAMMABLE
sensor is present.
High Pressure Warning Threshold
Sub-Cooling Temperature Access Level Required: SERVICE
Displays the difference between the Condenser Re- This value allows the user to define the condenser pres-
frigerant temperature and the Drop Leg Refrigerant sure at which the chiller will initiate a warning.
temperature. The Condenser Refrigerant temperature
will be represented by the Condenser Saturation tem- When Heat Pump Duty is set to enabled, this setpoint
perature. If the Drop Leg Sensor is not present, this is automatically set to 193 PSIG.
temperature is not displayed.
32 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.54-O1
Drop Leg (Enabled / Disabled) Heat Recovery

Access Level Required: SERVICE (Software version C.OPT.01.21.307 and later)
When a Drop Leg Refrigerant Sensor has been installed Access Level Required: SERVICE
it must be enabled via this toggle before the system Moves to a sub screen allowing programming and
will utilize the new, enhanced resolution input. viewing of the Heat Recovery setpoints and parame-
ters. Only appears when the Heat Recovery is enabled.
Fault Acknowledge 2
(Software version C.MLM.01.11.xxx (and later) or Head Pressure Control
C.OPT.01.11.xxx (and later)) (Software version C.OPT.01.21.307 and later)
Access Level Required: SERVICE Access Level Required: SERVICE
This allows clearing of the High Condenser Pressure Moves to a sub screen allowing programming and
Fault while Shutdown (Condenser-High Pressure viewing of the Head Pressure Control setpoints and pa-
Stopped). rameters. Only appears when Head Pressure Control is
enabled and Heat Recovery is disabled.
NAVIGATION Heat Pump

Home
Moves to a sub screen allowing programming and
viewing of the Heat Pump Setpoints and parameters.
Refrigerant Level Control Only appears when Heat Pump is enabled on the SET-
UP Screen.
Moves to the subscreen allowing programming of the
refrigerant liquid level control setpoints.
JOHNSON CONTROLS 33
FORM 160.54-O1
34 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.54-O1
HEAT RECOVERY SCREEN

(SOFTWARE VERSION C.OPT.01.21.307)
LD14334
Figure 9 - HEAT RECOVERY SCREEN (SOFTWARE VERSION C.OPT.01.21.307)
OVERVIEW ery is disabled, the condenser flow animation is based

on the standard Condenser Flow Switch. This screen
This screen displays all parameters related to the Heat
also serves as a gateway to controlling the Refrigerant
Recovery feature. It also allows for setting of the
Level, Heat Recovery and Head Pressure Control.
setpoints applicable to this feature.
A complete explanation of the Heat Recovery feature
The Heat Recovery feature is an optional feature and if
is contained in OptiView Control Center – Service In-
so equipped, it must be enabled on the SETUP Screen.
structions (Form 160.54-M1).
Once enabled, this screen is accessible from the CON-
DENSER Screen. If the Head Pressure Control feature Requires a login access level of SERVICE.
is also enabled, there is no separate HEAD PRES- Service Technicians refer to the OptiView
SURE CONTROL Screen. Rather, the Head Pressure Control Center - Service Instructions
Control parameters and setpoints appear on this screen. (Form 160.54-M1) for operation instruc-
The screen above is shown with Heat Recovery, Hot tions and explanation of all programmable
Water Control and Head Pressure Control enabled in setpoints and displayed values.
Analog Control Source.
Heat Recovery cannot be used simultaneously with DISPLAY ONLY
Heat Pump Duty. When Heat Pump Duty is enabled,
Heat Recovery is automatically disabled and locked. Return Heating Condenser Liquid Temperature
When Heat recovery is enabled, the condenser flow heating condenser tube bundle.
animation will show flow when either the Condenser
Liquid Flow Switch or the Heating Condenser Liquid
Flow Switch says flow is present. When Heat Recov-
JOHNSON CONTROLS 35
FORM 160.54-O1
Leaving Heating Condenser Liquid ing conditions cause it to switch over to Head Pressure
Temperature Control. When performing Hot Water Control, Hot
Displays the temperature of the liquid as it leaves the Water is displayed. When performing Head Pressure
heating condenser tube bundle. Control, Head Pressure is displayed. There are also
conditions under which it is not controlling either one,
Active Hot Water Setpoint in which case Inactive is displayed. Which feature will
Displays the Hot Water Setpoint to which the Leaving be controlling the valve at any given time and when
Heating Condenser Liquid Temperature is being con- it is inactive is determined by operating conditions
trolled. Only appears when Hot Water Control is enabled. as shown in the flow chart in the Heat Recovery Sec-
tion in OptiView Control Center – Service Instructions
Return Condenser Liquid Temperature (Form 160.54-M1).
standard condenser tube bundle. Control Valve Output
Displays the position command being sent to the con-
Leaving Condenser Liquid Temperature trol valve. If Hot Water Control is enabled and there is
Displays the temperature of the liquid as it leaves the flow in the Heating Condenser, the valve is perform-
standard condenser tube bundle. ing Heat Recovery Control. Otherwise, if Head Pres-
sure Control is enabled, it is performing Head Pressure
Delta P Control. Displayed over the range of 0.0% to 100%.
Displays the pressure difference between the condens- The actual value of the output signal for a given error
er and evaporator (condenser minus evaporator). This depends on whether the PID Output Setpoint is set to
is also called the Head Pressure. Only appears when direct or reverse. If set to direct, the 0.0% output will
Head Pressure Control is enabled. be at minimum; the 100% output will be at maximum.
If set to reverse, the 0.0% output will be at maximum;
Head Pressure Setpoint the 100% output will be at minimum. Only appears
Displays the active Head Pressure Setpoint to which when Hot Water Control is enabled or Head Pressure
the head pressure is being controlled. Only appears Control is enabled.
when Head Pressure Control is enabled.
Control Valve Control Mode
Heating Condenser Liquid Flow Switch (LED) Displays whether the Control Valve is in automatic or
Displays the status of the flow switch in the heating manual control. Only appears when Hot Water Control
condenser tube bundle. Illuminates when liquid flow is is enabled or Head Pressure Control is enabled.
present. Otherwise, it is extinguished.
Condenser Liquid Flow Switch (LED) PROGRAMMABLE

Displays the status of the flow switch in the standard Hot Water Control
condenser tube bundle. Illuminates when liquid flow is (Enabled or Disabled; default Disabled) Allows the
present. Otherwise, it is extinguished. Service Technician to enable and disable the Hot Water
Control for the Heat Recovery feature. When enabled,
PID Control Mode
Control Valve will control the Return Condenser Liq-
Only appears when Hot Water Control is enabled. Dis- uid Temperature to achieve the Hot Water Setpoint.
plays the function the Control Valve is controlling. If
the chiller is equipped with both Heat Recovery and Hot Water Setpoint
Head Pressure Control and both are enabled, there is (65.0 to 125°F; default 95°F) Sets the temperature
not a control valve for each feature. Rather, there is to which the Control Valve will control the Leaving
one common valve that is either performing Hot Wa- Heating Condenser Liquid Temperature. Only appears
ter Control for Heat Recovery or it is performing Head when Hot Water Control is enabled.
Pressure Control. It will not be performing control for
both features at the same time. Normally, it will be
performing Hot Water Control unless certain operat-
36 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.54-O1
Head Pressure Setpoint Control Valve Output Settings – Auto

(15.0 to 60 PSID; default 23.0 PSID) Sets the pressure Places the Control Valve in automatic control. Only ap-
differential to which the Control Valve will control pears when Hot Water Control is enabled or Head Pres-
the Head Pressure. When both Hot Water Control and sure Control is enabled.
Head Pressure Control are enabled, the Control Valve
will normally be performing Heat Recovery (control- Change Setpoints
ling to the Hot Water Setpoint). However, it will switch Use to enter the Hot Water Control and Head Pressure 2
over to Head Pressure Control when certain operating Control PID variables below. Pressing this key places a
conditions are met as shown in the flow chart in the green box around the first changeable setpoint. Use the
Heat Recovery Section in OptiView Control Center – up/down, left/right arrows to place the selection box
Service Instructions (Form 160.54-M1). Only appears around the desired setpoint. With the setpoint selected,
when Head Pressure Control is enabled. press the ENTER () key. A dialog box appears with
the range of settings. Using the NUMERIC keys, enter
Remote Input Type desired value. Then, press the ENTER () key.
(0 to 10V or 4 to 20mA; default 0 to 10V) When op-
Hot Water Control – P
erating in Analog Control Source, the LTC I/O Board
accepts a Remote Hot Water Setpoint offset in the form Sets the Proportional Gain of the Hot Water Control (0.00
of either a 0 to 10VDC or 4 to 20mA input to the LTC to 5.00; default 2.00). Use the CHANGE SETPOINTS
I/O Board input (TB9-3/4). This setpoint configures key as described above to select/enter this setpoint. Only
the LTC I/O Board input to accept the input signal type appears when Hot Water Control is enabled.
applied. Only appears when the Hot Water Control is Hot Water Control – I
set enabled and the Control Source Setpoint (OPERA-
Sets the Integral Gain of the Hot Water Control (0.00
TIONS Screen) is set to Analog.
to 5.00; default 2.00). Use the CHANGE SETPOINTS
Control Valve Output Settings – Type key as described above to select/enter this setpoint.
Only appears when Hot Water Control is enabled.
(0 to 10V or 4 to 20mA; default 0 to 10V) Sets the
output signal to the Control Valve to be in the form of Hot Water Control – D
either 0 to 10VDC or 4 to 20mA. Only appears when Sets the Derivative Gain of the Hot Water Control (0.00
Hot Water Control is enabled or Head Pressure Control to 5.00; default 0.00). Use the CHANGE SETPOINTS
is enabled. key as described above to select/enter this setpoint.
Only appears when Hot Water Control is enabled.
Control Valve Output Settings – PID Output
(Direct or Reverse) Allows the output signal to the Head Pressure Control – P
Control Valve to be set to direct or reverse acting. Sets the Proportional Gain of the Head Pressure Con-
When set to direct, the voltage or current signal to the trol (0.00 to 5.00; default 2.00). Use the CHANGE
Control Valve is at minimum for a 0% command and at SETPOINTS key as described above to select/enter
maximum for a 100% command. When set to reverse, this setpoint. Only appears when Head Pressure Con-
the voltage or current signal to the Control Valve is at trol is enabled.
maximum for a 0% command and at minimum for a
100% command. Only appears when Hot Water Con- Head Pressure Control – I
trol is enabled or Head Pressure Control is enabled. Sets the Integral Gain of the Head Pressure Con-
trol (0.00 to 5.00; default 2.00). Use the CHANGE
Control Valve Output Settings – Set SETPOINTS key as described above to select/enter
(0.0% to 100%; default 0.0%) Allows the Control Valve this setpoint. Only appears when Head Pressure Con-
to be manually set to a pre-determined position between trol is enabled.
0.0% and 100%. Only appears when Hot Water Control
is enabled or Head Pressure Control is enabled. Head Pressure Control – D
Sets the Derivative Gain of the Head Pressure Con-
trol (0.00 to 5.00; default 0.00). Use the CHANGE
SETPOINTS key as described above to select/enter
this setpoint. Only appears when Head Pressure Con-
trol is enabled.
JOHNSON CONTROLS 37
FORM 160.54-O1
NAVIGATION
Home
Condenser
Returns user to CONDENSER Screen.
38 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.54-O1
HEAD PRESSURE CONTROL SCREEN

(SOFTWARE VERSION C.OPT.01.21.307)
LD14335
Figure 10 - HEAD PRESSURE CONTROL SCREEN (SOFTWARE VERSION C.OPT.01.21.307)
OVERVIEW DISPLAY ONLY

This screen displays all parameters related to the Head Return Condenser Liquid Temperature
Pressure Control feature. It also allows for setting of Displays the temperature of the liquid as it enters the
the setpoints applicable to this feature. standard condenser tube bundle.
If equipped with this optional feature, it must be en-
abled on the SETUP Screen. Once enabled, this screen Leaving Condenser Liquid Temperature
is accessible from the CONDENSER Screen. Displays the temperature of the liquid as it leaves the
standard condenser tube bundle.
Head Pressure Control cannot be used simultaneously
with Heat Pump Duty. When Heat Pump Duty is en- Delta P
abled, Head Pressure Control is automatically disabled Displays the pressure difference between the condens-
and locked. er and evaporator (condenser minus evaporator). This
The condenser water flow animation will show flow is also called the Head Pressure.
when the Condenser Liquid Flow Switch senses flow
is present. Head Pressure Setpoint
Displays the active Head Pressure Setpoint to which
A complete explanation of the Head Pressure Con- the head pressure is being controlled.
trol feature is contained in OptiView Control Center –
Service Instructions (Form 160.54-M1). Control Valve Output
Requires a login access level of SERVICE. Displays the position command being sent to the Con-
Service Technicians refer to the OptiView trol Valve. Displayed over the range of 0.0% to 100%.
Control Center - Service Instructions The actual value of the output signal for a given error
(Form 160.54-M1) for operation instruc- depends on whether the PID OUTPUT Setpoint is set
tions and explanation of all programmable to direct or reverse. If set to direct, the 0.0% output will
setpoints and displayed values.
JOHNSON CONTROLS 39
FORM 160.54-O1
be at minimum; the 100% output will be at maximum. Change Setpoints

If set to reverse, the 0.0% output will be at maximum; Use to enter the Head Pressure Control PID variables
the 100% output will be at minimum. below. Pressing this key places a green box around the
first changeable setpoint. Use the up/down, left/right
Control Valve Control Mode
arrows to place the selection box around the desired
Displays whether the Control Valve is in automatic or setpoint. With the setpoint selected, press the ENTER
manual control. () key. A dialog box appears with the range of set-
tings. Using the NUMERIC keys, enter desired value.
PROGRAMMABLE Then, press the ENTER () key.
Head Pressure Setpoint Head Pressure Control – P

(15.0 to 60 PSID; default 23.0 PSID) Sets the pressure Sets the Proportional Gain of the Head Pressure Con-
differential to which the Control Valve will control the trol (0.00 to 5.00; default 2.00). Use the CHANGE
Head Pressure. SETPOINTS key as described above to select/enter
this setpoint.
Control Valve Output Settings – Type
(0-10v or 4 to 20mA; default 0-10v) Sets the output Head Pressure Control – I
signal to the Control Valve to be in the form of either 0 Sets the Integral Gain of the Head Pressure Con-
to 10VDC or 4 to 20mA. trol (0.00 to 5.00; default 2.00). Use the CHANGE
SETPOINTS key as described above to select/enter
Control Valve Output Settings – PID Output this setpoint.
(Direct or Reverse) Allows the output signal to the
Control Valve to be set to direct or reverse acting. Head Pressure Control – D
When set to direct, the voltage or current signal to the Sets the Derivative Gain of the Head Pressure Con-
Control Valve is at minimum for a 0% command and at trol (0.00 to 5.00; default 0.00). Use the CHANGE
maximum for a 100% command. When set to reverse, SETPOINTS key as described above to select/enter
the voltage or current signal to the Control Valve is at this setpoint.
maximum for a 0% command and at minimum for a
100% command.
NAVIGATION
Control Valve Output Settings – Set
Home
(0.0% to 100%; default 0.0%) Allows the Control
Valve to be manually set to a pre-determined position Returns user to HOME Screen.
between 0.0% and 100%.
Condenser
Control Valve Output Settings – Auto Returns user to CONDENSER Screen.
Places the Control Valve in automatic control.
40 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.54-O1
HEAT PUMP SCREEN

(SOFTWARE VERSION C.OPT.01.23.307 AND LATER)
LD15425
Figure 11 - HEAT PUMP SCREEN (SOFTWARE VERSION C.OPT.01.23.307 AND LATER)
OVERVIEW All setpoints pertinent to this feature are maintained on

this screen.
Heat Pump is an available option on certain models
of YK chillers. The feature is enabled and disabled on
the SETUP Screen. When enabled, this HEAT PUMP DISPLAY ONLY
Screen is accessible from the CONDENSER Screen.
The Heat Pump control can be switched between Heat- Leaving Condenser Liquid Temperature
ing mode and Cooling mode using the Operational mode Displays the temperature of the liquid as it leaves the
setpoint on this screen. In Heating mode, the chiller con- condenser
trols the Leaving Condenser Liquid Temperature to its
setpoint. In Cooling mode, the chiller controls the Leav- Return Condenser Liquid Temperature
ing Chilled Liquid Temperature to its setpoint. Displays the temperature of the liquid as it enters the
condenser
When Heat Pump is enabled, certain conditions are
automatically set as follows: The Heat Recovery and Leaving Condenser Liquid Temperature
Head Pressure Control options are disabled and locked. Setpoints – Setpoint
The Condenser Temperature Range Setpoint is set to
Displays the active Leaving Condenser Liquid Tem-
Extended. The Condenser High Pressure Warning
perature Setpoint to which the Heat Pump is operat-
Setpoint threshold is set to 193 PSIG.
ing, whether controlled locally or remotely, in Heating
The Quick Start feature is only available in Cooling mode.
mode and is automatically disabled when Heating
mode is selected. Leaving Condenser Liquid Temperature
Setpoints – Remote Range
If chiller is equipped with a VSD, it will operate at full
Displays the temperature range over which a remote
speed (50Hz or 60Hz) at all times in Heating mode. In
device (in Analog or Digital Remote mode) can reset
Cooling mode, it operates normally.
the Heat Pump Leaving Condenser Liquid Tempera-
JOHNSON CONTROLS 41
FORM 160.54-O1
ture Setpoint in Heating mode. See the Leaving Con- mode. It determines the magnitude of PRV movement
denser Liquid Temperature Setpoint – Range Setpoint in response to a change in Leaving Condenser Liquid
description below. Temperature. Programmable over the range of NOR-
MAL, 50% (default), 30%, 10%. Normal is the stan-
Leaving Condenser Liquid Temperature dard setting and provides the longest PRV pulse for a
Setpoints – Shutdown given change. The 50%, 30% and 10% selections pro-
Displays the Leaving Condenser Liquid Temperature vide decreasing pulse durations for the same amount of
at which the Heat Pump will shut down on LEAVING change in the Leaving Condenser Liquid Temperature.
CONDENSER LIQUID – HIGH TEMPERATURE The 10% selection provides the shortest pulse duration.
cycling shutdown in Heating mode. See Leaving Con- Select smaller settings, as necessary, to prevent over-
denser Liquid Temperature Cycling Offset – Shutdown shoot of the Leaving Condenser Liquid Temperature
Setpoint description below. Setpoint.
Leaving Condenser Liquid Temperature Operational Mode

Setpoints – Effective Offset Access Level Required: OPERATOR
Displays the actual offset being used to create the Leav- This setpoint can only be changed when the chiller is
ing Condenser Liquid Temperature setpoints – Shut- stopped and the RUN switch is in the Stop-Reset po-
down temperature above. See Leaving Condenser Liq- sition. This setpoint sets the Heat Pump operation to
uid Temperature Cycling Offset – Shutdown Setpoint either Cooling (default) or Heating operation.
description below.
Local Leaving Condenser Liquid Temperature
Leaving Condenser Liquid Temperature – Setpoint
Setpoints – Restart Access Level Required: OPERATOR
Displays the Leaving Condenser Liquid Temperature This allows the user to define the Local Mode Heat
at which the Heat Pump will restart after shutting down Pump Leaving Condenser Liquid Temperature
on LEAVING CONDENSER LIQUID – HIGH TEM- Setpoint that is to be maintained in Heating mode. It
PERATURE cycling shutdown in Heating mode. See is programmable over the range of 65.0°F to 122.0°F
Leaving Condenser Liquid Temperature Cycling Off- (default 95.0°F). A remote device can provide an ana-
set – Restart Setpoint description below. log signal (0 to 20mA, 4 to 20mA, 0 to 10VDC, 2 to
10VDC) in Analog Remote mode, or a PWM signal in
Leaving Condenser Liquid Temperature Digital Remote mode that changes the setpoint by cre-
Setpoints – Offset ating an offset below this setpoint. This offset may be
Displays the offset being used to create the Leaving defined as a maximum of 10, 20, 30 or 40°F below the
Condenser Liquid Temperature Setpoints – Restart local setpoint (see Local Leaving Condenser Liquid
temperature above. See Leaving Condenser Liquid Temperature Range description below). An E-Link or
Temperature Cycling Offset – Restart Setpoint descrip- Micro Gateway card (in ISN Remote mode) can set the
tion below. setpoint through a serial communications interface. In
For fields requiring access level of SER- this case, the incoming setpoint is not an offset below
VICE. Service Technicians refer to the the local setpoint. Rather, it is the setpoint value.
OptiView Control Center - Service Instruc-
Leaving Condenser Liquid Temperature –
tions (Form 160.54-M1) for operation
Range
instructions and explanation of all pro-
This is the range over which an analog signal (0 to
20mA, 4 to 20mA, 0 to 10VDC or 2 to 10VDC) in
PROGRAMMABLE Analog Remote mode or a PWM signal (1 to 11 sec-
onds) in Digital Remote mode, can reset the Leaving
Heating Sensitivity Condenser Liquid Temperature Setpoint below the op-
Access Level Required: SERVICE erator programmed local setpoint (see above) while the
Allows the user to adjust the Heat Pump sensitivity of Heat Pump is in Heating mode. Programmable values
the PRV response to changes in the Leaving Condenser are 10, 20, 30 or 40ºF (default 10). This number is sub-
Liquid Temperature as its being controlled in Heating tracted from the local setpoint to create a range over
42 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.54-O1
which the remote device can reset the setpoint. For Leaving Condenser Liquid Temperature Setpoint, to a
example, if this setpoint is set for 10°F and the local minimum of 55°F. The chiller will automatically re-
setpoint is 90°F, the remote device can set the Leaving start when this temperature is reached. This setpoint
Condenser Liquid Temperature Setpoint over the range can be used to reduce chiller cycling by delaying the
of 90 to 80°F. Heat Pump restart until the heating load has increased.
Leaving Condenser Liquid Temperature Heating LCHLT Shutdown 2

Cycling Offset – Shutdown Access Level Required: OPERATOR
Access Level Required: OPERATOR In Heating mode, the existing LEAVING CHILLED
This setpoint allows the user to specify the Leav- LIQUID TEMPERATURE – LOW TEMPERATURE
ing Condenser Liquid Temperature at which the Heat cycling shutdown logic will include an additional
Pump will shutdown on LEAVING CONDENSER check to its existing logic that will cause a shutdown in
LIQUID – HIGH TEMPERATURE cycling shutdown Heating mode. This setpoint allows the user to specify
in Heating mode. This is done by defining an offset the Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature at which the
above the Leaving Condenser Liquid Temperature Heat Pump will shut down on LEAVING CHILLED
Setpoint. The offset is programmable over the range LIQUID – LOW TEMPERATURE cycling shutdown
of 1 to 59°F (default 1) above the setpoint, to a maxi- when the Heat Pump is operating in Heating mode.
mum of 125°F. Anytime the Leaving Condenser Liq-
uid Temperature Setpoint is decreased, this shutdown The low limit for this setpoint is the higher of (Leaving
threshold becomes 125°F for the next 10 minutes. Af- Condenser Liquid Temperature Setpoint minus 71°F)
ter 10 minutes, the shutdown threshold becomes the or (Cooling mode Leaving Chilled Liquid Tempera-
programmed setpoint offset value. ture Shutdown Temperature). The high limit for this
setpoint is the Leaving Condenser Liquid Temperature
The actual offset being used is displayed as Effective Setpoint. The default is (Leaving Condenser Liquid
Offset on this screen. Usually, the offset that is used Temperature Setpoint minus 60°F).
is the same as the programmed value. However, the
setpoint used can change automatically to prevent the The Heat Pump will restart when the Leaving Chilled
Leaving Condenser Liquid temperature from going Liquid Temperature exceeds this shutdown tempera-
above the maximum allowed temperature of 125°F. ture by 5°F.
For example, if the offset is set to 6°F but the Leav-
ing Condenser Liquid Temperature Setpoint is set to NAVIGATION
120°F, the Effective Offset used will be 5 because 6
would allow it to exceed the maximum of 125. Home
Leaving Condenser Liquid Temperature Returns user to HOME Screen
Cycling Offset – Restart
Access Level Required: OPERATOR Condenser
This setpoint allows the user to specify the Leav- Access Level Required: VIEW
ing Condenser Liquid Temperature at which the Heat Returns user to CONDENSER Screen
Pump will restart after a shutdown on a LEAVING
CONDENSER LIQUID TEMPERATURE – HIGH Evaporator
TEMPERATURE cycling shutdown in Heating mode. Access Level Required: VIEW
This is done by defining an offset below the Leaving Returns user to EVAPORATOR Screen
Condenser Liquid Temperature Setpoint. It is program-
mable over a range of 0 to 67°F (default 0) below the
JOHNSON CONTROLS 43
FORM 160.54-O1
44 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.54-O1
REFRIGERANT LEVEL CONTROL SCREEN

(FLASH MEMORY CARD VERSIONS C.MLM.01.06.XXX AND EARLIER)
00303VIP
Figure 12 - R
EFRIGERANT LEVEL CONTROL SCREEN (FLASH MEMORY CARD VERSIONS C.MLM.01.06.
XXX AND EARLIER)
OVERVIEW the actual level is 32% to 47%, the level is shown about
70% full. When the actual level is 48% to 63%, the
level is shown about 80% full. When the actual level
denser, along with the liquid refrigerant level sensor
is 64% to 79%, the level is shown as about 90% full.
and the flow control valve. All setpoints relating to
Actual levels above 79%, shown as 100% full.
the liquid level control are maintained on this screen.
Through animation, the variable orifice position is dis- Refrigerant Level Control Mode
played. In addition, the refrigerant flow control valve
Indicates whether the liquid level control is under man-
(variable orifice) can be manually operated.
ual or automatic control.
Requires a login access level of SERVICE.
Service Technicians refer to the OptiView Raise (LED)
Control Center - Service Instructions Is ON when the digital output controlling the Level
(Form 160.54-M1) for operation instruc- Raise contact is on.
tions and explanation of all programmable
setpoints and displayed values. Lower (LED)
Is ON when the digital output controlling the Level
Lower contact is on.
DISPLAY ONLY
Refrigerant Level Position PROGRAMMABLE

Displays the present position of the liquid level. The
refrigerant level is animated in the cutaway view of the [Refrigerant Level] Setpoint
condenser. When the actual level is 0% to 15%, the Displays the setpoint to which the refrigerant level is
level is shown about 50% full. When the actual level is being controlled.
16% to 31%, the level is shown about 60% full. When
JOHNSON CONTROLS 45
FORM 160.54-O1
[Refrigerant Level Control] Period [Refrigerant Level Control] Raise (Manual)

The entire chiller run time is divided into Level Con- This key puts the level control into manual mode and
trol Periods. sends a RAISE command to the variable orifice.
[Refrigerant Level Control] Proportional Limit [Refrigerant Level Control] Lower (Manual)
Open This key puts the level control into manual mode and
This key establishes the response to the Proportion sends a LOWER command to the variable orifice.
Error. The amount of change in the level within the
Proportion Error is compared to Setpoints Proportion [Refrigerant Level Control] Hold (Manual)
Limit Open (if level is above setpoint). This key puts the level control into manual mode and
sends a HOLD command to the variable orifice.
[Refrigerant Level Control] Proportional Limit
Close [Refrigerant Level Control] Auto
This key establishes the response to the Proportion Returns the level control to automatic mode.
Proportion Error is compared to Setpoints Proportion
Limit Close (if level is below setpoint). NAVIGATION
Home
[Refrigerant Level Control] Rate Limit Open
This key establishes the response to the rate of change,
the amount of change in the level within the Level
Control Period is compared to the Rate Limit Open (if Condenser
level greater than setpoint). Access Level Required: VIEW
[Refrigerant Level Control] Rate Limit Close Returns user to CONDENSER Screen.
Control Period is compared to the Rate Limit Close (if
level less than setpoint).
46 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.54-O1

(SOFTWARE VERSION C.MLM.01.07.XXX TO C.MLM.01.10D.XXX OR C.OPT.01.10D (AND EARLIER))
LD09099
Figure 13 - R
EFRIGERANT LEVEL CONTROL SCREEN (SOFTWARE VERSION C.MLM.01.07.XXX TO
C.MLM.01.10D.XXX OR C.OPT.01.10D (AND EARLIER))
OVERVIEW level is shown about 50% full. When the actual level is
the actual level is 32% to 47%, the level is shown about
and variable orifice. Some setpoints relating to the liq-
level is shown about 80% full. When the actual level
uid level control are maintained on this screen, while
others are contained on a subscreen. Through anima-
Actual levels above 79%, shown as 100% full.
tion, the variable orifice position is displayed. In ad-
dition, the refrigerant flow control valve (variable ori- Refrigerant Level Control Mode
fice) can be manually operated.
Indicates whether the liquid level control is under man-
Requires a login access level of SERVICE. ual or automatic control.
Service Technicians refer to the OptiView
Control Center - Service Instructions Raise (LED)
(Form 160.54-M1) for operation instruc- Is ON when the output controlling the Level Raise con-
tions and explanation of all programmable tact is on.
Lower (LED)
Is ON when the output controlling the Level Lower
DISPLAY ONLY contact is on.
Refrigerant Level Position
Displays the present position of the liquid level. The
refrigerant level is animated in the cutaway view of the
condenser. When the actual level is 0% to 15%, the
JOHNSON CONTROLS 47
FORM 160.54-O1
PROGRAMMABLE NAVIGATION
Valve Preset Time Home

Upon entering chiller prelube, the Refrigerant Level Access Level Required: VIEW
close output is energized for the length of the program- Returns user to HOME Screen.
mable Valve Preset Time Setpoint (0 to 100 seconds;
default 50). Condenser
Ramp-up Time Returns user to CONDENSER Screen.
This ramp limit allows the level to go from the present
level to the Refrigerant Level Setpoint over a period of Setpoints
time programmed as the Ramp-Up Time Setpoint (3 to Access Level Required: SERVICE
15 minutes; default 8). Moves to a subscreen allowing programming of the
Refrigerant Level Control Setpoints.
48 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.54-O1
REFRIGERANT LEVEL CONTROL SETPOINTS SCREEN

(SOFTWARE VERSION C.MLM.01.07.XXX TO C.MLM.01.10D.XXX OR C.OPT.01.10D (AND EARLIER))
LD09097
Figure 14 - R
EFRIGERANT LEVEL CONTROL SETPOINTS SCREEN (SOFTWARE VERSION C.MLM.01.07.
XXX TO C.MLM.01.10D.XXX OR C.OPT.01.10D (AND EARLIER))
OVERVIEW level is shown about 80% full. When the actual level
Actual levels above 79% are shown as 100% full.
and variable orifice. Liquid Level Control setpoints
are maintained on this screen. Through animation, the PROGRAMMABLE
variable orifice position is displayed.
[Refrigerant Level] Setpoint
Service Technicians refer to the OptiView Displays the setpoint to which the refrigerant level is
Control Center - Service Instructions being controlled.
(Form 160.54-M1) for operation instruc-
[Refrigerant Level Control] Period
setpoints and displayed values. The entire chiller run time is divided into Level Con-
trol Periods.
DISPLAY ONLY [Refrigerant Level Control] Proportional Limit

Open
Refrigerant Level Position This key establishes the response to the Proportion
Displays the present position of the liquid level. The Error. The amount of change in the level within the
refrigerant level is animated in the cutaway view of Proportion Error is compared to Setpoints Proportion
the condenser. When the actual level is 0% to 15%, the Limit Open (if level is above setpoint).
level is shown about 50% full. When the actual level is
the actual level 32% to 47%, the level is shown about
JOHNSON CONTROLS 49
FORM 160.54-O1
[Refrigerant Level Control] Proportional Limit [Refrigerant Level Control] Lower (Manual)
Close This key puts the control into manual mode and sends
This key establishes the response to the Proportion a LOWER command to the variable orifice.
Proportion Error is compared to Setpoints Proportion [Refrigerant Level Control] Hold (Manual)
Limit Close (if level is below setpoint). This key puts the control into manual mode and sends
a HOLD command to the variable orifice.
[Refrigerant Level Control] Rate Limit Open
This key establishes the response to the rate of change, [Refrigerant Level Control] Auto
the amount of change in the level within the Level Returns the Level Control to automatic mode.
Control Period is compared to the Rate Limit Open (if
level greater than setpoint).
NAVIGATION
[Refrigerant Level Control] Rate Limit Close
Home
Control Period is compared to the Rate Limit Close (if
level less than setpoint). Refrigerant Level Control
[Refrigerant Level Control] Raise (Manual)
Returns user to REFRIGERANT LEVEL CONTROL
This key puts the control into manual mode and sends
Screen.
a RAISE command to the variable orifice.
50 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.54-O1

(SOFTWARE VERSIONS C.MLM.01.14.XXX AND LATER OR C.OPT.01.14.306 AND LATER)
LD10703
Figure 15 - R
EFRIGERANT LEVEL CONTROL SCREEN (SOFTWARE VERSIONS C.MLM.01.14.XXX AND
LATER OR C.OPT.01.14.306 AND LATER)
OVERVIEW Requires a login access level of SERVICE.

Control Center - Service Instructions
and variable orifice. Setpoints relating to the liquid lev-
el control are maintained on this screen. Through ani-
mation, the variable orifice position is displayed. Also,
the refrigerant flow control valve (variable orifice) can
be manually operated.
DISPLAY ONLY
A variable orifice is used to control the condenser re-
Refrigerant Level Position
frigerant level to the Refrigerant Level Setpoint. The
control thresholds are applied in two different zones, Displays the present level of the liquid level control.
as determined by the error relationship between the The refrigerant level is animated in the cutaway view of
actual refrigerant level and the level setpoint. Zone 1 the condenser. When the actual level is 0% to 15%, the
parameters are used when the error is less than or equal level is shown about 50% full. When the actual level is
to 9%. Zone 2 parameters are used when the error is 16% to 31%, the level is shown about 60% full. When
greater than 9%. When transitioning from Zone 2 to the actual level is 32% to 47%, the level is shown about
Zone 1, the error must be less than or equal to 9% for 70% full. When the actual level is 48% to 63%, the
60 seconds before the Zone 1 parameters are used. If level is shown about 80% full. When the actual level
the error is greater than 9%, the Zone 2 parameters are is 64% to 79%, the level is shown as about 90% full.
immediately implemented. Actual levels above 79% shown as 100% full.
JOHNSON CONTROLS 51
FORM 160.54-O1
Refrigerant Level Control Mode Ramp Up Time

Indicates whether the liquid level control is under man- Specifies the duration of the ramp up time applied to
ual or automatic control. the Refrigerant Level Target when starting the chiller
while the actual refrigerant level is less than the level
Raise (LED) setpoint after a 3 minute bypass at start.
ON when the digital output controlling the raise output
is ON. Otherwise, it is OFF. Period (Zone 1)
Specifies the control period used during Zone 1 operation.
Lower (LED)
ON when the digital output controlling the Lower out- Rate (Zone 1)
put is ON. Otherwise, it is OFF. Specifies the rate limit threshold used during Zone 1
operation.
Zone Control State
Displays the zone control state (Zone 1, Zone 2, Or Period (Zone 2)
Zone 2 To Zone 1) currently in effect for the Refriger- Specifies the control period used in Zone 2 operation.
ant Level control. Zone Control Off is displayed when
the chiller is shutdown. Rate (Zone 2)
Specifies the rate limit threshold used during Zone 2
Zone Time Remaining operation.
Displays the time remaining in the 60 second count-
down timer when transitioning from Zone 2 to Zone 1. [Refrigerant Level Control] Lower (Manual)
When transitioning from Zone 2 parameter set to Zone This key puts the Level Control into manual mode and
1 parameter set, the Zone 1 error requirement must be sends a LOWER (open) command to the variable ori-
met for 60 continuous seconds before Zone 1 param- fice.
eters are used.
[Refrigerant Level Control] Raise (Manual)
Refrigerant Level Target This key puts the Level Control into manual mode and
After the chiller has been running for 3 minutes, if sends a RAISE (close) command to the variable ori-
the refrigerant level is less than the level setpoint, a fice.
linearly increasing ramp (Refrigerant Level target)
is applied to the level setpoint. This ramp allows the [Refrigerant Level Control] Hold (Manual)
level to go from the present level to the programmed This key puts the Level Control into manual mode and
level setpoint over a period of time programmed as the sends a HOLD command to the variable orifice.
Ramp Up Time.
[Refrigerant Level Control] Auto
Ramp Up Time Remaining Returns the Level Control to automatic mode.
Displays the time remaining in the Ramp Up time
countdown timer while a Refrigerant Level target ramp
is in effect. NAVIGATION
Home
PROGRAMMABLE Access Level Required: VIEW
Setpoint
Specifies the desired refrigerant level to be maintained Condenser
in the condenser. Access Level Required: VIEW
Returns user to CONDENSER Screen.
Valve Preset Time
Specifies the duration of pre-positioning (close) pulse
during the System Prelube when starting the chiller.
52 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.54-O1
COMPRESSOR SCREEN
(ALL “P” COMPRESSORS AND STYLE F AND LATER CHILLERS
WITH G, Q OR H5-8 COMPRESSORS)
00549VIP
Figure 16 - C
OMPRESSOR SCREEN (ALL “P” COMPRESSORS AND STYLE F AND LATER CHILLERS WITH
G, Q OR H5-8 COMPRESSORS)

This screen displays a cutaway view of the chiller com- Oil Pressure
pressor, revealing the impeller, and shows all condi- Displays the pressure differential between the high
tions associated with the compressor. In addition, with side oil pressure transducer (compressor bearing input)
the proper access level, the Pre-rotation Vanes may and the low side oil pressure transducer (oil sump). The
be manually controlled. Animation of the compressor displayed value includes offset pressure derived from
impeller indicates whether the chiller is presently in a auto-zeroing during the System Prelube. If either of the
RUN condition. This screen also serves as a gateway to transducers used to calculate this differential is out of
subscreens for calibrating the Pre-rotation Vanes, cali- range, the display field will show XX.X.
brating the Proximity Probe, configuring the Hot Gas
Bypass, or providing advanced control of the Com- The offset pressure is the pressure differential between
pressor Motor Variable Speed Drive. the high oil pressure (HOP) transducer and the low
Requires a login access level of SERVICE. oil pressure (LOP) transducer outputs during a three
Service Technicians refer to the OptiView (3) second period beginning ten (10) seconds into the
Control Center - Service Instructions System Prelube. During this time, the transducers will
(Form 160.54-M1) for operation instruc- be sensing the same pressure and their outputs should
tions and explanation of all programmable indicate the same pressure. However, due to accuracy
setpoints and displayed values. tolerances in transducer design, differences can ex-
ist. Therefore to compensate for differences between
transducers and assure differential pressure sensing ac-
curacy, the offset pressure is subtracted algebraically
JOHNSON CONTROLS 53
FORM 160.54-O1
from the differential pressure. The offset pressure cal- Full Load Amps
culation will not be performed if either transducer is Access Level Required: SERVICE
out of range. The offset value will be taken as 0 PSI in Displays the motor current as a percentage of the Full
this instance. Load Amps (FLA) value.
Oil Sump Temperature Phase A, B, C Current (Solid State Starter

Displays the temperature of the oil in the sump Only)
Discharge Temperature Displays the 3-phase motor current values being read
Displays the temperature of the refrigerant in its gas- from the Solid State Starter.
eous state at discharge of the compressor as it travels
to the condenser. Oil Pump Drive Command Frequency
(Variable Speed Oil Pump Only)
Discharge Superheat The value displays the present frequency at which the
Displays the discharge superheat, calculated as (Dis- oil pump is being commanded to run.
charge Temperature – Condenser Saturation tempera-
ture).
High Speed Thrust Bearing Limit Switch OptiView Control Center - Service Instruc-
(LED) tions (Form 160.54-M1) for operation
Displays the present position of the High Speed Thrust
Bearing Limit Switch. Extinguished when closed. This
is the normal position.
Vane Motor Switch (LED) PROGRAMMABLE

Illuminates when the vanes are completely closed. [Pre-rotation Vanes] Open (Manual)
Oil Return Solenoid (LED) This key puts the vane control into manual mode and
Illuminates when the solenoid is energized. sends an OPEN command to the vanes.
Pre-rotation Vanes Control Mode [Pre-rotation Vanes] Close (Manual)
Indicates whether the vanes are under manual or auto- This key puts the vane control into manual mode and
matic control. sends a CLOSE command to the vanes.
[Pre-rotation Vanes] Open (LED) [Pre-rotation Vanes] Hold (Manual)
Indicates whether the vanes are in the process of open- This key puts the vane control into manual mode and
ing. sends a HOLD command to the vanes.
[Pre-rotation Vanes] Close (LED) [Pre-rotation Vanes] Auto
Indicates whether the vanes are in the process of clos- This key returns the vane control to automatic mode.
ing.
Fault Acknowledge
Pre-rotation Vanes Position (Variable Speed This option allows clearing of the High Speed Thrust
Drive and Hot Gas Option Only) Bearing Limit Switch safety shutdown.
This value displays the present position of the Pre-rota-
tion Vanes as a percentage between 0 and 100%.
54 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.54-O1
NAVIGATION Hot Gas

Home
Moves to a subscreen that allows programming of the
Hot Gas Bypass control setpoints and manual control of
Returns user to HOME Screen. the Hot Gas Bypass valve. Only displayed if Hot Gas
Bypass feature has been enabled on the OPERATIONS
Pre-rotation Vane Calibration
Screen. 2
Only available if the chiller is stopped and the system Surge
uses a Variable Speed Drive or Hot Gas Bypass con- Access Level Required: VIEW
trol. Moves to the subscreen allowing calibration of the Moves to the subscreen that allows viewing and pro-
Pre-rotation Vanes. gramming of the Surge Protection feature.
VSD Tuning (Variable Speed Drive Only)
Moves to the subscreen allowing advanced tuning of
the Variable Speed Drive.
JOHNSON CONTROLS 55
FORM 160.54-O1
56 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.54-O1
COMPRESSOR SCREEN
(STYLE E AND EARLIER CHILLERS WITH G, H, OR J COMPRESSORS
AND STYLE G CHILLERS WITH K COMPRESSORS)
LD09574
Figure 17 - C
OMPRESSOR SCREEN (STYLE E AND EARLIER CHILLERS WITH G, H, OR J COMPRESSORS
AND STYLE G CHILLERS WITH K COMPRESSORS)
OVERVIEW The offset pressure is the pressure differential between

the high oil pressure (HOP) transducer and the low
This screen displays a cutaway view of the chiller com-
oil pressure (LOP) transducer outputs during a three
pressor, revealing the impeller, and shows all condi-
(3) second period beginning ten (10) seconds into the
tions associated with the compressor. In addition, with
System Prelube. During this time, the transducers will
the proper access level, the Pre-rotation Vanes may
be sensing the same pressure and their outputs should
be manually controlled. Animation of the compressor
indicate the same pressure. However, due to accuracy
impeller indicates whether the chiller is presently in a
tolerances in transducer design, differences can ex-
RUN condition. This screen also serves as a gateway to
ist. Therefore to compensate for differences between
subscreens for calibrating the Pre-rotation Vanes, cali-
transducers and assure differential pressure sensing ac-
brating the Proximity Probe, configuring the Hot Gas
curacy, the offset pressure is subtracted algebraically
Bypass, or providing advanced control of the Com-
from the differential pressure. The offset pressure cal-
pressor Motor Variable Speed Drive.
culation will not be performed if either transducer is
out of range. The offset value will be taken as 0 PSI in
DISPLAY ONLY this instance.
Oil Pressure Oil Sump Temperature
Displays the pressure differential between the high Displays the temperature of the oil in the sump.
side oil pressure transducer (compressor bearing input)
and the low side oil pressure transducer (oil sump). The Discharge Temperature
displayed value includes offset pressure derived from Displays the temperature of the refrigerant in its gas-
auto-zeroing during the System Prelube. If either of the eous state at discharge of the compressor as it travels
transducers used to calculate this differential is out of to the condenser.
range, the display field will show XX.X.
JOHNSON CONTROLS 57
FORM 160.54-O1
Discharge Superheat (Flash Memory Card [Pre-rotation Vanes] Close (LED)

version C.MLM.01.02 or later) Access Level Required: SERVICE
Displays the discharge superheat, calculated as (Discharge Indicates whether the vanes are in the process of closing.
Temperature – Condenser Saturation temperature).
Pre-rotation Vanes Position (Variable Speed
High Speed Thrust Bearing Drive and Hot Gas Option Only)
Oil Drain Temperature Access Level Required: SERVICE
Displays the temperature of the oil in the high-speed This value displays the present position of the Pre-rota-
thrust bearing drain line. Not applicable to chill- tion Vanes as a percentage between 0 and 100%.
ers equipped with Flash Memory Card version
C.MLM.01.03 and higher. Full Load Amps
High Speed Thrust Bearing Displays the motor current as a percentage of the Full
Proximity Differential Load Amps (FLA) value.
Displays the distance between the high-speed thrust
collar and the tip of the Proximity Probe. This mea- Phase A, B, C Current (Solid State Starter
surement takes into account the reference position es- Only)
tablished at the time of compressor manufacture. Access Level Required: SERVICE
Displays the 3-phase motor current values being read
High Speed Thrust Solenoid from the Solid State Starter.
(LED – Style E-R22 Only)
Indicates whether the solenoid is presently energized. Oil Pump Drive Command Frequency
Vane Motor Switch (LED) The value displays the present frequency at which the
Indicates whether the vanes are completely closed. oil pump is being commanded to run.
Oil Return Solenoid (LED)
Indicates whether the solenoid is presently energized. OptiView Control Center - Service Instruc-
Vent Line Solenoid (LED – Style E-R22)
Indicates whether the solenoid is presently energized. grammable setpoints and displayed values.
Liquid Line Solenoid (LED – Style E-R22 and
E-R134a J-Compressors) PROGRAMMABLE
Indicates whether the solenoid is presently energized.
[Pre-rotation Vanes] Open (Manual)
Pre-rotation Vanes Control Mode Access Level Required: SERVICE
Access Level Required: SERVICE This key puts the vane control into manual mode and
Indicates whether the vanes are under manual or auto- sends an OPEN command to the vanes.
matic control.
[Pre-rotation Vanes] Close (Manual)
[Pre-rotation Vanes] Open (LED) Access Level Required: SERVICE
Access Level Required: SERVICE This key puts the vane control into manual mode and
Indicates whether the vanes are in the process of opening. sends a CLOSE command to the vanes.
[Pre-rotation Vanes] Hold (Manual)

This key puts the vane control into manual mode and
sends a HOLD command to the vanes.
58 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.54-O1
[Pre-rotation Vanes] Auto Hot Gas

This key returns the vane control to automatic mode. Moves to a subscreen that allows programming of the
Hot Gas Bypass control setpoints and manual control of
the Hot Gas Bypass valve. Only displayed if Hot Gas
NAVIGATION Bypass feature has been enabled on the OPERATIONS
Home Screen. 2
Surge (Flash Memory Card version
Returns user to HOME Screen. C.MLM.01.05.xxx and later)
Proximity Probe Calibration
Moves to the subscreen that allows viewing and pro-
gramming of the Surge Protection feature.
Only available if the chiller is stopped. Moves to the
subscreen allowing calibration of the High Speed VGD
Thrust Bearing Proximity Probe sensor. (Software version C.MLM.01.10.xxx (and later) or
C.OPT.01.10.302 (and later))
Pre-rotation Vane Calibration
Only displayed if VGD feature enabled on OPERA-
Only available if the chiller is stopped and the system
TIONS Screen. Moves to the subscreen that allows
uses a Variable Speed Drive or Hot Gas Bypass con-
viewing and programming of the Variable Geometry
trol. Moves to the subscreen allowing calibration of the
Diffuser (VGD) feature.
Pre-rotation Vanes.
VSD Tuning (Variable Speed Drive Only)

Moves to the subscreen allowing advanced tuning of
the Variable Speed Drive.
JOHNSON CONTROLS 59
FORM 160.54-O1
60 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.54-O1
PROXIMITY PROBE CALIBRATION SCREEN

(STYLE E AND EARLIER CHILLERS WITH G, H, OR J COMPRESSORS
AND STYLE F AND LATER CHILLERS WITH J OR H3 COMPRESSORS)
00305VIP
Figure 18 - P
ROXIMITY PROBE CALIBRATION SCREEN (STYLE E AND EARLIER CHILLERS WITH G, H,
OR J COMPRESSORS AND STYLE F AND LATER CHILLERS WITH J OR H3 COMPRESSORS)
OVERVIEW Oil Pressure

This screen displays a cutaway view of the chiller com- Displays the pressure differential between the high
pressor, revealing the Proximity Probe sensor and provides side oil pressure transducer (compressor bearing input)
the capability of calibrating the Proximity Probe sensor. and the low side oil pressure transducer (oil sump). The
displayed value includes offset pressure derived from
Requires a login access level of SERVICE. auto-zeroing during the System Prelube. If either of the
Service Technicians refer to the OptiView transducers used to calculate this differential is out of
Control Center - Service Instructions range, the display field will show XX.X.
tions and explanation of all programmable Calibration in Progress (LED)
setpoints and displayed values. Indicates that the calibration sequence is in progress.
DISPLAY ONLY Calibration Messages

These are text messages which step the user through
High Speed Thrust Bearing Proximity Position the calibration process and indicate its success or
Displays the distance between the high-speed thrust failure.
collar and the Proximity Probe that is used to measure
the position.
PROGRAMMABLE
High Speed Thrust Bearing Proximity
Reference Position Enter Reference
Displays the presently defined offset reference posi- Press this key to enter the reference position manually.
tion. This value is defined at the conclusion of a cali-
bration sequence.
JOHNSON CONTROLS 61
FORM 160.54-O1
Start Calibration NAVIGATION

Press this key to start the calibration.
Home
Cancel Calibration Access Level Required: VIEW
Press this key to cancel calibration. Returns user to HOME Screen.
Accept Calibration Compressor

Press this key to accept calibration.
Returns user to COMPRESSOR Screen.
Fault Acknowledge
This option is only displayed if a fault is present. Al-
lows clearing of High Speed Thrust Bearing related
shutdowns.
62 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.54-O1
HOT GAS BYPASS SCREEN
LD13826
Figure 19 - HOT GAS BYPASS SCREEN
OVERVIEW open. When the actual position is 40% to 59%, the

valve is shown 50% open. when actual is 60% to 79%,
This screen displays a cutaway view of the Hot Gas By-
the valve is shown as 75% open. Positions greater than
pass Valve. The setpoints relating to the Hot Gas Bypass
79% are shown as full open.
Control are maintained on this screen. Related Hot Gas
control parameters are displayed for reference. The Hot Pre-rotation Vanes Position
Gas Valve can be manually controlled from this screen.
Displays the present Pre-rotation Vanes position as a
Through animation, the relative valve position is dis-
value between 0% (closed) and 100% (full open).
played. The parameters displayed on this screen vary ac-
cording to the software version and the selection made Delta P/P
for the Motor Communications Protocol Setpoint when
Displays the chiller head pressure calculated as (condens-
equipped with Variable Speed Drive (VSD) or Medium
er pressure – evaporator pressure/evaporator pressure).
Voltage Variable Speed Drive (MV VSD).
Shown above as it appears in software version Temperature Differential (LCHLT – Setpoint)
C.OPT.01.19.307 and later. Earlier version variations Displays the difference between the Leaving Chilled
noted below. Liquid Temperature and the Leaving Chilled Liquid
Temperature Setpoint.
DISPLAY ONLY Surge Avoidance Surge Count

(Displayed as Total Surge Count in software version
Valve Position
C.OPT.01.15.307 and earlier).
Displays the present position of the Hot Gas Valve as a
value between 0% (closed) to 100% (full open). By an- This is the total number of surges accumulated by the
imation, the valve is shown in its relative position. The Surge Protection feature. If equipped with a VSD or
valve position is animated. When the actual position MV VSD, it is only the surges detected while the drive
is 0% to 19%, the valve is shown fully closed. When is running at maximum frequency.
actual position is 20% to 39%, the valve is shown 25%
JOHNSON CONTROLS 63
FORM 160.54-O1
Surge Avoidance Surge Detected (LED) Hold Period

Illuminates momentarily when a surge is detected by (30 to 120 minutes)
the Surge Protection feature. If equipped with a VSD This is the period of time after no more surges are de-
or MV VSD these are only the surges detected while tected that the Hot Gas Valve closing will begin.
the drive is running at maximum frequency.
Minimum Load
If equipped with software version C.OPT.01.18.307
or earlier, this is displayed as Surge Detected. It illu- (0 to 4°F)
minates momentarily when a surge is detected by the This sets the offset below the Leaving Chilled Liquid
Surge Protection feature. If equipped with a VSD, it Temperature Setpoint at which the Hot Gas Valve will be
illuminates whenever a surge is detected, regardless of opened to the position allowed by the Maximum Open
the VSD operating speed. Setpoint.
ACC Surge Detected (LED) Maximum Open

[Software version C.OPT.01.19.307 and later only. (25 to 100%)
Only displayed if equipped with a VSD (in Modbus The maximum allowed position for the Hot Gas Valve
Protocol Configuration only) or MV VSD]. during a Minimum load override condition.
Illuminates momentarily when a surge is detected by
the ACC function in the Microboard, while the drive is [Hot Gas Bypass Control] Open (Manual)
running at less than maximum frequency. Puts the Hot Gas Bypass valve in manual control mode.
Each time this key is pressed, the valve position is in-
Hot Gas Bypass Control Mode creased by 5%.
Indicates whether the Hot Gas Bypass is under auto-
matic, manual or override control. When in manual [Hot Gas Bypass Control] Close (Manual)
control, it is controlled from this screen. When in over- Puts the Hot Gas Bypass valve in manual control
ride control, Minimum Load, VSD Override or VGD mode. Each this key is pressed, the valve position is
Override is displayed as appropriate. Refer to OptiView decreased by 5%.
M1) for details of these messages. Software versions [Hot Gas Bypass Control] Auto
C.OPT.01.18.307 and earlier display OVERRIDE for Returns the Hot Gas Bypass Control to automatic
any of these conditions. mode.
NAVIGATION
tions (Form 160.54-M1) for operation Home
instructions and explanation of all pro- Access Level Required: VIEW
grammable setpoints and displayed values. Returns user to HOME Screen.
Compressor
PROGRAMMABLE Access Level Required: VIEW
Close Percentage Returns user to COMPRESSOR Screen.
(5 to 15%)
This is the incremental amount that the Hot Gas Valve
will be closed at 10 minute intervals after the HOLD
period has elapsed.
64 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.54-O1
SURGE PROTECTION SCREEN
LD13827
Figure 20 - SURGE PROTECTION SCREEN
OVERVIEW Surge Detection is performed there. If not equipped with

an ACC Board, (new production chillers after March
This screen displays a cutaway view of the chiller com-
2007), the ACC Surge Detection is performed in the
pressor and all parameters relating to the Surge Pro-
Microboard (Refer to OptiView Control Center – Ser-
tection feature. All setpoints relating to this screen are
vice Instructions (Form 160.54-M1)). With all Medium
maintained on this screen.
Voltage Variable Speed Drives (MV VSD), the ACC
The Surge Protection feature detects surge events and Surge Detection is performed in the Microboard.
provides a running count of the surges detected over
Screen shown above as it appears in software version
the lifetime of the chiller. It allows the user to define
C.OPT.01.19.307 (and later). The parameters displayed
how many surges are excessive and how the control
on this screen vary according to the software version
will react to an excess surge condition. When excess
and the motor starter type as noted below.
surging is detected, it can be configured to shutdown
the chiller, or initiate a surge avoidance mode while
allowing it to continue to run or simply display a warn- DISPLAY ONLY
ing message. The sensitivity of this surge detection
is set by the Sensitivity Setpoint on this screen. The Delta P/P
surges detected by this feature are also used for the Hot A parameter that represents the system differential or
Gas Bypass feature (Refer to Hot Gas Bypass Screen Head Pressure. It is calculated as (condenser pressure
on Page 63). – evaporator pressure) / evaporator pressure.
The detection and counting of surges in this feature is Surge Window Time
completely independent of the surge detection/counting When the chiller enters run mode, this value counts
performed by the Variable Speed Drive (VSD) Adaptive up to the time programmed as the Count Window Set-
Capacity Control (ACC) Surge Detection. The ACC point. When it reaches the Count Window minutes, the
Surge Detection creates a surge map used to control number of surge events in the oldest minute is discard-
the speed of the drive. If equipped with an ACC Board ed and the number of surge events in the most recent
(new production chillers prior to March 2007), the ACC
JOHNSON CONTROLS 65
FORM 160.54-O1
minute is added, thus providing a rolling count of the For fields requiring access level of SER-
total surge events that have occurred in the last Count VICE. Service Technicians refer to the
Window minutes. This value is reset when the chiller OptiView Control Center - Service Instruc-
shuts down. tions (Form 160.54-M1) for operation
Surge Window Count grammable setpoints and displayed values.
Displays the number of surge events that have occurred
in the last 1 to 5 minutes as programmed with the Count
Window Setpoint. If the chiller has been running for PROGRAMMABLE
less than the Count Window minutes, it is the number
of surge events that have occurred within the last num- Shutdown (Enabled/Disabled)
ber of minutes displayed as the Surge Window Time. Access Level Required: OPERATOR
The count is cleared when the chiller shuts down. Allows the user to select whether the chiller will shut-
down or continue to run when an Excess Surge situa-
Surge Avoidance Surge Detected (LED) tion has been detected.
Illuminates momentarily when a surge is detected by If this setpoint is Enabled and the Extended Run
the Surge Protection feature. If equipped with a VSD Setpoint is Disabled, a safety shutdown is performed
or MV VSD these are only the surges detected while when the Surge Window Count exceeds the Count
the drive is running at maximum frequency. Limit Setpoint.
If equipped with software version C.OPT.01.18.307 If this setpoint is Enabled and the Extended Run
or earlier, this is displayed as Surge Detected. It illu- Setpoint is Enabled, a safety shutdown is performed
minates momentarily when a surge is detected by the if the Surge Window Count exceeds the Count Limit
Surge Protection feature. If equipped with a VSD, it Setpoint at the completion of the 10 minute Extended
illuminates whenever a surge is detected, regardless of Run period.
the VSD operating speed.
Surge Protection – Excess Surge is displayed with ei-
ACC Surge Detected (LED) ther shutdown.
[Software version C.OPT.01.19.307 and later only.
Only displayed if equipped with a VSD (in Modbus If this setpoint is Disabled, refer to operation under
Protocol Configuration only) or MV VSD] Illuminates Count Limit on Page 67.
momentarily when a surge is detected by the ACC With software version C.MLM.01.09.xxx (and later)
function in the Microboard, while the drive is running or C.OPT.01.09.301 (and later):
at less than maximum frequency.
• If equipped with a compressor Variable Speed
Surge Avoidance Surge Count Drive (VSD), the VSD output frequency must
(Displayed as Total Surge Count in software version be at maximum before the Shutdown feature is
C.OPT.01.15.307 and earlier) implemented or Surge Warning messages are dis-
played.
This is the total number of surges accumulated by the
Surge Protection feature. If equipped with a VSD or • If equipped with a VSD and Hot Gas Bypass
MV VSD, it is only the surges detected while the drive (Enabled), the VSD output frequency must be at
is running at maximum frequency. maximum and the Hot Gas Valve must be at 100%
before the Shutdown feature is implemented or
Extended Run Time Remaining Surge warning messages are displayed.
Displays the time remaining in the 10-minute Extended
Run period. During this period, the Pre-rotation Vanes Extended Run (Enabled/Disabled)
are driven closed and WARNING – SURGE PROTEC- Access Level Required: OPERATOR
TION – EXCESS SURGE LIMIT is displayed. Refer Allows the user to select the surge correction/avoid-
to operation under Count Limit on Page 67. ance Extended Run mode. This will be implemented
when an Excess Surge situation is detected as follows:
Anytime the Surge Window Count exceeds the Count
Limit, the Pre-rotation Vanes are driven closed for the
66 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.54-O1
next 10 minutes. While this load inhibit is in effect, • If the Shutdown Setpoint is Enabled and the Extend-
WARNING – SURGE PROTECTION – EXCESS ed Run Setpoint is Disabled, the chiller will perform
SURGE LIMIT is displayed. When 10 minutes have a safety shutdown and display Surge Protection –
elapsed, the warning message and load inhibit are auto- Excess Surge. Refer to Hot Gas Bypass and Variable
matically cleared, provided the Surge Window Count is Speed Drive exceptions. See Shutdown (Enabled/
less than or equal to the Count Limit. If the Shutdown Disabled) on Page 66 and Extended Run (En-
Setpoint is Enabled, and the Surge Window Count ex- abled/Disabled) on Page 66. 2
ceeds the Count Limit at the completion of this period,
• If the Shutdown Setpoint is Disabled and the Ex-
a safety shutdown is performed and Surge Protection
tended Run Setpoint is Enabled, the Pre-rota-
– Excess Surge is displayed.
tion Vanes are driven closed for 10 minutes and
If the Hot Gas Bypass control is Enabled, the Hot Gas WARNING – SURGE PROTECTION – EXCESS
Bypass Valve position must be 100% before the Extend- SURGE LIMIT is displayed. When the 10 min-
ed Run mode is implemented. If the chiller is equipped utes have elapsed, if the Surge Window Count is
with a Compressor Motor Variable Speed Drive, output less than or equal to the Count Limit, this message
frequency must be at full speed (50Hz/60Hz) before and load inhibit are automatically cleared. Alternat-
the Extended Run mode is implemented. If the chiller ing with this message is WARNING – EXCESS
is equipped with both Hot Gas Bypass and Compres- SURGE DETECTED that continues after the 10
sor Motor Variable Speed Drive, both of the conditions minute period has elapsed until manually cleared
must be met before Extended Run is implemented. with the WARNING RESET key. Refer to Hot Gas
Bypass and Variable Speed Drive exceptions. See
Count Window Shutdown (Enabled/Disabled) on Page 66 and
Access Level Required: OPERATOR Extended Run (Enabled/Disabled) on Page 66.
Allows the user to define the period of time (1 to 5
• If both the Shutdown and Extended Run Setpoint
minutes; default 5; default 3 with software version
are Enabled, the 10 minute Extended Run mode
C.MLM.01.09.xxx (and later) or C.OPT.01.09.301
is invoked as described above. However, if the
(and later)) in which the number of surge events (Surge
Surge Window Count exceeds the Count Limit
Window Count) are compared to the maximum al-
at the completion of the 10 minute Extended Run
lowed (Count Limit), for the purpose of detecting an
period, a safety shutdown is performed and Surge
Excess Surge situation.
Protection – Excess Surge is displayed. Refer to
Count Limit Hot Gas Bypass and Variable Speed Drive excep-
Access Level Required: OPERATOR tions. See Shutdown (Enabled/Disabled) on Page
Allows the user to define the maximum number of surge 66 and Extended Run (Enabled/Disabled) on
events (4 to 20; default 4 ;default 15 with software ver- Page 66.
sion C.MLM.01.09.xxx (and later) or C.OPT.01.09.301 Surge Sensitivity
(and later)) that can occur within a defined period of Access Level Required: SERVICE
time before an Excess Surge situation is detected. If the
Allows the user to define the surge detection sensitivity
Surge Window Count exceeds the Count Limit, an Ex-
of the Surge Protection feature. The Surge Sensitivity
cess Surge situation has occurred.
Setpoint on the ACC DETAILS Screen sets the sensi-
When an Excess Surge situation is detected, the action tivity of the ACC Surge Detection feature that is em-
depends upon the following: ployed for ACC Surge Detection when configured in
MODBUS serial communications protocol. Selectable
• If both the Shutdown and Extended Run Setpoints over the range of 0.3 to 1.3; default 0.3. The smaller the
are Disabled, the chiller will continue to run, number, the greater the sensitivity.
displaying the message WARNING – EXCESS
SURGE DETECTED. Refer to Hot Gas Bypass Clear Surge Count
and Variable Speed Drive exceptions. See Shut- Access Level Required: ADMIN
down (Enabled/Disabled) on Page 66 and Ex- Allows user to set the Total Surge Count to zero.
tended Run (Enabled/Disabled) on Page 66.
JOHNSON CONTROLS 67
FORM 160.54-O1
NAVIGATION
Home
Compressor
68 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.54-O1
VARIABLE GEOMETRY DIFFUSER SCREEN
LD15427
Figure 21 - VARIABLE GEOMETRY DIFFUSER SCREEN
OVERVIEW Diffuser Gap Close (LED)

(This feature applies to software version C.MLM.01.10. Illuminates when a close signal is being applied to the
xxx (and later) or C.OPT.01.10.302 (and later)) VGD.
This screen displays information pertinent to the VGD Diffuser Gap Open (LED)
operation. Also, the VGD can be manually controlled
Illuminates when an open signal is being applied to the
from this screen.
VGD.
DISPLAY ONLY Surge Avoidance Surge Detected (LED)

Stall Detector Voltage Illuminates momentarily when a surge is detected by
Displays the Stall Detector output voltage (x.xxVDC), the Surge Protection feature. If equipped with a VSD or
as received by the Microboard. MV VSD, these are only the surges detected while the
drive is running at maximum frequency.
Pre-rotation Vanes Position
If equipped with software version C.OPT.01.22.307
Displays the position of the Pre-rotation Vanes over
or earlier, this is displayed as Surge Detected. It illu-
the range of 0% (fully closed) to 100% (fully open).
minates momentarily when a surge is detected by the
Displayed as XXX until calibration procedure is per-
Surge Protection feature, regardless of the VSD operat-
formed by Service Technician.
ing speed.
VGD Closed Limit Switch
ACC Surge Detected (LED)
Displays the status of the VGD Limit Switch. Dis-
Only displayed if equipped with a VSD (in Modbus
played as CLOSED when the switch is closed. This
Protocol Configuration) or MV VSD. Illuminates mo-
would be when the VGD is in the fully closed position.
mentarily when a surge is detected by the ACC func-
Otherwise, displayed as OPEN.
JOHNSON CONTROLS 69
FORM 160.54-O1
tion in the Microboard, while the drive is running at PROGRAMMABLE

less than maximum frequency.
[VGD] Open (Manual)
VGD Count This key puts the VGD in manual mode and sends an
Displays the number of times the Stall Detector Board OPEN command to the VGD.
output voltage goes above the High Limit Setpoint.
The count can be cleared with in ADMIN access lev- [VGD] Close (Manual)
el using the VGD CYCLE COUNT key on the VGD This key puts the VGD in manual mode and sends a
SETPOINTS Screen. CLOSE command to the VGD.
VGD Time ( __Days __Hrs __Min __Sec) [VGD] Hold (Manual)

Displays the accumulated time the Stall Detector Board This key puts the VGD in manual mode and sends a
output voltage is greater than the High Limit Setpoint HOLD command to the VGD.
while the chiller is running.
Control Status NAVIGATION

Displays the current state of the VGD control. The Home
states are: Stall Waiting, Stall Reacting, Probing, Surge Access Level Required: VIEW
Reacting, Surge Waiting, Hot Gas Override. Returns user to HOME Screen.
Time Remaining Compressor
While the VGD is in the Stall Waiting State, displays Access Level Required: VIEW
the time remaining in the Probe Wait Time interval Returns user to COMPRESSOR Screen.
(value programmed as the Probe Wait Time setpoint).
VGD Setpoints
Diffuser Gap Control Mode Access Level Required: SERVICE
Indicates whether the VGD is under manual or auto- Move to the subscreen that allows programming of the
matic control. Variable Geometry Diffuser setpoints.
70 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.54-O1
VARIABLE GEOMETRY DIFFUSER SETPOINTS SCREEN
LD15428
Figure 22 - VARIABLE GEOMETRY DIFFUSER SETPOINTS SCREEN
OVERVIEW VGD Closed Limit Switch

(This feature applies to software version C.MLM.01.10.
xxx (and later) or C.OPT.01.10.302 (and later)) Displays the status of the VGD Limit Switch. Dis-
played as CLOSED when the switch is closed. This
The Variable Geometry Diffuser setpoints are main-
would be when the VGD is in the fully closed position.
tained on this screen. All setpoints require a login ac-
Otherwise, displayed as OPEN.
cess level of Service.
Requires a login access level of SERVICE. Diffuser Gap Close (LED)
Service Technicians refer to the OptiView Illuminates when a close signal is being applied to the
Control Center - Service Instructions VGD.
tions and explanation of all programmable Diffuser Gap Open (LED)
setpoints and displayed values. Illuminates when an open signal is being applied to the
VGD.
DISPLAY ONLY Surge Avoidance Surge Detected (LED)

Stall Detector Voltage
Displays the Stall Detector output voltage, as received the Surge Protection feature. If equipped with a VSD
by the Microboard. or MV VSD, these are only the surges detected while
the drive is running at maximum frequency.
Displays the position of the Pre-rotation Vanes over If equipped with software version C.OPT.01.22.307
the range of 0% (fully closed) to 100% (fully open). or earlier, this is displayed as Surge Detected. It illu-
Displayed as XXX until calibration procedure is per- minates momentarily when a surge is detected by the
formed by Service Technician. Surge Protection feature, regardless of the VSD operat-
ing speed.
JOHNSON CONTROLS 71
FORM 160.54-O1
ACC Surge Detected (LED) Open Pulse

(Software version C.OPT.01.23.307 and later) (1 to 9 seconds; default 2) – Specifies the length of the
Only displayed if equipped with a VSD (in Modbus open pulse applied to the VGD during 10 second peri-
Protocol Configuration) or MV VSD. Illuminates mo- ods while in the Probing state.
mentarily when a surge is detected by the ACC func-
tion in the Microboard, while the drive is running at High Limit
less than maximum frequency. (0.5 to 1.2VDC; default 0.6VDC; (0.8VDC with soft-
ware version C.OPT.01.22.307 or earlier) – Specifies
VGD Count the Stall Detector Board output voltage that represents
Displays the number of times the Stall Detector Board an acceptable amount of stall noise.
output voltage goes above the High Limit Setpoint.
The count can be reset with an ADMIN access level The minimum difference between the High Limit
using the VGD CYCLE COUNT key on the VGD Setpoint and the Low Limit Setpoint is 0.1VDC. If
SETPOINTS Screen. a Low Limit Setpoint is entered which is less than
0.1VDC below the High Limit Setpoint, the High Lim-
VGD Time ( __Days __Hrs __Min __Sec) it Setpoint is adjusted so that it is 0.1VDC above the
Displays the accumulated time the Stall Detector Board newly entered Low Limit value.
output voltage is greater than the High Limit Setpoint
Low Limit
while the chiller is running.
(0.4 to 0.8VDC; default 0.5VDC; (0.6VDC with soft-
Control Status ware version C.OPT.01.22.307 or earlier) – in the Stall
Displays the current state of the VGD control. The Reacting State, the VGD is driven closed until the Stall
states are: Stall Waiting, Stall Reacting, Probing, Surge Detector Board output voltage decreases to this level.
Reacting, Surge Waiting, Hot Gas Override. The minimum difference between the High Limit
Setpoint and the Low Limit Setpoint is 0.1VDC. If
Time Remaining a Low Limit Setpoint is entered which is less than
While the VGD is in the Stall Waiting State, displays 0.1VDC below the High Limit Setpoint, the High Lim-
the time remaining in the Probe Wait Time interval it Setpoint is adjusted so that it is 0.1VDC above the
(value programmed as the Probe Wait Time setpoint). newly entered Low Limit value.
VGD Count
PROGRAMMABLE
Access Level Required: ADMIN
Surge React Allows the user to clear the VGD Cycle Count.
(1 to 30 seconds; default 5) – Specifies the length of the
Extreme Stall Duration
close pulse applied to the VGD in response to a surge.
(Software version C.MLM.01.14.xxx (and later) or
PRV Offset C.OPT.01.14.306 (and later))
(0 to 5%; default 3) – If the VGD control is in the (10 to 20 minutes; default 10) – Specifies the maxi-
Stall Waiting state and the Pre-rotation Vanes position mum allowed time an extreme stall condition can exist
changes by more than this value, the Probing state will before the VGD operation is disabled and driven to the
be entered. If the PRV Offset is set to 0%, the Stall full open position to protect it from damage.
Waiting state is performed based only on the Probe
PRV VGD Inhibit
Wait Time setpoint interval.
(Software version C.OPT.01.14.xxx and later)
Probe Wait [40% - 100% default 100% (95% with software version
(0.5 to 15 minutes; default 10) – Specifies how long C.OPT.01.22.307 and earlier)] While the Pre-rotation
the VGD control remains in the Stall Waiting or Surge Vanes position is greater than this setpoint, extreme
Waiting states before entering the Probing state. stall conditions are not checked, the VGD control is
inhibited and the VGD is pulsed open according to the
Open Pulse Setpoint. While this is in effect, PRV Posi-
tion Override is displayed as Control Status.
72 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.54-O1
NAVIGATION VGD Screen

Home
Returns user to VARIABLE GEOMETRY DIFFUSER
Screen.
JOHNSON CONTROLS 73
FORM 160.54-O1
74 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.54-O1
PRE-ROTATION VANES CALIBRATION SCREEN
LD18230
Figure 23 - PRE-ROTATION VANES CALIBRATION SCREEN
OVERVIEW Calibration Messages

This screen displays a cutaway view of the chiller com- These are text messages which step the user through the
pressor, revealing the Pre-rotation Vanes and provides the calibration process and indicate its success or failure.
capability of calibrating the Pre-rotation Vanes for either
Pre-rotation Vanes Voltage
Variable Speed Drive or Hot Gas Bypass applications.
Requires a login access level of SERVICE. Displays the Pre-rotation Vanes position potentiom-
Service Technicians refer to the OptiView eter feedback voltage when the PRV potentiometer is
Control Center - Service Instructions connected directly to the 031-02430 Microboard. This
(Form 160.54-M1) for operation instruc- applies to those chillers equipped with Variable Geom-
tions and explanation of all programmable etry Diffuser, VSD (Modbus Communications config-
setpoints and displayed values. uration) and Hot Gas Bypass
Displayed as Hot Gas PRV Voltage in software ver-
DISPLAY ONLY sion C.OPT.01.22.307 and earlier. In these versions,
the PRV Position Potentiometer feedback voltage is
Pre-rotation Vanes Opening (LED) displayed when the Hot Gas Bypass feature is enabled.
Indicates the vanes are opening.
Pre-rotation Vanes Closing (LED) VICE. Service Technicians refer to the
Indicates the vanes are closing.
Calibration in Progress (LED) instructions and explanation of all pro-
Indicates the calibration sequence is in progress.
JOHNSON CONTROLS 75
FORM 160.54-O1
PROGRAMMABLE NAVIGATION
Start Calibration Home

This option is hidden after calibration has started. Access Level Required: VIEW
Cancel Calibration
This option only becomes available after calibration Compressor
has started. Access Level Required: VIEW
76 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.54-O1
VSD TUNING SCREEN
LD13828
Figure 24 - VSD TUNING SCREEN
OVERVIEW Pre-rotation Vanes Position

This screen applies to both Variable Speed Drives Displays the present Pre-rotation Vane position as a
(VSD) and Medium Voltage Variable Speed Drives value between 0% (closed) and 100% (full open).
(MV VSD). It displays a cutaway view of the chiller
Delta P/P
compressor, revealing the Pre-rotation Vanes. Anima-
tion of the Pre-rotation Vanes indicates their position. Displays the chiller head pressure calculated as (condens-
In addition, this screen allows manual control of the er pressure - evaporator pressure/evaporator pressure).
vanes and manual control of the Command Frequency
Temperature Differential (LCHLT – Setpoint)
being sent to drive.
Displays the difference between the Leaving Chilled
Shown above as it appears in software version Liquid Temperature and the Leaving Chilled Liquid
C.OPT.01.19.307 and later. Earlier version variations Temperature Setpoint.
noted below.
Frequency Control Mode
Service Technicians refer to the OptiView Displays whether the Command Frequency to the drive
Control Center - Service Instructions is derived from manual or automatic frequency control
(Form 160.54-M1) for operation instruc- mode.
Command Frequency
When equipped with a VSD (with the Motor Com-
DISPLAY ONLY munications Protocol Setpoint set to MODBUS; ACC
Board not present) or equipped with a MV VSD, this
Output Frequency is the speed command being sent to the Drive Logic
Displays the frequency at which the drive is operating Board in either Auto or Manual Speed Control mode.
the motor. This value is returned from the drive. When equipped with a VSD (with Motor Communi-
JOHNSON CONTROLS 77
FORM 160.54-O1
cations Protocol Setpoint set to YORK; ACC Board Raise

present), it is only displayed in Manual Speed Control Puts the drive frequency control into manual mode.
mode and it is the speed command being sent to the Each time it is pressed it increases the Command
ACC Board in Manual Speed Control mode. Frequency to the drive by the amount defined by the
MANUAL INCREMENT key. It will not raise the val-
% Full Load Amps ue above the maximum allowed (50Hz or 60Hz).
Displays the motor current as a percentage of chiller Lower
Full Load Amps. Puts the drive frequency control into manual mode.
Each time it is pressed it lowers the Command Fre-
Output Current – Phase A, B, C quency to the drive by the amount defined by the
Displays the phase current measured to the motor. MANUAL INCREMENT key. It will not lower the
value below the minimum allowed; (30Hz for 60Hz
Pre-rotation Vanes Control Mode units; 25Hz for 50Hz units).
Indicates whether the vanes are under manual or auto-
matic control. Manual Increment
(Increment Amount - Software version C.OPT.01.18.
[Pre-rotation Vanes] Open (LED) xxx and earlier)
Illuminates when an OPEN command is being sent to
Defines the amount by which the manual Raise and
the vanes.
Lower commands will change the Command Frequen-
[Pre-rotation Vanes] Close (LED) cy to the drive in Manual Speed Control mode. With
software version C.OPT.01.18.xxx and earlier, this set-
Illuminates when a CLOSE command is being sent to
ting also affects the AUTO speed control mode.
the vanes.
[Pre-rotation Vanes] Open
PROGRAMMABLE Puts the vane control into manual mode and sends an
OPEN command to the vanes.
Set
Allows manual programming of the Command Frequen- [Pre-rotation Vanes] Close
cy value. Manually programming this value will put the Puts the vanes control into manual mode and sends a
drive frequency control in Manual Speed Control mode CLOSE command to the vanes.
and send the programmed Command Frequency to the
drive. [Pre-rotation Vanes] Hold
Puts the vane control into manual control and sends a
Auto HOLD command to the vanes.
Puts the drive frequency control in automatic control.
The Pre-rotation Vanes calibration must have been suc- [Pre-rotation Vanes] Auto
cessfully performed before this entry will be accepted. Puts the vane control into automatic mode.
In software version C.OPT.01.23.307 (and later), de-

fault is changed from Manual to Auto and a panel be- NAVIGATION
ing booted from a cleared BRAM will come up with
the mode set to Auto. Also with this software version, Home
the ISN, through serial communications, can no longer Access Level Required: VIEW
change this setpoint. Returns user to HOME Screen.
Fixed Compressor
Puts the drive frequency control in fixed speed mode, Access Level Required: VIEW
commanding it to run at maximum frequency (50Hz Returns user to COMPRESSOR Screen.
or 60Hz).
78 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.54-O1
OIL SUMP SCREEN
LD14336
Figure 25 - OIL SUMP SCREEN
OVERVIEW Oil – Saturated Condenser Temperature

Differential
This screen displays a close-up of the chiller oil sump
and provides all the necessary setpoints for maintain-
ing the Variable Speed Oil Pump (VSOP). In addition,
this screen allows manual control of the frequency Displays the difference between the Oil Sump Temper-
command sent to the VSOP. ature and the Saturated Condenser Temperature. This
parameter is useful when analyzing oil heater opera-
tion since it is used in the control of the oil heater.
DISPLAY ONLY
Sump Oil Pressure (LOP)
Oil Pressure Displays the low side oil pressure measured at the
Displays the pressure differential between the high sump.
side oil pressure transducer (output of oil filter) and the
low side oil pressure transducer (compressor housing). Pump Oil Pressure (HOP)
The displayed value includes offset pressure derived Displays the high side oil pressure measured at the
from auto-zeroing during the System Prelube. (Refer compressor bearing input.
to explanation of auto-zeroing under the Compressor
Screen on Page 53). If either of the transducers used Oil Pump Run Output (LED)
to calculate this differential is out of range, the display Indicates whether the oil pump is being commanded
field will show XX.X. to operate.
Oil Sump Temperature Oil Return Solenoid (LED)
Displays the temperature of the oil in the sump. Indicates whether the solenoid is energized.
JOHNSON CONTROLS 79
FORM 160.54-O1
Oil Heater (LED – Variable Speed Oil Pump For fields requiring access level of SER-
Only) VICE. Service Technicians refer to the
Indicates whether the oil heater output is energized. OptiView Control Center - Service Instruc-
Oil Seal Lubrication Time Remaining instructions and explanation of all pro-
Access Level Required: SERVICE grammable setpoints and displayed values.
If a Seal Lubrication is in progress, this will display the
amount of time remaining in the lubrication process.
PROGRAMMABLE
Next Oil Seal Lubrication
Standby Lube (Enabled / Disabled)
This display will show the time remaining until the
Allows the user to enable or disable the standby lube
next Seal Lubrication when this function is enabled.
operation. When enabled, this function causes the oil
Target / Setpoint Oil Pressure pump to operate for a period of two (2) minutes at 24-
(Variable Speed Oil Pump Only) hour intervals from when the oil pump was last run for
The Variable Speed Oil Pump (VSOP), if installed, op- at least 2 minutes.
erates to control to a defined Oil Pressure value. Dur-
OIL RETURN MIN
ing prelube, and for the first 15 seconds after prelube,
(Software version C.OPT.01.21.307 and later; P,Q,H9
this setpoint value is 45.0 PSID. During this time, this
compressors only)
field will display the target value. After 15 seconds,
this value will display the user-programmed setpoint
To avoid an OIL – LOW TEMPERATURE DIFFER-
Oil Pressure.
ENTIAL cycling condition from preventing a chiller
Pulldown Time Remaining start after running at low load conditions for extend-
(Variable Speed Oil Pump Only) ed periods, the Oil Return Solenoid (1SOL) is cycled
closed when the oil temperature gets too low on the P,
Displays the time remaining until the user-programmed
Q and H9 compressor chillers, while the chiller is run-
Oil Pressure Setpoint is used.
ning. The OIL RETURN MIN SETPOINT key appears
Variable Speed Oil Pump Control Mode on the OIL SUMP Screen when the Chiller Style/Com-
(Variable Speed Oil Pump Only) pressor Type Setpoint (on the OPERATIONS Screen)
is set to P, Q or H9 compressor in SERVICE access
Indicates whether the Variable Speed Oil Pump speed
level. This setpoint is programmable over the range of
is under manual or automatic control.
80.0°F to 110.0°F (default 95.0°F) and controls the oil
Oil Pump Drive Command Frequency return Solenoid as follows:
(Variable Speed Oil Pump Only) • When the compressor is running and the Oil
Displays the actual speed command being sent to the Sump Temperature is less than the Oil Return Min
VSOP. This value could be the result of automatic con- Setpoint, close (de-energize) the Oil Return Sole-
trol based on the Oil Pressure Setpoint, or the result of noid by de-energizing K12 relay.
a manual speed command.
• When the compressor is running and Oil Sump
Manual Oil Pump Operation Time Left Temperature is more than Oil Return Min plus
Displays the time remaining in the 10-minute Manual 7°F, open (energize) the Oil Return Solenoid by
Oil Pump operation described below. energizing K12 relay.
• During coastdown, the solenoid operation is not
changed from standard logic, it remains closed.
During startup the operation is not changed from
standard logic, it remains closed for 1 minute after
System Run.
80 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.54-O1
In previous software versions, the Oil Return Solenoid Lower

(1SOL) is opened 1 minute into System Run and re- Access Level Required: SERVICE
mains open until System Coastdown. This key puts the VSOP control into manual mode and
decrements the present speed command by 0.5Hz.
Pressure Setpoint (Variable Speed Oil Pump
Only) Auto
Access Level Required: SERVICE Access Level Required: SERVICE 2
The Variable Speed Oil Pump (VSOP) operates to con- This key returns the VSOP to automatic mode where
trol to a defined Oil Pressure value. This key allows the control is based on the Oil Pressure Setpoint.
user to define the setpoint for the VSOP control.
Manual Pump
Control Period (Variable Speed Oil Pump Access Level Required: OPERATOR
Only) This key puts the oil pump control in manual mode and
Access Level Required: SERVICE forces it to RUN. The oil pump is limited to running
By default, the automatic VSOP control algorithm op- for a maximum of ten (10) minutes. If a longer running
erates every 300ms. This key allows the user to specify time is desired, this key must be pressed again. Manual
the control period in multiples of 300ms. Oil Pump control is disabled (and the button hidden)
during System Prelube, System Run, Proximity Probe
Variable Speed Oil Pump Speed Control: Set Calibration, Seal Lubrication, and System Coastdown.
This key allows the user to specify a fixed manual
speed at which the VSOP will run. NAVIGATION
Raise Home
Access Level Required: SERVICE Access Level Required: VIEW
This key puts the VSOP control into manual mode and Returns user to HOME Screen.
increments the present speed command by 0.5Hz.
JOHNSON CONTROLS 81
FORM 160.54-O1
82 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.54-O1
ELECTRO-MECHANICAL STARTER SCREEN
LD10706a
Figure 26 - ELECTRO-MECHANICAL STARTER SCREEN
OVERVIEW For fields requiring access level of SER-

This screen displays all information pertaining to an
Electro-Mechanical Starter.
DISPLAY ONLY grammable setpoints and displayed values.
Motor Run (LED)

Indicates whether the digital output from the controls is PROGRAMMABLE
commanding the motor to RUN.
Local Motor Current Limit
Motor Current % Full Load Amps Access Level Required: OPERATOR
Displays the motor current as a percentage of the Full Allows the user to specify the maximum allowed mo-
Load Amps (FLA) value. For the Electro-Mechanical tor current (as a percentage of FLA). When the motor
Starter this is the data returned by the CM-2 board. current reaches this value, the Pre-rotation Vanes will
not be permitted to open further. If the motor current
Current Limit Setpoint rises above this value, the Pre-rotation Vanes will close
Displays the current limit value in use. This value could to reduce the current to this value.
come from a 0 to 20mA, 4 to 20mA, 0 to 10VDC or 2
to 10VDC input in Analog Remote mode, PWM signal Pulldown Demand Limit
in Digital Remote mode, E-Link Gateway interface in Access Level Required: OPERATOR
ISN mode, or a locally programmed value. Allows the user to specify the current limit value (as a
percentage of FLA) to which the chiller will be limited
Pulldown Demand Time Left during the specified pulldown limit time. This value
Displays the time remaining in the programmed will override the Motor Current Limit value during this
pulldown period if the value is nonzero. time period. This function is used to provide energy
savings following chiller start-up.
JOHNSON CONTROLS 83
FORM 160.54-O1
Pulldown Demand Time Motor Lube

Access Level Required: OPERATOR (Software version C.MLM.01.14.xxx (and later) or
Allows the user to set a period of time for which the C.OPT.01.14.306 (and later))
pulldown demand limit will be in effect after the chiller Access Level Required: VIEW
starts. Moves to the subscreen allowing operator acknowledge-
ment of the compressor motor lubrication and viewing
of the compressor motor lubrication parameters.
NAVIGATION
Motor Details
Home
Moves to a subscreen that provides information and
setpoints pertinent to the Motor Monitoring feature.
84 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.54-O1
MOD “A” SOLID STATE STARTER SCREEN
LD10707a
Figure 27 - MOD “A” SOLID STATE STARTER SCREEN
OVERVIEW Scale/Model
This screen displays all information pertaining to the Display information about the Liquid Cooled Solid
Mod “A” Solid State Starter. State Starter Rating and the maximum allowed Full
Load Amps.
DISPLAY ONLY Voltage – Phase A, B, C

Display the 3-phase input line voltage values being
Motor Run (LED) read from the Solid State Starter.
Indicates whether the digital output from the controls is
commanding the motor to RUN. Current – Phase A, B, C
Display the 3-phase motor current values being read
Motor Current % Full Load Amps from the Solid State Starter.
Displays the motor current as a percentage of the Full
Load Amps (FLA) value. For the Solid State Starter
this is the data returned by the Starter Logic Board.
Current Limit Setpoint tions (Form 160.54-M1) for operation
Displays the current limit value in use. This value could
to 10VDC input in Analog Remote mode, PWM signal
in Digital Remote mode, E-Link Gateway interface in
PROGRAMMABLE
ISN mode, or a locally programmed value.
Pulldown Demand Time Left Access Level Required: OPERATOR
Displays the time remaining in the programmed Allows the user to specify the maximum allowed mo-
pulldown period if the value is nonzero. tor current (as a percentage of FLA). When the motor
JOHNSON CONTROLS 85
FORM 160.54-O1
current reaches this value, the Pre-rotation Vanes will Current Unbalance Check (Enabled / Disabled)
not be permitted to open further. If the motor current Access Level Required: SERVICE
rises above this value, the Pre-rotation Vanes will close Allows the user to control whether the logic checks for
to reduce the current to this value. current unbalance and initiates a shutdown as a result.
Pulldown Demand Limit

Access Level Required: OPERATOR NAVIGATION
Allows the user to specify the current limit value (as a
Home
during the specified pulldown limit time. This value
will override the Motor Current Limit value during this Returns user to HOME Screen.
time period. This function is used to provide energy
Motor Lube
Pulldown Demand Time C.OPT.01.14.306 (and later))
Access Level Required: OPERATOR Access Level Required: VIEW
Allows the user to set a period of time for which the Moves to the subscreen allowing operator acknowledge-
pulldown demand limit will be in effect after the chiller ment of the compressor motor lubrication and viewing
starts. of the compressor motor lubrication parameters.
Full Load Amps Motor Details

Define the maximum amps at which the motor can op-
erate. This value is viewable when logged in under the Moves to a subscreen that provides information and
OPERATOR or VIEW access level. setpoints pertinent to the Motor Monitoring feature.
Supply Voltage Range

Allows the user to select a specific voltage range for
voltage checking. When not disabled, this line voltage
range is used to determine a low line and high line volt-
age threshold for initiating a shutdown.
86 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.54-O1
MOD “B” SOLID STATE STARTER SCREEN
LD10708a
Figure 28 - MOD “B” SOLID STATE STARTER SCREEN
OVERVIEW Input Power

This screen displays all information pertaining to the Displays the kilowatts measured by the Solid State
Mod “B” Solid State Starter. Starter.
KW Hours
DISPLAY ONLY Displays the cumulative amount of kilowatts used over
time.
Motor Run (LED)
Indicates whether the digital output from the controls is Starter Model
commanding the motor to RUN. Displays the Solid State Starter model that is applied
to the chiller. Starter Models are 7L, 14L, 26L or 33L.
Motor Current % Full Load Amps
Displays the motor current as a percentage of the Full Voltage – Phase A, B, C
Load Amps (FLA) value. Displays the 3-phase input line voltage measured by
the Solid State Starter.
Current Limit Setpoint
Displays the current limit in use. This value could Current – Phase A, B, C
come from a 0 to 20mA, 4 to 20mA, 0 to 10VDC or 2 Displays the 3-phase motor current values measured
to 10VDC input in Analog Remote mode, PWM signal by the Solid State Starter.
ISN Remote mode or a locally programmed value in Temperature – Phase A, B, C
Local mode. Displays the temperatures of the Silicon Controlled
Rectifier assemblies.
Pulldown Demand Time Left
Displays the time remaining in the programmed
pulldown period.
JOHNSON CONTROLS 87
FORM 160.54-O1
For fields requiring access level of SER- Starting Current

VICE. Service Technicians refer to the Access Level Required: SERVICE
OptiView Control Center - Service Instruc- Defines the maximum allowed motor starting amps. The
tions (Form 160.54-M1) for operation Solid State Starter will limit the motor starting current to
instructions and explanation of all pro- this value.
Open SCR (Enabled/Disabled)
PROGRAMMABLE Allows the user to enable or disable the Solid State
Starter Open SCR safety detection. This must never be
disabled unless under advisement of the YORK Fac-
tory.
Allows the user to specify the maximum allowed motor
current (as percentage of FLA). When the motor cur- Shorted SCR (Enabled/Disabled)
rent reaches this value, the Pre-rotation Vanes will not
(Flash Memory Card version C.MLM.01.04b or later)
be permitted to open further. If the motor rises above
this value, the Pre-rotation Vanes will close to reduce
the current to this value. Allows the user to enable or disable the Solid State
Starter Shorted SCR safety detection. This must nev-
Pulldown Demand Limit er be disabled unless under advisement of the YORK
Access Level Required: OPERATOR Factory.
Allows the user to specify the current limit value (as
KWH Reset
a percentage of FLA) to which the chiller will be lim-
ited during the specified pulldown time. This value
will override the Motor Current Limit value during this Allows the user to reset the cumulative Kilowatt hours.
savings following chiller start. NAVIGATION
Pulldown Demand Time Home
Allows the user to set a period of time for which the Returns user to HOME Screen.
pulldown demand limit will be in effect after the chiller
starts. Motor Lube
Full Load Amps C.OPT.01.14.306 (and later))
Access Level Required: SERVICE Access Level Required: VIEW
Defines the maximum amps at which the motor can oper- Moves to the subscreen allowing operator acknowledge-
ate. This value is viewable when logged in at OPERATOR ment of the compressor motor lubrication and viewing
or VIEW access level. of the compressor motor lubrication parameters.
Voltage Range Motor Details
Allows the user to select specific line voltage range for Access Level Required: SERVICE
voltage checking. When not disabled, this line voltage Moves to a subscreen that provides information and
range is used to determine a low line and high line volt- setpoints pertinent to the Motor Monitoring feature.
age threshold for initiating a shutdown.
88 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.54-O1
MEDIUM VOLTAGE SOLID STATE STARTER SCREEN
LD12573a
Figure 29 - MEDIUM VOLTAGE SOLID STATE STARTER SCREEN
OVERVIEW Pulldown Time Left

This screen displays all information pertinent to the Displays the time remaining in the programmed
Medium Voltage Solid State Starter (MVSSS). Soft- pulldown period.
ware version C.OPT.01.15.307 (or later) is required for
Input Power
MVSSS applications.
Displays the kilowatts measured by and transmitted
from the starter.
DISPLAY ONLY
KW Hours
Motor Run (LED) Displays the cumulative kilowatt hours. The mi-
Indicates when the OptiView Control Center is com- croboard calculates this value from the Input Power
manding the motor to run. transmitted from the starter. When the number exceeds
999999 KWH, the value will rollover to zero.
Displays the motor current as a percentage of Job Full Voltage – Phase A, B, C
Load Amps Setpoint. Displays the 3-phase input line voltage as measured by
and transmitted from the starter.
Current Limit Setpoint
Displays the current limit in use. This value could Current – Phase A, B, C
come from a 0 to 20mA, 4 to 20mA, 0 to 10VDC or 2 Displays the 3-phase motor current as measured by and
to 10VDC input in Analog Remote mode, PWM signal transmitted from the starter.
ISN Remote mode or a locally programmed value in Starter Model
Local mode. Displays the starter model number as transmitted from
the starter.
JOHNSON CONTROLS 89
FORM 160.54-O1
For fields requiring access level of SER- Full Load Amps

OptiView Control Center - Service Instruc- Defines the maximum amps at which the motor can
tions (Form 160.54-M1) for operation operate. This value is viewable when logged in at at
instructions and explanation of all pro- OPERATOR or VIEW access level.
Starting Current
PROGRAMMABLE Defines the maximum allowed motor starting amps.
The starter will limit the starting current to this value.
Access Level Required: OPERATOR KWH Reset
Allows the user to specify the maximum allowed mo- Access Level Required: SERVICE
tor current (as a percentage of FLA). When the motor Allows the user to reset the cumulative Kilowatt hours.
current reaches this value, the Pre-rotation Vanes will
rises above this value, the Pre-rotation Vanes close to NAVIGATION
reduce the current to this value.
Home
Pulldown Demand Limit Access Level Required: VIEW
Access Level Required: OPERATOR Returns user to HOME Screen.
percentage of FLA) to which the chiller will be limited Motor Lube
during the specified pulldown time. This value will Access Level Required: VIEW
override the Motor Current Limit Setpoint during this Moves to a subscreen allowing operator acknowledge-
time period. The Pre-rotation Vanes are used to limit ment of the compressor motor lubrication and viewing
the motor current to this value. of the compressor motor lubrication parameters.
Pulldown Demand Time Motor Details

Access Level Required: OPERATOR (Software version C.OPT.01.22.307 and later)
Allows the user to set the period of time for which the Access Level Required: SERVICE
pulldown demand limit will be in effect. Moves to a subscreen that provides information and
90 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.54-O1
VARIABLE SPEED DRIVE SCREEN
00312VIPa
Figure 30 - VARIABLE SPEED DRIVE SCREEN
OVERVIEW Output Voltage

This screen displays information pertaining to a Vari- Displays the output voltage measured to the motor.
able Speed Drive (VSD).
Output Frequency
Displays the present output frequency to the motor.
DISPLAY ONLY
Output Current – Phase A, B, C
Motor Run (LED) Displays the phase current measured to the motor.
commanding the motor to RUN. Input Power
Displays the total kilowatts measured by the VSD or
Motor Current % Full Load Amps Harmonic Filter, if installed.
Load Amps (FLA) value. KW Hours
Displays the cumulative amount of kilowatts used over
Current Limit Setpoint time as the VSD motor controller operates.
Displays the current limit value in use. This value could
come from a 0 to 20mA, 4 to 20mA, 0 to 10VDC or 2 Pre-rotation Vane Position
to 10VDC input in Analog Remote mode, PWM signal Displays the Pre-rotation Vane position as a value be-
in Digital Remote mode, E-Link Gateway interface in tween 0 and 100%.
Pulldown Demand Time Left

Displays the time remaining in the programmed
pulldown period if the value is nonzero.
JOHNSON CONTROLS 91
FORM 160.54-O1
Harmonic Filter Data kWH Reset

(Harmonic Filter installed Only) Access Level Required: ADMIN
Supply kVA Allows the user to reset the cumulative Kilowatt hours
Displays the supply kVA measured by the filter. to zero (0).
Total Power Factor Filter Inhibit (Harmonic Filter installed Only)

Displays the relationship between the Input Power and Access Level Required: SERVICE
the Supply kVA. Disable the filter logic from activating, although the
system will still communicate with the device. Only
Voltage Total Harmonic Distortion – (L1, L2, L3) available when chiller is stopped.
Displays the Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) for
each of the voltage lines as calculated by the filter.
NAVIGATION
Supply Current Total Demand Distortion –
Home
(L1, L2, L3)
Displays the Total Dynamic Distortion (TDD) for each
of the supply current lines as calculated by the filter.
For fields requiring access level of SER- VSD Details
VICE. Service Technicians refer to the Access Level Required: VIEW
OptiView Control Center - Service Instruc- Moves to the subscreen which provides more informa-
tions (Form 160.54-M1) for operation tion about the Variable Speed Drive.
grammable setpoints and displayed values. ACC Details
Moves to the subscreen which provides more informa-
PROGRAMMABLE tion about the Adaptive Capacity Control.
Local Motor Current Limit Filter Details (Harmonic Filter installed Only)
Allows the user to specify the maximum allowed mo- Moves to the subscreen which provides more informa-
tor current (as a percentage of FLA). When the motor tion about the Harmonic Filter.
not be permitted to open further. If the motor current Motor Lube
rises above this value, the Pre-rotation Vanes will close (Software version C.MLM.01.14.xxx (and later) or
to reduce the current to this value. C.OPT.01.14.306 (and later))
Moves to the subscreen allowing operator acknowl-
edgement of the compressor motor lubrication and
Allows the user to specify the current limit value (as a viewing of the compressor motor lubrication param-
percentage of FLA) to which the chiller will be limited eters.
will override the Motor Current Limit value during this Motor Details
time period. This function is used to provide energy (Software version C.OPT.01.22.307 and later)
savings following chiller start-up. Access Level Required: SERVICE
Moves to a subscreen that provides information and
Pulldown Demand Time
Allows the user to set a period of time for which the
starts.
92 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.54-O1
MEDIUM VOLTAGE VARIABLE SPEED DRIVE SCREEN

(SOFTWARE VERSION C.OPT.01.16.XXX AND LATER)
LD14337a
Figure 31 - M
EDIUM VOLTAGE VARIABLE SPEED DRIVE SCREEN (SOFTWARE VERSION C.OPT.01.16.
XXX AND LATER)
OVERVIEW Pulldown Demand Time Left

This screen displays information pertaining to a Me- Displays the time remaining in the programmed
dium Voltage Variable Speed Drive (MV VSD). Screen pulldown period if the value is not zero.
shown above is as it appears in software version
Output Voltage
C.OPT.01.20.307 (and later). For details of MV VSD
operation and setpoints, refer to Medium Voltage Vari- Displays the output voltage to the motor. Value is pro-
able Speed Drive – Service (Form 160.00-M6). vided by the MV VSD.
Output Frequency
DISPLAY ONLY Displays the present output frequency to the motor.
Value is provided by the MV VSD.
Motor Run (LED)
Indicates whether the digital output from the controls is Input Power
commanding the chiller to run. Displays the total kilowatts measured by the MV VSD.
Value is provided by the MV VSD.
Displays the motor current as a percentage of the Full KW Hours
Load Amps (FLA). Displays the cumulative amount of kilowatts used over
time as the VSD motor operates. Value is calculated
Current Limit Setpoint by the OptiView Control Center from the Input Power
Displays the current limit value in use. This value could value provided from the MV VSD.
ISN mode or a locally programmed value.
JOHNSON CONTROLS 93
FORM 160.54-O1
Pre-rotation Vanes Position Table 2 - VOLTAGE (V)

Displays the Pre-rotation Vane position as a value be- MOTOR RATED VOLTAGE (V)
tween 0 and 100%. 2300 V 3300 V 4160 V
500 107 A 78 A 62 A
Output Current
600 129 A 93 A 74 A
Displays the average of the 3-phase output current to
700 157 A 110 A 87 A
the motor. Value is provided by the MV VSD.
800 172 A 124 A 99 A
Input Voltage 900 202 A 141 A 112 A
Displays the average of the 3-phase input voltage to the Model in 1000 224 A 156 A 125 A
MV VSD. Value is provided by the MV VSD. HP 1250 280 A 195 A 155 A
1500 336 A 235 A 186 A
VSD Cooling Fans Output (LED) 1750 392 A 274 A 217 A
Illuminates when the VSD cooling fans are being com- 2000 438 A 312 A 248 A
manded to run.
2250 494 A 345 A 274 A
Precharge Relay Output (LED) 2500 561 A 391 A 310 A

Max. Job/Rated 100% FLA (A) (Programmed Drive Current)
Illuminates when the pre-charge relay is commanded
to energize.
Motor Voltage Rating
Output Current (Phase A, B, C) Displays the voltage rating of the MV VSD as re-
Displays the three phases of output current to the motor. ceived from the MV VSD. With software version
C.OPT.01.20.307 (and later), this is the Motor Voltage
DC Bus Voltage (Phase A, B, C) Rating (Modbus Address 40012) as received from the
Displays the three phases of DC Bus voltage MV VSD. Displayed as 1300V, 3300V or 4160V. If an
invalid value is received, Invalid is displayed and the
MV VSD Model chiller will not be allowed to run.
Displays the model number as received from the MV
Output Frequency Rating
VSD. The model number is displayed as a number rep-
resenting the horsepower rating (ie; 1500HP). With (Software version C.OPT.01.20.307 and later)
software version C.OPT.01.20.307 (and later), it is de- This is the rated output frequency (Modbus Address
rived from the Motor Rated Voltage (Modbus Address 40033), as received from the MV VSD. This value is
40012) and the Programmed Drive Current (Modbus the maximum drive frequency (Hz) when the MV VSD
Address 40013) values received from the MV VSD ac- receives a 100% speed command from the OptiView
cording to the following table. If this results in a model Control Center. If the value received is not 50Hz or
that is not defined in the lookup table, the model num- 60Hz, INVALID is displayed. If this is the case, then
ber is displayed as INVALID and the chiller will not be the Motor Voltage Rating (above) determines the maxi-
allowed to run while this is displayed mum frequency as follows:
Motor Voltage Rating Output Frequency Rating
2300 or 4160V 60Hz
3300V 50Hz
94 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.54-O1
For fields requiring access level of SER- C.OPT.01.20.307 (and later), the maximum program-
VICE. Service Technicians refer to the mable value of this setpoint is equal to Programmed
OptiView Control Center - Service Instruc- Drive Current (Modbus Address 40013) value received
tions (Form 160.54-M1) for operation from the MV VSD. In previous software versions, it
instructions and explanation of all pro- was derived from a lookup table based on the Motor
grammable setpoints and displayed values. Rated Voltage and MV VSD Model.
2
KWH Reset
PROGRAMMABLE Access Level Required: SERVICE
Allows the user to reset the cumulative Kilowatt hours
Local Motor Current Limit to zero.
Allows the user to specify the maximum allowed mo-
tor current (as a percentage of FLA). When the motor NAVIGATION
not be permitted to open further. If the motor current Home
rises above this value, the Pre-rotation Vanes will close Access Level Required: VIEW
to reduce the current to this value. Returns user to HOME Screen.
Pulldown Demand Limit ACC Details

Access Level Required: OPERATOR Access Level Required: SERVICE
Allows the user to specify the current limit value (as Moves to a subscreen which provides more informa-
percentage of FLA) to which the chiller will be limited tion about the Adaptive Capacity Control.
will override the Motor Current Limit value during this Motor Lube
time period. This function is used to provide energy Moves to a subscreen allowing operator acknowledge-
savings following chiller start-up. ment of the compressor motor lubrication and viewing
of the compressor motor lubrication parameters.
Access Level Required: OPERATOR Motor Details
Allows the user to set a period of time for which the (Software version C.OPT.01.22.307 and later)
pulldown demand limit will be in effect after the chiller Access Level Required: SERVICE
starts. Moves to a subscreen that provides information and
Full Load Amps
Defines the maximum amps at which the motor can
operate this value is viewable when logged in at
VIEW or OPERATOR level. With software version
JOHNSON CONTROLS 95
FORM 160.54-O1
96 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.54-O1
VARIABLE SPEED DRIVE (VSD) DETAILS SCREEN

(STYLE D VSD AND VSD WITH PART NUMBER 371-03789-XXX (503 HP 60HZ; 410HP 50HZ))
LD09096
Figure 32 - V
ARIABLE SPEED DRIVE (VSD) DETAILS SCREEN (STYLE D VSD AND VSD WITH PART
NUMBER 371-03789-XXX (503 HP 60HZ; 410HP 50HZ))
OVERVIEW Current Limit Setpoint

This screen displays more detailed information pertain- Displays the current limit value in use. This value could
ing to a Variable Speed Drive (VSD). Flash Memory come from a 0 to 20mA, 4 to 20mA, 0 to 10VDC or 2
Card version C.MLM.01.08.xxx and later is required to 10VDC input in Analog Remote mode, PWM signal
for VSD part number 371-03789-xxx (503HP 60Hz; in Digital Remote mode, E-Link Gateway interface in
419HP 50Hz). ISN mode, or a locally programmed value.
Requires a login access level of SERVICE. Pulldown Demand Time Left
Service Technicians refer to the OptiView Displays the time remaining in the programmed
Control Center - Service Instructions pulldown period if the value is nonzero.
tions and explanation of all programmable Water Pump Output (LED)
setpoints and displayed values. Indicates whether the relay controlling the water pump
output is energized.
DISPLAY ONLY Precharge Relay Output (LED)
Motor Run (LED) Indicates whether the relay controlling the precharge
Indicates whether the digital output from the controls is output is energized.
Trigger SCR Output (LED)
Motor Current % Full Load Amps Indicates whether the relay controlling the Trigger
Displays the motor current as a percentage of the Full SCR Output is energized.
Load Amps (FLA) value. For the Variable Speed Drive
this is the data returned by the VSD Logic Board.
JOHNSON CONTROLS 97
FORM 160.54-O1
DC Bus Voltage PROGRAMMABLE

Displays the DC Bus voltage as reported by the VSD.
DC Inverter Link Current Access Level Required: OPERATOR
Displays the DC Inverter link current as reported by Allows the user to specify the maximum allowed mo-
the VSD. tor current (as a percentage of FLA). When the motor
Internal Ambient Temperature not be permitted to open further. If the motor current
Displays the ambient temperature inside the VSD cabi- rises above this value, the Pre-rotation Vanes will close
net as reported by the VSD. to reduce the current to this value.
Converter Heatsink Temperature Pulldown Demand Limit

Displays the heatsink temperature of the converter as
reported by the VSD. Allows the user to specify the current limit value (as a
Heatsink Temperature – Phase A, B, C during the specified pulldown limit time. This value
(Labeled Baseplate Temperatures on VSD with part will override the Motor Current Limit value during this
number 371-03789-xxx (503HP 60Hz; 419HP 50Hz). time period. This function is used to provide energy
Displays the heatsink (baseplate) temperature of each savings following chiller start-up.
of the 3-phase voltage regulators as reported by the
VSD.
VSD Model Allows the user to set a period of time for which the
Access Level Required: SERVICE pulldown demand limit will be in effect after the chiller
Displays the horsepower configuration of the Variable starts.
Speed Drive control.
NAVIGATION
100% Full Load Amps
Displays the Full Load Amps value as reported by the Home
VSD. Access Level Required: VIEW
For fields requiring access level of SER- Returns user to HOME Screen.
OptiView Control Center - Service Instruc- VSD
tions (Form 160.54-M1) for operation Access Level Required: VIEW
instructions and explanation of all pro- Returns user to VSD Screen.
98 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.54-O1
VARIABLE SPEED DRIVE (VSD) DETAILS SCREEN

(VSD WITH PART NUMBER 371-02767-XXX (60HZ) OR 371-03700-XXX (50HZ))
00665VIP
Figure 33 - V
ARIABLE SPEED DRIVE (VSD) DETAILS SCREEN (VSD WITH PART NUMBER 371-02767-XXX
(60HZ) OR 371-03700-XXX (50HZ))

This screen displays more detailed information pertaining Displays the current limit value in use. This value could
to a Variable Speed Drive (VSD). come from a 0 to 20mA, 4 to 20mA, 0 to 10VDC or 2
Requires a login access level of SERVICE. in Digital Remote mode, E-Link Gateway interface in
Service Technicians refer to the OptiView ISN mode, or a locally programmed value.
(Form 160.54-M1) for operation instruc- Pulldown Demand Time Left
tions and explanation of all programmable Displays the time remaining in the programmed
setpoints and displayed values. pulldown period if the value is nonzero.
Water Pump Output (LED)

DISPLAY ONLY Indicates whether the relay controlling the water pump
Motor Run (LED) output is energized.
Precharge Relay Output (LED)
Indicates whether the relay controlling the precharge
Motor Current % Full Load Amps output is energized.
Trigger SCR Output (LED)
this is the data returned by the VSD Logic Board. Indicates whether the relay controlling the Trigger
SCR Output is energized.
JOHNSON CONTROLS 99
FORM 160.54-O1
DC Bus Voltage PROGRAMMABLE

Displays the DC Bus voltage as reported by the VSD.
DC Inverter Link Current Access Level Required: OPERATOR
Displays the DC Inverter link current as reported by Allows the user to specify the maximum allowed mo-
the VSD. tor current (as a percentage of FLA). When the motor
Internal Ambient Temperature not be permitted to open further. If the motor current
Displays the ambient temperature inside the VSD cabi- rises above this value, the Pre-rotation Vanes will close
net as reported by the VSD. to reduce the current to this value.
Converter Heatsink Temperature Pulldown Demand Limit

Displays the heatsink temperature of the converter as
reported by the VSD. Allows the user to specify the current limit value (as a
Baseplate Temperature during the specified pulldown limit time. This value
Displays the baseplate temperature of the 3-phase volt- will override the Motor Current Limit value during this
age regulators as reported by the VSD. time period. This function is used to provide energy
VSD Model
Displays the horsepower configuration of the Variable
Speed Drive control. Allows the user to set a period of time for which the
100% Full Load Amps starts.
Displays the Full Load Amps value as reported by the
VSD. NAVIGATION
VICE. Service Technicians refer to the Home
OptiView Control Center - Service Instruc- Access Level Required: VIEW
tions (Form 160.54-M1) for operation Returns user to HOME Screen.
grammable setpoints and displayed values. VSD
Returns user to VSD Screen.
100 JOHNSON CONTROLS

FORM 160.54-O1
ADAPTIVE CAPACITY CONTROL DETAILS SCREEN

(SOFTWARE VERSION C.OPT.01.18.307 AND EARLIER) (VSD AND MV VSD)
LD12572
Figure 34 - A
DAPTIVE CAPACITY CONTROL DETAILS SCREEN (SOFTWARE VERSION C.OPT.01.18.307
AND EARLIER) (VSD AND MV VSD)

This screen displays more detailed information per- Displays the current limit value in use. This value could
taining to a Adaptive Capacity Control (ACC). come from a 0 to 20mA, 4 to 20mA, 0 to 10VDC or 2
Requires a login access level of SERVICE. in Digital Remote mode, E-Link Gateway interface in
Service Technicians refer to the OptiView ISN mode, or a locally programmed value.
(Form 160.54-M1) for operation instruc- Pulldown Demand Time Left
tions and explanation of all programmable Displays the time remaining in the programmed
setpoints and displayed values. pulldown period if the value is nonzero.
VSD Output Frequency

DISPLAY ONLY Displays the frequency at which the VSD is operating
Motor Run (LED) the motor.
Pre-rotation Vane Position
Displays the Pre-rotation Vane position as a value be-
Motor Current % Full Load Amps tween 0 and 100%.
ACC Surge Count
this is the data returned by the VSD. The total number of surge conditions detected by the
Adaptive Capacity Control. The surge events detected
by the Surge Protection feature are not included in this
total.
JOHNSON CONTROLS 101

FORM 160.54-O1
Delta P/P Manual Surge Point

The value calculated by the Condenser and Evaporator This key will force the ACC to map a surge detection
pressures as reported by the Adaptive Capacity Control. at the present operating conditions. Mapping a point at
For fields requiring access level of SER- these conditions will cause the ACC to make adjust-
VICE. Service Technicians refer to the ments to the Command Frequency in the future in or-
OptiView Control Center - Service Instruc- der to prevent the chiller from operating at the condi-
tions (Form 160.54-M1) for operation tions mapped. USE WITH CAUTION.
ACC Auto Map Print (Enabled / Disabled)
The chiller monitors the ACC communications and
when a surge point is mapped, a short report of system
PROGRAMMABLE parameters is printed. When this function is active, all
other printing capability is disabled.
Allows the user to specify the maximum allowed mo- ACC Map Report
tor current (as a percentage of FLA). When the motor The chiller requests the entire surge map from the
current reaches this value, the Pre-rotation Vanes will ACC. As the map is received, the parameters for each
not be permitted to open further. If the motor current point are printed.
rises above this value, the Pre-rotation Vanes will close
to reduce the current to this value. Surge Map Clear
This key instructs the ACC to clear all of the surge
Pulldown Demand Limit points presently mapped. This key will require confir-
Allows the user to specify the current limit value (as a mation of its selection by entry of a special password.
percentage of FLA) to which the chiller will be limited USE WITH CAUTION.
will override the Motor Current Limit value during this
NAVIGATION
savings following chiller start-up. Home
pulldown demand limit will be in effect after the chiller VSD
starts. Access Level Required: VIEW
Surge Sensitivity
Allows the user to define the surge detection sensitivity
of the ACC Surge Detection.
Surge Margin Adjust

When the ACC maps a surge point, it will begin to
adjust the chiller Command Frequency and vane con-
trols at a certain Margin from the mapped point. This
programmable value allows the Service Technician to
modify the Margin at which these adjustments will be-
gin to take place.

FORM 160.54-O1

YORK PROTOCOL CONFIGURATION
LD14338
Figure 35 - A
DAPTIVE CAPACITY CONTROL DETAILS SCREEN YORK PROTOCOL CONFIGURATION

This screen displays detailed information pertaining % Full Load Amps
to the Adaptive Capacity Control (ACC). It is shown
Displays the motor current as a percentage of chiller
above with the OptiView-to-VSD serial communica-
Full Load Amps as calculated by the microboard from
tions hardware/interface in the York Protocol Configu-
current values returned from the drive Logic Board.
ration (Service Technicians refer to OptiView Control
Center – Service Instructions (Form 160.54-M1) to de- Current Limit Setpoint
termine existing hardware/interface configuration). This
Displays the current limit setpoint value in use. This
configuration was used in new production chillers prior
value could come from a 0 to 20mA, 4 to 20mA, 0 to
to March 2007. In this configuration, the microboard
10VDC or 2 to 10VDC input in Analog Remote mode,
communicates with the VSD Logic Board via the ACC
PWM input in Digital Remote mode, E-Link Gateway
Board using YORK protocol serial communications.
interface in ISN Remote mode or locally programmed
The ACC Board performs the ACC function. The Mo-
value in Local mode.
tor Communications Protocol Setpoint (on the SETUP
Screen) is set to YORK in this configuration. Motor Run (LED)
Requires a login access level of SERVICE. Illuminated when the Control Center is commanding
Service Technicians refer to the OptiView the drive to run. Otherwise, it is extinguished.
(Form 160.54-M1) for operation instruc- Output Frequency
tions and explanation of all programmable Displays the frequency at which the drive is operating
setpoints and displayed values. the motor. This value is provided by the drive Logic
Board.

FORM 160.54-O1
Pre-rotation Vanes Position Auto Map Print (Enable/Disable)

Displays the present Pre-rotation Vane position as a When enabled, the ACC surge map values from the
value between 0% (closed) and 100% (full open). This ACC Board are printed to a connected printer each
value is provided by the ACC Board. time a surge point is mapped, as shown in SECTION
4 - PRINTING of this manual.
Delta P/P
Displays chiller head pressure calculated as (condenser Manual Surge Point
pressure - evaporator pressure/evaporator pressure). Allows the Service Technician to manually log the
This value is calculated by the ACC Board. present running operating conditions into the surge
map (in the ACC Board) as a valid surge point. When
Temperature Differential (LCHLT – Setpoint) this key is pressed, a dialog box appears requesting a
Displays the difference between the Leaving Chilled special password to proceed.
Liquid Temperature and the Leaving Chilled Liquid
Temperature Setpoint. Surge Map Print
Allows the Service Technician to print the entire surge
Command Frequency map from the ACC Board to a connected printer, as
This is only displayed in Manual Speed Control mode shown in SECTION 4 - PRINTING of this manual.
and it is the speed command being sent to the ACC
Board in Manual Speed Control mode. Surge Map Clear
Allows the Service Technician to clear the surge map
ACC Surge Count stored in the ACC Board. When this key is pressed,
This count is provided by the ACC Board. Increments a dialog box appears requesting a special password to
each time the ACC Board detects a surge, whether run- proceed.
ning at maximum or less than maximum frequency.
For fields requiring access level of SER- NAVIGATION
OptiView Control Center - Service Instruc- Home
instructions and explanation of all pro- Returns user to HOME Screen.
VSD
PROGRAMMABLE Returns user to VSD Screen.
Surge Margin Adjust
This value determines how close the frequency reduc-
tion will be allowed to get to the surge line. It is sent to
the ACC Board. Programmable over the range of 0.0
(default) to 25.0Hz. Service Technicians should refer
to Variable Speed Drive – Service Instructions (Form
160.00-M4) prior to adjusting this setpoint.

FORM 160.54-O1

MODBUS PROTOCOL CONFIGURATION (SOFTWARE VERSION C.OPT.01.19.307 AND LATER)
LD14339
Figure 36 - A
DAPTIVE CAPACITY CONTROL DETAILS SCREEN MODBUS PROTOCOL CONFIGURATION

This screen displays detailed information pertaining
to the Adaptive Capacity Control (ACC). It is shown
above with the OptiView-to-VSD serial communica-
tions hardware/interface in the Modbus Protocol Con-
figuration (Service Technicians refer to OptiView Con-
trol Center – Service Instructions (Form 160.54-M1)
to determine existing hardware/interface configuration).
DISPLAY ONLY
This configuration is used in new production chillers af-
ter March 2007. In this configuration, the microboard % Full Load Amps
communicates directly with the VSD Logic Board us- Displays the motor current as a percentage of chiller
ing MODBUS protocol serial communications. The Full Load Amps as calculated by the microboard from
Microboard performs the ACC function and the ACC current values returned from the drive Logic Board.
Board is not present. The Motor Communications Proto-
col Setpoint (on the SETUP Screen) is set to MODBUS Current Limit Setpoint
in this configuration. Due to service parts replacement, Displays the current limit setpoint value in use. This
earlier production chillers could be in the MODBUS value could come from a 0 to 20mA, 4 to 20mA, 0 to
configuration. All Medium Voltage Variable Speed 10VDC or 2 to 10VDC input in Analog Remote mode,
Drives (MV VSD) use MODBUS protocol. PWM input in Digital Remote mode, E-Link Gateway
interface in ISN Remote mode or locally programmed
value in Local mode.

FORM 160.54-O1
Motor Run (LED) ACC Surge Count

Illuminated when the Control Center is commanding Increments when a surge is detected while the drive is
the drive to run. Otherwise, it is extinguished. running at less than maximum frequency.
Output Frequency Surge Map Point Count

Displays the frequency at which the drive is operating Displays the total number of data points contained in
the motor. This value is returned from the drive Logic the surge map.
Board. For fields requiring access level of SER-
Displays the present Pre-rotation Vane position as a tions (Form 160.54-M1) for operation
value between 0% (closed) and 100% (full open). instructions and explanation of all pro-
Delta P/P
Displays chiller head pressure calculated as (condenser
pressure - evaporator pressure/evaporator pressure). PROGRAMMABLE
This value is calculated by the Microboard.
VSD Start Frequency
Temperature Differential (LCHLT – Setpoint) (Software version C.OPT.01.21.307 and later)
Displays the difference between the Leaving Chilled Sets the starting frequency from which the ramp-up
Liquid Temperature and the Leaving Chilled Liquid will begin. Programmable over the following range:
Temperature Setpoint.
• 60Hz units – 30Hz to 60Hz (default 45Hz)
Command Frequency • 60Hz units with Quick Restart – 30Hz to 45Hz
This is the speed command being sent to the Drive (default 45Hz)
Logic Board in either Auto or Manual Speed Control
mode. • 50Hz units – 25Hz to 50Hz (default 37.5Hz)
• 50Hz units with Quick Restart – 25Hz to 37.5Hz
Speed Decrease Inhibit – Surge Map Point (LED)
(default 37.5Hz)
Illuminates when the Microboard ACC function is un-
able to reduce speed due to a mapped surge point. Oth- ACC Mapping Enable
erwise, it is extinguished. (Software version C.OPT.01.21.307 and later)
Sets the Delta T (Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature
Mapping Inhibited (LED) - Setpoint) needed to be met to enable surge mapping
Illuminates when the Microboard ACC function is not and speed reduction initially on startup. Programmable
permitted to map points or reduce speed due to unsta- over the range of 0.5°F to 4.0°F (default 1.0°F). With
ble Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature, manual speed software version C.OPT.01.23.307 (and later), the
control, current limit in effect (chiller FLA only) or dur- range is 0.5°F to 20.0°F.
ing Soft Shutdown (software version C.OPT.01.21.307
and later). Otherwise, it is extinguished. Surge Margin Adjust
This value determines how close the frequency reduc-
ACC Surge Detected (LED) tion will be allowed to get to the surge line. Program-
Illuminates momentarily when a surge is detected by mable over the range of 0.0 (default) to 25.0Hz. Ser-
the ACC function in the Microboard, while the drive is vice Technicians should refer to Variable Speed Drive
running at less than maximum frequency. – Service Instructions (Form 160.00-M4) prior to ad-
justing this setpoint.
Surge Avoidance Surge Detected (LED)
the Surge Protection feature. This feature only detects
surges that occur while the drive is running at maxi-
mum frequency.

FORM 160.54-O1
Surge Sensitivity Surge Map Clear

Allows the Service Technician to adjust the sensitivity Allows the Service Technician to clear the surge map.
of the ACC Surge Detection in the Microboard (surges When this key is pressed, a dialog box appears request-
that occur while the drive is running at less than maxi- ing a special password to proceed.
mum frequency). Programmable over the range of 1.5
to 2.5 with default of 2.0. Smaller values increase the
sensitivity. NAVIGATION 2
Home
Auto Map Print (Enable/Disable)
When enabled, the ACC surge map values are printed to
a connected printer each time a surge point is mapped,
as shown in SECTION 4 - PRINTING of this manual. VSD
Manual Surge Point
Allows the Service Technician to manually log the
present running operating conditions into the surge Surge Map
map as a valid surge point. When this key is pressed, Access Level Required: SERVICE
a dialog box appears requesting a special password to
Causes a jump to the subscreen that displays the surge
proceed.
map.
Surge Map Print
Allows the Service Technician to print the entire surge
map to a connected printer, as shown in SECTION 4 -
PRINTING of this manual.

FORM 160.54-O1

FORM 160.54-O1
SURGE MAP SCREEN - TABLE VIEW

LD15430
Figure 37 - SURGE MAP SCREEN - TABLE VIEW (SOFTWARE VERSION C.OPT.01.19.307 AND LATER)
OVERVIEW ent) and Medium Voltage Variable Speed Drives (MV

VSD). It is not accessible if equipped with a VSD in
The surge map can be shown in either Table (default) or
YORK Motor Communications Protocol Setpoint con-
List view as selected with the MAP VIEW key. Shown
figuration (ACC Board is present).
above is the Table View.
In this view, a table is used to graphically represent the
surge map in the view window. The X-Axis is Delta
P/P, the Y-Axis is Pre-rotation Vanes position and each
drive frequency point in the surge map is represented
by an “X”. To view the details of any mapped point,
position the green box (□) over the desired “X” using
the keypad arrow keys (▲▼◄►). The drive Out-
put Frequency, Pre-rotation Vanes Position and Delta DISPLAY ONLY
P/P of the selected point is displayed at the bottom of
the screen under selected. The default position for the Mapping Inhibited (LED)
green box is in the upper left corner of the view win- Illuminates while the Microboard ACC function is not
dow. Once moved, it will remain at the last position. permitted to map points or reduce speed due to unsta-
The Present Operating conditions are indicated with an ble Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature, manual speed
“*” (as shown above) and are detailed at the bottom control, current limit in effect (chiller FLA only) or dur-
of the screen under present. If the present condition is ing Soft Shutdown (software version C.OPT.01.21.307
the same as a mapped point, the “*” will be replaced and later). Otherwise, it is extinguished.
by an “O”.
ACC Surge Detected (LED)
This screen is applicable to Variable Speed Drives Illuminates momentarily when a surge is detected by
(VSD) (with the Motor Communications Protocol the ACC function in the Microboard, while the drive is
Setpoint set to MODBUS; ACC Board is not pres- running at less than maximum frequency.

FORM 160.54-O1
Speed Decrease Inhibit – Surge Map Point PROGRAMMABLE

(LED)
Map View
Illuminates when the Microboard ACC function is not
permitted to reduce speed due to a mapped surge point. Allows a Service Technician to change the view from
Otherwise, it is extinguished. table to list.
Temperature Differential (LCHLT – Setpoint) Manual Surge Point

(Software version C.OPT.01.23.307 and later) Allows the Service Technician to manually log the
Displays the difference between the Leaving Chilled present running conditions into the surge map as a val-
Liquid Temperature and the Leaving Chilled Liquid id surge point. When this key is pressed, a dialog bog
Temperature Setpoint. appears requesting a special password to proceed.
Output Frequency Remove Surge Point

Selected: Displays the drive output frequency of the Allows the Service Technician to remove a mapped
selected surge point. surge point. When this key is pressed, a dialog box ap-
Present: Displays the present drive output frequency. pears requesting a special password to proceed. The
surge point is selected by placing the green box over
Pre-rotation Vanes Position the desired point. Then the REMOVE SURGE POINT
Selected: Displays the PRV position of the selected key is pressed to remove it.
surge point.
Present: Displays the present PRV position. NAVIGATION
Delta P/P Home
Selected: Displays the Delta P/P of the selected surge Access Level Required: SERVICE
point. Returns user to HOME Screen.
Present: Displays the present Delta P/P.
For fields requiring access level of SER- VSD
OptiView Control Center - Service Instruc- Returns user to VSD Screen.
instructions and explanation of all pro- ACC Details
grammable setpoints and displayed values. Access Level Required: SERVICE
Returns user to ACC Screen.

FORM 160.54-O1
SURGE MAP SCREEN - LIST VIEW

LD13833
Figure 38 - SURGE MAP SCREEN - LIST VIEW (SOFTWARE VERSION C.OPT.01.19.307 AND LATER)

The surge map can be shown in either Table (default)
or List view as selected with the MAP VIEW key.
Shown above is the List view. In this view, the Delta tions and explanation of all programmable
P/P, Pre-rotation Vanes position and VSD output fre- setpoints and displayed values.
quency of each mapped point are listed. It is the same
report that is generated when the surge map is printed
to a printer. Therefore, this view cannot be selected PROGRAMMABLE
while a print is in progress. If the SURGE MAP key is
Map View
pressed on the ACC DETAILS Screen while a print is
in progress, the Map View is reset to Table if it is set Allows the Service Technician to change the view from
to List. List to Table.
The PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN keypad keys are Page Up

used to scroll to the previous or next list of parameters. This key scrolls the contents of the view window up to
the previous list of parameters. If the window cannot
This screen is applicable to Variable Speed Drives be scrolled up, this key will not be displayed.
(VSD) (with the Motor Communications Protocol
Setpoint set to MODBUS; ACC Board is not pres- Page Down
ent) and Medium Voltage Variable Speed Drives (MV This key scrolls the contents of the view window to
VSD). It is not accessible if equipped with a VSD in the next list of parameters. If the window cannot be
YORK Motor Communications Protocol Setpoint con- scrolled down, this key is not displayed.
figuration (ACC Board is present).

FORM 160.54-O1
NAVIGATION ACC Details

Returns user to ACC DETAILS Screen.
Home
VSD

FORM 160.54-O1
HARMONIC FILTER DETAILS SCREEN
LD15431
Figure 39 - H
ARMONIC FILTER DETAILS SCREEN (STYLE D VSD AND VSD WITH PART NUMBER 371-
03789-XXX (503HP 60HZ; 419HP 50HZ)
OVERVIEW Pulldown Demand Time Left

This screen displays more detailed information per- Displays the time remaining in the programmed
taining to the IEEE-519 Harmonic Filter. pulldown period if the value is nonzero.
Operating Mode (Run / Stop)

DISPLAY ONLY Indicates whether the Harmonic Filter is operating.
Motor Run (LED) VSD Model
Indicates whether the digital output from the controls is Access Level Required: SERVICE
commanding the motor to RUN. Displays the horsepower for which the attached Har-
monic Filter is configured.
Displays the motor current as a percentage of the Full DC Bus Voltage
Load Amps (FLA) value. For the Variable Speed Drive Displays the DC Bus voltage as measured by the Har-
this is the data returned by the VSD Logic Board. monic Filter.
Current Limit Setpoint Supply Contactor (LED)

Displays the current limit value in use. This value could Indicates whether the output to the Supply Contactor
come from a 0 to 20mA, 4 to 20mA, 0 to 10VDC or 2 is energized.

FORM 160.54-O1
Precharge Contactor (LED) For fields requiring access level of SER-

Indicates whether the output to the Precharge Contactor VICE. Service Technicians refer to the
is energized. OptiView Control Center - Service Instruc-
Phase Rotation instructions and explanation of all pro-
Displays the phase rotation detected by the Harmonic grammable setpoints and displayed values.
Filter (A, B, C or C, B, A)
Total Supply kVA PROGRAMMABLE

Displays the total supply Kilovolt-Amps measured by Local Motor Current Limit
the Harmonic Filter.
Heatsink Temperature Allows the user to specify the maximum allowed mo-
tor current (as a percentage of FLA). When the motor
(Labeled Baseplate Temperatures on VSD with part
number 371-03789-xxx (503HP 60Hz; 419HP 50Hz).
Displays the temperature of the Harmonic Heatsink
(baseplate).
to reduce the current to this value.
Voltage Peak (N-L1, N-L2, N-L3)
Displays the 3-phase peak voltages as measured by the
Harmonic Filter (Neutral to Line).
RMS Voltage (L1-L2, L2-L3, L3-L1) percentage of FLA) to which the chiller will be limited
Displays the 3-phase RMS Voltages across each line.
will override the Motor Current Limit value during this
Voltage Total Harmonic Distortion (L1, L2, L3) time period. This function is used to provide energy
Displays the 3-phase voltage Total Harmonic Distor-
tion (THD) measurements. Pulldown Demand Time
RMS Filter Current (L1, L2, L3)
Displays the 3-phase filter current values as measured
by the Harmonic Filter.
starts.
Supply Current Total Demand Distortion
(L1, L2, L3) NAVIGATION
Displays the 3-phase Current Total Demand Distortion
(TDD) measurements. Home
RMS Supply Current (L1, L2, L3) Returns user to HOME Screen.
Displays the 3-phase RMS Voltages across each line.
VSD

FORM 160.54-O1
MOTOR LUBRICATION SCREEN
LD10702
Figure 40 - MOTOR LUBRICATION SCREEN
OVERVIEW Last Lubrication. This also clears any motor lubrica-

tion warning or safety that is in effect and resets the
(This feature applies to software version C.MLM.01.14.
operating hours since last lubrication to zero.
xxx (and later) or C.OPT.01.14.306 (and later) only)
If equipped with software version C.OPT.01.16.XXX
This feature provides an indication when the compres-
(or later), this lubrication notification and shutdown
sor motor lubrication is required. The lubrication re-
feature can be enabled or disabled based on the cus-
quirement and notification is based on the operating
tomer’s preference using the AUTO LUBE and SHUT-
hours since last motor lubrication. There are up to three
DOWN keys.
levels of notification, each indicating an increasing
level of urgency. WARNING – MOTOR BEARING
LUBE SUGGESTED is displayed when the hours ex- DISPLAY ONLY
ceed 1000 hours. If there is no response, WARNING –
MOTOR BEARING LUBE REQUIRED is displayed Date of Last Motor Lubrication Warning or
when the hours exceed 1200 hours. If there is still no Fault
response, a safety shutdown is performed when the Displays the date of the last motor lubrication warning
hours exceed 1400 hours and Motor – Lack Of Bearing or safety shutdown.
Lubrication is displayed. Refer to SECTION 3 - DIS-
PLAY MESSAGES on Page 175 of this manual for de- Date of Last Motor Lubrication
tails of these messages. Displays the date of the last motor lubrication. This pa-
rameter is automatically recorded when the Operator
To provide a record of when a motor lubrication is per- enters his/her initials, name or user ID using the MO-
formed, the Operator enters his/her initials, name or TOR LUBE ACKNOWLEDGE key.
user ID using the MOTOR LUBE ACKNOWLEDGE
key. The date and time of this entry is automatically
logged as the Date of Last Lubrication and Time of

FORM 160.54-O1
Time of Last Motor Lubrication 1. At the keypad, log in at OPERATOR access lev-
Displays the time of the last motor lubrication. This el using password 9 6 7 5. If resetting the safety
parameter is automatically recorded when the Operator shutdown Motor – Lack Of Lubrication, place
enters his/her initials, name or user ID using the MO- Compressor Switch in Stop-Reset (O) position.
TOR LUBE ACKNOWLEDGE key. 2. Press the MOTOR LUBE ACKNOWLEDGE key
on the MOTOR LUBRICATION Screen. A dialog
Operator Initials at Last Motor Lubrication
box appears. A red box highlights the first change-
Displays the initials, name or user ID entered by the able location.
Operator when the motor lubrication is performed. En-
tered as a 3 to 8 character string using the MOTOR 3. Use the ▲▼ keys to scroll sequentially through
LUBE ACKNOWLEDGE key. the alphabet to enter letters or numbers. Each time
the ▲ is pressed, the next higher sequential alpha-
Operating Hours Since Last Motor Lubrication bet letter or number is displayed. Each time the
Displays the run hours (in whole hours) accumulated ▼ is pressed, the next lower alphabet letter or
since the last motor lubrication. The value is reset to number is displayed. When the desired letter or
zero whenever the Operating hours (on the OPERA- number is displayed, use the ► key to forward
TIONS Screen) is reset to zero or whenever the Op- space the red box for the next entry. Use the
erator enters his/her initials, name or user ID using the ◄ key to backspace, if necessary. To write over an
MOTOR LUBE ACKNOWLEDGE key. existing entry or to place a blank space, scroll to
the beginning of the alphabet. The selection prior to
the letter A is a blank space. Use the ● key to enter
a period/decimal point. During the entry process,
if it is desired to exit the dialog box and retain the
previous entry, press the CANCEL (X) key.
grammable setpoints and displayed values. • When all of the desired characters have been en-
tered, press the ENTER () key.
PROGRAMMABLE Motor Lube Date

Motor Lube Acknowledge Allows modification of the Date of Last Motor Lubri-
Access Level Required: OPERATOR cation.
When the motor lubrication has been performed, the
Operator must acknowledge the lubrication has been Auto Lube
performed. This is done by entering his/her initials, (Software version C.OPT.01.16.XXX and later)
name or user ID as a 3 to 8 character string. The entry Access Level Required: SERVICE
is displayed as the Operator Initials at Last Lubrica- This setpoint accommodates those chillers that are
tion. The date and time of this entry is automatically equipped with the optional Automatic Motor Lubrica-
logged as the Date of Last Motor Lubrication and Time tion hardware that automatically lubricates the motor
of Last Motor Lubrication. This entry also resets the at regular intervals. Since chillers equipped with this
operating hours since last lubrication to zero. hardware don’t require manual lubrication, the lubri-
cation warnings displayed at 1000, 1200 and 1400
This entry also resets the motor lubrication warning
(safety shutdown) operating hours since last lubrica-
messages: WARNING – MOTOR BEARING LUBE
tion are unnecessary. Therefore, when the automatic
SUGGESTED, WARNING – MOTOR BEARING
lubrication hardware is present, this setpoint must be
LUBE REQUIRED and safety shutdown Motor – Lack
Enabled. With this setting, no lubrication warnings or
Of Bearing Lubrication.
safety shutdown will occur. If Disabled, as it should
Enter your initials, name or user ID using the following be when not equipped with the automatic lubrication
procedure. The entry must be a minimum of 3 charac- hardware, the motor lubrication warnings and safety
ters and a maximum of 8 characters. shutdown will occur at the associated operating hours.

FORM 160.54-O1
Shutdown NAVIGATION
(Software version C.OPT.01.16.XXX and later)
Home
If the Auto Lube Setpoint above is set to Disabled, the
Shutdown Setpoint is used to enable or disable the safe- Returns user to HOME Screen.
ty shutdown that occurs at 1400 operating hours since
last lubrication. The safety shutdown can be enabled or
Motor 2
disabled per the customer’s preference. If enabled, the
safety shutdown will occur at the normal 1400 hours. Returns user to MOTOR Screen.
If disabled, a warning will be displayed but the safety
shutdown will not occur.

FORM 160.54-O1

FORM 160.54-O1
MOTOR DETAILS SCREEN

LD10702a
Figure 41 - MOTOR DETAILS SCREEN (SOFTWARE VERSION C.OPT.01.22.307 AND LATER)

This screen displays information pertinent to the Mo- Motor Run (LED)
tor Monitoring feature. The feature consists of motor Illuminates when the OptiView Control Center is com-
winding temperature, motor bearing temperature, mo- manding the motor to run.
tor bearing vibration and motor cooling coil leak detec-
tion. Setpoints on this screen allow any combination %Full Load Amps
of these items to be enabled or disabled based on the Displays the motor current as a percentage of chiller
equipment applied. The motor could be equipped with Full Load Amps.
different types of sensors for this monitoring. Either
RTD's or Transmitters could be applied for winding Output Frequency
and bearing temperature monitoring. Motor cooling Only displayed when Motor Drive Type Setpoint is set
coil leak detection could be done with either an optical to any VSD. Displays the frequency at which the VSD
or float sensor. Setpoints on this screen allow for the is operating the motor. This value is returned from the
enabling of the actual sensor type applied. VSD Logic Board.
Vibration baseline data can be entered manually or by
running an auto baseline routine that plots a baseline Pre-rotation Vanes Position
over a 1 hour period while the chiller is running. If equipped with a Pro-rotation Vanes potentiomer, dis-
plays the present Pre-rotation Vanes position as a value
This screen also serves as a gateway to a subscreen that between 0% (closed) and 100% (full open).
allows programming of the winding High Tempera-
ture Warning/Safety Shutdown thresholds and bearing
High Temperature and High Vibration Warning/Safety
Shutdowns. Also, individual winding temperature sen-
sors can be disabled on this screen.

FORM 160.54-O1
Motor Windings Vibration

Temperature Displays the Shaft End and Opposite End vibration val-
Displays the enabled Motor Winding Temperatures for ues. The vibration values are not in any particular units
phase A, B and C. The setting of the Winding Tempera- of measure. They are relative values. The larger the
ture Protection Setpoint affects this display as follows: number, the greater the magnitude of vibration repre-
When winding RTD's are enabled, there are 2 tempera- sented. When the Motor Vibration Protection Setpoint
tures per phase displayed (otherwise, there is only 1 is set to Disabled, no vibration values are displayed
per phase). When set to Disabled, no temperatures are and the heading, text and data boxes do not appear.
displayed and the heading, text and data boxes do not
Vibration Baseline
appear. Individual temperatures can be disabled using
the Temperature Disable Setpoint (on the MOTOR Displays the Shaft End and Opposite End vibration
SETPOINTS Screen). When an individual temperature values established during the running of the auto base-
is disabled, the temperature data box does not appear. line routine using the AUTO BASELINE key or by
Any RTD input that registers as an open RTD is con- manual entry using the MANUAL BASELINE key.
sidered invalid and displays as XXX.X. The vibration values are not in any particular units of
measure. They are relative values. The larger the num-
Average Winding Temperature ber, the greater the magnitude of vibration represented.
This value is calculated as the average of all enabled These values also create the High Vibration Shutdown
and valid Motor Winding Temperatures. Any winding and High Vibration Warning thresholds as follows:
temperature that registers as open, out of range or dis- (NOTE: if the calculated value exceeds the minimum
abled is not used in the calculation. When RTD's are and maximum limits of the Shutdown (2.0 to 30.0) or
used for winding temperature measurement, there are a Warning (1.0 to 15.0) threshold, the threshold is set to
maximum of 6 temperatures used to calculate the aver- the respective upper or lower limit)
age. When transmitters are used, there are a maximum • Shaft End High Vibration Warning - Shaft End Vi-
of 3 temperatures used to calculate the average. The bration Baseline X2
text description and data box do not appear when the
Winding Temperature Protection Setpoint is set to dis- • Shaft End High Vibration Warning Default - Shaft
abled. End Vibration Baseline X2
• Opposite Shaft End High Vibration Warning - Op-
Motor Cooling Coil Leak Detected (LED)
posite End Vibration Baseline X2
Illuminates when the enabled Motor Cooling Coil Leak
Detector (refer to Motor Cooling Coil Leak Protection • Opposite Shaft End High Vibration Warning De-
on Page 122) indicates a leak. The LED and text default - Opposite End Vibration Baseline X2
scription do not appear when the Motor Cooling Coil • Shaft End High Vibration Shutdown - Shaft End
Leak Protection Setpoint is set to Disabled. Vibration Baseline X3
Motor Bearings • Shaft End High Vibration Shutdown Default -

Shaft End Vibration Baseline X3
Temperature
• Opposite Shaft End High Vibration Shutdown -
Displays the enabled Shaft End and Opposite End mo-
Opposite Shaft End Vibration Baseline X3
tor bearing temperatures. Any RTD input that registers
as an open RTD, is considered invalid and displays as • Opposite Shaft End High Vibration Shutdown De-
XXX.X. When the Bearing Temperature Protection fault - Opposite Shaft End Vibration Baseline X3
Setpoint is set to Disable, no temperatures are dis-
These automatically derived values can be overrid-
played and the heading, text and data boxes do not ap-
den by manually entering a threshold on the MOTOR
pear.
SETPOINTS Screen using the VIBRATION SETUP
key.

FORM 160.54-O1
If no baseline values are entered, by either the auto • TRANSMITTER - Enables and displays the 3
baseline routine or manual entry, the message WARN- Motor Winding Temperatures, as reported by the
ING – MOTOR – BEARING VIBRATION BASE- winding transmitters via the Motor Monitoring
LINE NOT SET is displayed and the baseline values Board serial communications.
are set to X.X while this message is displayed. When
• VSD TRANSMITTER - Enables and displays the
the Motor Vibration Protection Setpoint is set to Dis-
3 Motor Winding Temperatures, as reported by
abled, no baseline vibration values are displayed and
the winding transmitters via the VSD Logic Board
2
the heading, text and data boxes do not appear.
serial communications.
Auto Baseline Time Left Bearing Temperature Protection
Only appears when the auto baseline routine is run- Access Level Required: SERVICE
ning. Displays the time remaining in the 1 hour auto Enables the type of temperature sensing device being
baseline routine. used to sense motor bearing temperature. When set to
For fields requiring access level of SER- any setting other than Disabled, the respective temper-
VICE. Service Technicians refer to the atures are enabled, displayed and the HIGH BEARING
OptiView Control Center - Service Instruc- TEMPERATURE Fault and Warning will occur when
tions (Form 160.54-M1) for operation the programmed thresholds for those conditions are
instructions and explanation of all pro- reached. The settings are:
• DISABLED - Disables the Bearing Temperature
feature. No bearing temperatures are displayed
and the heading, text and data boxes do not ap-
PROGRAMMABLE
pear. The High Bearing Temperature Fault and
Winding Temperature Protection Warning will not occur. This setting is when if the
Access Level Required: SERVICE motor is not equipped with bearing temperature
Enables the type of temperature sensing device being sensors or if is desired to disable the feature for
used to sense motor winding temperature. When set service reasons. This is the default setting.
to any setting other than Disabled, the respective tem- • RTD - Enables and displays the 2 motor bearing
peratures are enabled, displayed and the HIGH WIND- temperatures, as reported by the bearing RTD's,
ING TEMPERATURE Fault and Warning will occur via the Motor Monitoring Board serial communi-
when the programmed thresholds for those conditions cations.
are reached. The settings are:
• VSD TRANSMITTER - Enables and displays the
• DISABLED - Disables the Winding Temperature 2 motor bearing temperatures, as reported by the
feature. No winding temperatures are displayed bearing transmitters via the VSD Logic Board se-
and the heading, text and data boxes do not ap- rial communications.
pear. The High Winding Temperature Fault and
Warning will not occur. This setting is used when Motor Vibration Protection
the motor is not equipped with winding tempera- Access Level Required: SERVICE
ture sensors or if is desired to disable the feature Enables and disables the Motor Bearing Vibration pro-
for service reasons. This is the default setting. The tection feature. When set to any setting other than Dis-
winding displays can be individually disabled us- abled, the respective vibration values are enabled, dis-
ing the Temperature Disable Setpoint (ADMIN ac- played and the HIGH BEARING VIBRATION fault
cess level) on the MOTOR SETPOINTS Screen. and Warnings will occur when the programmed thresh-
olds for those conditions are reached. The settings are:
• RTD - Enables and displays the 6 (2 per phase)
Motor Winding Temperatures, as reported by the • DISABLED - Disables the Bearing Vibration
winding RTD's, via the Motor Monitoring Board Protection feature. No bearing vibration values
serial communications. are displayed and the heading, text and data boxes
do not appear. The High Bearing Vibration Fault,
Warning and Baseline Not Set Warning will not
occur. This setting is used when the motor is not

FORM 160.54-O1
equipped with bearing vibration sensors or if is Manual Baseline (Motor Bearing Vibration)
desired to disable the feature for service reasons. Access Level Required: SERVICE
This is the default setting. Used to manually enter a vibration baseline value (0.1
• ROLLING ELEMENT - Enables and displays the to 5; default 2) for the Shaft End and Opposite Shaft
Bearing Vibration Protection feature. Displays the End bearings. The vibration values are not in any par-
Shaft End and Opposite Shaft End vibration val- ticular units of measure. They are relative values. The
ues as reported by the vibration sensors via the larger the number, the greater the magnitude of vibra-
Motor Monitoring Board serial communications. tion represented. Values entered appear on this screen
The Vibration Baseline values, created by either as the Vibration Baseline values. A special password is
manual entry or by running the auto baseline rou- required.
tine are shown, along with the AUTO BASELINE
Auto Baseline (Motor Bearing Vibration)
and AUTO BASELINE SETPOINT keys.
Motor Cooling Coil Leak Protection Used to run the auto baseline routine. Only allowed af-
Access Level Required: SERVICE ter the chiller has been running for greater than 2 min-
Enables the type of leak protection device being used utes. The vibration level of each bearing is indepen-
to detect a leak of the motor cooling coil. When set to dently averaged for 1 hour at 1 minute intervals while
any setting other than Disabled, an LED status indi- the chiller is running. While the routine is running, the
cator is displayed and the Motor Cooling Coil safety time remaining in the 1 hour routine is displayed as
fault will occur when the sensor indicates a leak. The auto baseline time left on this screen. At the comple-
settings are: tion of the routine, the derived values appear on the
screen as the Vibration Baseline values (0.1 - 5; default
• DISABLED - Disables the Motor Cooling Coil 2). The vibration values are not in any particular units
Leak Protection feature. The status LED and text of measure. They are relative values. The larger the
do not appear. The Motor Cooling Coil Leak fault number, the greater the magnitude of vibration repre-
will not occur. This setting is used when the mo- sented. A special password is required.
tor is not equipped with a leak detector or if it is
desired to disable this feature for service reasons.
This is the default setting. NAVIGATION
• OPTICAL - Enables the optical sensor digital Home

input and displays the leak status, as reported by Access Level Required: VIEW
the optical leak sensor, via the Motor Monitoring Returns user to HOME Screen.
Board serial communications.
Motor
• FLOAT - Enables the float sensor digital input and
displays the leak status, as reported by the float
Returns user to MOTOR Screen.
leak sensor, via the Motor Monitoring Board se-
rial communications.
Setpoints
Moves to a subscreen allowing programming of addi-
tional Motor Monitoring Setpoints.

FORM 160.54-O1
MOTOR SETPOINTS SCREEN

LD10702b
Figure 42 - MOTOR SETPOINTS SCREEN (SOFTWARE VERSION C.OPT.01.22.307 AND LATER)
OVERVIEW perature Protection Setpoint on the MOTOR DETAILS

Screen is set to Disabled.
This screen allows programming of the winding and
bearing High Temperature Warning/Safety Shutdown Winding Hotspot Allowance
thresholds and the High Vibration Warning/Safety
Shutdown thresholds, along with the vibration input Displays the Winding Hotspot Allowance temperature.
gain. Also, individual winding temperature sensors can Not shown when Winding Temperature Protection
be disabled on this screen. Setpoint on the MOTOR DETAILS Screen is set to
Disabled.
DISPLAY ONLY Motor Bearings

High Vibration Shutdown
Motor Windings
Displays the High Vibration safety shutdown threshold
Temperature
for the Shaft End and Opposite Shaft End bearings. Not
Displays the Enabled/Disabled status of each winding shown when the Motor Vibration Protection Setpoint
sensor. The TEMPERATURE DISABLE Setpoint key on MOTOR DETAILS Screen is set to Disabled. The
can be used to enable or disable individual winding threshold used for this setpoint will either be the val-
temperature sensors. Not shown when Winding Tem- ues entered by the Vibration Setup Setpoint or values
perature Protection Setpoint on the MOTOR DETAILS derived from the Vibration Baseline Setpoints (refer to
Screen is set to Disabled. Vibration Setup on Page 124). Also displayed is the
Delay, which is the amount of time the vibration must
High Winding Temperature Shutdown exceed the shutdown threshold before the shutdown
Displays the High Winding Temperature safety shut- occurs.
down threshold, as programmed with the WINDING
SETUP Setpoint key. Not shown when Winding Tem-

FORM 160.54-O1
High Vibration Warning sensors. The respective temperature data box reflects
Displays the High Vibration Warning threshold for enabled or disabled status. This could be applied to de-
the Shaft End and Opposite Shaft End bearings. Not fective sensors or for service reasons. When a sensor is
shown when the Motor Vibration Protection Setpoint disabled, the respective temperature data box does not
on MOTOR DETAILS Screen is set to Disabled. The appear on the MOTOR DETAILS Screen.
threshold used for this setpoint will either be the val-
Winding Setup
ues entered by the Vibration Setup Setpoint or values
derived from the Vibration Baseline Setpoints (refer to
Vibration Setup on Page 124). Also displayed is the Not shown when Winding Temperature Protection
Delay, which is the amount of time the vibration must Setpoint on MOTOR DETAILS Screen is set to Dis-
exceed the warning threshold before the warning is disabled. Allows a Service Technician to program the High
played. Winding Temperature (266 to 320°F; default 311) and
Winding Hotspot Allowance (0 to 18°F; default 0) safe-
Vibration Input Gain ty shutdown thresholds. Values entered are displayed in
the respective data boxes.
Displays the Vibration Input Gain value, as programmed
with the VIBRATION GAIN Setpoint key. Not shown Vibration Setup
when the Motor Vibration Protection Setpoint on MO- Access Level Required: SERVICE
TOR DETAILS Screen is set to Disabled.
Not shown when Motor Vibration Protection Setpoint on
High Bearing Temperature Shutdown MOTOR DETAILS Screen is set to Disabled.
Displays the High Bearing Temperature safety shut- Allows a Service Technician to program the High Vi-
down threshold, as programmed with the BEARING bration Shutdown (2.0 to 30; default Baseline X3) and
SETUP Setpoint key. Not shown when Bearing Tem- WARNING (1.0 to 15; default Baseline X2) thresh-
perature Protection Setpoint on MOTOR DETAILS olds for the Shaft End and Opposite Shaft End bear-
Screen is set to Disabled. ings, along with the desired delays (shutdown - 0 to 30
seconds, default 15; WARNING - 0 to 120 seconds;
High Bearing Temperature Warning default 30). The vibration thresholds are not in any par-
Displays the High Bearing Temperature warning ticular units of measure. They are relative values. The
threshold, as programmed with the BEARING SETUP larger the number, the greater the magnitude of vibra-
Setpoint key. Not shown when Bearing Temperature tion represented.
Protection Setpoint on MOTOR DETAILS Screen is The thresholds used for Shutdown and warning will
set to Disabled. be either the values entered by this Vibration Setup
For fields requiring access level of SER- Setpoint or values derived from the Vibration Base-
VICE. Service Technicians refer to the line Setpoints. The values used by the software depend
OptiView Control Center - Service Instruc- upon the sequence in which the setpoints are entered.
tions (Form 160.54-M1) for operation If Vibration Baseline values are established (on the
instructions and explanation of all pro- MOTOR DETAILS Screen with either the MANUAL
grammable setpoints and displayed values. BASELINE key or the AUTO BASELINE key) after
thresholds have been entered with the Vibration Setup
Setpoint, the baseline derived Shutdown and Warning
PROGRAMMABLE thresholds override the thresholds entered with the Vi-
bration Setup Setpoint. Thresholds entered with this
Temperature Disable Vibration Setup Setpoint, after baseline derived Shut-
Access Level Required: ADMIN down and Warning thresholds are entered, override
Only shown when access level is ADMIN and Wind- Baseline derived values. The active threshold values
ing Temperature Protection Setpoint on MOTOR DE- are displayed in the Motor Bearings High Vibration
TAILS Screen is not set to Disabled. Allows a Service Shutdown and High Vibration Warning data boxes on
Technician to disable individual winding temperature this screen.

FORM 160.54-O1
The Vibration Baseline values from which the Vibra- are set to X.X while this message is displayed. When
tion Shutdown and Warning thresholds are derived, the Motor Vibration Protection Setpoint is set to Dis-
are displayed on the MOTOR DETAILS Screen. The abled, no baseline vibration values are displayed and
thresholds are calculated from the Baseline values as the heading, text and data boxes do not appear.
follows: (NOTE: if the calculated value exceeds the
minimum and maximum limits of the Shutdown (2.0 to Vibration Gain
30.0) or Warning (1.0 to 15.0) threshold, the threshold Access Level Required: ADMIN 2
is set to the respective upper or lower limit). Only shown when access level is ADMIN and Motor
Vibration Protection Setpoint on MOTOR DETAILS
• Shaft End High Vibration Warning - Shaft End Screen is not set to Disabled. Allows a Service Techni-
Vibration Baseline X2 cian to enter values for vibration Input Gain [1:1, 11:1,
• Shaft End High Vibration Warning Default - Shaft 21:1 (default)].
End Vibration Baseline X2
Bearing Setup
• Opposite Shaft End High Vibration Warning - Access Level Required: SERVICE
Opposite End Vibration Baseline X2 Not shown when Bearing Temperature Protection
• Opposite Shaft End High Vibration Warning Setpoint on MOTOR DETAILS Screen is set to Dis-
Default - Opposite End Vibration Baseline X2 abled. Allows a Service Technician to enter values for
High Bearing Temperature Shutdown (149 to 212°F;
• Shaft End High Vibration Shutdown - Shaft End default 203) and WARNING (140 to 194°F; default
Vibration Baseline X3 194) thresholds.
• Shaft End High Vibration Shutdown Default -
Shaft End Vibration Baseline X3
NAVIGATION
• Opposite Shaft End High Vibration Shutdown -
Opposite Shaft End Vibration Baseline X3 Home
• O
pposite Shaft End High Vibration Shutdown Returns user to HOME Screen.
Default - Opposite Shaft End Vibration Baseline
X3 Motor Details
If no baseline values are entered, by either the auto
baseline routine or manual entry, the message WARN- Returns user to MOTOR DETAILS Screen.
ING – MOTOR – BEARING VIBRATION BASE-
LINE NOT SET is displayed and the baseline values

FORM 160.54-O1

FORM 160.54-O1
SETPOINTS SCREEN
LD14342
Figure 43 - SETPOINTS SCREEN
OVERVIEW Offset – Shutdown from the Leaving Chilled Liquid

Temperature – Setpoint. If this value is below the abso-
This screen provides a convenient location for pro-
lute minimum allowed shutdown temperature the mini-
gramming the most common setpoints involved in the
mum value is displayed.
chiller control. This screen also serves as a gateway to
a subscreen for defining the setup of general system Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature Cycling –
parameters. Restart
Displays the Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature at
DISPLAY ONLY which the chiller will restart after it has shut down due
to over-cooling temperature. This value is calculated
Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature – by adding the Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature Cy-
Setpoint cling Offset – Restart to the Leaving Chilled Liquid
Displays the present setpoint to which the chiller is Temperature – Setpoint.
operating whether controlled remotely or locally. This
value could come from a 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20mA, 0 to Current Limit Setpoint
10VDC or 2 to 10VDC input in Analog Remote mode, (Flash Memory Card version C.MLM.01.01 or later)
PWM signal in Digital Remote mode, E-Link Gateway
interface in ISN mode, or a locally programmed value. Displays the active Current Limit Setpoint. In Local
mode, this is the locally programmed Current Limit
Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature Cycling – Setpoint. In ISN Remote mode, this is the setpoint re-
Shutdown ceived from the E-Link Gateway interface. In Analog
Displays the Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature at Remote mode, this is the setpoint received via 0 to
which the chiller will shut down to avoid over-cool- 10VDC, 2 to 10VDC, 0 to 20mA or 4 to 20mA input.
ing the building. This value is calculated by subtract- In Digital Remote mode, this is the Pulse width Modu-
ing the Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature Cycling lation signal input.

FORM 160.54-O1
For fields requiring access level of SER- Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature Cycling
VICE. Service Technicians refer to the Offset – Shutdown
OptiView Control Center - Service Instruc- Access Level Required: OPERATOR
tions (Form 160.54-M1) for operation This value allows the user to specify the Leaving
instructions and explanation of all pro- Chilled Liquid Temperature at which the chiller will
grammable setpoints and displayed values. shut down on a LEAVING CHILLED LIQUID – LOW
TEMPERATURE cycling shutdown. This is done by
defining an offset below the Leaving Chilled Liquid
PROGRAMMABLE Temperature Setpoint. It is programmable over a range
of 1°F to 64°F below the setpoint, to a minimum cut-
out of 36°F (water), 34°F (water with Smart Freeze
Range
enabled) or 6°F (brine). It establishes the minimum
allowed temperature for the Leaving Chilled Liquid
This is the range over which an analog signal (0 to 20
Temperature and prevents over-cooling of the build-
mA, 4 to 20mA, 0 to 10VDC or 2 to 10VDC) in Ana-
ing. Anytime the Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature
log Remote mode or a digital signal (PWM) in Digi-
Setpoint is increased, the shutdown threshold is 36.0°F
tal Remote mode can reset the Leaving Chilled Liquid
(water) or 6.0°F (brine) for the next ten (10) minutes. If
Temperature Setpoint above the operator programmed
Smart Freeze is enabled, the threshold is 34.0°F for the
BASE Setpoint. Programmable as either 10°F or 20°F,
next 10 minutes. After ten (10) minutes have elapsed,
with a default of 20°F, it is added to the BASE value to
the shutdown threshold becomes the programmed
create a range over which the remote device can reset
setpoint value.
the setpoint. For example, if this setpoint is programmed
for 10°F and the operator programmed value is 45°F, Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature Cycling
then the remote device can set the Leaving Chilled Liq- Offset – Restart
uid Temperature Setpoint over the range of 45.0°F to Access Level Required: OPERATOR
55.0°F.
This value allows the user to specify the Leaving
Chilled Liquid Temperature at which the chiller will
restart after a shutdown on a LEAVING CHILLED
Setpoint
LIQUID – LOW TEMPERATURE cycling shutdown.
This is done by defining an offset above the Leaving
This value allows the user to define the Leaving
Chilled Liquid Temperature Setpoint. It is program-
Chilled Liquid Temperature that is to be maintained by
mable over a range of 0°F to 70°F above the setpoint,
the chiller. It is programmable over the range of 38.0°F
to a maximum restart value of 80°F. The chiller will
to 72.0°F (water) or 10.0°F to 72.0°F (brine). If Smart
automatically restart when this temperature is reached.
Freeze is enabled, the range is 36.0°F to 70.0°F (water).
This setpoint can be used to reduce chiller cycling by
The maximum allowed setpoint with Heat Pump duty
delaying the chiller restart until the cooling load has
enabled is 86.0°F (software version C.OPT.01.23.307
increased.
and later). A remote device can provide an analog
signal (0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20mA, 0 to 10VDC or 2 to Remote Analog Input Range
10VDC) in Analog Remote mode, or PWM signal in
(Flash Memory Card version C.MLM.01.01 or later)
Digital Remote mode that changes the setpoint by cre-
ating an offset above the operator programmed BASE
Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature Setpoint. This This setpoint defines, for the Control Center, the re-
offset may be defined up to 10.0°F or 20.0°F above the mote signal range applied for remote reset of the Leav-
BASE Setpoint (refer to the Remote Leaving Chilled ing Chilled Liquid Temperature Setpoint and Current
Liquid Temperature Setpoint Range description). Ad- Limit Setpoint in Analog Remote mode. If the remote
ditionally, E-Link Gateway (in ISN Remote mode) can signal is 0 to 10VDC or 0 to 20mA, this setpoint must
define the setpoint through a serial data stream. In this be programmed for 0 to 10VDC. If the remote signal is
case, the incoming setpoint is not an offset that is ap- 2 to 10VDC or 4 to 20mA, this setpoint must be pro-
plied to the locally programmed BASE Setpoint value, grammed for 2 to 10VDC.
but rather is the setpoint value itself.

FORM 160.54-O1
Motor Current Limit NAVIGATION

Home
Allows the user to specify the maximum allowed mo-
tor current (as a percentage of FLA). When the motor
current reaches this value, the Pre-rotation Vanes will Returns user to HOME Screen.
Setup 2
to reduce the current to this value.
Moves to the subscreen allowing setup of general sys-
Pulldown Demand Limit tem parameters.
Quick Start
Allows the user to specify the current limit value (as
a percentage of Full Load Amps) to which the chiller
Access Level Required:
will be limited during the specified pulldown limit
ADMIN (to initially enable the feature);
time. This value will override the Motor Current Limit
SERVICE (if feature is enabled)
value during this time period. This function is used to
provide energy savings following chiller start-up. Moves to the subscreen allowing the Quick Start fea-
ture to be enabled/disabled. Once enabled, this screen
Pulldown Demand Time allows programming and viewing of Quick Start
Access Level Required: OPERATOR setpoints and parameters.
starts.
Print
Generates setpoints print report.

FORM 160.54-O1

FORM 160.54-O1
SETUP SCREEN
LD15426a
Figure 44 - SETUP SCREEN
OVERVIEW Anti-Recycle:
Displays Disabled or Enabled
This screen is the top level of the general configura-
tion parameters. It allows programming of the time and Power Failure Restart:
date, along with specifications as to how the time will Displays Manual or Automatic
be displayed (12 or 24 hour format). In addition, the
chiller configuration, as determined by the state of the Liquid Type:
Microboard Program Jumpers and Program Switches Displays Water or Brine
is displayed. A qualified Service Technician, following Coastdown:
instructions in OptiView Control Center – Service In- Displays Standard (150 seconds) or Enhanced (15
structions (Form 160.54-M1), establishes this configu- minutes – Steam Turbine applications)
ration per the desired operation. This screen also serves
as a gateway to more subscreens for defining general Pre-Run:
system parameters. Displays Standard (50 seconds) or Extended (180
seconds)
DISPLAY ONLY Oil Pump Package:

Displays Fixed Speed or Variable Speed
031-01730-000 Microboard
Chilled Liquid Pump Operation: Power Line Frequency (VSD only):
Displays Standard or Enhanced Displays 60Hz or 50Hz
Motor Type: 031-02430-000 and 031-02430-001 Microboard

Displays Fixed Speed or Variable Speed Refrigerant Selection
Displays R22 or R134a
Refrigerant Selection:
Displays R-22 or R134a Liquid Type
Displays Water or Brine

FORM 160.54-O1
For fields requiring access level of SER- AM and PM modifiers and show the range of time be-
VICE. Service Technicians refer to the tween 1:00 and 12:59, while the 24-hour time format
OptiView Control Center - Service Instruc- will show the range of time between 0:00 and 23:59.
instructions and explanation of all pro- 031-02430-000 and 031-02430-001 Microboard
grammable setpoints and displayed values. only
Change Settings
Access Level Required: OPERATOR or higher
PROGRAMMABLE
Used to enter the following setpoints. Pressing this key
Set Date places a green selection box around the first changeable
Access Level Required: OPERATOR setpoint. The access level determines which setpoints
Allows the user to specify the present date. This value can be changed. Use the ▲ and ▼ keys to place the
is critical to logging system shutdowns accurately and selection box around the desired setpoint. With the
for utilizing the scheduling capabilities. When prompt- setpoint selected, press the ENTER () key. A dialog
ed to enter a date value, the user must enter the day, box appears with the range of settings.
month, and four-digit year (using leading zeroes as
Chilled Liquid Pump Operation
necessary). If within range, the value will be accepted.
If out of range, the user is prompted for the information
again. At this point the user may retry the date entry, or Allows a Service Technician to select Chilled Liquid
cancel the programming attempt. Pump control contacts (I/O Board TB2-44/45) opera-
tion as either standard or enhanced.
Set Time
Motor Drive Type
Allows the user to specify the present time. This value
is critical to logging system shutdowns accurately and Allows a Service Technician to enter the applied com-
for utilizing the scheduling capabilities. When prompt- pressor motor type as either Electro-Mechanical (EM),
ed to enter a time value, the user must enter the hour Solid State Starter (SSS-Mod A), Solid State starter
and minute desired (using leading zeroes as necessary). (SSS – Mod B), Variable Speed Drive-60Hz or Vari-
If the chiller is presently set to 24-hour mode, the time able Speed Drive-50Hz.
must be entered in the 24-hour format. Otherwise, the
Anti-Recycle
user must also select AM or PM for the entered time. If
out of range, the user is prompted for the information
again. At this point the user may retry the time entry, or Allows a Service Technician to enable or disable the
cancel the programming attempt. anti-recycle timer.
Clock (Enabled / Disabled) Power Failure Restart

Allows the user to enable or disable the Real Time Allows the user to select Manual or Automatic restart
Clock in order to conserve battery life. The clock will after power failure.
be disabled during manufacturing and must be enabled
Coastdown
at system commissioning. In addition, when preparing
for prolonged shutdown the clock should once again
Allows a Service Technician to select either Standard
be disabled.
(electric motor) or Enhanced (15 minutes–Steam Tur-
12/24 Hr bine applications). When Standard is selected, the
Access Level Required: OPERATOR duration depends on the Software used. With version
Allows the user to specify the format in which the time C.OPT.01.16.XXX (and later), the duration is pro-
will be presented to the user. This setpoint will affect grammable using the Coastdown Time Setpoint below.
the display of the time on the chiller panel and on all With earlier software versions, the duration is fixed at
reports generated. 12-hour time format will include the 150 seconds.

FORM 160.54-O1
Pre-Run the VSD Logic Board or Style B LCSSS Logic/Trigger

Access Level Required: SERVICE Board. The Motor Node ID Setpoint must be set to “1”
Allows Service Technician to select either Standard to match the address assigned to the VSD Logic Board
(30 seconds) or Extended (180 seconds). or Style B LCSSS Logic/Trigger Board. This setpoint
and entry instructions are described in detail in Sec-
Oil Pump Package tions Microboard 031-02430-000 and 031-02430-001,
Access Level Required: SERVICE and LTC I/O Board of OptiView Control Center – Ser- 2
Allows Service Technician to enter the applied oil vice Instructions (Form 160.54-M1). The chiller must
pump drive type as either Variable Speed or Fixed be stopped with the Start-Run-Stop/Reset switch in the
Speed. Stop/Reset position to change this setpoint.
Motor Communications Protocol VSD applications: Set the Modbus Address of VSD
Logic Board 031-02506 to “1” by setting Switch SW3
(VSD applications – Software version C.OPT.01.16.307
position 1 to ON with all other positions OFF.
or later)
(Style B Liquid Cooled Solid State Starter applications Style B Solid State Starter applications: Set the Mod-
– Software version C.OPT.01.18.307 or later) bus Address of the Logic/Trigger Board 031-02505 to
Access Level Required: SERVICE “1” by setting Switch SW1 position 1 to ON with all
other positions OFF.
Only displayed when Motor Drive Type Setpoint above
is selected as “VSD-60Hz”, “VSD-50Hz” or “SSS- Coastdown Time
Mod B”. Allows the Service Technician to enable the (Software version C.OPT.01.16.xxx (or later))
appropriate serial communications port for commu-
nications with the Style B Liquid Cooled Solid State
Only displayed when Standard is selected as the
Starter (LCSSS) or Variable Speed Drive (VSD). En-
Coastdown Setpoint above. Allows Service Techni-
tered as YORK to enable COM 5 (J15) or MODBUS
cian to select appropriate coastdown time for com-
to enable COM 2 (J13). Selection required is based on
pressor motor applied. Larger motors require a lon-
hardware and interface that is present. Section Solid
ger coastdown time to assure the motor rotation has
State Starters or Section Adaptive Capacity Control
stopped before the oil pump is turned off at completion
Board to determine which hardware/interface is pres-
of post-lube. Programmable range is determined by the
ent. This setpoint and entry instructions are described
Chiller Style/Compressor Setpoint (Style F/J7 and G/
in detail in Sections Microboard 031-02430-000 and
K6-K7, the range is 240 (default) to 900 seconds. All
031-02430-001, and LTC I/O Board of OptiView Con-
others, the range is 150 (default) to 900 seconds).
trol Center – Service Instructions (Form 160.54-M1).
The chiller must be stopped with the Start-Run-Stop/ Condenser Temperature Range
Reset switch in the Stop/Reset position to change this (Software version C.OPT.01.19.307 or later)
setpoint.
Motor Node ID Special order R134a chillers are allowed to operate at
higher than standard condenser temperatures. The re-
(VSD applications – Software version C.OPT.01.16.307
sulting higher operating pressures require higher con-
or later) (Style B Liquid Cooled Solid State Starter
denser warning and safety shutdown thresholds than
applications – Software version C.OPT.01.18.307 or
standard applications. These chillers are equipped with
later)
a special High Pressure Cutout Switch (HPCO) that
Access Level Required: SERVICE can be set to trip at a higher pressure.
Only displayed when MODBUS is selected for the Mo-
tor Communications Protocol Setpoint above. Allows
the Service Technician to enter the Modbus Address of

FORM 160.54-O1
Table 3 - CONDENSER TEMPERATURE RANGE

STANDARD EXTENDED
Warning – High Pressure Limit – Maximum allowable value (PSIG) 162.5 193
Condenser – High Pressure – Trip/reset threshold (PSIG) 180/120 200/140
Condenser – High Pressure Stopped – Trip/reset threshold (PSIG) 160/160 170/170
This setpoint allows for either standard or higher tem- Motor Monitoring
perature condenser temperature operation. It is set at the (Software version C.OPT.01.22.307 and later)
factory and requires an ADMIN password to change it. Access Level Required: SERVICE
It is only visible when set to Extended. It is set to Ex- Allows the Service Technician to enable or disable the
tended for those chillers equipped for high condenser Motor Monitoring feature.
temperature operation. Otherwise, it is set to Standard.
When Heat Pump Duty is set to Enabled, this setpoint is Heat Recovery
automatically set to Extended. For R134a chillers, refer (Software version C.OPT.01.21.307 and later)
to Table 3 on Page 134. Access Level Required: SERVICE
Allows the Service Technician to enable or disable the
PRV Position Heat Recovery feature.
Access Level Required: SERVICE Heat Recovery cannot be used simultaneously with
New production chillers after June 2009 can be Heat Pump Duty. When Heat Pump Duty is enabled,
equipped with an optional Pre-rotation Vanes Potenti- Heat Recovery is automatically disabled and locked.
ometer, regardless of other options. This setpoint al-
lows the software to be used in all YK chillers, whether Head Pressure Control
equipped with the potentiometer or not. The PRV po- (Software version C.OPT.01.21.307 and later)
sition will be shown on respective screens when En- Access Level Required: SERVICE
abled. Allows the Service Technician to enable or disable the
Head Pressure Control feature.
• Enabled – Automatically set to this setting if Hot
Gas Bypass or Variable Geometry Diffuser (VGD) Head Pressure Control cannot be used simultaneously
is enabled on the OPERATIONS Screen or Motor with Heat Pump Duty. When Heat Pump Duty is en-
Drive Type Setpoint is set to VSD or MVVSD. abled, Head Pressure Control is automatically disabled
The actual connection point of the potentiometer and locked.
is determined by the equipment configuration:
If equipped with a VSD in YORK protocol con- Heat Pump Duty
figuration, it is connected to the ACC Board; in (Software Version C.OPT.01.23.307 and later)
Modbus Protocol Configuration, it is connected Access Level Required: ADMIN
to the Microboard J7. If not equipped with VSD, Allows the Service Technician to enable and disable the
but equipped with Hot Gas Bypass, the connec- Heat Pump feature. The access level must be ADMIN
tion point is determined by which I/O Board is and the Refrigerant Type must be set to R-134a (SW1-
present: with I/O Board 371-02514-000, it is con- 1) for the setpoint to appear on this screen. When Heat
nected to this board; otherwise, it is connected to Pump Duty is enabled, Heat Recovery and Head Pres-
the Microboard J7. If not equipped with Hot Gas sure Control are automatically disabled and locked.
Bypass but equipped with a VGD, it is connected
to the Microboard J7.
• Disabled – Set to this position when not equipped
with a PRV potentiometer. If equipped with a VSD,
MVVSD or the Hot Gas Bypass, or Variable Ge-
ometry Diffuser is enabled; this setpoint is auto-
matically enabled and cannot be set to disabled.

FORM 160.54-O1
NAVIGATION Printer
Home
Moves to the subscreen allowing configuration and
control of printer functions.
Sales Order
Schedule Access Level Required: VIEW 2
Moves to the subscreen displaying the Sales Order in-
Moves to the subscreen allowing definition of the chill- formation for the chiller system.
er operation schedule.
Operations
Diagnostics Access Level Required: VIEW
Moves to the subscreen displaying operating param-
Moves to the subscreen allowing limited diagnostic ca- eters of the chiller system.
pability while operating.
User
Comms Access Level Required: VIEW
Moves to the subscreen allowing configuration of user
Moves to the subscreen allowing configuration of sys- preferences.
tem communications.

FORM 160.54-O1

FORM 160.54-O1
QUICK START SCREEN

LD14341
Figure 45 - QUICK START SCREEN (SOFTWARE VERSION C.OPT.01.21.307 AND LATER)
OVERVIEW beginning of prelube, instead of waiting until Sys-

tem Run. At the completion of prelube, the VSD
The Quick Start feature is useful in data center and
is started and after the VSD achieves its Start Fre-
process control applications where it is desirable to re-
quency, the speed ramp rate is faster than with
establish cooling as fast as possible after a shutdown
normal control.
or power failure. This feature, when enabled, allows
quicker starts and restarts than normal control. It does In order to use this feature, the chiller must be equipped
this by reducing the time cycle for chiller restart and with a Variable Speed Drive in Modbus Protocol Con-
once running, loading the chiller as fast as possible. figuration or a Medium Voltage Variable Speed Drive.
After the chiller is running and has met a specified The low inrush current of a VSD allows more starts per
setpoint or a specified period of time has elapsed, con- hour and allows the chiller to start with a more open
trol returns to normal. vane position. It must be enabled with an ADMIN pass-
word by a qualified Service Technician using the pro-
Quick Start feature has two different start modes: cedure in OptiView Control Center – Service Instruc-
• Quick Restart – When a chiller shutsdown, if tions (Form 160.54-M1). Once enabled, all setpoints
certain conditions are met at the completion of and parameters related to this feature are displayed on
coastdown (and within 30 seconds thereafter), the this screen, when logged in at SERVICE access level.
VSD is started immediately with no prelube. The If Heat Pump Duty is enabled, Quick Start is only avail-
vanes are given a constant open pulse and after the able when the Heat Pump Operational mode setpoint
VSD achieves its start frequency, the speed ramp is set to Cooling. When Heat Pump Duty Operational
rate is faster than with normal control. mode is set to Heating, Quick Start is automatically
• Quick Normal Start – If the conditions for a Quick Disabled.
Restart are not met, the next time the chiller is
Service Technicians refer to OptiView Control Center
started, it has a prelube period just like a normal
– Service Instructions (Form 160.54-M1) for complete
start, however the vanes will begin to open at the
explanation of this feature.

FORM 160.54-O1
DISPLAY ONLY Quick Start can be Disabled when logged in at SER-

VICE access level. However, once Disabled, it re-
Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature quires an ADMIN password to enable it again, as ex-
Displays the temperature of the liquid as it leaves the plained above. Quick Start mode will be automatically
evaporator. disabled when any of the following occur: The Motor
Drive Type is changed to something other than VSD
Leaving Chilled Active Setpoint or MVVSD, or the Motor Communications Protocol is
Displays the setpoint to which the Leaving Chilled changed to YORK, or the Heat Pump Duty (if enabled)
Liquid is being controlled. Operational Setpoint is set to Heating mode.
Quick Pulldown in Effect (LED) Quick Pulldown Setpoint Offset

Illuminates while a Quick Pulldown is in effect. This is Access Level Required: SERVICE
in effect from a start initiate until the Quick Pulldown (0°F to 10°F; default 5°F) This setpoint sets the Leav-
Setpoint Offset has been reached or the Pulldown ing Chilled Liquid Temperature at which the control
Override Time has elapsed, whichever occurs first. transitions from Quick Start mode to normal opera-
For fields requiring access level of SER- tion. It is entered in the form of an offset above the
VICE. Service Technicians refer to the active Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature (LCHLT)
OptiView Control Center - Service Instruc- Setpoint. Once the Leaving Chilled Liquid Tempera-
tions (Form 160.54-M1) for operation ture falls below the Active LCHLT Setpoint plus Quick
instructions and explanation of all pro- Pulldown Setpoint Offset, PRV (Quick Restart) and
grammable setpoints and displayed values. speed control (Quick Restart and Quick Normal Start)
revert to normal automatic control. Lower values of
this offset result in faster pulldown times but can result
PROGRAMMABLE in overshoot of the LCHLT Setpoint. Setting the value
to its minimum of 0 results in the fastest pulldown time
Change Setpoints but nearly always results in setpoint overshoot. De-
Access Level Required: SERVICE pending upon how close the Low Chilled Liquid Tem-
Used to enter the following setpoints. Pressing this key perature shutdown threshold is to the LCHLT Setpoint,
places a green selection box around the first change- this could result in a LOW CHILLED LIQUID TEM-
able setpoint. Use the ▲ and ▼ keys to place the selec- PERATURE cycling shutdown.
tion box around the desired setpoint. With the setpoint
selected, press the ENTER () key. A dialog box ap- The Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature and setpoint
pears with the range of settings. is shown on the QUICK START Screen for reference.
This setpoint sets one of the two setpoints that deter-
Quick Start Mode mine when the control transitions from Quick Start
Access Level Required: ADMIN mode to normal operation. The other is the Pulldown
(Enabled, Disabled; default Disabled) This setpoint Override Time below.
is used to Enable and Disable the Quick Start feature.
Pulldown Override Time
It can only be Enabled when the Motor Drive Type
Setpoint is set to VSD and the Motor Communications
Protocol is set to Modbus. or, the Motor Drive Type (0 min to 15 min; default 10 min) This setpoint is the
Setpoint is set to MVVSD. If Heat Pump Duty is en- length of time the PRV is held open (Quick Restart) and
abled, the Quick Start feature is only available when the ACC speed (Quick Restart and Quick Normal Start)
the Heat Pump Operational mode setpoint is set to is increased on startup if the Quick Pulldown Setpoint
Cooling. Offset is not reached. This could be due to hitting cur-
rent limit during the pulldown. If the Quick Pulldown
The default is Disabled. Quick Start can only be en- Setpoint Offset is not reached in the Pulldown Override
abled using an ADMIN password. When logged in at Time, PRV and ACC speed control will revert back to
ADMIN access level, a QUICK START key will ap- normal automatic control.
pear on the SETPOINTS Screen. Pressing this key
will navigate to the QUICK START Screen where this
setpoint is used to enable/disable the feature.

FORM 160.54-O1
VSD Start Frequency Quick Ramp Current Threshold

The VSD Start Frequency is as follows: (20% to 80% FLA; default 50%) This setpoint sets the
motor current threshold where the VSD speed com-
• 60Hz units with quick start enabled equal 30Hz to mand ramp rate changes. At or below this threshold
45Hz (default 45Hz) the speed command ramp is 4X of standard control.
• 50Hz units equal 25Hz to 37.5Hz (default 37.5Hz) Over this threshold, the ramp rate is 2X of standard 2
control until it hits the standard current limiting over
This setpoint is the same as shown on the ACC DE- 80% FLA. Higher current thresholds can result in fast-
TAILS Screen. It can be programmed on either the er pulldown times. However, setting this value too high
ACC Screen or the QUICK START Screen. It sets the can result in slower pulldown times due to hitting the
VSD Start Frequency from which the speed will ramp current limit sooner on pulldown.
from.
Mapping Enable NAVIGATION

(0.5°F to 4.0°F; default 1.0°F) This is the same setpoint Home
as shown on the ACC DETAILS Screen. It can be pro- Access Level Required: SERVICE
grammed on either the ACC Screen or the QUICK Returns user to HOME Screen.
START Screen. It sets the Delta T needed to be met to
enable surge mapping and speed reduction initially on Setpoints
startup. Access Level Required: SERVICE
Returns user to SETPOINTS Screen.

FORM 160.54-O1

FORM 160.54-O1
SCHEDULE SCREEN
00331VIP
Figure 46 - SCHEDULE SCREEN
OVERVIEW the end of each week the schedule for the next week is
created by combining the standard week definition and
The SCHEDULE Screen contains more programma-
the next defined exception week. The schedule is then
ble values than a normal display screen. As such, each
updated as each of the exception weeks shifts down,
programmable value is not linked to a specific button.
leaving a new, blank exception week in the 6th week
Instead the SELECT key is used to enable the cursor
slot.
arrows which are used to highlight the day and the start
or stop time the user wishes to modify. At this point the
user may press the () key to program the Start / Stop DISPLAY ONLY
times for that day.
None
In order for the Start / Stop combination to be uti- For fields requiring access level of SER-
lized, each Start time must have a corresponding Stop VICE. Service Technicians refer to the
time which occurs later in the day. The presently pro- OptiView Control Center - Service Instruc-
grammed schedule for a given day can be cancelled by tions (Form 160.54-M1) for operation
setting both the Start time and Stop time to 12:00AM. instructions and explanation of all pro-
If the Start time equals the Stop time (with any time grammable setpoints and displayed values.
other than 12:00AM), the chiller is OFF for that day.
If the user desires the chiller to operate continuously
through several days, the Stop time of Day 1 can be PROGRAMMABLE
set to 11:59 PM and the Start time of Day 2 can be set
to 12:00 AM. The chiller will not stop but continue to Standard Week Start/Stop Times
operate until the stop of Day 2. Access Level Required: OPERATOR
For each day of the week, the user may specify a time
The user has the ability to define a standard set of Start
for the chiller to start and a time for the chiller to stop.
/ Stop times which are utilized every week. The user
The times specified in this entry week will be used as
may then specify exception Start / Stop combinations
the default for every week of chiller operation.
for any day of the week up to 6 weeks in advance. At

FORM 160.54-O1
Exception Start/Stop Times Select

Access Level Required: OPERATOR Access Level Required: OPERATOR
For each day of the week, the user may specify a time Places a selection box around a start time for a given
for the chiller to start and a time for the chiller to stop. day. Use ◄ , ► , ▲ or ▼ cursor arrows to place the
These Start / Stop combinations may be scheduled up box around the desired start or stop time for a given
to five (5) weeks in advance and also for the present day.
week. As each week goes by, the new schedule will
be created for the present week using the Exception Print
specification in combination with the Standard week Access Level Required: VIEW
definition, as described above. Generates a Schedule print report.
Schedule (Enabled / Disabled)

Allows the user to enable or disable the monitoring Home
function which enforces the scheduled starting and
stopping of the chiller.
Repeat Sunday Schedule
Setup
Duplicates the schedule defined for Sunday for the re-
Return to the previous SETUP Screen.
mainder of the standard weekdays.
Reset All Exception Days

Deletes all programming for exception days within the
next 6 weeks.

FORM 160.54-O1
USER SCREEN
LD15432
Figure 47 - USER SCREEN
OVERVIEW PROGRAMMABLE
This screen allows definition of custom User ID’s and System Language
matching passwords. This allows the building admin- Access Level Required: OPERATOR
istrator to assign custom passwords to those who are Allows the user to define the language for all Screens.
authorized to maintain the chiller. The desired language is selected by scrolling through the
Each custom user value is not linked to a specific but- list of those available. English is the Default language and
ton. Instead, the CHANGE button is pressed which en- is selected by pressing the ▲ key when the dialog box
ables the cursor arrows which are used to highlight the appears during the selection process. The selected lan-
custom user parameter the user wishes to modify. At guage will not be displayed until after the user navi-
this point the () button is pressed and the value may gates from the USER Screen to another screen. The
be entered. selections are: English, French, German, Hungarian,
Italian, Japanese (software version C.OPT.01.20.307
and later), Portuguese, Simplified Chinese, Spanish,
DISPLAY ONLY and Traditional Chinese.
None
English / Metric Units
For fields requiring access level of SER- Access Level Required: OPERATOR
VICE. Service Technicians refer to the Define the unit system (English or Metric) used by the
OptiView Control Center - Service Instruc- chiller display.

FORM 160.54-O1
Custom User ID (4) Date Format

This allows the user to specify up to four (4) custom Access Level Required: OPERATOR
User ID values. Each User ID will then require a cor- This setpoint allows the date format to be displayed in
responding password and user level. A User ID can be DDD MMM YYY (default), DD.MM.YYY or YYYY-
defined for various maintenance personnel. MM-DD.
Custom User Password (4)

Access Level Required: SERVICE NAVIGATION
This allows the user to specify up to four (4) custom Home
password values. Each password will then require a
corresponding User ID and user level.
Custom User Access Level (4)
Setup
This allows the user to specify up to four (4) custom
Returns user to SETUP Screen.
User Access Levels. Each access level will then require
a corresponding password and User ID.

FORM 160.54-O1
COMMS SCREEN
00470VIP
Figure 48 - COMMS SCREEN
(Screen shown from all applications equipped with Flash Chiller ID
Memory Card version C.MLM.01.05.xxx and later. Access Level Required: OPERATOR
Screen layout from earlier versions slightly different.) Define the numeric chiller ID when used within an ISN
This screen allows definition of the necessary commu- network of chillers. This ID number is also printed at
nications parameters. Refer to SECTION 4 - PRINTING the top of reports obtained with a local printer.
of this manual for details of the printer connections and
setup. Presently, there are no COM 2 communications Printer Setup and COM 2 Setup
features available. Access Level Required: OPERATOR
Pressing either key places a green selection box around
the first changeable parameter. Use the ▲ and ▼ keys
DISPLAY ONLY to place the selection box around the desired param-
None eter to be changed. With the selection box around the
desired parameter, press the ENTER () key. A dialog
For fields requiring access level of SER- box is displayed permitting data entry. In VSD or LC-
VICE. Service Technicians refer to the SSS Modbus Protocol Configuration, COM2 button is
OptiView Control Center - Service Instruc- not shown because COM2 serial port is used for this
tions (Form 160.54-M1) for operation interface.
grammable setpoints and displayed values. Printer Baud Rate
Define the baud rate at which the panel shall commu-
nicate to the printer.

FORM 160.54-O1
Printer Data Bit(s) COM 2 Parity Bit(s)

Define the number of data bits with which the panel Define the number of parity bits with which the panel
shall communicate to the printer. shall communicate through the modem port.
Printer Parity Bit(s) COM 2 Stop Bit(s)

Define the number of parity bits with which the panel Define the number of stop bits with which the panel
shall communicate to the printer. shall communicate through the modem port.
Printer Stop Bit(s)

Define the number of stop bits with which the panel NAVIGATION
shall communicate to the printer. Home
COM 2 Baud Rate
Define the baud rate at which the panel shall communi-
cate through the modem port. Setup
COM 2 Data Bit(s)
Define the number of data bits with which the panel
shall communicate to the modem port.

FORM 160.54-O1
PRINTER SCREEN
00319VIP
Figure 49 - PRINTER SCREEN
OVERVIEW Output Interval

This screen allows definition of the necessary commu-
nications parameters for the printer. Refer to SECTION Define the interval at which log printing will occur.
4 - PRINTING of this manual for details of the printer
Automatic Printer Logging (Enabled /
connections and setup.
Disabled)
DISPLAY ONLY Enable the printer to begin printing status reports be-
ginning at the programmed start time and recurring at
Time Remaining Until Next Print the interval defined above.
Displays the time until the next print log will occur, if
the function is enabled. Printer Type
For fields requiring access level of SER- Access Level Required: SERVICE
VICE. Service Technicians refer to the Define the printer type connected to the chiller system.
tions (Form 160.54-M1) for operation ACC Auto Map Print (Enabled / Disabled)
instructions and explanation of all pro- Access Level Required: SERVICE
grammable setpoints and displayed values. Only available if the chiller system utilizes a Variable
Speed Drive motor controller. The chiller monitors
the ACC communications and when a surge point is
PROGRAMMABLE mapped, a short report of system parameters is printed.
When this function is active, all other printing capabil-
Log Start Time ity is disabled.
Set the time at which scheduled print logs will begin.

FORM 160.54-O1
ACC Map Report Print All Histories

Access Level Required: SERVICE Access Level Required: OPERATOR
Only available if the chiller system utilizes a Variable Generate a report of the system data at the time of all
Speed Drive motor controller. The chiller requests the stored shutdowns.
entire surge map from the ACC. As the map is received,
the parameters for each point are printed.
NAVIGATION
Print Report
Home
Select the report type to print when the PRINT RE-
PORT key is selected. This can vary from status report
(present system parameters), Setpoints report (present Setup
value of the system setpoints), Schedule report (present
value of the system schedule times), or a Sales Order
Data report (information provided on the SALES OR-
DER Screen). A print report is generated upon comple-
tion of selection.

FORM 160.54-O1
SALES ORDER SCREEN
00320VIP
Figure 50 - SALES ORDER SCREEN
OVERVIEW System Information

This screen allows definition of the sales order param- Factory defined conditions for which the chiller was
eters. The commissioning date is entered by the Ser- originally rated and sold.
vice Technician at the time of chiller commissioning.
Condenser and Evaporator Design Load
These values should never be changed or entered by
Information
anyone other than a qualified Service Technician. En-
try instructions are included in the OptiView Control Factory defined description of the condenser and evap-
Center – Service Instructions (Form 160.54-M1). The orator configuration at time of shipment.
remainder of the values are entered at the YORK Fac-
Nameplate Information
tory during the manufacturing of the chiller.
Factory defined information about the chiller motor
configuration.
DISPLAY ONLY For fields requiring access level of SER-
Model Number
Factory defined model number of the chiller system. tions (Form 160.54-M1) for operation
Panel Serial Number
Factory defined serial number for the micropanel.
Chiller Serial Number

PROGRAMMABLE
Factory defined serial number for the chiller system.
Commissioning Date
YORK Order Number Access Level Required: SERVICE
Factory defined order number under which the chiller Define the date at which the chiller was commissioned.
was sold.

FORM 160.54-O1
Job Name and Location NAVIGATION

Home
Factory defined job name and location the chiller is
destined for.
Print
Setup
This generates a listing of the Sales Order data.

FORM 160.54-O1
OPERATIONS SCREEN
LD09578a
Figure 51 - OPERATIONS SCREEN
This screen allows definition of general parameters Control Source
having to do with the operation of the chiller. Access Level Required: OPERATOR
Define whether the control of the chiller will be Lo-
DISPLAY ONLY cal, Digital Remote, Analog Remote, Modem Remote
or ISN Remote.
Chiller Run Time
(Flash Memory Card version C.MLM.01.04 or later) Number of Starts
Displays the amount of time the chiller has been run- Displays the number of the starts the chiller has initi-
ning since the last start signal was received. Value ated. This may be reprogrammed to a desired value,
is reset to zero when the chiller enters coastdown. It (generally when this value has been reset due to a
remains at zero while shutdown and during System Microboard replacement), but should not be done so
Prelube. arbitrarily.
VICE. Service Technicians refer to the Operating Hours
OptiView Control Center - Service Instruc- Access Level Required: ADMIN
tions (Form 160.54-M1) for operation Displays the total accumulated run time of the chiller.
instructions and explanation of all pro- This may be reprogrammed to a desired value (gener-
grammable setpoints and displayed values. ally when this value has been reset due to a Microboard
replacement), but should not be done so arbitrarily.

FORM 160.54-O1
Hot Gas Control (Enabled/Disabled) Chiller Style/Compressor

Access Level Required: SERVICE (Flash Memory Card version C.MLM.01.07.xxx and
Enables and disables the optional Hot Gas Bypass later)
Control feature. Access Level Required: SERVICE
Used to enter the chiller style/compressor combination.
Refrigerant Level Control (Enabled / Disabled)
Once the applicable chiller style/compressor combina-
Access Level Required: SERVICE tion is entered, the program controls the chiller per the
Enables and Disables the Refrigerant Level Control requirements of the entered chiller style and compres-
Feature. sor.
Flow Switch Edit Phone Numbers
(Style F and later chillers equipped with Flash Memory (Flash Memory Card version C.MLM.01.05.xxx and
Card version C.MLM.01.08.xxx and later) later)
Used to enter the applicable flow switch type. Style F Displays up to two service phone numbers. The Re-
and later chillers could be equipped with either Pad- gional service phone number is displayed as the
dle-type or Thermal-Type Flow sensors. The actual first number. Although the label and number can be
type installed must be entered to allow the program to changed appropriately, the default for this entry is
read the correct input. Key is only displayed if Style “Johnson Controls North American Toll Free Number
F chiller is selected with the Chiller Style/Compressor 1-800-861-1001”. The Local service phone number is
Setpoint below. displayed as the second number. Although blank by de-
fault, the appropriate label and number can be entered
VGD (Enabled/Disabled)
by a Service Technician.
C.OPT.01.10.302 (and later))
Access Level Required: SERVICE NAVIGATION
Enables and disables the Variable Geometry Diffuser Home
feature. If equipped with this feature, it should be en-
abled. Otherwise, it should be disabled.
Setup

FORM 160.54-O1
HISTORY SCREEN
00661VIP
Figure 52 - HISTORY SCREEN
OVERVIEW Last Fault While Running

This screen allows the user to browse through the faults. This window displays the date and time and the de-
In order to get a more thorough reporting of the system scription of the last safety or cycling shutdown while
conditions at the time of the recorded shutdown, move the system was running.
to the subscreen HISTORY DETAILS.
Last Ten Faults
The user may use the SELECT FAULT button to select This window displays a chronological listing (most
the history to view. At this point the VIEW DETAILS recent first) of the date and time and the description
button is used to jump to a subscreen containing stored of the last ten safety or cycling shutdowns that occur
chiller parameters values at the time of the shutdown. while the system is running or stopped.
Additionally, the PRINT HISTORY button can be used
to generate a hard-copy report of the parameter values
at the time of the shutdown.
DISPLAY ONLY instructions and explanation of all pro-
Last Normal Shutdown
This window displays the date and time and the de-
scription of the last normal shutdown. A normal shut- PROGRAMMABLE
down is defined as:
Print History
• Local (Panel rocker switch) Access Level Required: VIEW
This generates a report listing the status of the chiller
• Remote (Digital, Analog or ISN)
parameters at the time of the selected shutdown.

FORM 160.54-O1
Print All Histories Trending

Access Level Required: VIEW Access Level Required: VIEW
This generates a report listing the status of the chiller Causes a move to a subscreen allowing the user to view
parameters at the time of each of the stored shutdowns. trending data on selected chiller parameters.
Custom View
NAVIGATION (Flash Memory Card version C.MLM.01.04 or later)
Home Access Level Required: VIEW
Access Level Required: VIEW Causes a move to a subscreen allowing the user to view
Returns user to HOME Screen. the CUSTOM SETUP Screen.
View Details Security Log

Access Level Required: VIEW (Flash Memory Card version C.MLM.01.06 and later
Causes a move to a subscreen containing the value of and "P" compressors C.MLM.04.02 and later)
select chiller parameters at the time of the associated Access Level Required: SERVICE
shutdown. Causes a move to a subscreen allowing the user to view
a record of the last 75 setpoint changes.

FORM 160.54-O1
HISTORY DETAILS SCREEN
00660VIP
Figure 53 - HISTORY DETAILS SCREEN
OVERVIEW Page Down

This screen allows the user to see an on-screen printout
of all the system parameters at the time of the selected Scroll down in the displayed data (if applicable).
shutdown. Not all screens are shown above. The num-
Print History
ber of screens required to display all of the data varies
according to type of motor starter and options applied.
This generates a report listing the status of the chiller
parameters at the time of the selected shutdown.
DISPLAY ONLY
History Printout NAVIGATION

This is the on-screen printout of the system parameters.
Home
For fields requiring access level of SER- Access Level Required: VIEW
VICE. Service Technicians refer to the Returns user to HOME Screen.
tions (Form 160.54-M1) for operation History
instructions and explanation of all pro- Access Level Required: VIEW
grammable setpoints and displayed values. Returns user to HISTORY Screen.
PROGRAMMABLE
Page Up
Scroll up in the displayed data (if applicable).

FORM 160.54-O1

FORM 160.54-O1
SECURITY LOG SCREEN
00662VIP
Figure 54 - SECURITY LOG SCREEN

(This screen only available with Flash Memory Card Category
version C.MLM.01.06.xxx and later) Displays the category of the setpoint (motor, evapora-
This screen displays a listing of the last 75 setpoint tor, condenser, etc.).
changes. They are listed and numbered in reverse order
in which they were changed, with the most recent listed Setpoint
as number 1. Multiple pages are necessary to display Displays the setpoint that was changed.
all 75 changes. Not all setpoints are logged. Service
Technicians refer to list in OptiView Control Center – New Value
Service Instructions (Form 160.54-M1). Displays the value that was entered at the time of the
setpoint change.
The details of any setpoint change can be viewed by
navigating to a subscreen that displays the date and
time of the change, access level and User ID used to PROGRAMMABLE
make the change, the old setpoint value and the new
Log Entry
setpoint value.
Allows the user to select a particular setpoint change
Requires a login access level of SERVICE. for detail viewing.
Control Center - Service Instructions Print
(Form 160.54-M1) for operation instruc- Generates a detailed report of all setpoint changes list-
tions and explanation of all programmable ed in the setpoint change log.
Page Up
Scroll up in the displayed data (if applicable).

FORM 160.54-O1
Page Down History

Scroll down in the displayed data (if applicable). Access Level Required: SERVICE
Returns user to HISTORY Screen.
NAVIGATION View Details

Home
Causes a move to a subscreen containing the details
of the setpoint change selected with the LOG ENTRY
key.

FORM 160.54-O1
SECURITY LOG DETAILS SCREEN
00663VIP
Figure 55 - SECURITY LOG DETAILS SCREEN
OVERVIEW Date
(This screen only available with Flash Memory Card Displays the date the setpoint was changed.
version C.MLM.01.06.xxx and later)
Access Level
This screen allows the user to view the details of Displays the login Access Level used to make the
a logged setpoint change, selected from the list on setpoint change.
the SECURITY LOG Screen. The date and time the
setpoint was changed, the new and old setpoint value User ID
and access level and User ID used to make the change Displays the login User ID used to make the setpoint
are displayed. The data on this screen can be printed. change.
Old Value
Control Center - Service Instructions Displays the previous setpoint value.
New Value
setpoints and displayed values. Displays the value entered at the time of the setpoint
change.
DISPLAY ONLY
PROGRAMMABLE
Description
Print
Displays the setpoint/category that was changed.
Generates a report of change parameters displayed on
Time this screen.
Displays the time the setpoint was changed.

FORM 160.54-O1
NAVIGATION Security Log

Home
Returns user to SECURITY LOG Screen.

FORM 160.54-O1
CUSTOM VIEW SCREEN
00324VIP
Figure 56 - CUSTOM VIEW SCREEN
Print
This screen allows up to 10 Service Technician select- Access Level Required: VIEW
ed parameters to be displayed. These parameters are This generates a listing of the parameters displayed on
selected from a list on the CUSTOM VIEW SETUP this screen.
Screen. This allows the Service Technician to display
parameters pertinent to a particular problem during
troubleshooting. At completion of the service call, the NAVIGATION
display can be cleared or the parameters can be left
there for monitoring by operations personnel. Home
DISPLAY ONLY
History
None
For fields requiring access level of SER- Returns user to HISTORY Screen.
OptiView Control Center - Service Instruc- Setup
tions (Form 160.54-M1) for operation Access Level Required: OPERATOR
instructions and explanation of all pro- Causes a jump to the subscreen that allows selection of
grammable setpoints and displayed values. the parameters to be displayed.

FORM 160.54-O1

FORM 160.54-O1
CUSTOM VIEW SETUP SCREEN
00325VIP
Figure 57 - CUSTOM VIEW SETUP SCREEN
OVERVIEW Page Down

(Flash Memory Card version C.MLM.01.04 or later) Scroll down through list of available parameters.
This screen allows the Service Technician to select up
Select
to 10 parameters for display on the CUSTOM VIEW
Screen. First use the PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN keys to scroll
through the Slot Numbers list and note the number of
Requires a login access level of SERVICE. the parameter(s) to be displayed. Pressing the SELECT
Service Technicians refer to the OptiView key places a green colored selection box around Cus-
Control Center - Service Instructions tom Slot 1. If it is desired to change an already entered
(Form 160.54-M1) for operation instruc- parameter, use the 5 and 6 keys to place the selection
tions and explanation of all programmable box around the Slot Number to be changed. With the
setpoints and displayed values. selection box around the Slot Number to be changed
or entered, press the ENTER () key. A dialog box is
displayed permitting data entry. Using the NUMERIC
DISPLAY ONLY
keypad keys, enter the desired Slot Number and press
Slot Numbers the ENTER () key.
Lists the available parameters that can be displayed.
Custom Slot (1-10)
The desired parameters for display are selected from
this list. Use the SELECT key and NUMERIC keypad keys as
described above and enter the Slot Number from Slot
Numbers list. Setting the Slot Number to zero clears
PROGRAMMABLE the display of this Slot Number.
Page Up
Scroll up through list of available parameters.

FORM 160.54-O1
NAVIGATION
Home
Custom View
Returns user to CUSTOM VIEW Screen.

FORM 160.54-O1
TREND SCREEN
00472VIP
Figure 58 - TREND SCREEN
OVERVIEW The parameters are sampled at the selected Data Col-

lection Interval and plotted using 450 data points across
As many as six Operator selected parameters (Data
the X-Axis. If the actual value of the sampled param-
Points) can be plotted in an X/Y graph format. The
eter is less than the Y-Axis label minimum for that
X-Axis is scaled per the selected Data Collection In-
parameter, the value will be plotted at the minimum
terval and displayed in a time of day or elapsed time
value. Similarly, if the actual value is greater than the
format, as selected with the X-Axis TOGGLE key. The
Y-Axis label maximum for that parameter, the value
Y-Axis is scaled for each parameter per the selected
will be plotted at the maximum value.
minimum and maximum value for each parameter.
Analog parameters are scaled in pressure, temperature, There are three types of charts that can be created: One
volts, amps, hertz or time. Digital on/off parameters Screen, Continuous or Triggered (not applicable to Flash
are scaled as zero (off) and one (on). Only one Y-Axis Memory Card version C.MLM.01.04.xxx and earlier).
label is displayed at a time. The Y-Axis TOGGLE Key When plotting reaches the end of the X-Axis, if one screen
is used to toggle the Y-Axis labels through the different is selected, trending stops and data is frozen. If continuous
parameters. The Y-Axis label that is being displayed is selected, the oldest data is dropped from the left-hand
is identified at the top of the graph. For identification, side of the graph at the next collection interval. Thereaf-
each plotted parameter and associated Y-Axis labeling ter, the oldest data is dropped from the left hand-side of
is color coordinated. the graph at each data collection interval. If triggered is
selected, data collection can be set to start or stop based
On compressor applications other than “P” compres-
upon the selected Trigger Action (start or stop). If start
sors, if equipped with Flash Memory Card version
is selected, data collection will not begin until the trig-
C.MLM.01.04.xxx and earlier, all trended Data Points
gers have been satisfied and any selected trigger delay has
are displayed simultaneously. On all “P” compres-
elapsed. Data collection will stop at the completion of one
sor applications or other compressor applications
screen of data as with the one screen. If stop is selected,
that are equipped with Flash Memory Card version
data collection will not stop until the triggers have been
C.MLM.01.05.xxx and later, the DATA SELECT key
satisfied and any selected trigger delay has elapsed.
is used to display all trended Data Points simultane-
ously or select a single Data Point for display.

FORM 160.54-O1
If a power failure occurs while the trending is running, presently on the screen is sent to the printer. If set to
the trending is stopped. Upon restoration of power, new, all data collected after pressing this key will be
the last screen of data that was collected will be dis- sent to the printer as it is collected. If set to disabled,
played on the TREND Screen. The START key must no data is sent to the printer. Refer to SECTION 4 -
be pressed to initiate a new TREND Screen. PRINTING of this manual for printout example.
DISPLAY ONLY Data Select

(Flash Memory Card version C.MLM.01.05.xxx and
This screen allows the user to view the graphical trend- later)
ing of the selected parameters and is also a gateway to Access Level Required: VIEW
the graph setup screens. Allows the user to display all trended data points si-
A red screen with the words “TREND multaneously or select a single trended data point for
MAX MUST BE > TREND MIN” will ap- display, hiding the other data points. Selections are All
pear if the Y-Axis minimum has been pro- Data or Data Point X (1-6).
grammed to a value that is greater than
the Y-Axis maximum for any parameter. Y-Axis
If this appears, proceed to the TREND Access Level Required: VIEW
SETUP Screen to change the values. This key toggles the Y-Axis labels of the graph. Each
key press changes the label to another of the selected
For fields requiring access level of SER- parameters.
OptiView Control Center - Service Instruc- X-Axis
instructions and explanation of all pro- This key toggles the X-Axis labels of the graph. Each
grammable setpoints and displayed values. key press alternates the scaling between time of day
and elapsed time. The Time of Day scaling is in 24-
PROGRAMMABLE hour format. The Elapsed Time scaling is the time
elapsed since the START key was pressed, starting the
Start trending.
Pressing this key clears the graph, starts a new graph,
NAVIGATION
sets the time of day to the present clock time and be-
gins the trending. This key is only available if trend- Home
ing is stopped. If the selected Chart Type is triggered Access Level Required: VIEW
and Trigger Action is set to Start, data collection will Returns user to HOME Screen.
not begin until the triggers have been satisfied and any
selected trigger delay has elapsed. Otherwise, data col- History
lection will begin immediately. (Flash Memory Card version C.MLM.01.04.xxx and
later)
Stop
Returns user to HISTORY Screen.
Pressing this key stops the trending. The trend data
is frozen on the display until another graph is started Trend Setup
with the START key. The STOP key is only available if Access Level Required:
trending is running. Only displayed if the trending is stopped. Causes a jump
to a subscreen for configuring the trending display.
Print
(Flash Memory Card version C.MLM.01.05.xxx and
later)
Allows the data on the TREND Screen to be printed in
tabular format. If set to existing, a snapshot of the data

FORM 160.54-O1
TREND SETUP SCREEN
00473VIP
Figure 59 - TREND SETUP SCREEN
OVERVIEW
This screen is used to configure the TRENDING PROGRAMMABLE
Screen. The parameters to be trended are selected from
the COMMON SLOTS Screen or Common Slots Mas- Chart Type
ter list and entered as Slot Numbers for Data Points 1 Access Level Required: OPERATOR
through 6. The Y-Axis minimum and maximum values Selects Continuous, One Screen Or Triggered (If com-
for each parameter are entered as Data Point Min and pressor application is other than “P”, applies only to
Data Point Max for Data Points 1 through 6. The inter- Flash Memory Card version (C.MLM.01.05.xxx and
val at which all the parameters are sampled is selected later) type of graph.
as the Data Collection Interval.
Collection Interval
DISPLAY ONLY Selects the interval at which the parameters are sam-
None pled. There are 450 data points displayed across the
X-Axis of the graph. Each point represents the instan-
For fields requiring access level of SER- taneous value of the parameter. The user selects the
VICE. Service Technicians refer to the time interval between these points. This is called the
OptiView Control Center - Service Instruc- Data Collection Interval, or the interval at which the
tions (Form 160.54-M1) for operation parameter is sampled. This interval is programmable
instructions and explanation of all pro- over the range of 1 second to 3600 seconds (1 hour), in
grammable setpoints and displayed values. one second increments. The selected interval not only
determines the sample interval, but also the full screen
time display. The full screen time display is a result
of the selected interval in seconds, multiplied by the
450 data points. For example, if the Data Collection
Interval is programmed for 900 seconds, the param-
eter would be sampled every 900 seconds, with the last
112.5 hours (4.7 days) of data viewable on the screen.

FORM 160.54-O1
Therefore, the selected interval is a compromise be- Point Max. Otherwise, a red graph is displayed on the
tween resolution and full screen time display. Select TREND Screen with the words TREND MAX MUST
the desired Data Collection Interval as follows: BE > TREND MIN. If the parameter selected for this
data point is a digital type (on/off), this value must be
1. Determine the desired time interval (in seconds), set to zero (0). Zero indicates the OFF state.
between data samples.
2. Calculate the full screen time display as follows: Data Point Max (1-6)
• 450 x Data Collection Interval equals full Only displayed if the associated Slot Number is not
screen seconds zero. This is the maximum value displayed for the
• full screen seconds/60 equals full screen Y-Axis. Selecting a parameter for a Data Point sets this
minutes to the default value, which is the highest value allowed
for that parameter. It can be changed to a value that
• full screen minutes/60 equals full screen hours provides a more appropriate resolution for the param-
• full screen hours/24 equals full screen days eter being monitored. To change, use the SELECT key
as described above and enter the desired value. The
3. Decide if the resultant sample interval and full value must always be set to a value greater than the
screen display meet the requirements. If not, se- Data Point Min. Otherwise, a red graph is displayed
lect a different sample interval. on the TREND Screen with the words TREND MAX
MUST BE > TREND MIN. There are 20 Y-Axis di-
Select
visions. If a MIN-MAX span is selected that is not
Access Level Required: OPERATOR evenly divided by 20, the program will automatical-
This key is used to enter the Slot Numbers and the min- ly select the next higher MAX value that makes the
imum and maximum Y-Axis values of each parameter span evenly divided by 20 (If compressor application
to be trended. Pressing this key places a yellow box is other than “P”, applies only to Flash Memory Card
around Data Point 1 Slot Number. Use the ▲ and ▼ version C.MLM.01.02 or later). For example, if 0.0 is
navigation keys to place the box around the value of selected as the MIN and 69.0 is selected as the MAX,
Data Points 1 through 6 to be changed. With the de- the program will insert 70.0 as the MAX value. If the
sired value selected, press the X key. A dialog box is parameter selected for this data point is a digital type
displayed permitting data entry. (on/off), this value must be set to one (1). One indicates
the on state.
Data Point Slot # (1-6)
Use the SELECT key as described above and enter the NAVIGATION
Slot Number from the COMMON SLOTS Screen or
Home
Master Slot Number List of the desired parameter to
be trended. The selected parameter description will be Returns user to HOME Screen.
displayed for the Data Point. Setting this Slot Number
Trending
to zero will disable trending for that particular Data
Point. Any or all points can be disabled. Returns user to TREND Screen.
Slot Numbers
Data Point Min (1-6)
Causes a jump to a subscreen that lists the Slot Num-
Only displayed if the Associated Slot Number is not
bers of the most commonly monitored parameters. The
Zero. This is the minimum value displayed for the
desired parameters to be plotted are selected from this
Y-Axis. Selecting a parameter for a Data Point sets this
screen.
to the default value, which is the lowest value allowed
for that parameter. It can be changed to a value that Triggers
provides a more appropriate resolution for the param- (Flash Memory Card version C.MLM.01.05.xxx and later)
eter being monitored. To change, use the SELECT key
Causes a jump to the Advanced TREND SETUP Screen,
as described above and enter the desired value. The
where the start/stop Triggers can be setup. Only dis-
value must always be set to a value less than the Data
played if triggered has been selected as Chart Type.

FORM 160.54-O1
ADVANCED TREND SETUP SCREEN
00474VIP
Figure 60 - ADVANCED TREND SETUP SCREEN
OVERVIEW Entry fields are as follows:

(Flash Memory Card version C.MLM.01.05.xxx and I. Primary Trigger
later)
A. Primary Operator
The desired data collection start/stop triggers are setup
B. Primary Test
on this screen. The trend data collection can be set to
start or stop based upon the status of up to two selected II. Primary to Secondary Operator
triggers.
III. Secondary Trigger
The triggers can consist of digital events or analog pa-
A. Secondary Operator
rameters compared to thresholds. The triggers can be
used individually or in combination. The digital and ana- B. Secondary Test
log parameters are selected from the COMMON SLOTS
IV. Trigger Action
Screen (or Master Slot Numbers List in this manual).
A. Delay of Trigger Delay
The parameter selected as the Primary Trigger is com-
pared to a value selected as the Primary Test, using the After the desired triggers are set, the START key on the
Primary Operator as a comparator. If it is evaluated as TREND Screen must be manually pressed before the
true, then the data collection is started or stopped (after triggers will be evaluated. While waiting for the trig-
any selected trigger delay) per the selected Trigger Ac- gers to start or stop data collection, a status message
tion. is displayed in the upper right corner of the TREND
Screen describing the pending action.
A Secondary Trigger can be evaluated with the Prima-
ry Trigger to start/stop data collection. The Primary to
Secondary Operator is used to define the trigger com-
binations required to be true to start/stop data collec-
tion. The Secondary Trigger is setup and evaluated the
same as the Primary Trigger.

FORM 160.54-O1
DISPLAY ONLY elapsed. If the Trigger Action is set to Stop, data col-
lection will stop after the triggers evaluate as true and
None
the delay timer has elapsed.
VICE. Service Technicians refer to the Primary to Secondary Operator
OptiView Control Center - Service Instruc- Access Level Required: OPERATOR
tions (Form 160.54-M1) for operation Selects whether the Primary Trigger, Secondary Trig-
instructions and explanation of all pro- ger or both have to be true in order to start or stop data
grammable setpoints and displayed values. collection. Selections are AND, OR, XOR and None. If
NONE is selected, the Secondary Trigger is disabled.
PROGRAMMABLE Data collection will start/stop (as selected with Trigger

Action) when:
Primary Trigger
Access Level Required: OPERATOR • If AND selected: Both Primary AND Secondary
Selects the first parameter to be evaluated. Selection are true
is made from the Slot Numbers listing on the TREND • If OR selected: Either Primary OR Secondary (or
COMMON SLOTS Screen or the Master Slot Num- both) are true
bers List in this manual. Setting this Slot Number to
zero disables the Primary Trigger. • If XOR selected: Either Primary OR Secondary
(but not both) are true
Primary Operator
Secondary Trigger
Selects the comparator for the Primary Trigger’s rela-
Selects the second parameter to be evaluated. Selection
tionship to the Primary Test. If the Primary Trigger is
is made from the Slot Numbers listing on the TREND
an analog value, selections are: <, <=, =, =>, >. If the
COMMON SLOTS Screen or the Master Slot Num-
Primary Trigger is a digital event, selections are: Equal
bers List in this manual. Setting this Slot Number to
To, Not Equal To.
zero disables the Secondary Trigger.
Primary Test
Secondary Operator
Selects the value or condition that the Primary Trig-
Selects the comparator for the Secondary Trigger’s re-
ger is compared to. Selection ranges from the Primary
lationship to the Secondary Test. If the Secondary trig-
Trigger minimum value to the Primary Trigger maxi-
ger is an Analog value, selections are: <, <=, =, =>, >.
mum value.
If the Secondary Trigger is a digital event, selections
Trigger Action are: Equal To, Not Equal To.
Secondary Test
Selects whether the trend data collection will Start or
Stop when the trigger comparisons are true. If set to
Selects the value or condition that the Secondary Trig-
Start, data collection will stop after one screen of data
ger is compared to. Selection ranges from the Secondary
is collected.
Trigger minimum to the Secondary Trigger maximum.
Trigger Delay
Allows the data collection start or stop to be delayed
after the triggers evaluate as true. The delay is select- Home
able from 1 to 864000 seconds (10 days). Display is Returns user to HOME Screen.
in days, hours, minutes and seconds. The delay timer
begins when the triggers evaluate as true. If the Trigger Trend Setup
Action is set to Start, data collection will begin after Returns user to TREND SETUP Screen.
the triggers evaluate as true and the delay timer has

FORM 160.54-O1
COMMON SLOTS SCREEN
00328VIP
Figure 61 - COMMON SLOTS SCREEN
This screen displays the Slot Numbers of the common- Page Down
ly monitored parameters. The Slot Numbers for the re- Access Level Required: OPERATOR
mainder of the available parameters are listed on the Scroll down in the displayed data.
Master Slot Numbers List that follows.
From these lists, select up to six parameters to be trend- Page Up
ed. Return to the TREND SETUP Screen and enter the Access Level Required: OPERATOR
parameters Slot Numbers into Data Points 1 through 6. Scroll up in the displayed data.
Print
DISPLAY ONLY Access Level Required: OPERATOR
Generates a list of the Slot Numbers of the available
Slot Numbers parameters.
These are the Slot Numbers of the most commonly
used parameters.
NAVIGATION
VICE. Service Technicians refer to the Home
OptiView Control Center - Service Instruc- Returns user to HOME Screen.
instructions and explanation of all pro- Trend Setup
grammable setpoints and displayed values. Returns user to TREND SETUP Screen.

FORM 160.54-O1
Table 4 - MASTER SLOT NUMBERS LIST FOR TABLE 4 - MASTER SLOT NUMBERS LIST FOR
USE WITH TREND FEATURE USE WITH TREND FEATURE (CONT'D)
SLOT SLOT
DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION
NUMBER NUMBER
256 System: Chiller State 1538 Oil Pump: Control Mode
257 System: Coastdown Time Remaining 1539 Oil Pump: Is Pump On
258 System: Prelube Time Remaining 1540 Oil Pump: Manual Time Left
259 System: Are Safety Shutdown Contacts Closed 1541 Oil Heater: Is Control Enabled
260 System: Are Cycling Shutdown Contacts Closed 1542 Oil Heater: Is Heater On
261 System: Are Anticipatory Alarm Contacts Closed 1543 Oil Return Solenoid: Is Solenoid On
262 System: Operating Hours 1792 Leaving Chilled Liquid: Temperature
263 System: Run Time (in seconds) 1793 Leaving Chilled Liquid: Temperature Differential
264 System: Number of Starts 1794 Leaving Chilled Liquid: Is Flow Switch Closed
265 System: Is Stop Switch Closed 1795 Leaving Chilled Liquid: Is Pump On
266 System: Is Start Switch Closed 1796 Leaving Chilled Liquid: Local Temperature
267 System: Is Remote Ready to Start Setpoint
280 External Contact: Is Remote Stop Closed 1797 Leaving Chilled Liquid: Remote Analog
Temperature Setpoint
281 External Contact: Is Remote Start Closed
1798 Leaving Chilled Liquid: Remote BAS
282 External Contact: Is MultiUnit Cycling Closed
Temperature Setpoint
283 External Contact: Is Remote Cycling Closed
1799 Leaving Chilled Liquid: Remote Modem
284 External Contact: Is Auxiliary Safety Open Temperature Setpoint
285 Jumper: Is Anti‑Recycle Enabled 1800 Leaving Chilled Liquid: Selected Temperature
286 Jumper: Coastdown Operation Setpoint
287 Jumper: Is Diagnostics Enabled 1801 Leaving Chilled Liquid: Control Sensitivity
288 Jumper: Liquid Type 1802 Leaving Chilled Liquid: Remote Temperature
289 Jumper: Chilled Liquid Pump Operation Range
290 Jumper: Motor Type 1803 Leaving Chilled Liquid: Restart Temperature
291 Jumper: Power Failure Restart Offset
292 Jumper: Pre‑Run Operation 1804 Leaving Chilled Liquid: Restart Temperature
Setpoint
293 Jumper: Refrigerant Selection
1805 Leaving Chilled Liquid: Shutdown Tempera-
294 Jumper: VSD Motor Supply Line Frequency
ture Offset
295 Jumper: Oil Pump Package
1806 Leaving Chilled Liquid: Shutdown Tempera-
304 Options: Control Mode ture Setpoint
305 Options: System Language 1807 Return Chilled Liquid: Temperature
306 Options: Chiller ID Number 1808 Evaporator: Pressure
307 Options: Display Mode 1809 Evaporator: Saturation Temperature
336 Security: Log In Level 1810 Evaporator: Small Temperature Difference
337 Security: Log In User ID 1811 Evaporator: Is Refrigerant Sensor Present
512 Sched: Is Schedule Enabled 1812 Evaporator: Refrigerant Temperature
1280 Pre‑Rotation Vanes: Is Motor Switch Closed 1813 Evaporator: Delta P / P
1281 Pre‑Rotation Vanes: Position 1814 Evaporator: Brine Low Cutout
1282 Pre‑Rotation Vanes: Are Vanes Opening 1815 Smart Freeze Protection: Is Control Enabled
1283 Pre‑Rotation Vanes: Are Vanes Closing 1816 Liquid Line Solenoid: Is Solenoid Installed
1284 Pre‑Rotation Vanes: Are Vanes Holding 1817 Liquid Line Solenoid: Is Solenoid On
1285 Pre‑Rotation Vanes: Control Mode 1818 Leaving Chilled Liquid: Remote Digital Tem-
1296 Discharge: Temperature perature Setpoint
1536 Oil: Differential Pressure 2048 Leaving Condenser Liquid: Temperature
1537 Oil: Sump Temperature 2049 Leaving Condenser Liquid: Is Flow Switch Closed

FORM 160.54-O1
TABLE 4 - MASTER SLOT NUMBERS LIST FOR TABLE 4 - MASTER SLOT NUMBERS LIST FOR
USE WITH TREND FEATURE (CONT'D) USE WITH TREND FEATURE (CONT'D)
SLOT SLOT
NUMBER NUMBER
2050 Leaving Condenser Liquid: Is Pump On 2575 LcSss: Phase A Voltage
2051 Return Condenser Liquid: Temperature 2576 LcSss: Phase B Voltage
2052 Condenser: Pressure 2577 LcSss: Phase C Voltage 2
2053 Condenser: Saturation Temperature 2578 LcSss: Phase A Temperature
2054 Condenser: Small Temperature Difference 2579 LcSss: Phase B Temperature
2057 Condenser: Is High Pressure Switch Closed 2580 LcSss: Phase C Temperature
2058 Condenser: High Pressure Warning Threshold 2581 LcSss: Starter Model
2059 SubCooling: Temperature 2582 LcSss: Full Load Amps
2060 Drop Leg Refrigerant: Is Sensor Present 2583 LcSss: Voltage Range
2061 Drop Leg Refrigerant: Temperature 2584 LcSss: Starting Current
2062 Vent Line Solenoid: Is Solenoid Installed 2585 LcSss: Is Serial Communications OK
2063 Vent Line Solenoid: Is Solenoid On 2586 LcSss: Panel to Sss Comm Errors
2304 Motor: Starter Type 2587 LcSss: Sss to Panel Comm Errors
2305 Motor: Is Motor Starter On 2816 VSD: Motor HP
2306 Motor: Current %FLA 2817 VSD: 100% Full Load Amps
2307 Motor: Is Motor Controller Switch Open 2818 VSD: Input Power
2308 Motor: Current Limit Local Setpoint 2819 VSD: Kilowatt Hours
2309 Motor: Current Limit Remote Analog Setpoint 2820 VSD: DC Bus Voltage
2310 Motor: Current Limit Remote BAS Setpoint 2821 VSD: DC Inverter Link Current
2311 Motor: Current Limit Remote Modem Setpoint 2822 VSD: Output Frequency
2312 Motor: Current Limit Selected Setpoint 2823 VSD: Output Voltage
2313 Motor: Pulldown Demand Time Remaining 2824 VSD: Phase A Current
2314 Motor: Pulldown Demand Limit Setpoint 2825 VSD: Phase B Current
2315 Motor: Pulldown Demand Time Setpoint 2826 VSD: Phase C Current
2316 Motor: Anti‑Recycle Time Remaining 2827 VSD: Is Precharge Relay On
2317 Motor: Current Limit Remote Digital Setpoint 2828 VSD: Is Trigger SCR On
2351 Motor - Operating Hours Since last Lubrication 2829 VSD: Is Water Pump On
(Mod “A” Solid State Starters) 2830 VSD: Control Mode
2560 SSS: Phase A Current 2831 VSD: Command Frequency
2561 SSS: Phase B Current 2832 VSD: Manual Frequency Increment
2562 SSS: Phase C Current 2833 VSD: Internal Ambient Temperature
2563 SSS: Phase A Voltage 2834 VSD: Converter Heatsink Temperature
2564 SSS: Phase B Voltage 2835 VSD: Phase A Heatsink Temperature
2565 SSS: Phase C Voltage 2836 VSD: Phase B Heatsink Temperature
2566 SSS: Scale/Model 2837 VSD: Phase C Heatsink Temperature
2567 SSS: Full Load Amps 2838 VSD: Is Communications OK
2568 SSS: Supply Voltage Range 2839 VSD: Panel to ACC Comms Error Count
2569 SSS: Is Current Unbalance Check Enabled 2840 VSD: ACC to Panel Comms Error Count
(Mod “B” Solid State Starters) 2841 VSD: ACC to VSD Comms Error Count
2570 LcSss: Input Power 2842 VSD: VSD to ACC Comms Error Count
2571 LcSss: Kilowatt Hours 2843 VSD: VSD to Filter Comms Error Count
2572 LcSss: Phase A Current 2844 VSD: Filter to ACC Comms Error Count
2573 LcSss: Phase B Current 2845 ACC: Delta P/P
2574 LcSss: Phase C Current 2846 ACC: Stability Limit

FORM 160.54-O1
TABLE 4 - MASTER SLOT NUMBERS LIST FOR TABLE 4 - MASTER SLOT NUMBERS LIST FOR
USE WITH TREND FEATURE (CONT'D) USE WITH TREND FEATURE (CONT'D)
SLOT SLOT
NUMBER NUMBER
2847 ACC: Surge Margin 8196 Oil Seal Lube: Time Left
2848 ACC: Manual Surge Command 8197 VSOP: Speed Command
2849 ACC: Surge Map Count 8198 VSOP: Control Mode
2850 ACC: Surge Type 8199 VSOP: Manual Command Frequency
2857 ACC: Surge Map Point Count 8200 VSOP: Is Pulldown In Effect
2858 ACC: Surge Map Delta P/P 8201 VSOP: Pulldown Time Remaining
2859 ACC: Surge Map Output Frequency 8202 VSOP: Target Setpoint
2860 ACC: Surge Map PRV Position 8203 VSOP: Pressure Setpoint
2861 Filter: Is Filter Installed 8204 VSOP: Control Period
2862 Filter: Is Operation Inhibited 8205 Refrigerant Level: Is Control Enabled
2863 Filter: Is Filter Running 8206 Refrigerant Level: Position
2864 Filter: Is Precharge Contactor Closed 8207 Refrigerant Level: Is Valve Closing
2865 Filter: Is Supply Contactor Closed 8208 Refrigerant Level: Is Valve Opening
2866 Filter: Phase Rotation 8209 Refrigerant Level: Control Mode
2867 Filter: Motor HP 8210 Refrigerant Level: Is Pulldown In Effect
2868 Filter: Supply kVA 8211 Refrigerant Level: Pulldown Time Remaining
2869 Filter: Total Power Factor 8212 Refrigerant Level: Target Setpoint
2870 Filter: DC Bus Voltage 8213 Refrigerant Level: Setpoint
2871 Filter: Heatsink Temperature 8214 Refrigerant Level: Period
2872 Filter: L1 - L2 RMS Voltage 8215 Refrigerant Level: Proportional Limit Close
2873 Filter: L2 - L3 RMS Voltage 8216 Refrigerant Level: Proportional Limit Open
2874 Filter: L3 - L1 RMS Voltage 8217 Refrigerant Level: Rate Limit Close
2875 Filter: L1 - N Peak Voltage 8218 Refrigerant Level: Rate Limit Open
2876 Filter: L2 - N Peak Voltage 8221 HSTB: Oil Drain Temperature (Before
2877 Filter: L3 - N Peak Voltage C.MLM.01.03)
2878 Filter: L1 Total Harmonic Distortion 8222 HSTB: Is Solenoid Installed
2879 Filter: L2 Total Harmonic Distortion 8223 HSTB: Is Solenoid On
2880 Filter: L3 Total Harmonic Distortion 8224 HSTB: Proximity Position
2881 Filter: L1 RMS Filter Current 8225 HSTB: Proximity Differential
2882 Filter: L2 RMS Filter Current 8226 HSTB: Proximity Reference Position
2883 Filter: L3 RMS Filter Current 8280 Stall Detector Board output voltage
2884 Filter: L1 RMS Supply Current 8281 VGD open
2885 Filter: L2 RMS Supply Current 8282 VGD close
2886 Filter: L3 RMS Supply Current 8317 Stall DC Pressure Voltage
2887 Filter: L1 Total Demand Distortion
2890 Filter: Maximum Total Harmonic Distortion
2891 Filter: Maximum Total Demand Distortion
8192 Oil: Pump Pressure
8193 Oil: Sump Pressure
8194 Oil Seal Lube: Is Control Enabled
8195 Oil Seal Lube: Time To Next Lube

FORM 160.54-O1
SECTION 3 - DISPLAY MESSAGES

The Status Bar of the display contains a Status Line System Prelube
and, beneath it a Details Line. The Status Line contains A chiller start has been initiated and the pre-start lu-
a message describing the operating state of the chill- brication is being performed. The prelube duration is
er; whether it is stopped, running, starting or shutting either 50 seconds or 180 seconds, as configured with
down. The Details Line displays Warning, Cycling, a Microboard Program Switch. The prelube duration
Safety, Start Inhibit and other messages that provide must never be changed by anyone other than a quali-
further details of the Status Bar messages. The Status fied Service Technician. The standard prelube duration
Messages listed below are displayed on the Status Line. is 50 seconds.
All other messages are displayed on the Details Line.
To aid in the meaning of the message, messages are
System Run 3
displayed in different colors as follows: The chiller is running under the condition described in
the Details Line of the Status Bar.
MESSAGE COLOR
System Run – Cooling Mode
Normal Operation Green
Warning Yellow
Cycling Shutdown Orange The chiller is running with Heat Pump Duty enabled
Safety Shutdown Red
and the Heat Pump Duty Operational mode setpoint set
to Cooling mode. In this mode, the Heat Pump is con-
trolling the Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature to the
For messages specific to the Variable Speed Drive, Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature Setpoint.
Medium Voltage Variable Speed Drive, Solid State
Starter and Medium Voltage Solid State Starter, refer System Run – Heating Mode
to the applicable service manual as follows: Variable (Software version C.OPT.01.23.307 and later)
Speed Drive – Service Instructions (Form 160.00-M4);
Medium Voltage Variable Speed Drive – Service (Form The chiller is running with Heat Pump Duty enabled
160.00-M6); Solid State Starter (Mod “B”) – Opera- and the Heat Pump Duty Operational mode setpoint set
tion and Maintenance (Form 160.00-O2); Medium to Heating mode. In this mode, the Heat Pump is con-
Voltage Solid State Starter – Service (Form 160.00- trolling the Leaving Condenser Liquid Temperature to
M5). the Leaving Condenser Liquid Temperature Setpoint.
STATUS MESSAGES System Coastdown

The chiller has shut down and the Post-run lubrication
System Ready To Start is being performed. The Coastdown duration varies ac-
The chiller is shut down but will start upon receipt of a cording to the microboard and setup. On 031-01730-
local or remote start signal. 000 microboards, it is 150 seconds for electric motor
applications (standard); 15 minutes for Steam Turbine
Cycling Shutdown – Auto Restart applications (enhanced), as determined by Program
The chiller is shut down on a cycling shutdown. The Jumper JP36. On 031-02430-000/001 microboards,
cause of the shutdown is still in effect and is displayed the duration varies according to the software used.
on the Details Line of the Status Bar. The chiller will With software version C.OPT.01.16.XXX (and later),
automatically restart when the cycling condition clears. the Coastdown duration is determined by the setting of
the Coastdown (standard or enhanced) and Coastdown
Safety Shutdown – Manual Restart Time Setpoints. If the Coastdown setpoint is set to en-
hanced (steam turbine applications), it is 15 minutes.
The chiller is shut down on a safety shutdown. The
If set to standard (electric motor applications), it is
cause of the shutdown is still in effect and is displayed
programmable over a range determined by the Chiller
on the Details Line of the Status Bar. The chiller can
Style/Compressor Setpoint (for style F/J7 and G/K6-
be started after the safety condition clears and the Op-
K7, the range is 240 (default) to 900 seconds. All oth-
erator moves the Compressor Switch to the Stop-Reset
(O) position.

FORM 160.54-O1
ers, the range is 150 (default) to 900 seconds). With Heat Pump – Leaving Condenser Liquid Control
earlier software versions, the duration is fixed at 150 (Software version C.OPT.01.23.307 and later)
seconds.
The Heat Pump is running, controlling the Leaving
Start Inhibit Condenser Liquid Temperature to the Leaving Con-
denser Liquid Temperature Setpoint. In this mode,
The chiller is prevented from being started due to the Heat Pump Duty is enabled and the Heat Pump Duty
reason displayed on the Details Line of the Status Bar. Operational mode setpoint is set to Heating mode.
Vanes Closing Before Shutdown Current Pulldown Limit
Displayed while the Pre-rotation Vanes are closing The Pulldown Demand Limit Setpoint timer is in effect
during a Soft Shutdown. During Soft Shutdowns, the and the Compressor Motor current is greater than or
Vanes are driven fully closed prior to shutting down the equal to the Pulldown Demand Current Limit Setpoint
compressor. When the Vane Motor End Switch closes, value. The Pre-rotation Vane operation is being inhib-
indicating the Vanes have fully closed (or 3.5 minutes ited as described in Motor – High Current Limit mes-
have elapsed, whichever occurs first), the Run Signal sage below.
is removed from the compressor motor starter and a
System Coastdown is performed. Soft Shutdowns are Motor – High Current Limit
initiated by the following:
The Compressor Motor current is greater than or equal
1. Leaving Chilled Liquid – Low temperature to the local or remote Current Limit Setpoint. The Cur-
rent Limit Setpoint is programmed over a range of 30
2. Remote Stop to 100% of the Chiller Full Load Amps (FLA). When
3. Multi-Unit Cycling – Contacts Open the motor current increases to the Inhibit Open thresh-
old, the Pre-rotation Vanes are inhibited from further
4. System Cycling – Contacts Open opening. This prevents a further current rise. If the
5. Control Panel – Schedule current continues to rise to the Start Close threshold,
the Vanes begin closing until the current falls to the
6. Operator Initiated at Keypad (Flash Memory Card Stop Close threshold. Automatic Vane operation is re-
version C.MLM.01.06.xxx and later) sumed and this message automatically clears when the
While the Vanes are closing during any Soft Shutdown, motor current decreases to the Allow Open threshold.
if a Local Stop is initiated with the Compressor Switch The thresholds are different for the various motor start-
or any faults other than those listed above occur, the er applications. To allow field calibration of the Solid
Soft Shutdown is terminated and it will immediately State Starter (Mod “A”) Logic Board or CM-2 Current
perform a System Coastdown. Module, pressing the Pre-rotation Vanes OPEN key in
SERVICE access level, starts a 10 minute timer during
RUN MESSAGES which the current limit thresholds are elevated. Refer to
table:
Leaving Chilled Liquid Control
MOTOR CURRENT (%FLA)
The chiller is running, controlling the Leaving Chilled
Liquid to the Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature Set- ELECTRO-
VANE CONTROL MECHANICAL/ SERVICE
point. There are no system conditions inhibiting this VSD
SOLID STATE MODE
operation.
STARTER
Heat Pump – Leaving Chilled Liquid Control On rise, inhibit open 100 100 107
(Software version C.OPT.01.23.307 and later) On fall, allow open 98 98 106
The Heat Pump is running, controlling the Leaving On rise, start close 104 103 110
Chilled Liquid Temperature to the Leaving Chilled On fall, stop close 102 101 109
Liquid Temperature Setpoint. In this mode, Heat Pump
Duty is enabled and the Heat Pump Duty Operational
mode setpoint is set to Cooling mode.

FORM 160.54-O1
An example of current limit is as follows: If a Solid VSD – Frequency > 0Hz

Sate Starter chiller FLA is 100 Amps, and the Current (Software version C.MLM.01.14.xxx (and later) or
Limit Setpoint is 50%, the following will occur: C.OPT.01.14.306 (and later))
50 Amps – inhibit vane open This start inhibit is set whenever the chiller is shut-
down and a Compressor Motor Variable Speed Drive
52 Amps – vanes begin closing (VSD) Output Frequency of greater than 0Hz is detect-
51 Amps – vanes stop closing ed. This fault is released and the chiller can be start-
ed after the frequency is at 0Hz and the Compressor
49 Amps – allow automatic vane control Switch is placed in the Stop-Reset (O) position. The oil
pump is started (with a starting frequency of 45Hz) as
With software versions prior to C.OPT.01.16.xxx, this soon as this fault is detected. A System Coastdown is
message is also displayed when the Compressor Motor performed whenever this fault is released. 3
Variable Speed Drive has not yet reached full speed af-
ter having been commanded to do so in Manual Speed LCSSS – High Temperature Phase X - Stopped
Control mode. (Mod. “B” Solid State Starter only)
Load Control Mode The chiller is stopped and the Liquid Cooled Solid
(Software version C.OPT.01.16.xxx and later) State Starter Logic/Trigger Board has detected that the
temperature of phase A, B, or C (designated as X in this
message) Silicon Controlled Rectifier (SCR) Module
The Compressor Motor Variable Speed Drive has not is greater than 110°F. The starter cooling pump will run
yet reached full speed after having been commanded to and the chiller will be inhibited from starting until the
do so in Manual Speed Control mode. While this is dis- temperature decreases to less than 109°F.
played, the Pre-rotation Vanes are inhibited from further
opening. WARNING MESSAGES
START INHIBIT MESSAGES Warning – Real Time Clock Failure
Anti-Recycle XX min/Sec During the initialization process that occurs when
power is applied to the Control Center, test data is writ-
The chiller is inhibited from starting because the 30 ten to a location in the BRAM battery backed memory
minute anti-recycle time has not yet elapsed. Time re- device (IC location U52 on Microboard). This data is
maining is displayed. then read from the BRAM and compared to the test
data. If the read data is not the same as that which was
Vane Motor Switch Open
written to the device, it is assumed the BRAM and Real
The chiller is inhibited from starting because the Pre- Time Clock operation is defective and this message is
rotation Vanes are not fully closed. displayed. The BRAM should be replaced by a quali-
fied Service Technician. This message automatically
Motor – Current >15% FLA clears when the BRAM problem has been solved.
This start inhibit is instantaneously set whenever the
chiller is not running and a motor current of greater Warning – Condenser or Evaporator XDCR Error
than 15% FLA is detected. The oil pump is started as The Evaporator Pressure transducer is indicating a
soon as this fault is detected. The starting frequency higher pressure than the Condenser pressure transducer
for the Variable Speed Oil Pump is 45.0Hz. The start after the chiller has been running for 10 minutes. This
inhibit is released when the motor current decreases to is indicative of a Condenser or Evaporator transducer
greater than or equal to 15% FLA and the Compres- failure. This message will be displayed until the condi-
sor Switch is placed in the Stop-Reset (O) position. A tion clears and the WARNING RESET Keypad key is
full System Coastdown is performed when this fault is pressed in Operator (or higher) access mode. Condition
released. With software version C.MLM.01.10D.xxx not checked in Brine mode.
(and earlier) or C.OPT.01.10D.xxx (and earlier), the
motor current must exceed 15% FLA for 10 continu-
ous seconds before the start inhibit is set.

FORM 160.54-O1
Warning – Refrigerant Level Out Of Range Warning – Evaporator – Low Pressure Limit
(Flash Memory Card version C.MLM.01.05C.xxx and The Evaporator Pressure has decreased to the Warn-
earlier and “P” compressors with C.MLM.04.01B and ing threshold. This threshold is fixed in Water cooling
earlier) applications. In Brine cooling applications, the thresh-
The output of the condenser refrigerant level sensor old is a fixed amount above the programmable safety
is greater than 5.1VDC. This is indicative of a level shutdown threshold. The Safety threshold in Brine ap-
sensor failure. While this condition exists, the refriger- plications is determined by the Brine solution and is
ant variable orifice is driven to the full open position. determined by the YORK Factory. While this condition
This message automatically clears when the refrigerant is in effect, the Pre-rotation Vanes are inhibited from
level sensor output is within range. further opening. This message automatically clears and
the Vanes are permitted to open when the Evaporator
Warning – Standby Lube – Low Oil Pressure Pressure increases to the reset value.
A minimum of 15 PSID of oil pressure was not achieved
WARNING RESET
in the first 30 seconds of a Standby Lubrication cycle, THRESHOLD (PSIG) THRESHOLD (PSIG)
or the pressure decreased below this value during the WATER BRINE WATER BRINE
remainder of the cycle. This message will be displayed
+1.9 more +3.2 more
and no further Standby Lubrications will be performed R22 56.2 than Safety 57.5 than Safety
until the WARNING RESET key is pressed in Opera- Setpoint Setpoint
tor (or higher) access mode. R134a 27.0 +2.0 >Safety 28.0 +3.0>Safety
Setpoint Setpoint
With software version C.OPT.01.23.307 (and later),
this warning is also set when either the Pump Oil Pres- Warning – Vanes Uncalibrated – Fixed Speed
sure transducer or the Sump Oil Pressure transducer
The Compressor Motor Variable Speed Drive (VSD) is
is less than 2 PSIG when a Standby Lube is requested
operating Fixed Speed (full speed) mode because the
by automatic control. This inhibits the Standby Lube
Pre-rotation Vanes position potentiometer calibration
cycle when the chiller is open to atmosphere.
has not been performed.
Warning – Setpoint Override
Warning – Harmonic Filter – Operation Inhibited
A blank BRAM battery-backed memory device (IC loca- The Compressor Motor Variable Speed Drive (VSD)
tion U52 on Microboard) or a failure of this device was Harmonic Filter has been inhibited. Refer to Variable
detected during the initialization process that occurs when Speed Drive – Service Instructions (Form 160.00-M1).
power is applied to the Control Center. Due to this fail- Harmonic Filter operation should not be altered by
ure, any or all of the programmed Setpoints could have anyone other than a qualified Service Technician.
been corrupted. Therefore, all Setpoints have been auto-
matically changed to their Default values. All Setpoints Warning – Harmonic Filter – Data Loss
will have to be programmed to their desired values. This
Communications between the Harmonic Filter Logic
message will clear when the WARNING RESET key is
Board and the Compressor Motor Variable Speed
pressed in Operator (or higher) access mode.
Drive VSD Logic Board or the Adaptive Capacity
Warning – Condenser – High Pressure Limit Control Board is not occurring. While this condition
exists, all filter related parameters are displayed as X’s.
The Condenser Pressure exceeds the High Pressure Warn- This message automatically clears when communica-
ing Setpoint threshold, programmed by a Service Tech- tions are restored.
nician logged in at SERVICE access level. While this
condition is in effect, the Pre-rotation Vanes are inhibited Warning – Harmonic Filter – Input Frequency
from further opening. This message automatically clears Range
and the Vanes are permitted to open when the condenser
The power line frequency detected by the Compressor
pressure decreases to 5 PSIG below the Setpoint.
Motor Variable Speed Drive (VSD) Harmonic Filter is
outside the range of 58 to 62Hz (60Hz), or 49 to 51Hz
(50Hz). While this condition exists, all filter related pa-
rameters are displayed as X’s. This message automati-
cally clears when the line frequency is within range.

FORM 160.54-O1
Warning – Harmonic Filter – Not Running Warning – Surge Protection – Excess Surge
(Software version C.OPT.01.23.307 and later) Limit
This warning is set when all of the following are true (Flash Memory Card version C.MLM.01.05.xxx and
for 20 continuous seconds: later)
(Applies only if Surge Protection Extended Run fea-
• Chiller is running ture is Enabled)
• Filter is enabled Displayed during the Surge Protection 10 minute Ex-
tended Run period. This period begins when the Surge
• Filter present status is true Window Count exceeds the Count Limit. During this
• Run Time greater than 20 seconds period, the Pre-rotation Vanes are driven closed. When
10 minutes have elapsed, this message and the Pre-
• Filter operating mode is stopped rotation Vanes load inhibit are automatically cleared. 3
This warning is released when the chiller is stopped, Message and load inhibit are also cleared when the
but will be displayed until manually cleared using the chiller is shutdown.
WARNING RESET key when logged in at OPERA- If the optional Hot Gas Bypass feature
TOR (or higher) access level. is enabled, the valve position must be at
100% before the Extended Run is imple-
Warning – Vanes Uncalibrated mented. If the chiller is chiller is equipped
The Hot Gas Bypass feature is enabled, but the Pre- with a Compressor Motor Variable Speed
rotation Vanes calibration procedure has not yet been Drive, the output frequency must be at full
performed. speed (50Hz/60Hz) before this control can
be implemented.
Warning – External I/O – Serial Communications
Serial communications between the Microboard and Warning – Condenser Or VGD Sensor Failure
the optional Analog I/O Board has been interrupted for (Software version C.MLM.01.14.xxx (and later) or
at least 20 seconds. C.OPT.01.14.306 (and later))
The difference between the Stall Pressure transducer
Warning – Excess Surge Detected
output and the Condenser Pressure transducer output
(Flash Memory Card version C.MLM.01.05.xxx and has exceeded 0.28VDC for 3 continuous minutes while
later) the chiller was running. This feature verifies the opera-
(Applies only if Surge Protection Shutdown feature is tion of the Stall transducer and the Condenser trans-
Disabled) ducer. Since both transducers are measuring essentially
The Surge Window Count has exceeded the Count the same pressure, both outputs should be within the
Limit. Message can be manually cleared after the specified tolerance. This message must be manually
Surge Window Count is less than or equal to the Count cleared. It will be displayed until the transducer out-
Limit, or the Shutdown feature is enabled or the chiller puts are within the acceptable range of each other and
is stopped. To clear message press WARNING RESET the WARNING RESET key in SERVICE access level.
key on HOME Screen when logged in at OPERATOR
While this message is displayed, the Variable Geom-
(or higher) access level.
etry Diffuser (VGD) is driven to the full open position
and held there until this warning is manually cleared.
Warning – Liquid Level Setpoint not Achieved
When cleared, the VGD returns normal operation.
(Software version C.OPT.01.25C.308 (and later))
Automatic reset warning message is displayed when Warning – Loss of Subcooler Liquid Seal
the Refrigerant Level is not within + or - 15% of the (Software version C.OPT.01.25C.308 (and later))
Refrigerant Level Setpoint for 10 continuous minutes
This Warning is displayed if the chiller has been run-
after the chiller has been running for 30 minutes. It
ning for 30 minutes or more and the Drop Leg Tem-
will clear when within the 15% range or the chiller is
perature is less than the Return Condenser Liquid
stopped.
Temperature continuously for two minutes. Setting the
Drop Leg Sensor installed to Disabled will prevent this
warning from being displayed.

FORM 160.54-O1
Warning – Conditions Override VGD Warning – Motor Bearing Lube Required

(Software version C.MLM.01.14.xxx (and later) or (Software version C.MLM.01.14.xxx (and later) or
C.OPT.01.14.306 (and later)) C.OPT.01.14.306 (and later))
An extreme stall condition has been detected while the The Operating Hours Since Last Motor Lubrication has
chiller was running. An extreme stall condition exists exceeded 1200 hours. This replaces WARNING – MO-
when the Stall Detector Voltage (output of the Stall De- TOR BEARING LUBE SUGGESTED above. This is
tector Board) exceeds twice the High Limit setpoint for displayed until manually cleared by the Operator or the
the duration programmed in the Extreme Stall Dura- Operating Hours Since Last Motor Lubrication exceed
tion Setpoint (10 to 20 minutes). While this message is 1400 hours, whereupon it is replaced by the message
displayed, the compressor Variable Geometry Diffuser Motor – Lack Of Bearing Lubrication below. The Op-
(VGD) is driven to the full open position and held there erator clears this message by entering his/her initials,
until the message is manually cleared. This protects the name or user ID in OPERATOR access level (or high-
VGD ring from possible damage from an extreme stall er) using the MOTOR LUBE ACKNOWLEDGE key
condition. This message can be cleared after the Stall on the MOTOR LUBRICATION Screen. Refer to the
Detector Voltage returns to less than two times the Motor Lubrication Screen on Page 115 for entry in-
High Limit Setpoint and the WARNING RESET key is structions. The date and time of this entry is automati-
pressed in SERVICE access level. cally logged as the Date Of Last Motor Lubrication and
Time Of Last Motor Lubrication. It also resets the Op-
The extreme stall condition is not checked under the erating Hours Since Last Lubrication to zero. The date
following conditions: this warning occurs is stored as the Date Of Last Motor
• While the VGD is in manual control mode. Lubrication Warning Or Fault. With software version
C.OPT.01.16.xxx (and later), this warning message
• While the VGD is fully closed (VGD Limit will not be displayed if the Auto Lube Setpoint on the
Switch closed). MOTOR LUBRICATION Screen enabled.
• While the Pre-rotation Vanes position is greater
Warning – Motor – High Winding Temperature
than the PRV VGD INHIBIT Setpoint.
Warning – Motor Bearing Lube Suggested This warning occurs when any of the enabled Motor
(Software version C.MLM.01.14.xxx (and later) or Winding Temperatures exceeds the following: [High
C.OPT.01.14.306 (and later)) Winding Temperature Shutdown threshold - 18°F] for
The Operating Hours Since Last Motor Lubrication has 3 continuous seconds. This warning will automatically
exceeded 1000 hours. This will be displayed until man- clear when all winding temperatures decrease below
ually cleared by the Operator or the Operating Hours the warning threshold. The value programmed for the
Since Last Motor Lubrication exceed 1200 hours, above threshold is displayed as High Winding Temper-
whereupon it is replaced by the message WARNING ature Shutdown on the MOTOR SETPOINTS Screen.
– MOTOR BEARING LUBE REQUIRED below. The It is programmed with the Winding Setup Setpoint on
Operator clears this message by entering his/her ini- that screen. This warning not occur when the Wind-
tials, name or user ID in OPERATOR access level (or ing Temperature Protection Setpoint is set to Disabled
higher) using the MOTOR LUBE ACKNOWLEDGE on the MOTOR DETAILS Screen. Also, it will not act
key on the MOTOR LUBRICATION Screen. Refer to on any RTD input registering as an open RTD or any
the Motor Lubrication Screen on Page 115 for entry individual winding temperature sensor that has been
instructions. The date and time of this entry is automati- disabled with the Temperature Disable Setpoint on the
cally logged as the Date Of Last Motor Lubrication and MOTOR SETPOINTS Screen.
Time Of Last Motor Lubrication. It also resets the Op-
erating Hours Since Last Lubrication to zero. The date Warning – Motor – High Bearing Temperature
this warning occurs is stored as the Date Of Last Motor (Software version C.OPT.01.22.307 and later)
Lubrication Warning Or Fault. With software version This warning occurs when either of the enabled mo-
C.OPT.01.16.xxx (and later), this warning message tor bearing temperatures exceeds the programmed
will not be displayed if the Auto Lube Setpoint on the High Bearing Temperature Warning for 3 continuous
MOTOR LUBRICATION Screen enabled. seconds. This warning will automatically clear when
all bearing temperatures decrease below the warning

FORM 160.54-O1
threshold. The value programmed for this threshold is Place Compressor Switch In Run Position
displayed as High Bearing Temperature Warning on The Control Center is in either Digital or ISN Remote
the MOTOR SETPOINTS Screen. It is programmed mode. The Operator is requested to place the Compres-
with the Bearing Setup Setpoint on that screen. This sor Switch in the RUN position. The Control Center
warning not occur when the Bearing Temperature Pro- will not accept a Remote start/stop command unless
tection Setpoint is set to Disabled on the MOTOR DE- the switch is in the RUN position.
TAILS Screen. Also, it will not act on any RTD input
registering as an open RTD. CYCLING SHUTDOWN MESSAGES
Warning – Motor – Bearing Vibration Baseline Multiunit Cycling – Contacts Open
Not Set The Multiunit Cycling contacts connected to I/O Board
(Software version C.OPT.01.22.307 and later) TB4-9, have opened to initiate a cycling shutdown. If 3
Displayed until both the Shaft End and Opposite Shaft the chiller is running when this occurs, the Pre-rotation
End motor bearing vibration baseline values are entered Vanes are driven fully closed prior to shutting down the
on the MOTOR DETAILS Screen. This can be done chiller. The chiller will automatically restart when the
either manually with the Manual Baseline Setpoint or contacts close.
automatically with the AUTO BASELINE key on that
screen. While this message is displayed, the vibration System Cycling – Contacts Open
baseline values are set to X.X. The System Cycling contacts connected to I/O Board
TB4-13, have opened to initiate a cycling shutdown. If
Warning – Motor – High Bearing Vibration the chiller is running when this occurs, the Pre-rotation
(Software version C.OPT.01.22.307 and later) Vanes are driven fully closed prior to shutting down the
Either the Shaft End or Opposite Shaft End motor bear- chiller. The chiller will automatically restart when the
ing vibration has exceeded the value programmed for the contacts close.
High Vibration Warning Setpoint for the programmed
number of Delay seconds. The warning will automati- Oil – Low Temperature Differential
cally clear when both vibration values decrease below the The chiller is prevented from starting because for one
warning threshold. This warning does not occur when the of the following reasons. The chiller will automatically
Motor Vibration Protection Setpoint is set to Disabled on restart when the conditions have been satisfied. In soft-
the MOTOR DETAILS Screen or while the WARNING ware version C.OPT.01.23.307 (and later), this condition
– MOTOR – BEARING VIBRATION BASELINE NOT is only checked while the chiller is stopped. In previous
SET warning is displayed. software versions, it is checked when stopped and during
the first 10 seconds of prelube.
ROUTINE SHUTDOWN MESSAGES
The chiller has been shut down for less than or equal
Remote Stop to 30 minutes and the oil temperature minus the con-
A shutdown command has been received from a re- denser saturation temperature is less than 30°F.
mote device. Remote stop commands can be received -OR-
in Digital Remote mode via I/O Board TB4-7/8 or in
ISN Remote mode via the E-Link Gateway serial com- The chiller has been shut down for greater than 30 min-
munications. If the chiller is running when this occurs, utes and the oil temperature minus the condenser satu-
the Pre-rotation Vanes are driven fully closed prior to ration temperature is less than 40°F.
shutting down the chiller.
-OR-
Local Stop
Following a power failure, upon restoration of power,
A local shutdown command has been received by plac- the oil temperature minus the condenser saturation
ing the Keypad Start-Run-Stop/Reset switch in the temperature is less than 40°F.
Stop (O) position.

FORM 160.54-O1
Oil – Low Temperature abled and operating in Heating mode (Heat Pump Op-
The oil temperature has decreased to less than 55°F. erational Setpoint set to Heating mode). Refer to HEAT
The chiller will automatically restart when the tem- PUMP Screen. Anytime the Leaving Condenser Liq-
perature increases to greater than 55.0°F and is greater uid Temperature Setpoint is decreased, the shutdown
than the Condenser Saturated temperature by 30 or threshold becomes 125°F for the next 10 minutes. Af-
40°F, as described above in the Oil – Low Temperature ter 10 minutes have elapsed, the shutdown threshold
Differential message description. becomes the programmed setpoint value. The Heat
Pump will automatically restart when the temperature
Control Panel – Power Failure decreases to the programmed Leaving Condenser Liq-
uid Temperature Cycling offset – Restart Setpoint.
A Control Power failure has occurred. If the power fail-
ure occurred while the chiller was running, it will auto- Leaving Chilled Liquid – Flow Switch Open
matically restart when power is restored. However, if the
power failure duration was less than the duration of the The Chilled Liquid Flow Switch has remained open for
applicable coastdown period (2.5 minutes standard; 15 5 continuous seconds (2 seconds with software version
minutes steam turbine) when power is restored, the re- C.OPT.01.15A.xxx and earlier) while the chiller was
mainder of the coastdown will be performed, prior to the running or failed to close during the System Prelube
chiller starting. This message can indicate a Cycling (au- period. The chiller will automatically restart when the
to-restart after power failure) or Safety (manual restart flow switch closes.
after power failure) shutdown, depending upon Control With software version C.OPT.01.23.307 (and later),
Center configuration. It indicates a cycling shutdown while this cycling shutdown is active, the evaporator
when displayed in orange characters; safety shutdown pump relay contacts (TB2-44/45) remain closed un-
when displayed in red characters. The Control Center is til the chiller is given a stop command or has another
configured for auto-restart or manual restart after power fault. With all previous software versions, these con-
failure by a qualified Service Technician following in- tacts open at completion of coastdown.
structions in OptiView Control Center - Service Instruc-
tions (Form 160.54-M1). Condenser – Flow Switch Open
Leaving Chilled Liquid – Low Temperature The condenser water flow switch has remained open
for 30 continuous seconds (2 seconds with software
The Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature has decreased version C.OPT.01.15A.xxx and earlier) while the chill-
to the programmed Shutdown Temperature Setpoint. If er was running. This check is bypassed for the first 30
the chiller is running when this occurs, the Pre-rotation seconds of System Run. The chiller will automatically
Vanes are driven fully closed prior to shutting down restart when the flow switch closes.
the chiller. The chiller will automatically restart when
the temperature increases to the programmed Restart With software version C.OPT.01.23.307 (and later),
Temperature Setpoint. while this cycling shutdown is active, the condenser
pump contacts (TB2-150/151) remain closed until the
If the chiller is operating in Heat Pump Heating mode, chiller is given a stop command or has another fault.
(Heat Pump Duty is enabled, and the Heat Pump Op- With all previous software versions, these contacts
erational mode setpoint is set to Heating), there is ad- open at completion of coastdown.
ditional logic that will cause this Shutdown when the
Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature (LCHLT) de- Motor Controller – Contacts Open
creases below the programmed Heating LCHLT Shut-
The CM-2 Current Module (Electromechanical starter ap-
down Temperature Setpoint. For details of this setpoint,
plications) or Solid State Starter Logic Board (Mod “A”
refer to the HEAT PUMP Screen.
Solid State Starter applications) has shutdown the chiller.
Leaving Condenser Liquid – High Temperature When detecting a fault condition that places the starter
or motor at risk, these devices open the Motor Controller
contacts “CM” (located on the respective device and con-
The Leaving Condenser Liquid Temperature has in- nected between TB6-16 and TB6-53 in the Control Cen-
creased to the programmed Leaving Condenser Liquid ter) to initiate a shutdown. Since there are several different
Temperature Cycling Offset - Shutdown Setpoint. This faults that are monitored, LED’s on the respective device
shutdown is only applicable to Heat Pump Duty en- illuminate to identify the specific fault that has occurred.

FORM 160.54-O1
Refer to Solid State Starter (Mod “A”) – Operation and DEVICE SHUTDOWN
Maintenance (Form 160.46-OM3.1) for details of Mod CM-2 Module Power Fault
“A” Solid State Starter initiated shutdowns and OptiView
Solid State Starter Power Fault
Control Center – Service Instructions (Form 160.54-M1)
Half Phase
for CM-2 initiated shutdowns. The chiller will automati-
cally restart when the Motor Controller contacts close.
Control Panel – Schedule
On some shutdowns, the respective device automatically
closes the contacts when the fault condition clears. Other The programmed Daily Schedule Setpoint has shut-
shutdowns require the Operator to perform a Manual Re- down the chiller. If this occurs while the chiller is run-
set at the respective device. ning, the Pre-rotation Vanes are driven fully closed
prior to shutting down the chiller. The chiller will auto-
matically restart at the next scheduled start time.
DEVICE
MANUAL
RESET FAULT
AUTOMATIC
RESET FAULT
3
CM-2 Overload None Starter – Low Supply Line Voltage (Mod “A”
Module Overload Phase Rotation/Loss Solid State Starter)
High Temp (more High Temp start inhibit The voltage in any phase of the AC Power Line Voltage
Solid
than 212°F) (more than 110°F) supplying the Solid State Starter has decreased to the low
State
Starter
Trigger Board line voltage threshold for 20 continuous seconds. The
Fault Current
Out-of-Lock chiller will automatically restart when the voltage returns
to the restart level. The thresholds are as follows:
Motor Controller – Loss Of Current
SUPPLY VOLTAGE RANGE SHUTDOWN RESTART
The Compressor Motor current decreased to 10% Full
(VOLTS) (VOLTS) (VOLTS)
Load Amps (FLA) for 25 continuous seconds while the
380 305 331
chiller was running. This could be caused by the start-
400 320 349
er de-energizing during run or a defect in the motor
current feedback circuitry to the Control Center. The 415 335 362
chiller will automatically restart at the completion of 440-480 370 400
System Coastdown. 550-600 460 502
Supply Voltage Range disabled none N/A
Power Fault
The CM-2 Current Module (Electro-Mechanical Start- Starter – High Supply Line Voltage (Mod “A”
er applications) or Solid State Starter Logic Board Solid State Starter)
(Mod “A” Solid State Starter applications) has shut- The voltage in any phase of the AC Power Line Voltage
down the chiller because it detected a fault condition supplying the Solid State Starter has increased to the
that places the motor at risk. These devices open and high line voltage threshold for 20 continuous seconds.
close the Motor Controller “CM” contacts (located on The chiller will automatically restart when the voltage
the respective device and connected between TB6-16 returns to the restart level. The thresholds are as fol-
and TB6-53 in the Control Center) in less than 3 sec- lows:
onds to initiate the shutdown and produce this message.
An LED on the respective device illuminates to iden- SUPPLY VOLTAGE RANGE SHUTDOWN RESTART
(VOLTS) (VOLTS) (VOLTS)
tify the specific fault that has occurred. Refer to Solid
State Starter (Mod “A”) – Operation and Maintenance 380 415 414
(Form 160.46-OM3.1) for details of Solid State Starter 400 436 435
initiated shutdowns and OptiView Control Center – 415 454 453
Service Instructions (Form 160.54-M1) for CM-2 initi- 440-480 524 523
ated shutdowns. The chiller will automatically restart 550-600 655 654
when the contacts close. Supply Voltage Range disabled none N/A

FORM 160.54-O1
Proximity Probe – Low Supply Voltage consecutive attempts to communicate with the Control
(Style E and earlier chillers with G, H, or J compres- Center after Initialization has been successfully com-
sors and Style F and later chillers with J or H3 completed. The Control Center attempts to establish com-
pressors). munications until successful.
This message indicates the +24VDC power sup- LCSSS Shutdown – Requesting Fault Data...
ply voltage to the Proximity Probe has decreased to
+19.0VDC. This is below the minimum level required The Liquid Cooled State Starter Logic/Trigger Board
for reliable operation. The chiller will automatically re- has shut down the chiller but the Control Center has
start when the voltage increases to greater than or equal not yet received the cause of the fault from the LC-
to 19.7VDC. SSS, via the serial communications link. The LCSSS
shuts down the chiller by opening the Motor Controller
Oil – Variable Speed Pump – Drive Contacts LCSSS Stop Contacts (K1 relay located on the starter
Open Logic/Trigger Board and connected between TB6-16
and TB6-53 in the Control Center). The Microboard,
The Oil Pump Variable Speed Drive has shut down
in the Control Center then sends a request for the cause
the chiller by opening its status contacts connected to
of the fault to the Logic/Trigger Board over the serial
the I/O Board TB3-70. The Drive initiates a shutdown
communications link. Since serial communications are
anytime its internal protection circuits will not permit
initiated every 2 seconds, this message is typically dis-
the Drive to run. The contacts remain open until its
played for a few seconds and then replaced with one of
internal protection circuits are satisfied it is safe to
the following fault messages.
operate. Some Drive initiated shutdowns require AC
Power to be cycled to clear the fault. Refer to Op- LCSSS – Stop Contacts Open
tiView Control Center – Service Instructions (Form
160.54-M1). The chiller will automatically restart Refer to LCSSS Shutdown – Requesting Fault Data... on
when the contacts close. Page 184. If the Control Center’s Microboard does not
receive the cause of a starter initiated shutdown with 20
MOD “B” SOLID STATE STARTER CYCLING seconds of the shutdown, it is assumed it is not forth-
SHUTDOWN MESSAGES coming and that message is replaced with this message.
The chiller can be started when the Motor Controller
LCSSS Initialization Failed LCSSS Stop Contacts close.
When AC Power is restored to the system after a pow-
A missing interlock jumper between Starter Logic/
er failure, an initialization process occurs wherein the
Trigger Board J1-1 and J1-12 will also produce this
Control Center attempts to establish communications
message.
through the serial communications link with the Liquid
Cooled Solid State Starter. If communications are not LCSSS – Power Fault
established within 10 consecutive attempts, a cycling
shutdown is performed and this message is displayed. The Liquid Cooled Solid State Starter Logic/Trigger
The Control Center attempts to establish communica- Board has detected that the compressor motor current
tions until successful. in one or more phases has decreased to less than 10%
of the FLA for a minimum of 1 line cycle. This check
LCSSS – Serial Communications is inhibited during the first 4 seconds of System Run
and until the motor current is greater than 25% of the
After communications have been successfully estab-
Job FLA. The chiller will automatically restart upon
lished in the Initialization process, the Control Center
completion of System Coastdown.
initiates a data transmission to the Liquid Cooled Solid
State Starter on the serial communications link every 2 LCSSS – Low Phase (X) Temperature Sensor
seconds. After these communications have been estab-
lished, if the Control Center does not receive a reply The Liquid Cooled Solid State Starter Logic/Trigger
within 10 consecutive attempts, a cycling shutdown is Board has detected that the temperature of the starter
performed and this message is displayed. This same phase A, B or C (designated as X in the message) Sili-
cycling shutdown is performed, along with the same con Controlled Rectifier (SCR) Module has decreased
message, if the Liquid Cooled Solid State Starter does to less than 37°F. This would generally be indicative
not receive a response from the Control Center after 10 of a disconnected or defective sensor. If all three SCR

FORM 160.54-O1
Modules are indicating a temperature of less than 37°F, SUPPLY VOLTAGE RANGE SHUTDOWN RESTART
the SCR Module cooling pump turns on. This is ac- (VOLTS) (VOLTS) (VOLTS)
complished by disconnecting all three sensors. This Disabled None N/A
feature allows Service Technicians to run the cooling 200-208 160 174
pump while filling the cooling system by disconnect- 220-240 185 200
ing plugs P2, P3 and P4 in the LCSSS.
380 305 331
LCSSS – Run Signal 400 320 349
415 335 362
The Liquid Cooled Solid State Starter receives two
440-480 370 400
start signals from the Control Center simultaneously;
one via the serial communications link and one via the 550-600 460 502
start relay TB6-24 in the Control Center. If they are
LCSSS – High Supply Line Voltage
3
not received within 5 seconds of one another, a cycling
shutdown is performed and this message is displayed. The Liquid Cooled Solid State Starter Logic/Trigger
This is generally indicative of defective wiring. Board has detected that the compressor motor AC Pow-
er Line Voltage, in any phase, exceeded the high line
LCSSS – Invalid Current Scale voltage threshold continuously for 20 seconds. The
Selection chiller will automatically restart when the voltage in
There is an invalid compressor motor current scale all phases returns to the restart level. The thresholds
jumper combination installed in the Liquid Cooled Solid are as follows:
Starter Logic/Trigger Board J1. Jumper combination de-
SUPPLY VOLTAGE RANGE SHUTDOWN RESTART
termines allowable “100% FLA” setpoint range; 7L-35 (VOLTS) (VOLTS) (VOLTS)
to 260A, 14L-65 to 510A, 26L-125 to 850A and 33L-
Disabled None N/A
215 to 1050A. The chiller will be permitted to start when
200-208 227 226
the jumpers are configured correctly. Refer to Solid State
220-240 262 261
Starter (Mod “B”) – Operation and Maintenance (Form
160.00-O2) for valid jumper configurations. 380 415 414
400 436 435
LCSSS – Phase Locked Loop 415 454 453
The Liquid Cooled Solid State Starter Logic/Trigger 440-480 524 523
Board phase locked loop circuit was not able to main- 550-600 655 654
tain lock with phase A of the power line. This could be
caused by a power line anomaly such as sag or jitter. A LCSSS – Logic Board Processor
power line frequency jitter of up to 3Hz/second can be Communication between the V25 Microprocessor and
tolerated. The chiller will automatically restart when Digital Signal Processor (DSP) on the Liquid Cooled
lock has resumed. Solid State Starter Logic/Trigger Board has been in-
terrupted. The chiller will automatically restart when
LCSSS – Low Supply Line Voltage communications are restored.
The Liquid Cooled Solid State Starter Logic/Trigger
Board has detected that the compressor motor AC LCSSS – Logic Board Power Supply
Power Line Voltage, in any phase, decreased below the Following application of power, this message is dis-
low line voltage threshold continuously for 20 seconds. played and a snapshot of the LCSSS parameters and
The chiller will automatically restart when the voltage time of power failure are sent to the Control Center.
in all phases returns to the restart level. The thresholds
are as follows:

FORM 160.54-O1
LCSSS – Phase Rotation/Loss VSD – Stop Contacts Open

(Flash Memory Card version C.MLM.01.03 or earlier) Refer to VSD Shutdown – Requesting Fault Data on
The Liquid Cooled Solid Starter Logic/Trigger Board Page 186. If the Control Center’s Microboard does
has detected the three-phase compressor motor power not receive the cause of the fault over the Serial Link
line voltage phase rotation is not correct or the line- within 20 seconds, it is assumed it is not forthcoming
to-line voltage in any phase has decreased to less than and that message is replaced with VSD – STOP CON-
30% of nominal. The chiller will automatically restart TACTS OPEN message.
when the power line conditions are acceptable.
VSD Initialization Failed
LCSSS – Phase Loss Upon application of power, all boards go through the
(Flash Memory Card version C.MLM.01.04 or later) initialization process. At this time, memory locations are
The Liquid Cooled Solid State Starter Logic/Trigger cleared, program jumper positions are checked and seri-
Board has detected the line-to-line RMS voltage in any al communications links are established. There are sev-
phase has decreased to less than or equal to 30% of the eral causes for an unsuccessful initialization as follows:
lowest value of the programed voltage range. If the pro-
• The Control Center and the VSD must be ener-
grammed voltage range is Disabled, a value of 60VAC
gized at the same time. The practice of pulling
is used as the threshold. The chiller will automatically
the fuse in the Control Center to remove power
restart when the line voltage is greater than the shut-
from the Control Center will create a problem.
down threshold. The voltage range is programmed by a
Power-up must be accomplished by closing the
Service Technician following instructions in OptiView
main disconnect on the VSD cabinet with all fuses
in place. A power interruption to the VSD Logic
M1).
Board will also generate this message.
COMPRESSOR MOTOR VARIABLE SPEED • The eproms must be of the correct version for each
DRIVE: CYCLING SHUTDOWN MESSAGES VSD board and they must be installed correctly.
The following cycling shutdown messages are dis- The eproms are created as a set, and cannot be in-
played on Compressor Motor Variable Speed Drive terchanged between earlier and later versions.
(VSD) applications only. These messages are gener- • Serial data communications must be established.
ated by events that occur within the VSD. The chiller Refer to VSD – Serial Communications on Page
will automatically restart when the cycling condition 189. If communications between the VSD Logic
clears. Service and troubleshooting information is con- Board, Harmonic Filter Logic Board, ACC Board
tained in Variable Speed Drive – Service Instructions and Control Center Microboard does not take
(Form 160.00-M1). place during initialization, this message will be
generated. The serial communications can be ver-
VSD Shutdown – Requesting Fault Data ified by selecting the VSD DETAILS Screen from
The VSD has shutdown the chiller and the Control the MOTOR Screen and observing the Full Load
Center has not yet received the cause of the fault from Amps value. A zero displayed for this and other
the VSD, via the serial communications link. The VSD VSD parameters, indicates a serial communica-
shuts down the chiller by opening the Motor Controller tions link problem.
VSD STOP CONTACTS (located on the VSD Logic
• If the Harmonic Filter option is included, make
Board and connected between TB6-16 and TB6-53 in
sure the Filter Logic Board is not in continuous
the Control Center). The Microboard in the Control
reset. This condition is evidenced by the Filter
Center then sends a request for the cause of the fault to
Logic Board’s LED’s alternately blinking. The
the VSD Logic Board via the Adaptive Capacity Con-
filter can be eliminated as a cause of initializa-
trol Board, over the serial link. Since serial communi-
tion failure by disconnecting the filter by placing
cations are initiated every 2 seconds, this message is
switch SW1 on the Filter Logic Board in the OFF
typically displayed for a few seconds and then replaced
position and removing the ribbon cable between
with one of the below listed fault messages.
the Filter Logic Board and the VSD Logic Boards.
• VSD and Harmonic Filter horsepower ratings do
not agree.

FORM 160.54-O1
VSD – High Phase A Instantaneous Current VSD – Phase B Gate Driver

This shutdown is generated by the VSD if the motor See Phase A Gate Driver message above.
current in phase “A” exceeds a given limit. The mo-
tor current is sensed by the current transformers on the VSD – Phase C Gate Driver
VSD output pole assemblies and the signals are sent See Phase A Gate Driver message above.
to the VSD Logic Board for processing. Maximum in-
stantaneous permissible currents are: VSD – Single Phase Input Power
• 351/292 HP equals 771 Amps This shutdown is generated by the SCR trigger control
and relayed to the VSD Logic Board to initiate a sys-
• 503/419 HP equals 1200 Amps tem shutdown. The SCR Trigger control uses circuitry
to detect the loss of any one of the three input phases.
• 790/658 HP equals 1890 Amps
The Trigger will detect the loss of a phase within one
3
If an over current trip occurs, but the chiller restarts and half line cycle of the phase loss. This message is also
runs without a problem, the cause may be attributed to displayed every time power to the VSD is removed or
a voltage sag on the utility power feeding the VSD that if the input power dips to a very low level.
is in excess of the specified voltage range for this prod-
uct. Thus is especially true if the chiller was running at, VSD – High DC Bus Voltage
or near full load. If there should be a sudden dip in line The VSD’s DC Link Voltage is continuously moni-
voltage, the current to the motor will increase, since the tored and if the level exceeds 745VDC, a Bus Over-
motor wants to draw constant horsepower. The chiller Voltage shutdown is initiated. If this shutdown occurs,
Pre-rotation Vanes cannot close quickly enough to cor- it will be necessary to look at the level of the 460VAC
rect for this sudden increase in current, and the chiller applied to the drive. The specified voltage range is 414
will trip on an over current fault. to 508VAC. If the incoming voltage is in excess of
If the chiller will not restart, but keeps tripping on this 508VAC, steps should be taken to reduce the voltage to
same shutdown, an output pole problem is the most within the specified limits.
likely cause. The VSD would require service under
VSD – Logic Board Power Supply
these conditions.
This shutdown is generated by the VSD Logic Board
With software version C.OPT.01.23.307 (and later), if and it indicates that the low voltage power supplies
this cycling shutdown occurs 3 times in 10 minutes, the for the Logic Boards have dropped below their allow-
third shutdown becomes a safety shutdown. able operating limits. The power supplies for the Logic
Boards are derived from the secondary of the 120 to
VSD – High Phase B Instantaneous Current
24VAC transformer, which in turn, is derived from the
See High Phase A Instantaneous Current message 480 to 120VAC control power transformer. This mes-
above. sage usually means the power to the VSD has been re-
moved.
VSD – High Phase C Instantaneous Current
See High Phase A Instantaneous Current message VSD – Low DC Bus Voltage
above. If the DC link drops below 500VDC (or 414VDC for
50Hz applications), the drive will initiate a system
VSD – Phase A Gate Driver shutdown. A common cause for this shutdown is a se-
A second level of current protection exists on the VSD vere sag in the incoming power to the drive. Monitor
driver boards themselves. The collector-to-emitter satu- the incoming three-phase AC line for severe sags and
ration voltage of each IGBT is checked continuously also monitor the DC link with a voltmeter.
while the device is gated on. If the voltage across the
IGBT is greater than a set threshold, the IGBT is gated
off and a shutdown pulse is sent to the VSD Logic Board
shutting down the entire VSD system. A gate driver fault
can be initiated when the VSD is not running.

FORM 160.54-O1
VSD – Low DC Bus Voltage or an entering condenser water temperature that ex-
(575V/60Hz applications) ceeds the allowable limit for the job. Additional causes
for the shutdown are:
(Software version C.OPT.01.15.xxx (or later))
If the DC Link Voltage falls below 600VDC while run- • Plugged Strainer – The standard 1.5" Y-strainer
ning, this shutdown is performed. contains a woven mesh element with 20 stainless
steel wires per inch. This has been found to work
VSD – DC Bus Voltage Imbalance adequately on most applications. Some users may
The DC link is filtered by many large electrolytic ca- have very dirty condenser water, which can cause
pacitors, rated for 450VDC. These capacitors are wired the strainer to plug. Locations with special condi-
in series to achieve 900VDC capability for the DC tions may want to consider a dual strainer arrange-
link. It is important that the voltage be shared equally ment with quarter turn valves, to permit cleaning
from the junction of the center, or series capacitor con- of one strainer with the unit still on line.
nection, to the negative bus and the positive bus. This • Plugged Heat-exchanger – In cases where the
center point should be approximately ½ of the total DC strainer plugs frequently, the heat-exchanger may
Link Voltage. Most actual Bus Voltage Imbalance con- eventually plug or become restricted to the point
ditions are caused by a shorted capacitor or a leaky or of reduced flow. At this point, we suggest you
shorted IGBT transistor in an output phase bank assem- back-flush the heat-exchanger by reversing the
bly. This usually indicates the VSD requires service. two rubber hoses which supply condenser water
to-from the heat-exchanger. If the rust cannot be
VSD – DC Bus Voltage Imbalance back-flushed, the heat-exchanger might have to be
(575V/60Hz applications) replaced.
• Low Condenser Flow – The VSD system requires
If the Half DC Link Voltage does not remain within 8 feet of pressure drop across the heat exchanger
plus or minus 106VDC of the DC Link Voltage divided to maintain adequate GPM. If the pressure drop is
by 2 while running, this shutdown is performed. less than 8 feet, it will be necessary to correct the
flow problem or add a booster pump as is applied
VSD – Precharge – DC Bus Voltage Imbalance on retrofit chillers.
This message indicates the same as the VSD-DC Bus
Voltage Imbalance message above, except the condi- VSD – Invalid Current Scale Selection
tion occurred during the prelube period. Since the part number of the VSD Logic Board is the
same on all horsepower sizes, the position of Program
VSD – Precharge-DC Bus Voltage Jumpers tells the Logic Board the size of the VSD
Imbalance employed. This allows the VSD to properly scale the
(575V/60Hz applications) output current. If the jumper configuration is invalid, a
(Software version C.OPT.01.15.xxx (or later)) shutdown is performed and this message is generated.
Refer to Variable Speed Drive – Service Instructions
If the Half DC Link Voltage does not remain within
(Form 160.00-M1).
plus or minus 106VDC of the DC Link Voltage divided
by 2 during the pre-charge interval, this shutdown is VSD – Low Phase A Inverter Heatsink
performed. Temperature
VSD – High Internal Ambient Temperature (Style D VSD)
The ambient temperature monitored is actually the A heatsink temperature sensor indicating a temperature
temperature detected by a component mounted on the less than 37°F will cause the chiller to shut down and
VSD Logic Board. The high ambient trip threshold is display this message. In most cases, the problem will
set for 140°F. Some potential causes for this shutdown be an open transmitter or broken wiring to the transmit-
are: internal VSD fan failure, VSD water pump failure ter. The normal transmitter resistance is 10K ohms at
77°F.

FORM 160.54-O1
VSD – Low Phase B Inverter Heatsink 500VDC within 15 seconds after the pre-charge relay is
Temperature energized. If this condition is not met, a shutdown is per-
(Style D VSD) formed and this message is generated.
See Low Phase A Inverter Heatsink Temperature mes- VSD – Precharge – Low DC Bus Voltage
sage above.
(575V/60Hz applications)
VSD – Low Phase C Inverter Heatsink (Software version C.OPT.01.15.xxx (or later))
Temperature If the DC Link Voltage does not reach at least 60VDC
(Style D VSD) (within 4 seconds) or at least 600VDC (within 20 sec-
See Low Phase A Inverter Heatsink Temperature mes- onds) after the precharge command has been received,
sage above. this shutdown is performed.
3
VSD – Low Converter Heatsink Temperature VSD – Low Inverter Baseplate Temperature
If VSD part number is 371-02767-XXX (60Hz) or 371- (Applicable to VSD with part number 371-02767-
03700-XXX (50Hz), a heatsink temperature sensor in- XXX (60Hz) or 371-03700-XXX (50Hz))
dicating a temperature of less than 37°F will cause the (If compressor other than “P”, requires Flash Memory
chiller to shutdown and display this message. In most Card version C.MLM.01.05A.xxx and later)
cases, the problem will be an open transmitter or bro- A baseplate temperature sensor indicating a temper-
ken wiring to the transmitter. The normal transmitter ature of less than 37°F will cause the chiller to shut
resistance is 10K ohms at 77°F. down and display this message. In most cases, the
problem will be an open transmitter or broken wiring
VSD – Low Phase A Inverter Baseplate to the transmitter. The normal transmitter resistance is
Temperature 5K ohms at 77°F.
(VSD part number 371-03789-xxx (503 HP 60Hz; 419
HP 50Hz) (Flash Memory Card version C.MLM.01.08 VSD – Logic Board Processor
and later) This shutdown is generated if a communications prob-
The chiller has shutdown because the baseplate tem- lem occurs between the two microprocessors on the
perature has decreased to less than 37°F. VSD Logic Board.
VSD – Low Phase B Inverter Baseplate VSD – Run Signal

Temperature
Redundant Run Signals are generated by the Control
(VSD part number 371-03789-xxx (503 HP 60Hz; 419 Center; one via TB6-24 and the second via the serial
HP 50Hz) (Flash Memory Card version C.MLM.01.08 communications link. Upon receipt of either of the two
and later) Run Commands by the VSD, a 5 second timer shall
The chiller has shutdown because the baseplate tem- commence timing. If both Run Commands are not re-
perature has decreased to less than 37°F. ceived by the VSD Logic Board within 5 seconds, a
shutdown is performed and this message is displayed.
VSD – Low Phase C Inverter Baseplate This is generally indicative of a wiring problem be-
Temperature tween the Control Center and the VSD.
(VSD part number 371-03789-xxx (503 HP 60Hz; 419
HP 50Hz) (Flash Memory Card version C.MLM.01.08 VSD – Serial Communications
and later) This message is generated when communications be-
The chiller has shutdown because the baseplate tem- tween the Adaptive Capacity Control (ACC) Board
perature has decreased to less than 37°F. and the VSD Logic Board, or between the Control
Center Microboard and the VSD Logic Board, is dis-
VSD – Precharge – Low DC Bus Voltage rupted. This is generally indicative of defective wiring
During pre-charge, the DC link must be equal to or great- between J11 on the VSD Logic Board and J8 on the
er than 50VDC (41VDC for 50Hz) within ½ second and ACC Board.

FORM 160.54-O1
Harmonic Filter – Logic Board or Harmonic Filter – High Phase C Current

Communications See Harmonic Filter – High Phase A Current message
This message is generated when communications be- above.
tween the Harmonic Filter and the VSD Logic Board,
is disrupted. If equipped with Flash Memory Card ver- Harmonic Filter – Phase Locked Loop
sion C.MLM.01.06.xxx and later, the communications This shutdown indicates that a circuit called Phase
must be interrupted for 10 continuous communications Locked Loop on the Filter Logic Board has lost syn-
cycles (20 seconds) before the shutdown will occur. chronization with the incoming power line. This is
usually indicative of an open fuse in one of the filter’s
Harmonic Filter – High DC Bus Voltage incoming power line. Filter power fuses 11FU, 12FU
The Harmonic Filter’s DC Link Voltage is continu- and 13FU should be checked.
ously monitored and if the level exceeds 860VDC,
this shutdown is performed. The Harmonic Filter has Harmonic Filter – Precharge – Low DC Bus
its own DC bus as part of the filter power assembly, Voltage
and this DC Link is not connected in any way with During pre-charge, the Filter’s DC link must be equal to
the VSD’s DC link. If this shutdown occurs, it will be or greater than 50VDC (41VDC for 50Hz) within 1/10
necessary to look at the level of 460VAC applied to the second after the pre-charge relay is energized. If this
Harmonic Filter. The specified voltage range is 414 to condition is not met, a shutdown is performed and this
508. If the incoming voltage is in excess of 508, steps message is generated.
should be taken to reduce the level to within specified
limits. The cause of this message is typically high line VSD – Harmonic Filter-Precharge-Low DC
voltage or a surge on the utility supply. Bus Voltage
(575V/60Hz applications)
Harmonic Filter – High Phase A Current
The maximum instantaneous Harmonic Filter current
If the DC Link Voltage does not reach at least 60VDC
is monitored and compared to a preset limit. If this
(within 100 millisconds) or at least 630VDC (within 5
limit is exceeded, a shutdown is performed and this
seconds) after the filter precharge command has been
message is generated. The filter current is monitored
received, this shutdown is performed.
using two DCCT’s and these signals are processed by
the Filter Logic Board. The preset limits are as follows: Harmonic Filter – Low DC Bus Voltage
• 351/292 HP equals 356 Amps The Harmonic Filter generates its own Filter DC link
Voltage by switching its IGBT’s. This DC level is ac-
tually higher than the level that one could obtain by
• 790/658 HP equals 745 Amps simply rectifying the input line voltage. Thus, the
Harmonic Filter actually performs a voltage BOOST
function. This is necessary in order to permit current to
If the VSD automatically restarts after this shutdown flow into the power line from the filter when the input
and continues to operate properly with the filter oper- line is at its peak level. This shutdown occurs when the
ating, it is likely the filter tripped due to a sag or surge Filter’s DC Link Voltage decreases to a level less than
in the voltage feeding the VSD. If this message reoc- 60VDC below the Filter DC Link Voltage setpoint.
curs, preventing the chiller from starting, the VSD will This Setpoint is determined by the Filter Logic Board
require service. via the sensing of the three phase input line-to-line
voltage. This setpoint is set to the peak of the sensed
Harmonic Filter – High Phase B Current input line-to-line voltage plus 32 volts, not to exceed
See Harmonic Filter – High Phase A Current message 760 volts and it varies with the input line-to-line volt-
above. age. If this shutdown occurs occasionally, the likely
cause is a severe sag in the input line voltage.

FORM 160.54-O1
Harmonic Filter – DC Bus Voltage Imbalance Harmonic Filter – DC Current Transformer 1

The Filter DC link is filtered by large, electrolytic ca- During initialization, with no current flowing through
pacitors, rated for 450VDC. These capacitors are wired the DC Current Transformers (DCCT’s), the DCCT
in series to achieve a 900VDC capability for the DC output voltages are measured and compared with a
link. It is important the voltage is shared equally from preset limit via the Filter Logic Board. If the measured
the junction of the center or series capacitor connec- values exceed the preset limits, the DCCT’s are pre-
tion, to the negative bus and to the positive bus. This sumed to be defective and this shutdown is generated.
center point should be approximately ½ of the total DC
Link Voltage. Harmonic Filter – DC Current Transformer 2
See Harmonic Filter – DC Current Transformer 1 mes-
VSD – Harmonic Filter-DC Bus Voltage sage above.
Imbalance 3
(575V/60Hz applications) SAFETY SHUTDOWN MESSAGES
Evaporator – Low Pressure
If the Half DC Link Voltage does not remain within
The Evaporator Pressure, as sensed by the Evapora-
plus or minus 63VDC of the DC Link Voltage divided
tor transducer, has decreased to the safety shutdown
by 2, this shutdown is performed.
threshold. For water cooling applications, the safety
Harmonic Filter – Input Current Overload shutdown threshold is a fixed value for the respective
refrigerant. For Brine cooling applications, the safety
The three phases of RMS Filter current are monitored shutdown threshold varies according to the concentra-
and if any one of the three phases continuously exceeds tion of the Brine solution. The Brine shutdown thresh-
a given threshold for 7 seconds, a chiller shutdown is old is programmed at the YORK Factory. It should not
performed and this message is displayed. The maxi- be changed by anyone other than a qualified Service
mum permissible continuous RMS current ratings for Technician following instructions in OptiView Con-
the Harmonic Filter are: trol Center – Service Instructions (Form 160.54-M1).
• 351/292 HP equals 128 Amps The chiller can be started after the Evaporator Pressure
increases to the restart threshold and the Compressor
• 503/419 HP equals 176 Amps Switch is placed in the Stop-Reset (O) position.
• 790/658 HP equals 277 Amps SHUTDOWN RESTART
• 1048/917 HP equals 385 Amps (PSIG) (PSIG)
Water Cooling - R22 54.3 54.4
Harmonic Filter – Logic Board Power Supply - R134a 25.0 25.1
The low voltage power supplies on the Filter Logic +0.1 more
Board have decreased below their permissible operat- Brine Cooling - R22
25.0 to 54.3 than
ing range. The Filter Logic Board receives its power as programmed Shutdown
from the VSD Logic Board via the ribbon cable, con- threshold
necting the two boards. +0.1 more
6.0 to 25.0 than
- R134a
Harmonic Filter – Run Signal as programmed Shutdown
threshold
When a digital run command is received at the Filter
Logic Board from the VSD Logic Board via the 16 po- Evaporator – Low Pressure - Smart Freeze
sition ribbon cable, a 1/10 second timer is started. If a
redundant run command does not occur on the serial (Flash Memory Card version C.MLM.01.02 or later)
data link from the VSD Logic Board before the timer Smart Freeze protection is activated and has shutdown
expires, a shutdown is performed and this message is the chiller because the evaporator temperature has been
generated. below the Smart Freeze threshold for greater than the

FORM 160.54-O1
allowable number of seconds. If the Evaporator Refrig- Evaporator – Transducer Or Temperature Sensor
erant Temperature sensor RT7 is enabled, (using pro- A possible defective Evaporator Pressure transducer or
cedure in OptiView Control Center – Service Instruc- Refrigerant Temperature Sensor has been detected. The
tions (Form 160.54-M1)), this parameter is used as the Control Center converts the Evaporator Pressure to a
Evaporator Refrigerant Temperature and the freeze Saturated Temperature value and compares this value
threshold is 32.8°F. If RT7 is not enabled, the Evapo- to the optional Evaporator Refrigerant Temperature
rator Refrigerant Temperature used is the Evaporator Sensor. If the difference between these temperatures
Saturation Temperature, derived from the Evaporator is greater than 3.0°F, continuously for 1 minute, this
Pressure transducer and the freeze threshold is 34.0°F. shutdown is performed. This check is only performed
The total count is incremented once for every second under the following conditions:
the Evaporator Refrigerant Temperature is below the • Chiller has been running for at least 10 minutes
freeze threshold (but is never decremented below zero).
The number of seconds it will take the chilled liquid to • Evaporator Refrigerant Temperature (RT7) has
freeze is based on how far the Evaporator Refrigerant been enabled by a Service Technician using in-
Temperature is below the freeze threshold as follows: structions in OptiView Control Center – Service
Instructions (Form 160.54.M1)
number of seconds (4053.7)
to freezing = • Not in Brine Cooling mode (If compressor appli-
freeze threshold – evap.
refrigerant temp. cation other than “P”, applies only to Flash Mem-
ory Card version C.MLM.01.02 and later)
Smart Freeze is activated only if the feature has been
• Smart Freeze is enabled (If compressor applica-
enabled by a Service Technician (following instruc-
tion other than “P”, applies only to Flash Memory
tions in OptiView Control Center – Service Instruc-
Card version C.MLM.01.05.xxx and later)
tions (Form 160.54-M1)) and the Leaving Chilled Liq-
uid Temperature Setpoint is less than 38.0°F. • Evaporator Temperature Sensor (RT7) or Evapora-
tor Saturation Temperature is indicating a temper-
Evaporator – Transducer Or Leaving Liquid ature of less than 32.0°F (If compressor applica-
Probe tion other than “P”, applies only to Flash Memory
A possible defective Evaporator Pressure transducer Card version C.MLM.01.05.xxx and later)
or Leaving Chilled Liquid temperature transmitter has The chiller can be started after the temperatures are
been detected. The pressure and temperature that these within 3.0°F of one another and the Compressor Switch
devices are indicating are not in the correct relation- is placed in the Stop-Reset (O) position.
ship to each other. The Control Center converts the
Evaporator Pressure to a Saturated Temperature value Condenser – High Pressure Contacts Open
and compares this value to the Leaving Chilled Liquid
The contacts of the electro-mechanical high pressure
temperature (difference equals chilled liquid temp mi-
safety device, located on the condenser shell, have
nus evaporator saturated temp). The difference should
opened because this device has detected a pressure:
not be outside the range of –2.5°F to +25.0°F. If the
transducer and transmitter are accurate, the Evaporator • more than 204 PSIG (R134a)
Saturated temperature should not be greater than 2.5°F
warmer nor greater than 25.0°F colder than the Leav- • more than 265.0 (R22)
ing Chilled Liquid Temperature. In order to initiate a The contacts will automatically close when the con-
shutdown, the difference must be outside the acceptable denser pressure decreases to:
range continuously for 10 minutes. For Steam Turbine
drive applications, this check is bypassed for the first 20 • less than 160 PSIG (R134a)
minutes of chiller operation. The chiller can be started • less than 205 PSIG (R22)
after the Compressor Switch is placed in the Stop-Reset
(O) position.

FORM 160.54-O1
The chiller can be started after the contacts close and This is outside the normal operating range of the
the Compressor Switch is placed in the Stop-Reset (O) transducer. This is generally indicates a defective
position. transducer. The chiller can be started after the trans-
ducer is indicating a pressure that is within range and
Condenser – High Pressure the Compressor Switch is placed in the Stop-Reset
The condenser pressure, as sensed by the Condenser (O) position.
transducer, has increased to:
Auxiliary Safety – Contacts Closed
• more than 180.0 PSIG (R134a) The Auxiliary safety shutdown contacts, connected to
• more than 265.0 PSIG (R22). I/O Board TB4-31 have closed, initiating a safety shut-
down. This input is a general-purpose, user defined
The chiller can be started after the pressure decreases to: safety shutdown input. The chiller can be started after 3
• less than 120.0 PSIG (R134a) the contacts open and the Compressor Switch is placed
in the Stop-Reset (O) position.
• less than 205 PSIG (R22) and the Compressor
Switch is placed in the Stop-Reset (O) position Discharge – High Temperature
For special order R134a high condenser temperature The discharge temperature, as sensed by the Discharge
chiller applications, the Condenser Temperature Range Temperature Transmitter, has increased to greater than
Setpoint (software version C.OPT.01.19.307 or later) 220.0°F. The chiller can be started after the tempera-
is set to Extended. The trip/reset threshold is then ture decreases to less than 220.0°F and the Compressor
200/140 PSIG. Switch is placed in the Stop-Reset (O) position.
Condenser – High Pressure – Stopped Discharge – Low Temperature

(Software versions C.MLM.01.11.xxx and later or The discharge temperature, as sensed by the Discharge
C.OPT.01.11.303 and later) The condenser pressure Temperature Transmitter, has decreased to less than
exceeded 160.0PSIG (R134a), 240.0 PSIG (R22) while 30.0°F. The chiller can be started after the temperature
the chiller was stopped. High temperature condenser increases to greater than 30.0°F and the Compressor
water flowing through the condenser while the chiller Switch is placed in the Stop-Reset (O) position.
is shutdown can cause a condenser high pressure con-
dition resulting in loss of refrigerant. This safety fault Oil – High Temperature
anticipates this problem by annunciating the condenser The oil temperature, as sensed by the Oil Temperature
high pressure condition. The chiller can be restarted af- Transmitter, has increased to greater than 180.0°F. The
ter a Service Technician performs a special reset preset chiller can be started after the temperature decreases to
procedure contained in OptiView Control Center – Ser- less than 180.0°F and the Compressor Switch is placed
vice Instructions (Form 160.54-M1). in the Stop-Reset (O) position.
For special order R134a high condenser temperature Oil – Low Differential Pressure
chiller applications, the Condenser Temperature Range
Setpoint (software version C.OPT.01.19.307 or later) The differential oil pressure decreased to less than
is set to Extended. The trip/reset is then 170/170 PSIG . 15.0 PSID while the chiller was running or failed to
achieve 25.0 PSID by the last 5 seconds of the System
Condenser – Pressure Transducer Out Of Prelube period. The differential oil pressure is the dif-
Range ference between the output of the Sump Oil Pressure
transducer (system low pressure) and the output of the
The Condenser Pressure transducer is indicating a Pump Oil Pressure transducer (system high pressure).
pressure that is: The chiller can be started after the Compressor Switch
• less than 6.8 PSIG (R134a) is placed in the Stop-Reset (O) position.
• less than 24.2 PSIG (R22)

• or more than 300.0 PSIG (R134a or R22)

FORM 160.54-O1
Oil – High Differential Pressure pressure during this period and their outputs should be
The differential oil pressure increased to greater similar. The chiller can be started after the Compressor
than 90.0 PSID (120.0 PSID with software versions Switch is placed in the Stop-Reset (O) position.
C.MLM.01.08.xxx (and later) or C.OPT.01.08A.xxx
Oil – Variable Speed Pump – Setpoint Not
(and later)) while the oil pump was running. The differ-
Achieved
ential oil pressure is the difference between the output
of the Sump Oil Pressure transducer (system low pres- This is only applicable to chillers equipped with the Oil
sure) and the output of the Pump Oil Pressure trans- Pump Variable Speed Drive. One of the following con-
ducer (system high pressure). The chiller can be started ditions have occurred while in System Prelube, System
after the differential oil pressure decreases to less than Run or System Coastdown. The chiller can be started
90.0 PSID and the Compressor Switch is placed in the after the Compressor Switch is placed in the Stop-Reset
Stop-Reset (O) position. (O) position. With software version C.OPT.01.18.307
(or later), this safety shutdown is not performed when
Oil – Pump Pressure Transducer Out Of Range the Refrigerant Selection (microboard SW1-1) is set to
The Pump Oil Pressure transducer (system high pres- “R22”.
sure) is indicating a pressure that is less than 0.0 PSIG 1. The differential oil pressure was less than 35.0
or greater than 315.0 PSIG. This is outside the normal PSID; (less than 25 PSID for “P” compressors
operating range of the transducer. This generally indi- equipped with software version C.01.10A.xxx
cates a defective transducer. The chiller can be started (and earlier) or C.OPT.01.10A.xxx (and earlier)
after the transducer is indicating a pressure that is with- for 5 continuous seconds during the last 10 sec-
in range and the Compressor Switch is placed in the onds of the System Prelube period or during the
Stop-Reset (O) position. first 15 seconds of System Run.
Oil – Sump Pressure Transducer Out Of Range -OR-
The Sump Oil Pressure transducer (system low pres- 2. Anytime after the first 30 seconds of System Run,
sure) is indicating a pressure that is outside the normal the differential oil pressure was less than the Oil
operating range of the transducer as follows: Pressure Setpoint with the speed command from
• R134a is less than 0.0 PSIG or more than 315.0 the Microboard at 60Hz for 5 continuous seconds.
PSIG.
Control Panel – Power Failure
• R22 is less than 23.2 PSIG or more than 271.8 A Control Power failure has occurred. If the power
PSIG. failure duration was less than the duration of the appli-
This generally indicates a defective transducer. The cable coastdown period (2.5 minutes standard; 15 min-
chiller can be started after the transducer is indicat- utes steam turbine), the remainder of the coastdown is
ing a pressure that is within range and the Compressor performed upon restoration of power. The chiller can
Switch is placed in the Stop-Reset (O) position. be started after the Compressor Switch is placed in the
Stop-Reset (O) position. This message can indicate
Oil – Differential Pressure Calibration a Cycling (auto-restart after power failure) or Safety
(manual restart after power failure) shutdown, depend-
The Sump and Pump oil pressure transducers indicated
ing upon Control Center configuration. It indicates a
a differential oil pressure of greater than 15.0 PSID
cycling shutdown when displayed in orange characters;
during the oil pressure transducer Auto-Zeroing period
safety shutdown when displayed in red characters. The
that begins 10 seconds into System Prelube and lasts
Control Center is configured for auto-restart or manual
for 3 seconds. This is indicative of a defective Sump
restart after power failure by a qualified Service Tech-
or Pump transducer, since the oil pump is not running
nician following instructions in OptiView Control Cen-
during this period and the actual differential oil pres-
ter – Service Instructions (Form 160.54-M1).
sure is 0 PSID. The transducers are sensing the same

FORM 160.54-O1
Motor Or Starter – Current Imbalance This shutdown must be evaluated by a

The three phase compressor motor current imbalance qualified Service Technician prior to
was greater than 30% continuously for 45 seconds. The starting the chiller. Starting the chiller
imbalance is not checked until the chiller has been run- without this evaluation could result in
ning for at least 45 seconds and the average of the three severe compressor damage. To prevent the
phases of motor current is greater than 80% of the pro- chiller from starting without the proper
grammed 100% chiller Full Load Amps. The average evaluation, restart is inhibited until the
is calculated as: clearance is within acceptable limits and a
special reset procedure is performed by the
(Ia+Ib+Ic) Service Technician. The evaluation and
Iave =
3 reset procedure are contained in Optiv-
The imbalance is calculated as:
iew Control Center - Service Instructions 3
(Form 160.54-M1).
(Ia-Iave) + (Ib-Iave) + (Ic-Iave)
x 100
2(Iave) Thrust Bearing – Proximity Probe Out Of Range
(Style E and earlier chillers with G, H or J compressors
The Style B Solid State Starter and Variable Speed and Style F and later Chillers with J or H3 compres-
Drive detects the unbalance condition and advise the sors)
OptiView Control Center Microboard via serial com-
munications. The Style A Solid State Starter and Vari- The clearance between the compressor high speed
able Speed Drives returns the 3-phase motor current thrust collar and the tip of the Proximity Probe has de-
values to the OptiView Control Center Microboard creased to less than 17 mils.
where the unbalance calculation is performed. This
If equipped with software version C.MLM.01.10.xxx
safety shutdown is not performed on Electro-Mechani-
(and later) or C.OPT.01.10.302 (and later), the opera-
cal Starter applications.
tion is as follows: the clearance is only checked during
Thrust Bearing – Proximity Probe Clearance the last 20 seconds of System Prelube, during System
Run and during coastdown. Therefore, the fault is only
(Style E and earlier chillers with G, H or J compressors detected during those periods.
and Style F and later Chillers with J or H3 compressors)
This shutdown must be evaluated by a
The clearance between the compressor high speed qualified Service Technician prior to start-
thrust collar and the tip of the Proximity Probe has in- ing the chiller. Starting the chiller without
creased more than +10 mils or decreased to less than this evaluation could result in severe
-25 mils (for 2 continuous seconds) from the Refer- compressor damage. To prevent the chiller
ence Position. The minimum allowed clearance is 23 from starting without the proper evalua-
mils. Therefore, if the Reference position is less than tion, restart is inhibited until the clearance
47 mils, the shutdown will occur when the actual clear- is within +10 to -25 mils of the Reference
ance is less than 22 mils. Position and a special reset procedure
is performed by the Service Technician.
If equipped with software version C.MLM.01.10.xxx The evaluation and reset procedure are
(and later) or C.OPT.01.10.302 (and later), the opera- contained in OptiView Control Center -
tion is as follows: the clearance is only checked during Service Instructions (Form 160.54-M1).
the last 20 seconds of System Prelube, during System
Run and during coastdown. Therefore, the fault is only
detected during those periods. Also, the +10mil thresh-
old must be exceeded for 2 continuous seconds (instan-
taneous with previous software).

FORM 160.54-O1
Thrust Bearing – High Oil Temperature This shutdown must be evaluated by a

(Not applicable to Flash Memory Card version qualified Service Technician prior to
C.MLM.01.03 and later) starting the chiller. Starting the chiller
without this evaluation could result in
The temperature of the oil in the High Speed Drain
severe compressor damage. To prevent
Line, as sensed by the Proximity Probe, has increased
the chiller from starting without the
to greater than or equal to 250.0°F.
proper evaluation, restart is inhibited
This shutdown must be evaluated by a until the switch contacts have closed and
qualified Service Technician prior to a special reset procedure is performed
starting the chiller. Starting the chiller by the Service Technician. The evalua-
without this evaluation could result in tion and reset procedure are contained
severe compressor damage. To prevent in OptiView Control Center - Service
the chiller from starting without the Instructions (Form 160.54-M1).
proper evaluation, restart is inhibited until
the temperature decreases to less than Watchdog – Software Reboot
180.0°F and a special reset procedure
is performed by the Service Technician. The Microboard’s software Watchdog initiated a Mi-
The evaluation and reset procedure are croprocessor reset because it detected that a portion of
contained in OptiView Control Center - the chiller operating program was not being executed.
Service Instructions (Form 160.54-M1). The result of this reset is a safety shutdown and re-ini-
tialization of the program. This is generally indicative
Thrust Bearing – Oil Temperature Sensor of a severe electrical power disturbance or impending
Microboard Failure. The chiller can be started after the
(Not Flash Memory Card version C.MLM.01.03 and later)
Compressor Switch is placed in the Stop-Reset (O) po-
The temperature of the oil in the High Speed Drain sition.
Line, as sensed by the Proximity Probe, has decreased
to less than 50.0°F during System Run or the last 10 Surge Protection – Excess Surge
seconds of System Prelube. (Flash Memory Card version C.MLM.01.05.xxx and
This shutdown must be evaluated by a later) (Applies only if Surge Protection Shutdown fea-
qualified Service Technician prior to ture is Enabled)
starting the chiller. Starting the chiller The Surge Window Count surge events exceeded the
without this evaluation could result in Count Limit Setpoint. If the Surge Protection Extended
severe compressor damage. To prevent the Run feature is Disabled, the chiller shuts down as soon
chiller from starting without the proper as the count exceeds the limit. If the Extended Run
evaluation, restart is inhibited until the feature is Enabled, this shutdown occurs only if the
temperature increases to greater than count exceeds the limit at completion of the 10 minute
50.0°F and a special reset procedure is Extended Run period. The chiller can be started after
performed by the Service Technician. the Compressor Switch is placed in the Stop-Reset (O)
The evaluation and reset procedure are position.
contained in OptiView Control Center -
Service Instructions (Form 160.54-M1). Motor – Lack of Bearing Lubrication
Thrust Bearing – Limit Switch Open C.OPT.01.14.306 (and later))
(All “P and Q” compressors and Style F Chillers with The Operating Hours Since Last Motor Lubrication has
G or H5-8 compressors) exceeded 1400 hours. This message replaces WARN-
The High Speed Thrust Bearing Limit Switch contacts, ING MOTOR BEARING LUBE REQUIRED above.
connected to TB3-81, have opened. This occurs when This safety shutdown remains in effect until the Op-
the Bearing position decreases to less than the allowed
position.

FORM 160.54-O1
erator places the Compressor Switch in the Stop-Reset Motor – High Bearing Temperature
(O) position and enters his/her initials, name or user ID (Software version C.OPT.01.22.307 and later)
in OPERATOR access level (or higher) using the MO-
This safety shutdown occurs when either of the enabled
TOR LUBE ACKNOWLEDGE key on the MOTOR
motor bearing temperatures exceeds the programmed
LUBRICATION Screen. Refer to the Motor Lubrica-
High Bearing Temperature Shutdown threshold for 3
tion Screen on Page 115 for entry instructions. The
continuous seconds. The value programmed for this
date and time of this entry is automatically logged as
safety threshold is displayed as High Bearing Temper-
the Date Of Last Motor Lubrication and Time Of Last
ature Shutdown on the MOTOR SETPOINTS Screen.
Motor Lubrication. It also resets the Operating Hours
It is programmed with the Bearing Setup Setpoint on
Since Last Lubrication to zero. The date this warning
that screen. The chiller can be started after both bearing
occurs is stored as the Date Of Last Motor Lubrication
temperatures decrease to at least 9°F below the shut-
Warning Or Fault. With software version C.OPT.01.16.
down threshold and the Compressor Switch is placed 3
xxx (and later), this message will only be displayed if
in the Stop-Reset position. This safety shutdown will
the Auto Lube Setpoint is disabled. With this setting, if
not occur when the Bearing Temperature Protection
the Shutdown Setpoint is enabled, this safety shutdown
Setpoint is set to Disabled on the MOTOR DETAILS
will occur. If shutdown is disabled, this warning mes-
Screen. Also, it will not act on any RTD input register-
sage will be displayed but the safety shutdown will not
ing as an open RTD.
be performed.
Motor – High Bearing Vibration
Motor – High Winding Temperature
Either the Shaft End or Opposite Shaft End motor
This safety shutdown occurs when either of the follow-
bearing vibration has exceeded the value programmed
ing conditions are present:
for the High Vibration Shutdown Setpoint for the pro-
• Any of the enabled Motor Winding Temperatures grammed number of delay seconds. This safety shut-
exceeded the programmed High Winding Temper- down does not occur when the Motor Vibration Pro-
ature Shutdown threshold plus the programmed tection Setpoint is set to Disabled on the MOTOR
Winding Hotspot Allowance threshold for 3 con- DETAILS Screen or while the WARNING – MOTOR
tinuous seconds. – BEARING VIBRATION BASELINE NOT SET
warning is displayed. The chiller can be started after
-OR- the both vibration values decrease below the shutdown
• The Average Winding Temperature has exceed- threshold and the Compressor Switch is placed in the
ed the programmed High Winding Temperature Stop-Reset (O) position.
Shutdown threshold for 3 continuous seconds.
Motor – Cooling Coil Leak
The values programmed for the above safety thresh- (Software version C.OPT.01.22.307 and later)
olds are displayed as High Winding Temperature Shut-
The Motor Cooling Coil Leak Detector has registered
down and Winding Hotspot Allowance on the MOTOR
a fault condition for at least 3 continuous seconds. The
SETPOINTS Screen. They are programmed with the
Motor Cooling Coil leak Protection Setpoint enables
Winding Setup Setpoint on that screen. The chiller can
the type of sensor employed: If an optical sensor is be-
be started after all winding temperatures decrease to at
ing used, the input to the Motor Monitoring Board goes
least 18°F (10°C) below the shutdown threshold and
high to indicate a leak; if a float switch is used, the
the Compressor Switch is placed in the Stop-Reset po-
input goes low to indicate a leak. This safety shutdown
sition. This safety shutdown will not occur when the
will not occur when the Motor Cooling Coil Leak Pro-
Winding Temperature Protection Setpoint is set to Dis-
tection Setpoint is set to Disabled. The chiller can be
abled on the MOTOR DETAILS Screen. Also, it will
started after the leak sensor no longer indicates a leak
not act on any RTD input registering as an open RTD
and the Compressor Switch is placed in the Stop-Reset
or any individual winding temperature sensor that has
(O) position.
been disabled with the Temperature Disable Setpoint
on the MOTOR SETPOINTS Screen.

FORM 160.54-O1
MOD “B” SOLID STATE STARTER LCSSS – Phase (X) Shorted SCR
SAFETY SHUTDOWN MESSAGES (Flash Memory Card version C.MLM.01.04 or later)
LCSSS Shutdown – Requesting Fault Data... A shorted Silicon Controlled Rectifier (SCR) in phase
A, B or C (designated as X in the message) has been
detected by the Liquid Cooled Solid State Starter
Board has shut down the chiller but the Control Cen-
Logic/Trigger Board. The voltage across each SCR in
ter has not yet received the cause of the fault from the
monitored to detect the shorted condition. The shorted
LCSSS, via the serial communications link. The LC-
condition must exist continuously for 5 seconds in or-
SSS shuts down the chiller by opening the Motor Con-
der to annunciate the fault. This check is disabled while
troller LCSSS Stop Contacts (K1 relay located on the
the chiller is running. The chiller can be started after
Logic/Trigger Board and connected between TB6-16
the condition has been corrected and the Compressor
and TB6-53 in the Control Center). The Microboard, in
Switch is placed in the Stop‑Reset (O) position.
the Control Center, then sends a request for the cause
of the fault to the Logic/Trigger Board over the serial LCSSS – Open SCR
communications link. Since serial communications are
initiated every 2 seconds, this message is typically dis- An open Silicon Controlled Rectifier (SCR) has been
played for a few seconds and then replaced with one of detected by the Liquid Cooled Solid State Starter
the following fault messages. Logic/Trigger Board. The open condition must exist
continuously for 5 seconds in order to annunciate the
LCSSS – High Instantaneous Current fault. The chiller can be started after the condition has
been corrected and the Compressor Switch is placed
in the Stop-Reset (O) position. This check is disabled
Board detected that the compressor motor current in
when the chiller is shut down. In certain applications,
any phase exceeded 1.1(1.414 x RMS value of the pro-
local power line conditions could interfere with the
grammed Start Current) for a minimum of 1 second.
open SCR detection technique. This requires a quali-
The chiller can be started after the Compressor Switch
fied Service Technician to disable this check. Refer to
is placed in the Stop-Reset (O) position.
OptiView Control Center – Service Instructions (Form
160.54-M1).
LCSSS – High Phase (X) Heatsink
Temperature – Running
LCSSS – Phase (X) Open SCR
(Software versions C.MLM.01.11.xxx and later or
Board has detected the temperature of phase A, B or
C.OPT.01.11.303 and later) An open SCR in phase A,
C (designed as X in the message) Silicon Controlled
B or C (designated as X in message) has been detected.
Rectifier (SCR) Modules has exceeded 212°F while
This safety shutdown has the same criteria as LCSSS
the chiller was running. The safety can be reset af-
– OPEN SCR above. However, when the Solid State
ter all SCR temperatures are less than 210°F and the
Starter Logic/Trigger Board is equipped with Eprom
Compressor Switch is placed in the Stop‑Reset posi-
version C.SSS.01.03 (and later) and the OptiView
tion (O). However, the chiller cannot be started until
Control Center is equipped with above software, the
all SCR temperatures are less than 109°F. During the
phase in which the open SCR occurred is identified.
shutdown, the starter cooling pump runs until the tem-
perature is less than 109°F. LCSSS – Phase Rotation
LCSSS – 105% Motor Current Overload
The highest phase of the compressor motor current in-
Board has detected the three phase compressor motor
creased to greater than 105% of the programmed 100%
power line voltage phase rotation is not correct. The
chiller Full Load Amps continuously for 40 seconds.
chiller can be started after the phase rotation is correct
The chiller can be started after the Compressor Switch
and the Compressor Switch is placed in the Stop-Reset
is placed in the Stop‑Reset (O) position.
(O) position.

FORM 160.54-O1
COMPRESSOR MOTOR VARIABLE SPEED will shut down on Ambient Temperature @ 140.0°F
DRIVE: SAFETY SHUTDOWN MESSAGES before the heatsinks can reach 158°F. If this message
is displayed, make sure there is adequate coolant level,
The following safety shutdown messages are displayed
ascertain the pump is operating when the chiller is run-
on Compressor Motor Variable Speed Drive (VSD)
ning, and check the strainer in the primary of the heat
applications only. These messages are generated by
exchanger for clogs and silt. The chiller can be started
events that occur within the VSD. The chiller can be
after the fault condition clears, the RESET button on
started after manual resets are performed as detailed
the VSD Logic Board is pressed and the Compressor
below. Service and troubleshooting information is con-
Switch is placed in the Stop-Reset (O) position.
tained in Variable Speed Drive – Service Instructions
(Form 160.00-M1). VSD – High Phase B Inverter Heatsink
Temperature 3
VSD Shutdown – Requesting Fault Data
(Style D VSD)
The VSD has shut down the chiller and the Control
Center has not yet received the cause of the fault from See PHASE A message above.
the VSD, via the serial communications link. The VSD
VSD – High Phase C Inverter Heatsink
shuts down the chiller by opening the Motor Controller
Temperature
VSD Stop Contacts (located on the VSD Logic Board
and connected between TB6-16 and TB6-53 in the (Style D VSD)
Control Center). The Microboard in the Control Center See PHASE A message above.
then sends a request for the cause of the fault to the
VSD Logic Board via the Adaptive Capacity Control VSD – High Converter Heatsink Temperature
Board, over the serial link. Since serial communica- (Style D VSD)
tions are initiated every 2 seconds, this message is typ- See PHASE A message above.
ically displayed for a few seconds and then replaced
with one of the following fault messages. VSD – High Converter Heatsink Temperature
(Applicable to VSD with Part Number 371-02767-
VSD – 105% Motor Current Overload XXX (60Hz) and 371-03700-XXX (50Hz))
This shutdown is generated by the VSD Logic Board (If compressor other than “P”, requires Flash Memory
and it indicates that a motor overload has occurred. The Card version C.MLM.01.05A.xxx and later)
shutdown is generated when the VSD Logic Board has
This shutdown will occur if the heatsink temperature
detected that at least 1 of the 3 output phase currents
exceeds 170°F. The chiller can be started after the fault
has exceeded 105% of the chiller Full Load Amps
condition clears and the Compressor Switch is placed
(FLA) value for greater than 7 seconds. The chiller
in the Stop-Reset (O) position.
FLA value is set by adjustment of the FLA potentiome-
ter on the VSD Logic Board. The chiller can be started VSD – High Inverter Baseplate Temperature
after the RESET push-button on the VSD Logic Board
(Applicable to VSD with Part Number 371-02767-
is pressed and the Compressor Switch is placed in the
XXX (60Hz) and 371-03700-XXX (50Hz))
Stop-Reset (O) position.
(If compressor other than “P”, requires Flash Memory
VSD – High Phase A Inverter Heatsink Tem- Card version C.MLM.01.05A.xxx and later)
perature This shutdown will occur if the baseplate temperature
(Style D VSD) exceeds 175°F. The chiller can be started after the fault
This shutdown will occur if the heatsink temperature condition clears, the RESET button on the VSD Logic
exceeds 158°F on any of the output pole assemblies. Board is pressed and the Compressor Switch is placed
This shutdown will seldom occur. In most cases where in the Stop-Reset (O) position.
the coolant temperature has risen abnormally, the VSD

FORM 160.54-O1
VSD – High Phase A Inverter Baseplate Harmonic Filter – High Heatsink Temperature
Temperature (Style D VSD)
(VSD part number 371-03789-xxx (503HP 60Hz; The Harmonic Filter power assembly has one heat-
419HP 50Hz)) (Flash Memory Card version sink transmitter on the 503 HP units and two heatsink
C.MLM.01.08.xxx and later) transmitter on the 790 HP units. If the temperature on
The chiller has shut down because the baseplate tem- any heatsink exceeds 167°F (75°C), the unit will shut
perature has increased to greater than 158°F (70°C). down. This message is usually an indication of a low
The chiller can be started after the fault condition clears coolant level in the VSD cooling loop. The chiller can
and the RESET button on the VSD Logic Board and the be started after the fault condition clears, the OVER-
Compressor Switch are placed in the Stop-Reset (O) TEMP RESET button on the Filter Logic Board is
position. pressed, and the Compressor Switch is placed in the
VSD – High Phase B Inverter Baseplate
Temperature Harmonic Filter – High Baseplate Temperature
(VSD part number 371-03789-xxx (503HP 60Hz; (Applicable to VSD with part number 371-02767-xxx
419HP 50Hz)) (Flash Memory Card version (60Hz) and 371-03700-xxx (50Hz)) (If it is a compres-
C.MLM.01.08.xxx and later) sor other than “P”, it requires Flash Memory Card ver-
The chiller has shut down because the baseplate tem- sion C.MLM.01.05A.xxx and later)
perature has increased to greater than 158°F (70°C). This shutdown occurs when the baseplate temperature
The chiller can be started after the fault condition clears exceeds 174°F (79°C). The chiller can be started af-
and the RESET button on the VSD Logic Board and the ter the fault condition clears, the OVERTEMP RESET
Compressor Switch are placed in the Stop-Reset (O) button on the Filter Logic Board is pressed, and the
position. Compressor Switch is placed in the Stop-Reset (O) po-
sition.
VSD – High Phase C Inverter Baseplate
Temperature Harmonic Filter – High Baseplate Temperature
(VSD part number 371-03789-xxx (503HP 60Hz; (VSD part number 371-03789-xxx (503HP 60Hz;
419HP 50Hz)) (Flash Memory Card version 419HP 50Hz)) (Flash Memory Card version
C.MLM.01.08.xxx and later) C.MLM.01.08.xxx and later)
The chiller has shut down because the baseplate tem- The chiller has shut down because the baseplate tem-
perature has increased to greater than 158°F (70°C). perature has increased to greater than 194°F (90°C).
The chiller can be started after the fault condition clears The chiller can be started after the fault condition
and the RESET button on the VSD Logic Board and the clears and the OVERTEMP RESET button on the Fil-
Compressor Switch are placed in the Stop-Reset (O) ter Logic Board and the Compressor Switch are placed
position. in the Stop-Reset (O) position.
VSD – Precharge Lockout VSD – Harmonic Filter-High Baseplate

If the VSD fails to make pre-charge, the pre-charge re- Temperature
lay shall drop out for 10 seconds. During that time, the (575V/60Hz applications)
VSD’s fans and water pumps shall remain energized (Software version C.OPT.01.15.xxx or later)
in order to permit the pre-charge resistors to cool. Fol- If the baseplate temperature rises above the following
lowing this 10-second cool-down period, pre-charge limits, this shutdown is performed:
shall again be initiated. The VSD shall attempt to make
pre-charge three consecutive times. If the VSD fails to 424HP - 174.2°F (78.9°C)
make pre-charge on three consecutive tries, the unit
will shut down, lockout, and display this message. The 608HP - 190.4°F (88°C)
chiller can be started after the Compressor Switch is
placed in the Stop-Reset (O) position.

FORM 160.54-O1
Harmonic Filter – High Total Demand Distortion VSD – Low Frequency Detected
This shutdown indicates the filter is not operating cor- (Software version C.MLM.01.14.xxx (and later) or
rectly and the input current to the VSD/Filter is not C.OPT.01.14.306 (and later))
sinusoidal. This shutdown will occur if the TDD ex- After a 20 second bypass after entering System Run, if
ceeds 25% continuously for 45 seconds. TDD is an the VSD frequency decreases to below 1Hz less than
acronym for Total Demand Distortion, a term defined the minimum allowed frequency for 25 continuous
by the IEEE Std 519-1992 standard as the total root- seconds, this shutdown is initiated. With software ver-
sum-square harmonic current distortion, in percent of sion C.OPT.01.19.307 (and earlier), this fault occurs
the maximum demand load current (15 or 30 min de- when the VSD frequency falls below 1Hz less than the
mand). In the filter option supplied by YORK, the dis- minimum allowed frequency after having reached the
played TDD is the total RMS value of all the harmonic minimum frequency. The minimum allowed frequency
current supplied by the main power to the VSD divided for the VSD is 25Hz for 50Hz units; 30Hz for 60Hz 3
by the chiller Full Load Amps, in percent. A standard units. The Compressor Switch is placed in the Stop-
VSD, less the optional filter typically has an input cur- Reset (O) position.
rent TDD level on the order of 28-30%. The chiller can
be started after the Compressor Switch is placed in the

FORM 160.54-O1

FORM 160.54-O1
SECTION 4 - PRINTING
• Trend (Flash Memory Card version

C.MLM.01.05.xxx and later) - Prints a snapshot
of the existing TREND Screen data or prints new
data collected after the TREND PRINT key is
pressed.
The printer can be permanently connected to the Con-
trol Center or connected as required to produce a report.
If permanently connected, a DATA LOGGING feature
can produce a status report automatically, beginning at
an Operator selected start time and occurring at an Op-
erator selected interval thereafter.
The following figures are examples of the different
print reports. Solid State Starter application print re-
OKIPOS 441 Serial
LD16572
ports shown. Electro-Mechanical Starter and Variable
4
Charcoal p/n 62113901 Speed Drive reports are similar but print parameters
Beige p/n 62113601 applicable to those devices.
Figure 62 - PRINTER • Figure 64 ‑ Status on Page 208

• Figure 65 ‑ Setpoints on Page 210
PRINTING OVERVIEW • Figure 66 ‑ Schedule on Page 212
A printer can be connected to the Control Center’s • Figure 67 ‑ Sales Order on Page 212
Microboard to print the following reports. The screen • Figure 68 ‑ History on Page 214
from which each report can be generated is listed in
parenthesis. • Figure 69 ‑ Security Log (Flash Memory Card
version C.MLM.01.06.xxx and later and “P”
• Status ‑ Present system parameters (Printer, Home) compressors C.MLM.04.02.xxx and later) on
• Setpoints ‑ Present programmed values of all set- Page 216
points (Printer, Setpoints) • Figure 70 - Trend (Flash Memory Card version
C.MLM.01.05.xxx and later) on Page 216
• Schedule ‑ Present value of programmed daily
schedule (Printer, Schedule) • Figure 71 - CUSTOM Screen (If compressor
other than “P”, applies only to Flash Memory
• Sales Order ‑ Information about SALES ORDER Card C.MLM.01.04 and later) on Page 216
Screen (Printer, Sales Order)
• Figure 72 - Adaptive Capacity Control New Map
• History ‑ System parameters at the time of the last point Report on Page 217
normal stop, last fault while running and last 10
• Figure 73 - Adaptive Capacity Control Existing
faults, whether running or not (Printer, History)
Map points Report on Page 217
• Cycling or Safety Shutdown Initiated Print ‑
Snapshot of all system parameters at instant of
shutdown. Automatically occurs if printer is con-
nected at time of shutdown.
• Adaptive Capacity Control (ACC) Surge Map
‑ System conditions at instant all surge points
were mapped. (Compressor Motor Variable Speed
Drive applications; requires SERVICE access lev-
el) (Printer, ACC)

FORM 160.54-O1
ACCEPTABLE PRINTERS PRINTER CONNECTIONS

The following printers can be used. Printers must be Connect the printers to the Control Center Microboard
equipped with an RS‑232 Serial interface. as follows. Only one printer can be connected at a time.
Okidata – Table 5 - OKIDATA OKIPOS 441

Models: OKIPOS 441 MICROBOARD PRINTER FUNCTION
• Dimensions: J2-4 pin 3 Tx (data to printer)
6.9 in. wide x 9.64 in. deep x 5.98 in. high J2-2 pin 20 DSR (busy signal from
• Paper: 3.0 in. wide printer)
J2-9 pin 7 Gnd
• Type: Dot Matrix Impact
Cabinet Shield
• Purchase: 800-OKIDATA
Spare printer Ribbon Okidata 52119001 Black
The Control Center provides the required formatting Hardware required:
control codes for the printers above when the printer Cable
is selected on the PRINTER Screen in the instructions
below. These codes are transmitted through the serial • #18 AWG stranded 50 ft. maximum length.
interface to the printer to provide a proper print format. Connectors
Different printers require different formatting control Microboard
codes. Other printers might provide proper operation
when connected to the Control Center. However, the • None. Strip 1/4" insulation from wire and insert
print format may not be correct or as desired. into screw terminal block.
Printers
Proceed with caution and use the following guidelines
if an unlisted printer is selected: • Okidata ‑ 25 pin plug DB‑25P or equivalent; Shell
DB‑C2‑J9 or equivalent.
1. All must be capable of RS‑232 serial communica-
tions.
2. Primary differences between printers involve the
formatting control codes required by the printer.
These codes are sent from the Control Center to
the printer. For example, Weigh-Tronix printers
require a control code to select 40 column width.
This same code is interpreted by the Okidata
printer as an instruction to print wide characters.
In some instances, a printer will ignore a code it
cannot interpret.
3. The Control Center requires a busy signal from
the printer when the printer receive buffer is full.
This causes the Control Center to momentarily
terminate data transmission until the printer can
accept more data. The busy signal polarity must
be asserted low when busy.

FORM 160.54-O1
PRINTER SETUP Printer Type

The selected printer must be configured as follows. Re-
fer to manual provided by printer manufacturer with Using the PRINTER Screen, set the printer type to
respective printer. Weigh-Tronix.
OKIDATA OKIPOS 441 Automatic Data Logging

1. With the printer power off, remove the two screws
If automatic data logging is desired, a status report can
which hold the RS232 Interface Module.
be automatically printed at a specified interval begin-
2. Pull the RS232 Interface Module out of the printer. ning at a specified time, using the PRINTER Screen.
The interval is programmable over the range of 1 min-
3. Set DIP switch SW2-2 to OFF to select 19200
ute to 1440 minutes in 1 minute increments. The first
BPS. Do not change any other switch settings.
print will occur at the programmed START time and
4. Re-install the RS232 Interface Module and two occur at the programmed Output Interval thereafter.
mounting screws. The time remaining until the next print is displayed on
the PRINTER Screen.
5. Load paper and install the printer ribbon into the
printer. • Automatic Printer Logging ‑ Enables and disables 4
automatic data logging.
6. Connect the printer cable to the printer and the
microboard. • Log Start Time ‑ Enter the time the first print is
desired.
7. Connect the printer power cable to the printer and
plug into a 100 to 240VAC power source. • Output Interval ‑ Enter the desired interval be-
tween prints.
CONTROL CENTER SETUP
DOWNLOADING SYSTEM PRINTS TO A
Chiller ID LAPTOP
Access Level Required: OPERATOR Downloading system histories to a file is another use-
Using the COMMS Screen, assign an identification ful method to capture system operating conditions. The
number to the chiller. This number will appear at the following instructions are used to establish communi-
top of each report. cation between the OptiView Control Panel and a lap-
top computer.
Printer Setup
Access Level Required: OPERATOR 1. Connect the laptop computer to the OptiView as
described below.
Using the COMMS Screen, the Control Center must be
configured to transmit data in the same format as the Laptop OptiView
printer is configured to receive the data. The following (RS-232 Serial Port) (Com 1)
values must be entered. PIN DESC Connector Terminal
• Baud Rate ‑ Set to 19200 2 RX to J2 4 (TXD1)
4 DTR to J2 2 (DSR1)
• Data Bits ‑ 8
5 GND to J2 9 GND
• Parity ‑ None
2. On OptiView Printer Screen, select “PC”. This
• Stop Bits ‑ 1 will allow faster data download than the printer
selections. SETTINGS should match “H. Port set-
tings” see below. Earlier software select SEIKO if
PC selection is not available.

FORM 160.54-O1
3. Setup HyperTerminal The following additional RS232 connections, are used to

wire up serial devices for desktop and laptop computers.
A. Go to START menu
B. Select All Programs RS-232 PIN ASSIGNMENTS
(DB25 PC SIGNAL SET)
C. Select Accessories (OLDER DESKTOPS ONLY)
D. Select Communications Pin 1 Protective Ground
Pin 2 Transmit Data
E. Select HyperTerminal
Pin 3 Recieved Data
F. In the box displayed, it requires a name and
Pin 4 Request To Send
icon for the connection. Select a name that
Pin 5 Clear To Send
is descriptive and select an icon. Select OK.
Pin 6 Data Set Ready
G. In the box labeled Connect using the select Pin 7 Signal Ground
com port that will connect to the YK unit.
Recieved line Signal Detector
This port is usually labelled Com 1. Select Pin 8
(Data Carrier Detect)
OK.
Pin 20 Data Terminal Ready
H. Port settings Pin 22 Ring Indicator
Bits per second 57600
The connector on the PC has Male pins, therefore the
Data bits 8 mating cable needs to terminate in a DB25/F (Female
Parity None pin) connector.
Stop Bits 1 RS-232 PIN ASSIGNMENTS
Flow control None (DB9 PC SIGNAL SET)
(MOST LAPTOPS)
4. Set HyperTerminal to capture a file. Recieved line Signal Detector
Pin 1
A. Select Transfer from toolbar (Data Carrier Detect)
Pin 2 Recieved Data
B. Select Capture Text from the drop down
menu. Pin 3 Transmit Data
Pin 4 Data Terminal Ready
C. A Capture Text Filebox will be displayed.
Pin 5 Signal Ground
Verify location and file name.
Pin 6 Data Set Ready
D. Select Start. Pin 7 Request To Send
5. Press the Print Screen key on the appropriate Pin 8 Clear To Send
screen to be captured. The HyperTerminal will Pin 9 Ring Indicator
display the printed information and the informa-
tion will be recorded as a .txt file. The connector on the PC has male pins; therefore, the
mating cable needs to terminate DB9/F (female pin)
When the print file has been recorded, select connector.
Transfer from the toolbar and capture from the
drop down menu and select Stop. This will stop
the transfer and allow access to the capture file.

FORM 160.54-O1
Brecknell – PRINTER CONNECTIONS

Models: Brecknell CP130 Connect the printer to the Control Center Microboard
as follows. Only one printer can be connected at a time.
• Dimensions:
5.25″ Long x 3.75″ Wide x 2.5″ High
Table 6 - BRECKNELL CP130
• Paper: Thermal 57mm (2.25”) Modify the cable and connect as shown below.
• Type: Dot Matrix MICROBOARD PRINTER FUNCTION
J2-4 Pin 3 TX Data to the printer
• Purchase: 800-637-0529 (North America)
J2-2 Pin 5 Busy signal from the printer
+44 (0) 845-246-6717 (Europe & ME)
J2-9 Pin 6 Signal Common
• P/N AWT 05-505788 (printer, cable, 1 roll of paper)
• P/N AWT 05-505594 (power supply)
• P/N AWT 05-505671 (case, 20 rolls of paper)
LD17609
Figure 63 - BRECKMAN PRINTER
R G
TX1 RX1
RS-232
J2 DB9
COM 1 9 GND 5
4 TX PC
MICRO 2
2 DSR 4 HYPERTERMINAL
J2 Port 2B
7 GTX
RX
COM 4B 6 GRX
OPTIVIEW TX E-LINK
COM
LD14492
Figure 64 - COMMUNICATIONS BLOCK DIAGRAM

FORM 160.54-O1
YORK UPDATE Skip the following section if Hot Gas Bypass is not
[
CHILLER ID 0 enabled]
(c) 1997 – 2001 YORK INTERNATIONAL CORPORATION Hot Gas
Mon 22 Nov 1999 8:50:45 AM -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Valve Position = 15 %
SYSTEM RUN Pre-Rotation Vanes Position = 75 %
LEAVING CHILLED LIQUID CONTROL
[List all warnings presently active] Surge
Controls C.MLM.01.06.102
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Run Time 0 Days 2 Hr 59 Min
Total Surge Count = 127
Surge Window Time = 1 Min
Operating Hours = 25 Hr
Surge Window Count = 0
Number Of Starts = 6
Control Source = Local
Skip the following section if Variable Speed Oil
[
Pump is not installed]
Evaporator
Variable Speed Oil Pump
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Leaving Chilled Active Setpoint = 45.0 ~F
Oil Pump Drive Command Frequency = 25.0 Hz
Chilled Liquid Pump = Run
Pulldown Time Remaining = 9.0 Min
Chilled Liquid Flow Switch = Closed
[If Pulldown in effect]
Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature = 45.0 ~F
Return Chilled Liquid Temperature = 55.0 ~F
Skip the following section if Liquid Level is not
[
Evaporator Pressure = 75.0 Psig
enabled]
Evaporator Saturation Temperature = 44.4 ~F
Refrigerant Level Control
Evaporator Refrigerant Temperature = 44.5 ~F
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
[If Refrigerant Sensor enabled]
Refrigerant Level Position = 35 %
Small Temperature Difference = 0.5 ~F
Ramp Up Time Remaining = 15 Sec
Condenser
[If Ramp Up in effect]
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Proximity Probe
Condenser Liquid Pump = Run
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Condenser Liquid Flow Switch = Closed
High Speed Thrust Bearing Proximity Differen = 2 Mils
Leaving Condenser Liquid Temperature = 95.0 ~F
High Speed Thrust Solenoid = On
Return Condenser Liquid Temperature = 85.0 ~F
[If Mod C Chiller]
Condenser Pressure = 200.0 Psig
Condenser Saturation Temperature = 101.4 ~F
[Skip the following section if Motor Type is not EM]
Small Temperature Difference = 6.4 ~F
Electro-Mechanical Starter
Drop Leg Refrigerant Temperature = 83.0 ~F
[If Drop Leg Sensor enabled] -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Sub Cooling Temperature = 18.4 ~F Motor Run = On
[If Drop Leg Sensor enabled] % Full Load Amps = 94 %
Compressor [Skip the following section if Motor Type is not Mod A SSS]
Liquid-Cooled Solid State Starter
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Discharge Temperature = 120.0 ~F
Motor Run = On
Liquid Line Solenoid = On
% Full Load Amps = 94 %
[If Mod C Chiller]
Phase A Voltage = 447 V
Vent Line Solenoid = On
Phase B Voltage = 409 V
[If Mod D Chiller or higher]
Phase C Voltage = 442 V
Phase A Current = 193 A
Oil Sump
Phase B Current = 204 A
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Phase C Current = 190 A
Oil Pump Run Output = On
Sump Oil Pressure (LOP) = 75.8 Psig
Skip the following section if Motor Type is not Mod
[
Pump Oil Pressure (HOP) = 124.6 Psig
B SSS]
Oil Pressure = 47.8 Psid
Oil Sump Temperature = 150.0 ~F
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Oil Heater = Off
Starter Model = 26L
Motor Run = On
Oil Return Solenoid = Off
kW Hours = 20723 kWH
Input Power = 8225 kW
Figure 65 - SAMPLE PRINTOUT (STATUS) FIGURE 64 - SAMPLE PRINTOUT (STATUS) (CONT'D)

FORM 160.54-O1
Phase A Voltage = 422 V [Skip the following section if Motor Type is not VSD,
Phase B Voltage = 449 V or Filter is not present]
Phase C Voltage = 449 V Harmonic Filter Data
Phase A Current = 253 A -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Phase B Current = 257 A Precharge Contactor = Off
Phase C Current = 262 A Supply Contactor = On
Phase A Temperature = 109 ~F Operating Mode = Running
Phase B Temperature = 109 ~F Phase Rotation = ABC
Phase C Temperature = 110 ~F Total Supply kVA = 148 kVA
Total Power Factor = 0.97
[Skip the following section if Motor Type is not VSD] DC Bus Voltage = 608 V
Variable Speed Drive Heatsink Temperature [If TMIII VSD] = 102 ~F
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Baseplate Temperature [If VyperDrive VSD] = 102 ~F
Motor Run = On Voltage Peak N-L1 = 200 V
% Full Load Amps = 94 % Voltage Peak N-L2 = 200 V
Pre-Rotation Vanes Position = 75 % Voltage Peak N-L3 = 200 V
Full Load Amps = 402 A L1-L2 RMS Voltage = 215 V
Precharge Relay Output = Off L2-L3 RMS Voltage = 215 V
Trigger SCR Output = On L3-L1 RMS Voltage = 215 V
Water Pump Output = On L1 RMS Filter Current = 150 A
kW Hours = 14528 kWH L2 RMS Filter Current = 150 A
Input Power
Output Frequency
=
=
150 kW
60Hz
L3 RMS Filter Current
L1 RMS Supply Current
=
=
150 A
152 A
4
Output Voltage = 800 V L2 RMS Supply Current = 152 A
DC Bus Voltage = 600 V L3 RMS Supply Current = 152 A
DC Inverter Link Current = 300 A L1 Voltage Total Harmonic Distortion = 1.5 %
Phase A Output Current = 195 A L2 Voltage Total Harmonic Distortion = 1.2 %
Phase B Output Current = 198 A L3 Voltage Total Harmonic Distortion = 1.1 %
Phase C Output Current = 193 A L1 Supply Current Total Demand Distortion = 2.6 %
Internal Ambient Temperature = 88 ~F L2 Supply Current Total Demand Distortion = 2.3 %
Converter Heatsink Temperature = 102 ~F L3 Supply Current Total Demand Distortion = 2.8 %
Phase A Heatsink Temperature [If TMIII VSD] = 93 ~F
Phase B Heatsink Temperature [If TMIII VSD] = 99 ~F
Phase C Heatsink Temperature [If TMIII VSD] = 97 ~F
Baseplate Temperature [If VyperDrive VSD] = 106 ~F
FIGURE 64 - SAMPLE PRINTOUT (STATUS) (CONT'D) FIGURE 64 - SAMPLE PRINTOUT (STATUS) (CONT'D)

FORM 160.54-O1
YORK SETPOINTS Remote Range = 10.0 ~F

CHILLER ID 0 Sensitivity = Normal
(c) 1997 – 2001 YORK INTERNATIONAL CORPORATION Restart Offset = 0.0 ~F
Mon 22 Nov 1999 8:48:27 AM Restart Setpoint = 45.0 ~F
Shutdown Offset = 4.0 ~F
Software Versions Shutdown Setpoint = 41.0 ~F
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Brine Low Evaporator Cutout = 54.3 Psig
Controls = C.MLM.01.04 Smart Freeze = Off
BIOS = C.MLM.00.00 Refrigerant = Enabled
Kernel = 0.18
GUI = 0.28 Condenser
SIO = 0.23 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
GPIC = 0.04 High Pressure Warning Threshold = 246.3 Psig
Ext I/O = Drop Leg = Enabled
0110112091996
[Skip if External I/O board is not activated] Oil Sump
VSD [Skip if Motor Type is not VSD] = C.VSD.00.00 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
SSS [Skip if Motor Type is not Mod B SSS] = C.SSS.01.01 Oil Pump Package = Variable
Speed
System Information Standby Lube = On
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
System Language = English [Skip the following section if Variable Speed Oil Pump
Data Display Mode = English is not installed]
Control Source = Local Variable Speed Oil Pump
Remote Analog Input Range = 0–10 Volts ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Clock = Enabled Pressure Setpoint = 35 Psid
Control Period = 0.9 Sec
Jumper Settings
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Proximity Probe
Pre-Run = Standard ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Coastdown = Standard High Speed Thrust Bearing Proximity Referenc = 41 Mils
Chilled Liquid Pump Operation = Standard
Refrigerant Selection = R22 [Skip the following section if Liquid Level is not
Anti-Recycle = Enabled enabled]
Power Failure Restart = Auto Refrigerant Level Control
Liquid Type = Water ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Motor Type = Fixed Speed Level Control = On
Setpoint = 50 %
Printer Setup Period = 3.5 Sec
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Proportion Limit Open = 15 %
Automatic Printer Logging = Disabled Proportion Limit Close = 45 %
Log Start Time = 12:00 am Rate Limit Open = 10 %
Output Interval = 60 Min Rate Limit Close = 10 %
Printer Type = Okidata
Baud = 9600 Baud [Skip the following section if Hot Gas Bypass is not
Data Bits = 8 Bits enabled]
Parity = None Hot Gas
Stop Bits = 1 Bit ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Hot Gas = Enabled
COM 2 Setup Hold Period = 30 Min
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Close Percentage = 5 %
Baud = 19200 Baud Minimum Load = 1 ~F
Data Bits = 8 Bits Maximum Open = 80 %
Parity = Odd
Stop Bits = 1 Bit Surge
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Evaporator Surge Sensitivity = 0.3
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Shutdown = Enabled
Leaving Chilled Local Setpoint = 45.0 ~F Extended Run = Disabled
Leaving Chilled ISN Setpoint = 45.0 ~F Count Limit = 15
Leaving Chilled Modem Setpoint = 45.0 ~F Count Window = 5 Min
Leaving Chilled Analog Setpoint = 45.0 ~F
Leaving Chilled Digital Setpoint = 45.0 ~F
Figure 66 - SAMPLE PRINTOUT (SETPOINTS) FIGURE 65 - SAMPLE PRINTOUT (SETPOINTS) (CONT'D)

FORM 160.54-O1
[Skip the following section if Motor Type is not EM] Shorted SCR = Disabled
Electro-Mechanical Starter
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- [Skip the following section if Motor Type is not VSD]
Local Motor Current Limit = 100 % Variable Speed Drive
Remote ISN Current Limit = 100 % ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Remote Analog Current Limit = 100 % Local Motor Current Limit = 100 %
Remote Digital Current Limit = 100 % Remote ISN Current Limit = 100 %
Remote Modem Current Limit = 100 % Remote Analog Current Limit = 100 %
Pulldown Demand Limit = 100 % Remote Digital Current Limit = 100 %
Pulldown Demand Time = 0 Min Remote Modem Current Limit = 100 %
Pulldown Demand Limit = 100 %
[Skip the following section if Motor Type is not Mod A Pulldown Demand Time = 0 Min
SSS] Motor HP = 351 HP
Liquid-Cooled Solid State Starter Power Line Frequency = 60Hz
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Local Motor Current Limit = 100 % [Skip the following section if Motor Type is not VSD]
Remote ISN Current Limit = 100 % Harmonic Filter Data
Remote Analog Current Limit = 100 % ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Remote Digital Current Limit = 100 % Filter Operation = Enabled
Remote Modem Current Limit = 100 % Motor HP = 351 HP
Scale/Model
=
=
0 Min
600 V, 281 A
[Skip the following section if Motor Type is not VSD]
Adaptive Capacity Control
4
Supply Voltage Range = Disabled ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Full Load Amps = 150 A Surge Margin Adjust = 0 Hz
Current Imbalance Check = Disabled Stability Limit = 4500
[Skip the following section if Motor Type is not Mod B

SSS]
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Local Motor Current Limit = 100 %
Remote ISN Current Limit = 100 %
Remote Analog Current Limit = 100 %
Remote Digital Current Limit = 100 %
Remote Modem Current Limit = 100 %
Pulldown Demand Time = 0 Min
Starter Model = 26L
Voltage Range = 440 - 480
Full Load Amps = 275 A
Starting Current = 1150 A
Open SCR = Enabled
FIGURE 65 - SAMPLE PRINTOUT (SETPOINTS) (CONT'D) FIGURE 65 - SAMPLE PRINTOUT (SETPOINTS) (CONT'D)

FORM 160.54-O1
YORK SCHEDULE YORK SALES ORDER

CHILLER ID 3
CHILLER ID 3 © 1997 ‑ 1999 YORK INTERNATIONAL CORPORATION
© 1997 - 1999 YORK INTERNATIONAL CORPORATION MON 29 MAR 1999 1 28 PM
MON 29 MAR 1999 1 27 PM ORDER INFORMATION
SCHEDULE = OFF ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------

COMMISSIONING DATE = 01 JAN 1999
STANDARD SCHEDULE
JOB NAME =
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
SUN START = OFF STOP = OFF JOB LOCATION =
MON START = 8:00 AM STOP = 5:00 PM MODEL NUMBER =
TUE START = 8:00 AM STOP = 5:00 PM YORK ORDER NUMBER =
WED START = 8:00 AM STOP = 5:00 PM PANEL SERIAL NUMBER =
THU START = 8:00 AM STOP = 5:00 PM CHILLER SERIAL NUMBER =
FRI START = 8:00 AM STOP = 5:00 PM DESIGN LOAD ‑ CONDENSER =
SAT START = OFF STOP = OFF ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------

PASSES =
EXCEPTION DAYS
DESIGN WORKING PRESSURE =
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
02 APR 1999 START = OFF STOP = OFF FOULING FACTOR =
13 APR 1999 START = 8:00 AM STOP = 10:00 PM PRESSURE DROP =
NOZZLE ARRANGEMENT IN =
Figure 67 - SAMPLE PRINTOUT (SCHEDULE) NOZZLE ARRANGEMENT OUT =
LEAVING TEMPERATURE =
RETURN TEMPERATURE =
GPM =
TUBES =
DESIGN LOAD ‑ EVAPORATOR
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
PASSES =
DESIGN WORKING PRESSURE =
FOULING FACTOR =
PRESSURE DROP =
NOZZLE ARRANGEMENT IN =
NOZZLE ARRANGEMENT OUT =
LEAVING TEMPERATURE =
RETURN TEMPERATURE =
GPM =
TUBES =
Figure 68 - SAMPLE PRINTOUT (SALES ORDER)

FORM 160.54-O1
NAMEPLATE INFORMATION
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
MOTOR CODE =
POWER (VOLTS) =
PHASES =
FREQUENCY ( HZ) =
LOOKED ROTOR AMPS =
FULL LOAD AMPS =
INRUSH AMPS =
SYSTEM INFORMATION
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
REFRIGERANT =
TONS =
GEAR CODE =
4
LIQUID TYPE =
BRINE PERCENT =
KILOWATTS INPUT =
VSD / SSS / EM =
FIGURE 67 - SAMPLE PRINTOUT (SALES ORDER)

(CONT'D)

FORM 160.54-O1
YORK HISTORY 1 [Skip the following section if Hot Gas Bypass is not
CHILLER ID 0 enabled]
(c) 1997 – 2001 YORK INTERNATIONAL CORPORATION Hot Gas
Mon 22 Nov 1999 9:23:12 AM ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Valve Position = 0 %
SYSTEM READY TO START Pre-Rotation Vanes Position = 0 %
LCSSS – LOGIC BOARD POWER SUPPLY
[List any warnings that were active at the time of Surge
shutdown] ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Total Surge Count = 127
Controls C.MLM.01.06.102 Surge Window Time = 1 Min
Run Time 0 Days 2 Hr 59 Min Surge Window Count = 0
Operating Hours = 25 Hr [Skip the following section if Variable Speed Oil

Number Of Starts = 6 Pump is not
Control Source = Local installed]
Variable Speed Oil Pump
Evaporator ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Oil Pump Drive Command Frequency = 25.0 Hz
Leaving Chilled Active Setpoint = 45.0 ~F Pulldown Time Remaining = 9.0 Min
Chilled Liquid Pump = Stop [If Pulldown in effect]
Chilled Liquid Flow Switch = Open
Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature = 45.0 ~F [Skip the following section if Liquid Level is not
Return Chilled Liquid Temperature = 55.0 ~F enabled]
Evaporator Pressure = 75.0 Psig Refrigerant Level Control
Evaporator Saturation Temperature = 44.4 ~F ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Evaporator Refrigerant Temperature = 44.5 ~F Refrigerant Level Position = 35 %
[If Refrigerant Sensor enabled] Ramp Up Time Remaining = 15 Sec
Small Temperature Difference = 0.5 ~F [If Ramp Up in effect]
Condenser Proximity Probe

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Condenser Liquid Pump = Stop High Speed Thrust Bearing Proximity Differen = 2 Mils
Condenser Liquid Flow Switch = Open High Speed Thrust Solenoid = Off
Leaving Condenser Liquid Temperature = 95.0 ~F [If Mod C Chiller]
Condenser Pressure = 200.0 [Skip the following section if Motor Type is not EM]
Psig Electro-Mechanical Starter
Condenser Saturation Temperature = 101.4 ~F ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Small Temperature Difference = 6.4 ~F Motor Run = Off
Drop Leg Refrigerant Temperature = 83.0 ~F % Full Load Amps = 0 %
[If Drop Leg Sensor enabled]
Sub Cooling Temperature = 18.4 ~F [Skip the following section if Motor Type is not Mod
[If Drop Leg Sensor enabled] A SSS]
Compressor ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Motor Run = Off
Discharge Temperature = 120.0 ~F % Full Load Amps = 0 %
Liquid Line Solenoid = Off Phase A Voltage = 447 V
[If Mod C Chiller] Phase B Voltage = 409 V
Vent Line Solenoid = Off Phase C Voltage = 442 V
[If Mod D Chiller or higher] Phase A Current = 0 A
Phase B Current = 0 A
Oil Sump Phase C Current = 0 A
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Oil Pump Run Output = Off [Skip the following section if Motor Type is not Mod
Sump Oil Pressure (LOP) = 75.8 Psig B SSS]
Pump Oil Pressure (HOP) = 76.6 Psig Liquid-Cooled Solid State Starter
Oil Pressure = 0.0 Psid ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Oil Sump Temperature = 150.0 ~F Starter Model = 26L
Oil Heater = Off Motor Run = Off
[If Mod D Chiller or higher] % Full Load Amps = 0 %
Oil Return Solenoid = Off kW Hours = 20723
[If Mod D Chiller or higher] kWH
Figure 69 - SAMPLE PRINTOUT (HISTORY) FIGURE 68 - SAMPLE PRINTOUT (HISTORY) (CONT'D)

FORM 160.54-O1
Input Power = 0 kW Phase A Heatsink Temperature [If TMIII VSD] = 93 ~F

Phase A Voltage = 422 V Phase B Heatsink Temperature [If TMIII VSD] = 99 ~F
Phase B Voltage = 449 V Phase C Heatsink Temperature [If TMIII VSD] = 97 ~F
Phase C Voltage = 449 V Baseplate Temperature [If VyperDrive VSD] = 106 ~F
Phase A Current = 0 A [Skip the following section if Motor Type is not VSD,
Phase B Current = 0 A or Filter is not present]
Phase C Current = 0 A Harmonic Filter Data
Phase A Temperature = 109 ~F ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Phase B Temperature = 109 ~F Precharge Contactor = Off
Phase C Temperature = 110 ~F Supply Contactor = Off
Operating Mode = Stopped
[Skip the following section if Motor Type is not VSD] Phase Rotation = ABC
Variable Speed Drive Total Supply kVA = 0 kVA
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Total Power Factor = 0.00
Motor Run = Off DC Bus Voltage = 608 V
% Full Load Amps = 0 % Heatsink Temperature [If TMIII VSD] = 102 ~F
Pre-Rotation Vanes Position = 0 % Baseplate Temperature [If VyperDrive VSD] = 102 ~F
Full Load Amps = 402 A Voltage Peak N-L1 = 200 V
Precharge Relay Output = Off Voltage Peak N-L2 = 200 V
Trigger SCR Output = Off Voltage Peak N-L3 = 200 V
Water Pump Output = Off L1-L2 RMS Voltage = 215 V
kW Hours
Input Power
=
=
14528 kWH
0 kW
L2-L3 RMS Voltage
L3-L1 RMS Voltage
=
=
215
215
V
V
4
Output Frequency = 0 Hz L1 RMS Filter Current = 0 A
Output Voltage = 0 V L2 RMS Filter Current = 0 A
DC Bus Voltage = 600 V L3 RMS Filter Current = 0 A
DC Inverter Link Current = 0 A L1 RMS Supply Current = 0 A
Phase A Output Current = 0 A L2 RMS Supply Current = 0 A
Phase B Output Current = 0 A L3 RMS Supply Current = 0 A
Phase C Output Current = 0 A L1 Voltage Total Harmonic Distortion = 1.5 %
Internal Ambient Temperature = 88 ~F L2 Voltage Total Harmonic Distortion = 1.2 %
Converter Heatsink Temperature = 102 ~F L3 Voltage Total Harmonic Distortion = 1.1 %
L1 Supply Current Total Demand Distortion = 0.0 %
FIGURE 68 - SAMPLE PRINTOUT (HISTORY) FIGURE 68 - SAMPLE PRINTOUT (HISTORY)

(CONT'D) (CONT'D)

FORM 160.54-O1
YORK SETPOINT CHANGE LOG YORK TREND

CHILLER ID 0
(c) 1997 – 2001 YORK INTERNATIONAL CORPORATION CHILLER ID 163
Fri 05 Oct 2001 4:48:04 PM
© 1997 – 2000 YORK INTERNATIONAL CORPORATION
Log Entry 1 Evaporator - Leaving Chilled Local Setpoint
MON 09 OCT 2000 3:33:47 PM
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Date = 05 Oct 2001
Time = 4:23:49 PM DATA 1: LEAVING CHILLED LIQUID TEMPERATURE
DATA 2: RETURN CHILLED LIQUID TEMPERATURE
Access Level = Service
DATA 3: EVAPORATOR PRESSURE
User Id = 4268
Old Value = 46.5 ~F DATA 4: LEAVING CONDENSER LIQUID TEMPERATURE
New Value = 48.0 ~F DATA 5: RETURN CONDENSER LIQUID TEMPERATURE
DATA 6: CONDENSER PRESSURE
Log Entry 2 Condenser - High Pressure Warning Threshold
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- TIME DATA 1 DATA 2 DATA 3 DATA 4 DATA 5 DATA 6
Date = 05 Oct 2001 3:33:47 PM 45.5 °F 55.0 °F 39.0 PSIG 95.0 °F 85.0 °F 120.0 PSIG
Time = 1:36:12 PM 3:33:48 PM 45.5 °F 55.0 °F 39.0 PSIG 95.0 °F 85.0 °F 120.0 PSIG
Access Level = Service 3:33:49 PM 45.5 °F 55.0 °F 39.0 PSIG 95.0 °F 85.0 °F 120.0 PSIG
User Id = 4268 3:33:50 PM 45.5 °F 55.0 °F 39.0 PSIG 95.0 °F 85.3 °F 120.1 PSIG
Old Value = 162.5 Psig 3:33:51 PM 45.5 °F 55.2 °F 39.1 PSIG 95.1 °F 85.4 °F 120.2 PSIG
New Value = 225.0 Psig
Log Entry 3 Condenser - Drop Leg

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Date = 05 Oct 2001
Time = 1:36:02 PM
Access Level = Service Figure 71 - SAMPLE PRINTOUT (TREND DATA
User Id = 4268
NEW OR EXISTING POINTS)
Old Value = Disabled
New Value = Enabled
Log Entry 4 Evaporator - Refrigerant

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Date = 05 Oct 2001
Time = 1:35:48 PM
Access Level = Service
User Id = 4268
Old Value = Disabled
New Value = Enabled
YORK CUSTOM VIEW

Figure 70 - SAMPLE PRINTOUT (SECURITY LOG CHILLER ID 0
REPORT) (c) 1997 – 2001 YORK INTERNATIONAL CORPORATION
Mon 21 Jun 1999 1:28:25 PM
Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature = 45.0 ~F

Return Chilled Liquid Temperature = 55.0 ~F
Leaving Condenser Liquid Temperature = 95.0 ~F
Evaporator Saturation Temperature = 41.0 ~F
Condenser Saturation Temperature = 78.5 ~F
Oil Pressure = 45.0 Psid
Figure 72 - SAMPLE PRINTOUT (CUSTOM

SCREEN REPORT)

FORM 160.54-O1
Log Time: Mon 12:45:39 PM 21 Jun 1999 D-P/P = 1.20; Prv Pos = 89; Freq = 58 Hz
D-P/P= 0.92; Prv Pos= 56; Freq= 39 Hz D-P/P = 1.41; Prv Pos = 71; Freq = 46 Hz
Surge Type = Delta P/P Surge D-P/P = 0.98; Prv Pos = 73; Freq = 52 Hz
Leaving Chilled Active Setpoint = 45.0 ~F D-P/P = 0.71; Prv Pos = 86; Freq = 39 Hz
Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature = 50.0 ~F D-P/P = 0.86; Prv Pos = 53; Freq = 48 Hz
Return Chilled Liquid Temperature = 59.3 ~F D-P/P = 1.14; Prv Pos = 76; Freq = 51 Hz
Leaving Condenser Liquid Temperature = 85.0 ~F D-P/P = 0.84; Prv Pos = 84; Freq = 37 Hz
Return Condenser Liquid Temperature = 94.9 ~F D-P/P = 0.99; Prv Pos = 63; Freq = 46 Hz
Figure 73 - SAMPLE PRINTOUT (ADAPTIVE Figure 74 - SAMPLE PRINTOUT (ADAPTIVE

CAPACITY CONTROL NEW MAP POINT REPORT) CAPACITY CONTROL EXISTING MAP POINTS
REPORT)

FORM 160.54-O1
NOTES

FORM 160.54-O1


Length

Pressure Drop
TEMPERATURE
Example: (45.0°F - 32°) x 0.5556 = 27.2°C

P.O. Box 1592, York, Pennsylvania USA 17405-1592 Tele. 800-861-1001 Subject to change without notice. Printed in USA
Copyright © by Johnson Controls 2014 www.johnsoncontrols.com ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Form 160.54-O1 (914)
Issue Date: September 10, 2014
Supersedes: 160.54-O1 (1013)
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS Supersedes: 160.75-N1 (311) Form 160.75-N1 (414)
MODEL YK (STYLE G)
R-134a
WITH OPTIVIEW™ CONTROL CENTER

LD15222
Issue Date:
April 30, 2014
FORM 160.75-N1
IMPORTANT!
materials under pressure, rotating components, and operating/service personnel. It is expected that these
both high and low voltage. Each of these items has the individuals possess independent training that will en-
potential, if misused or handled improperly, to cause able them to perform their assigned tasks properly and
bodily injury or death. It is the obligation and respon- safely. It is essential that, prior to performing any task
sibility of operating/service personnel to identify and on this equipment, this individual shall have read and
recognize these inherent hazards, protect themselves, understood this document and any referenced mate-
and proceed safely in completing their tasks. Failure rials. This individual shall also be familiar with and
to comply with any of these requirements could result comply with all applicable governmental standards and
in serious damage to the equipment and the property in regulations pertaining to the task in question.
SAFETY SYMBOLS


not taken.
connections to the controls or application of improper control signals. Failure to follow this warn-
ing will void the manufacturer’s warranty and cause serious damage to property or personal injury.
2 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.75-N1

In complying with Johnson Controls’ policy for contin- these documents, the technician should verify whether
uous product improvement, the information contained the equipment has been modified and if current litera-
in this document is subject to change without notice. ture is available from the owner of the equipment prior
Johnson Controls makes no commitment to update or to performing any work on the chiller.
provide current information automatically to the man-
ual owner. Updated manuals, if applicable, can be ob- CHANGE BARS
tained by contacting the nearest Johnson Controls Ser- Revisions made to this document are indicated with a
vice office or accessing the Johnson Controls QuickLIT line along the left or right hand column in the area the
website at http://cgproducts.johnsoncontrols.com. revision was made. These revisions are to technical in-
Operating/service personnel maintain responsibility for formation and any other changes in spelling, grammar
the applicability of these documents to the equipment. or formatting are not included.
If there is any question regarding the applicability of
Solid State Starter (Mod “B”) – Operation and Maintenance 160.00-O2
Variable Speed Drive – Operation 160.00-O1
Installation – Unit 160.54-N1
Operation – OptiView Control Panel 160.54-O1
Renewal Parts – Unit 160.75-RP1
Wiring Diagram – YK Chiller (Style G) Field Control Modifications 160.75-PW4
Wiring Diagram – YK Chiller (Style G) OptiView Control Center with Remote Low or Medium Voltage EMS 160.75-PW5
Wiring Diagram – YK Chiller (Style G) OptiView Control Center with Unit Mounted Low or Medium
160.75-PW6
Voltage SSS, Unit Mounted Low Voltage VSD with Modbus, or Remote Medium Voltage VSD
Wiring Diagram – YK Chiller (Style G) OptiView Control Center with LTC I/O Board with Remote Low
160.75-PW7
or Medium Voltage EMS
Wiring Diagram – YK Chiller (Style G) OptiView Control Center with LTC I/O Board with Unit Mounted
Low or Medium Voltage SSS, Unit Mounted Low Voltage VSD with Modbus or Remote Medium 160.75-PW8
Voltage VSD
Maintenance Requirements Log Sheets 160.54-MR1
Installation and ReAssembly - Unit 160.75-N3
Operation - Unit 160.75-O1
JOHNSON CONTROLS 3
FORM 160.75-N1
NOMENCLATURE
MOTOR CODE
POWER SUPPLY
– for 60 Hz
5 for 50 Hz
COMPRESSOR CODE*
CONDENSER CODE*
EVAPORATOR CODE*
* Refer to YK Engineering Guide (Form 160.75-EG1)
MODEL* for Shell/Motor/Compressor combinations.
4 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.75-N1
LIST OF FIGURES

FIGURE 2 - Rigging��9
FIGURE 3 - Neoprene Isolators�� 11
FIGURE 4 - Neoprene Isolators��12
FIGURE 5 - Spring Isolators ��13
FIGURE 6 - Spring Isolators��14
FIGURE 7 - Schematic of a Typical Piping Arrangement��16
FIGURE 8 - Typical Refrigerant Vent Piping��17
FIGURE 9 - Control Panel Positioning (H9, K1-K7)��18
FIGURE 10 - Unit Insulation��20
FIGURE 11 - Dimensions – P and Q Compressor Units (ft–in)��23
FIGURE 12 - Dimensions – P and Q Compressor Units (mm)��24
FIGURE 13 - Dimensions – H Compressor Units (ft–in)��25
FIGURE 14 - Dimensions – H Compressor Units (mm)��26
FIGURE 15 - Dimensions – K Compressor Units (ft–in)��27
FIGURE 16 - Dimensions – K Compressor Units (mm)��28
FIGURE 17 - Dimensions – Evaporator Compact Waterboxes ��29
FIGURE 18 - Dimensions – Condenser Compact Waterboxes ��30
FIGURE 19 - Dimensions – Evaporator Compact Waterboxes A thru L Evaporators�� 31
FIGURE 20 - Dimensions – Evaporator Compact Waterboxes M thru Z Evaporators�� 32
FIGURE 21 - Dimensions – Condenser Compact Waterboxes - Standard (mm)�� 33
FIGURE 22 - Dimensions – Condenser Compact Waterboxes - Standard (mm)�� 34
FIGURE 23 - Dimensions – Condenser Heat Recovery Compact Waterboxes - Standard (mm)�� 35
FIGURE 24 - Dimensions – Evaporator Nozzle Arrangements - Standard (mm)�� 36
FIGURE 25 - Dimensions – Condenser Nozzle Arrangements - Standard (mm)�� 37
FIGURE 26 - Dimensions – Evaporator Marine Waterboxes ��38
FIGURE 27 - Dimensions – Condenser Marine Waterboxes ��39
LIST OF TABLES
TABLE 1 - Allowable Compressor / Evaporator / Condenser / Motor Combinations�� 21

TABLE 2 - Approximate Unit Weight Including Motor for Flooded Evaporator Units - LBS (KGS)�� 42
TABLE 3 - Approximate Unit Weight Including Motor for Hybrid Falling Film Evaporator Units - LBS (KGS) �� 43
TABLE 4 - Evaporator Marine Waterbox Weights - LBS (KGS) ��43
TABLE 5 - Condenser Marine Waterbox Weights - LBS (KGS) ��44
TABLE 6 - SI Metric Conversion��45
JOHNSON CONTROLS 5
FORM 160.75-N1
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.
6 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.75-N1
SECTION 1 - INTRODUCTION 1
GENERAL The services of a Johnson Controls representative will
be furnished to check the installation, supervise the
This manual describes the installation of a YORK YK
initial start-up and operation of all chillers installed
Mod "G" Centrifugal Chiller. This unit can be shipped
within the Continental United States.
as a single factory assembled, piped, wired package,
requiring a minimum of field labor to make chilled The Johnson Controls Warranty may be
water connections, condenser water connections, re- voided if the following restrictions are not
frigerant atmospheric relief connections, and electri- adhered to:
cal power connections. Refrigerant and oil charges are
shipped separately unless optional condenser isolation
valves are ordered.
1. No valves or connections should be opened under
Chillers can also be shipped dismantled when required any circumstances because such action will result
by rigging conditions, but generally it is more econom- in loss of the factory nitrogen charge.
ical to enlarge access openings to accommodate the 2. Do not dismantle or open the chiller for any rea-
factory assembled unit. Chillers shipped dismantled son except under the supervision of a Johnson
MUST be field assembled under the supervision of a Controls representative.
Johnson Controls representative, but otherwise instal-
3. When units are shipped dismantled, notify the
lation will be as described in this instruction.
nearest Johnson Controls office in ample time for
FIELD ASSEMBLED UNITS ONLY a Johnson Controls representative to supervise
rigging the unit to its operating position and the
Use Unit - Installation Instructions (Form 160.75-N3) assembly of components.
in conjunction with this installation instruction. This in-
4. Do not make final power supply connections to
struction will be furnished with all units that are to be
the compressor motor or control center.
field assembled.
COMPRESSOR
CONTROL
CENTER
MOTOR
CONDENSER
LD15222
EVAPORATOR
JOHNSON CONTROLS 7
FORM 160.75-N1
section 1 - INTRODUCTION
5. Do not charge the compressor with oil. • Compressor/motor assembly removed from
shells and skidded. Evaporator/condenser is
6. Do not charge the unit with refrigerant.
not skidded.
7. Do not attempt to start the system.
• All wiring integral with compressor is left on
8. Do not run hot water (110°F / 43°C max) or steam it, and all conduit is left on shell. All open-
through the evaporator or condenser at any time. ings on compressor, oil separator, and shell
are closed and charged with dry nitrogen (2
SHIPMENT to 3 PSIG) (115/122 kPa).
The chiller may be ordered and shipped in any of the • Miscellaneous packaging of control center,
following forms: tubing, water temperature controls, wiring,
Form 1 – Factory Assembled Unit, complete with mo- oil, isolators, solid state starter (option), etc.;
tor, refrigerant and oil charges. refrigerant charge shipped separately.
Units shipped dismantled MUST be re-
• The motor/compressor assembly mounted, assembled by, or under the supervision of,
with all necessary interconnecting piping a Johnson Controls representative. Refer
assembled. OptiView™ Control Center is to Installation - Unit (Form 160.75-N3)
mounted on the unit. Complete unit factory
leak tested, evacuated and charged with R-
134A.
Form 7 – S
plit Shells – Shipped as three major assem-
An optional Solid State Starter or Variable blies. Unit first factory assembled, refriger-
Speed Drive can be factory mounted and ant piped, wired and leak tested; then dis-
wired. mantled for shipment.
• Miscellaneous material – Four (4) vibration • Compressor/motor assembly removed from
isolation pads (or optional spring isolators shells and skidded.
and brackets). K7 units will be shipped with
• Evaporator and condenser shells are sepa-
8 Vibration Isolation Pads.
rated at tube sheets and are not skidded. Re-
Form 2 – Factory Assembled Unit, complete with mo- frigerant lines between shells are flanged and
tor (refrigerant and oil charges shipped sepa- capped, requiring no welding.
rately).
• All wiring integral with compressor is left
• The motor/compressor assembly mounted, on it. All wiring harnesses on shells are re-
with all necessary interconnecting piping moved. All openings on compressor and
assembled. OptiView™ Control Center is shells are closed and charged with dry nitro-
mounted on the unit. Complete unit fac- gen (2 to 3 psig) (115/122 kPa).
tory leak tested, evacuated and charged with
• Miscellaneous packaging of control center,
holding charge of nitrogen.
tubing, water temperature controls, wiring,
An optional Solid State Starter or Variable oil isolators, solid state starter (option), etc.;
Speed Drive can be factory mounted and refrigerant charge shipped separately.
wired. Units shipped dismantled MUST be re-
assembled by, or under the supervision of,
• Miscellaneous material – Four (4) vibration
a Johnson Controls representative. Refer
isolation pads (or optional spring isolators).
to Installation - Unit (Form 160.75-N3)
K7 units will be shipped with 8 Vibration
Isolation Pads.
Form 3 – D
riveline Separate From Shells – Shipped as When more than one chiller is involved, the major
two major assemblies. Unit first factory assem- parts of each unit will be marked to prevent mixing
bled, refrigerant piped, wired and leak tested; of assemblies. (Piping and Wiring Drawings to be fur-
then dismantled for shipment. nished by Johnson Controls)
8 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.75-N1
INSPECTION – DAMAGE – SHORTAGE RIGGING
1
The unit shipment should be checked on arrival to see The complete standard chiller is shipped without skids.
that all major pieces, boxes and crates are received. (When optional skids are used it may be necessary to
Each unit should be checked on the trailer or rail car remove the skids so riggers skates can be used under
when received, before unloading, for any visible signs the unit end sheets to reduce overall height.)
of damage. Any damage or signs of possible damage
must be reported to the transportation company imme- Each unit has four (4) lifting holes (two in each end)
diately for their inspection. Johnson Controls will not in the end sheets which should be used to lift the unit.
be responsible for any damage in shipment, at job site, Care should be taken at all times during rigging and
or loss of parts. (Refer to Shipping Damage Claims, handling of the chiller to avoid damage to the unit and
Form 50.15-NM.) its external connections. Lift only using holes shown in
When received at the job site all containers should be Figure 2 on Page 9.
opened and contents checked against the packing list. Do not lift the unit with slings around
Any material shortage should be reported to Johnson motor/compressor assembly or by means
Controls immediately. (Refer to Shipping Damage of eyebolts in the tapped holes of the
Claims, Form 50.15-NM.) compressor motor assembly. Do not turn
a unit on its side for rigging. Do not rig
CHILLER DATA PLATE vertically.
A unit data plate is mounted on the control center as-
sembly of each unit, giving unit model number; design The rigging and operating weights and overall dimen-
working pressure; water passes; refrigerant charge; se- sions are given on pages 22 thru 40 as a guide in deter-
rial numbers; and motor power characteristics and con- mining the clearances required for rigging. Add 6" (15
nection diagrams. cm) to overall height for optional skidded unit.
Additional information may be found on the motor data

plate. This information should be included when con-
tacting the factory on any problem relating to the motor.
LD00700(R)
Figure 2 - RIGGING
JOHNSON CONTROLS 9
FORM 160.75-N1
LOCATION MOTORS
YORK Chillers are furnished with vibration isola- The YK open motor is air cooled. Check state, local
tor mounts for basement or ground level installations. and other codes for ventilation requirements.
Units may be located on upper floor levels providing
the floor is capable of supporting the total unit operat- FOUNDATION
ing weight and optional spring isolators are used. A level floor, mounting pad or foundation must be pro-
Sufficient clearance to facilitate normal vided by others, capable of supporting the operating
service and maintenance work must be weight of the unit.
provided all around and above the unit
and particularly space provided at either CLEARANCE
end to permit cleaning or replacement Clearances should be adhered to as follows:
of evaporator and condenser tubes – see
Clearance. A doorway or other sufficiently • Rear and above unit – 2 ft (61 cm).
large opening properly located may be • Front of unit – 3 ft (91 cm).
used. The chiller should be located in an
indoor location where temperatures range • Tube Removal – 14 ft.* (4.3 m) (either end)
from 40°F to 110°F (4.4°C to 43.3°C). * 16 ft (4.9 meters) on shell codes Q-Q, N-N, R-R, X-T and X-X.
** 18 ft (5.5 meters) on shell code S-S, S-V, Z-Z.
*** 22 ft (6.7 meters) on shell code W-W.
10 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.75-N1
ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES (MM)

1
LD12638 LD12639
UNIT WEIGHT UP TO 16,365 Lbs (7,423 Kgs) UNIT WEIGHT 16,366 - 28,835 Lbs (7,424 - 13,080 Kgs)
LD12640 LD12641
UNIT WEIGHT 28,836 - 53,530 Lbs (13,081 - 24,281 Kgs) UNIT WEIGHT 53,531 - 100,464 Lbs (45,570 - 58,968 Kgs)
LD12642
UNIT WEIGHT 100,465 - 130,000 Lbs (45,570 - 58,967 Kgs)

Figure 3 - NEOPRENE ISOLATORS
JOHNSON CONTROLS 11
FORM 160.75-N1
LD12643
COMPRESSOR UNIT WEIGHT DIM "A" DIM "B" DIM "C" DIM "D"
Up To 16,365 Lbs 6" 8"
See Figures 11-16 See Figures 11-16
(7,423 Kgs) (152mm) (203mm)
16,366 - 28,835 Lbs 6" 8"
(7,424 - 13,08 Kgs) (152mm) (203mm)
Q, P, H
28,836 - 53,530 Lbs 6" 8"
& See Figures 11-16 See Figures 11-16
(13,081 - 24,281 Kgs) (152mm) (203mm)
K1 - K4
53,531 - 100,464 Lbs 10" 8"
(24,281 - 45,569 Kgs) (254mm) (203mm)
100,465 - 130,000 Lbs 10" 8"
(45,570 - 58,967 Kgs) (254mm) (203mm)
10" 11"
*K7 – See Figures 15-16 See Figures 15-16
(254mm) (280mm)
* Isolator quantity is 8 when K7 Compressor is supplied.
Figure 4 - NEOPRENE ISOLATORS
12 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.75-N1

1
LD126544 LD12645
UNIT WEIGHT UNIT WEIGHT
10,000 Lbs UP TO 35,009 Lbs 35,010 Lbs UP TO 58,349 Lbs
(4,536 Kgs UP TO 15,880 Kgs) (15,881 Kgs UP TO 26,467 Kgs)
LD12646 LD12647
UNIT WEIGHT UNIT WEIGHT
89,341 Lbs UP TO 115,000 Lbs 115,000 Lbs. UP TO 190,000 Lbs
(40,252 Kgs UP TO 52,164 Kgs) (52,163 Kgs UP TO 86,182 Kgs)
Figure 5 - SPRING ISOLATORS
JOHNSON CONTROLS 13
FORM 160.75-N1
LD12643a
UNIT WEIGHT DIM "A" DIM "B" DIM "C" DIM "D" DIM "E"
10,000 - 35,009 Lbs See See 6" 6-7/8" 5-1/2"
(4,536 - 15,880 Kgs) Figures 11-16 Figures 11-16 (152) (175) (140)
35,010 - 58,349 Lbs See See 9" 7" 6-1/4"
89,341 - 115,000 Lbs See See 13-1/2" 8" 5"
115,000 - 190,000 Lbs See See 16" 17" 16-1/4"
Figure 6 - SPRING ISOLATORS
14 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.75-N1
SECTION 2 - INSTALLATION
RIGGING UNIT TO FINAL LOCATION INSTALLING OPTIONAL SPRING ISOLATORS

2
Rig the unit to its final location on the floor or mount- When ordered, spring type isolator assemblies will be
ing pad, lift the unit (or shell assembly) by means of an furnished with the unit. The 4 assemblies are identical
overhead lift and lower the unit to its mounting posi- and can be placed at any of the 4 corners of the unit.
tion. (If optional shipping skids are used, remove them
before lowering the chiller to its mounting position.) While the unit is still suspended by the rigging, the iso-
lators should be bolted to the unit by inserting the cap
At this point units shipped dismantled screw(s) through the hole(s) in the mounting bracket
should be assembled under the supervi- into the tapped hole in the top of the isolator leveling
sion of a Johnson Controls representative. bolt(s). Then the unit can be lowered onto the floor.
The leveling bolts should now be rotated one (1) turn at
a time, in sequence, until the unit end sheets are clear
If evaporator is to be field insulated, the insulation of the floor by the dimension shown in Figure 4 on
should be applied to the evaporator before the unit is Page 12 or Figure 6 on Page 14 and the unit is
placed in position while the unit is in the lift position. level. Check that the unit is level, both longitudinally
Be sure unit is properly supported. (Refer to Figure 2 and transversely (see Leveling the Unit). If the leveling
on Page 9) bolts are not long enough to level unit due to an uneven
or sloping floor or foundation, steel shims (grouted, if
LOCATING AND INSTALLING ISOLATOR PADS necessary) must be added beneath the isolator assem-
blies as necessary.
The isolator pad mounts are to be located as shown in
Figure 3 on Page 11 (rubber side down). After the unit is leveled, wedge and shim under each
corner to solidly support the unit in this position while
After the isolator pads have been placed into position piping connections are being made, pipe hangers ad-
on the floor, lower the chiller onto the pads. When the justed and connections checked for alignment. Then
unit is in place, remove the rigging equipment and the unit is filled with water and checked for leaks. The
check that the unit is level. The unit should be level leveling bolts should now be finally adjusted until the
within 1/4" (6 mm) from one end to the other end and wedges and shims can be removed. The unit should
from front to the rear. If the chiller is not level within now be in correct level position, clear of the floor or
the amount specified, lift it and place shims between foundation and without any effect from the weight of
the isolation pad and the chiller tube sheets. (Shims the piping.
furnished by the installer.) Lower unit again and re-
check to see that it is level. PIPING CONNECTIONS
CHECKING THE ISOLATION PAD DEFLECTION After the unit is leveled (and wedged in place for op-
tional spring isolators) the piping connections may be
All isolation pads should be checked for the proper de- made; chilled water, condenser water and refrigerant
flection while checking to see if the unit is level. Each relief. The piping should be arranged with offsets for
pad should be deflected approximately 0.10 inches flexibility, and adequately supported and braced inde-
(2.5 mm) to 0.20 inches (5 mm). If an isolation pad is pendently of the unit to avoid strain on the unit and
under-deflected, shims should be placed between the vibration transmission. Hangers must allow for align-
unit tube sheet and the top of the pad to equally deflect ment of pipe. Isolators (by others) in the piping and
all pads. hangers are highly desirable, and may be required by
specifications, in order to effectively utilize the vibra-
LEVELING THE UNIT
tion isolation characteristics of the vibration isolation
The longitudinal alignment of the unit should be mounts of the unit.
checked by placing a level on the top center of the
evaporator shell under the compressor/motor assem- Check for piping alignment – Upon completion of
bly. Transverse alignment should be checked by plac- piping, a connection in each line as close to the unit
ing a level on top of the shell end sheets. as possible should be opened, by removing the flange
JOHNSON CONTROLS 15
FORM 160.75-N1
section 2 - installation
bolts or coupling and checked for piping alignment. If flow path for the starter heat exchanger to regulate cooling
any of the bolts are bound in their holes, or if the con- above the equipment room dewpoint for applications using
nection springs are out of alignment, the misalignment cooling sources other than evaporative air-exchange meth-
must be corrected by properly supporting the piping or ods, such as wells, bodies of water, and chilled water. The
by applying heat to anneal the pipe. temperature control valve should be the type to open on in-
If the piping is annealed to relieve stress, creasing drive coolant temperature, fail-closed, and set for a
the inside of the pipe must be cleaned of temperature above dewpoint. It can be requested as factory-
scale before it is finally bolted in place. supplied on a chiller order by special quotation.
Chilled Water
Foreign objects which could lodge in, or block flow
through, the evaporator and condenser tubes must be
EVAPORATOR AND CONDENSER WATER
kept out of the water circuit. All water piping must be
PIPING
cleaned or flushed before being connected to the chiller
The evaporator and condenser liquid heads of chiller pumps, or other equipment.
have nozzles which are grooved, suitable for welding
150 psig DWP flanges or the use of flexible couplings. Permanent strainers (supplied by others) are required
Factory mounted flanges are optional. in both the evaporator and condenser water circuits to
protect the chiller as well as the pumps, tower spray
The nozzles and water pass arrangements are furnished in nozzles, chilled water coils and controls, etc. The
accordance with the job requirements (see Product Draw- strainer must be installed in the entering chilled water
ings) furnished with the job. Standard units are designed line, directly upstream of the chiller.
for 150 psig DWP on the water side. If job requirements
are for greater than 150 psig DWP, check the unit data plate Water piping circuits should be arranged so that the
before applying pressure to evaporator or condenser to de- pumps discharge through the chiller, and should be
termine if the chiller has provisions for the required DWP. controlled as necessary to maintain essentially constant
chilled and condenser water flows through the unit at
Inlet and outlet connections are identified by labels
all load conditions.
placed adjacent to each nozzle.
The coolant temperature inside any JCI-supplied liquid- If pumps discharge through the chiller, the strainer
cooled motor starter must be maintained above the dewpoint may be located upstream from pumps to protect both
temperature in the equipment room to prevent condensing pump and chiller. (Piping between strainer, pump and
water vapor inside the starter cabinet. Therefore, an addi- chiller must be very carefully cleaned before start-up.)
tional temperature-controlled throttle valve is needed in the If pumps are remotely installed from chiller, strainers
should be located directly upstream of the chiller.
EVAPORATOR
LD08529
Figure 7 - SCHEMATIC OF A TYPICAL PIPING ARRANGEMENT
16 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.75-N1
VENT TO ATMOSPHERE
SUPPORT VENT PIPING TO AVOID

FLANGED JOINT
TO PERMIT PIPING
STRAIN ON RELIEF PIPING
2
DISASSEMBLY
FLEXIBLE CONNECTOR
CONDENSATION
TRAP
CONDENSER
DUAL RELIEF SEE NOTE
VALVES
EVAPORATOR
COOLER
NOTE: SHELLS MAY BE FURNISHED WITH

ONE OR TWO RELIEF VALVES,
DEPENDING ON SHELL SIZE.
LD03863
Figure 8 - TYPICAL REFRIGERANT VENT PIPING
Condenser Water Circuit
For proper operation of the unit, condenser refrigerant solid-state flow sensors have a small internal heat-
pressure must be maintained above evaporator pressure. ing element and use the cooling effect of the flowing
If operating conditions will fulfill this requirement, no fluid to sense when an adequate flow rate has been
attempt should be made to control condenser water established.
temperature by means of automatic valves, cycling of
the cooling tower fan or other means, since chillers are Waterbox Drain and Vent Valves
designed to function satisfactorily and efficiently when Drain and vent valves (by others) should be installed
condenser water is allowed to seek its own temperature in the connections provided in the evaporator and con-
level at reduced loads and off-peak seasons of the year. denser liquid heads. These connections may be piped
However, if entering condenser water temperature can to drain if desired.
go below the required minimum, Refer to Operation -
Unit (Form 160.75-O1) condenser water temperature Checking Piping Circuits and Venting Air
must be maintained equal to or slightly higher than the After the water piping is completed, but before any
required minimum. Refer to Figure 7 on Page 16 for waterbox insulation is applied. Tighten and torque to
typical water piping schematic. maintain between 30 and 60 ft. lbs. (41 and 81 N·m)
the nuts on the liquid head flanges. Gasket shrinkage
Stop Valves
and handling during transit cause nuts to loosen. If wa-
Stop valves may be provided (by others) in the evapora- ter pressure is applied before tightening is done, the
tor and condenser water piping adjacent to the unit to gaskets may be damaged and have to be replaced. Fill
facilitate maintenance. Thermometer wells and pressure the chilled and condenser water circuits, operate the
taps should be provided (by others) in the piping as close pumps manually and carefully check the evaporator
to the unit as possible to facilitate operating check. and condenser water heads and piping for leaks. Repair
leaks as necessary.
Flow Switches
Thermal type water flow switches are factory mount- Before initial operation of the unit both water circuits
ed in the chilled and condensed water nozzles and are should be thoroughly vented of all air at the high points.
factory wired to the OptiView™ control panel. These
JOHNSON CONTROLS 17
FORM 160.75-N1
REFRIGERANT RELIEF PIPING

PANEL
Each unit is equipped with pressure relief valves lo- TRACK
cated on the condenser and on the evaporator for the
purpose of quickly relieving excess pressure of the re- SUPPORT
frigerant charge to the atmosphere as a safety precau- ARMS
tion in case of an emergency, such as fire.
Refrigerant relief vent piping (by others), from the re-
lief valves to the outside of the building, is required
by code in most areas and should be installed on all
chillers. The vent line should be sized in accordance
with the ANSI/ASHRAE-15, or local code. The vent
line must include a dirt trap in the vertical leg to in-
tercept and permit clean out and to trap any vent stack
condensation. The piping MUST be arranged to avoid
strain on the relief valves, using a flexible connection,
if necessary.
LD03826
UNIT PIPING
Figure 9 - CONTROL PANEL POSITIONING
Compressor lubricant piping and system external pip-
(H9, K1-K7)
ing are factory installed on all units shipped assembled.
On units shipped dismantled, the following piping
should be completed under the supervision of the John-
son Controls representative: (1) the lubricant piping to CONTROL WIRING
oil sump and oil evaporator and system oil return con-
On units shipped disassembled, after installation of the
nections using material furnished. Refer to Installation
control center, control wiring must be completed be-
- Unit (Form 160.75-N3).
tween unit components and control center, solid state
CONTROL PANEL POSITIONING starter, or variable speed drive, when used, using wir-
ing harnesses furnished. Refer to Installation - Unit
On large YK chillers equipped with H9 and K1-K7 (Form 160.75-N3).
compressors, the control panel height can be adjusted.
Chillers equipped with P and Q compressors the Field wiring connections for commonly encountered
control panel height is NOT adjustable. The OptiV- control modifications (by others) if required, are
iew™ Control Center is placed in a position above the shown on Wiring Diagram – Unit (Style G) Field Con-
evaporator for shipping. To move the control center trol Modifications (Form 160.75-PW4).
into position for operation, proceed as follows: No deviations in unit wiring from that
shown on drawings furnished shall be
1. While supporting the control center, remove the
made without prior approval of the John-
hardware between the support arms and the evap-
son Controls representative.
orator.
2. Swing the control center into a vertical position.
3. Slide the control center down the guide rails to the POWER WIRING
proper position. Tighten securely.
Chiller with Electro-Mechanical Starter
4. Discard unused hardware.
A 115 volt – single phase – 60 or 50 Hertz power sup-
ply of 20 amperes must be furnished to the control
center, from the control transformer (2 KVA required)
included with the compressor motor starter. Do NOT
make final power connections to control center until
approved by YORK representative.
18 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.75-N1
OIL PUMP – 3 PHASE STARTER Speed Drive (or an optional factory installed discon-
nect switch). See Field Wiring Diagram. All wiring to
Separate wiring or a fused disconnect switch should be
the control panel and the oil pump starter is completed
supplied by the installer.
by the factory. A control transformer is furnished with 2
Remote Electro-Mechanical starters for the Solid State Starter or Variable Speed Drive.
the chiller must be furnished in accor-
dance with YORK Starter Specifications INSULATION
Product Drawing Form 160.73-PA1 to DO NOT field insulate until the unit has
provide the features necessary for the been leak tested under the supervision of
starter to function properly with the the Johnson Controls representative.
YORK control system.
Each chiller unit is furnished for a specific electrical

power supply as stamped on the Unit Data Plate, which
Insulation of the type specified for the job, or mini-
also details the motor connection diagrams.
mum thickness to prevent sweating of 30°F (-1°C) sur-
To insure proper motor rotation the starter faces should be furnished (by others) and applied to the
power input and starter to motor con- evaporator shell, end sheets, liquid feed line to flow
nections must be checked with a phase chamber, compressor suction connection, and evapo-
sequence indicator in the presence of the rator liquid heads and connections. The liquid head
Johnson Controls representative. flange insulation must be removable, to allow head re-
moval for the tube maintenance. Details of areas to be
DO NOT cut wires to final length or make insulated are given on the Product Drawing.
final connections to motor terminals or
starter power input terminals until ap- Units are furnished factory anti-sweat insulated on or-
proved by the Johnson Controls repre- der at additional cost. This includes all low tempera-
sentative. ture surfaces except the two (2) cooler liquid heads.
INSTALLATION CHECK – REQUEST FOR

YK Motors (Electro-Mechanical Starter) START-UP SERVICE
Motor leads are furnished with a crimp type connection The services of a Johnson Controls representative will
having a clearance hole for a 3/8" bolt, motor terminal be furnished to check the installation and supervise the
lugs are not furnished. Refer to Wiring Labels in mo- initial start-up and operation on all chillers installed
tor terminal box for hook-up to suit motor voltage and within the Continental United States.
amperage for power wiring connections.
After the unit is installed, piped and wired as described
Chiller with Solid State Starter or Variable in this Instruction, but before any attempt is made to
Speed Drive start the unit, the Johnson Controls District Office
A chiller equipped with a factory mounted Solid State should be advised so that the start-up service, included
Starter or Variable Speed Drive does not require wiring in the contract price, can be scheduled. Use the In-
to the compressor motor. The motor power wiring is stallation Checklist and Request for startup, (Form
factory connected to the Solid State Starter or Variable 160.75-CL1).
JOHNSON CONTROLS 19
FORM 160.75-N1
Input Drain
and
Charging
LD12649
Figure 10 - UNIT INSULATION
20 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.75-N1
Table 1 - ALLOWABLE COMPRESSOR / EVAPORATOR / CONDENSER / MOTOR COMBINATIONS

YK MOD G COMBINATIONS
COMPRESSOR EVAPORATOR CONDENSER MOTOR CODES
CODES CODES CODES 60 HZ 50 HZ 2
Q3 AP to AS AP to AS
CP to CS CP to CS CF-CT 5CC-5CO
Q3, Q4
DP to DS DP to DS EF-ET 5EC-5EO
Q4 EP to ET EP to ET
CP to CS CP to CS
Q5
DP to DS DP to DS CH-CT 5CE-5CO
EP to ET EP to ET EH-ET 5EE-5EO
Q5, Q6, Q7
FQ to FT FQ to FT
EP to ET EP to ET CU-CY
P7 5CP-5CU
FQ to FT FQ to FT EU-EV
P8 GQ to GS EV to EX
HQ to HS FV to FX CH-CZ 5CE-5CU
P8, P9 JP to JS JP to JS EH-EV 5EE-5EO
LQ to LS LQ to LS
KP to KS, K2 to K4 KP to KS, K2 to K4 CN-CA 5CK-5CW
H9
MQ to MS, M2 to M4 MP to MS, M2 to M4 EN-EV 5EK-5EO
K1 KT to KX, K5 to K7 KP to KS, K2 to K4
MQ to MS, M2 to M4 MP to MS, M2 to M4
CS-DC 5CN-5DC
NQ to NS, N2 to N4 NP to NS, N2 to N4
K1, K2 ES-EV 5EN-5EO
PQ to PS, P2 to P4 PQ to PS, P2 to P4
QQ to QS, Q2 to Q4 QQ to QS, Q2 to Q4
NQ to NS, N2 to N4 NP to NS, N2 to N4
K3 QQ to QV, Q2 to Q4 QQ to QS, Q2 to Q4 DA-DJ 5DA-5DH
RQ, RS, RV, R3, R5, R7 RQ to RS, R2 to R4
RP, RR, RT, R2, R4, R6 RQ to RS, R2 to R4
SQ to SS, S2 to S4
SQ, SS, SV, S3, S5, S7
K4 VP to VS, V2 to V5 DA-DJ 5DA-5DJ
TP to TS, T2 to T5
XQ to XS, X2 to X4
XQ to XS, X2 to X4
WP-WT, W1, W2, W4, W6 WQ to WS, W1 to W4
K7 DD-DL 5DD-5DL
ZQ to ZS, Z1 to Z4 ZQ to ZS, Z1 to Z4
YK MOD G HEAT RECOVERY COMBINATIONS

COMPRESSOR EVAPORATOR CONDENSER MOTOR CODES
CODES CODES CODES 60 HZ 50 HZ
Q4 CP to CS BW, BX CF-CT 5CC-5CO
Q7 EP to ET IW, IX EF-ET 5EC-5EO
CN-CA 5CK-5CW
H9 KP to KS, K2 to K4 OW, OX, O8, O9
EN-EV 5EK-5EO
CS-DC 5CN-5DC
K2 MQ to MS, M2 to M4 UW, UX, U8, U9
ES-EV 5EN-5EO
K7 ZQ to ZS, Z1 to Z4 YW, YX, Y8, Y9 DD-DL 5DD-5DL
JOHNSON CONTROLS 21
FORM 160.75-N1
TABLE 1 - ALLOWABLE COMPRESSOR/EVAPORATOR/CONDENSER/MOTOR COMBINATIONS (CONT'D)

YK MOD G HYBRID FALLING FILM COMBINATIONS
COMPRESSOR HYBRID FALLING FILM CONDENSER MOTOR CODES
CODES EVAPORATOR CODES CODES 60 HZ 50 HZ
AC, AD, A3, A4 AP to AS
Q3
CC to CE, C3 to C5 CP to CS CF-CT 5CC-5CO
CC to CE, C3 to C5 CP to CS EF-ET 5EC-5EO
Q4
DC to DE, D3 to D5 DP to DS
CC to CE, C3 to C5 CP to CS
Q5
DC to DE, D3 to D5 DP to DS CH-CT 5CE-5CO
EC to EE, E3 to E5 EP to ET EH-ET 5EE-5EO
Q5, Q6, Q7
FC to FE, F3 to F5 FQ to FT
EC to EE, E3 to E5 EP to ET CU-CY
P7 5CP-5CU
FC to FE, F3 to F5 FQ to FT EU-EV
GC to GE, G3 to G5 EV to EX, E3 to E4 CH-CZ 5CE-5CU
P8, P9
HC to HE, H3 to H5 FV to FX, F3 to F4 EH-EV 5EE-5EO
KC, KD, K8, K9, K0 KP, KQ, KR, KS, K2, K3, K4
CN-CA 5CK-5CW
H9 IB, ID, IF, IH, I2, I4, I6, I8 KP, KQ, KR, KS, K2, K3, K4
EN-EV 5EK-5EO
MB, MD, MF, M5, M7, M8 MP, MQ, MR, MS, M2, M3, M4
K1 IB, ID, IF, IH, I2, I4, I6, I8 KP, KQ, KR, KS, K2, K3, K4
MB, MD, MF, M5, M7, M8, M9 MP, MQ, MR, MS, M2, M3, M4
CS-DC 5CN-5DC
NB, ND, NF, N5, N7, N8, N9 NP, NQ, NR, NS, N2, N3, N4
K1, K2 ES-EV 5EN-5EO
PB, PD, PF, P5, P7, P8 PQ, PR, PS, P2, P3, P4
QB, QD, QF, Q5, Q7, Q8 QQ, QR, QS, Q2, Q3, Q4
NB, ND, NF, N5, N7, N8, N9 NP, NQ, NR, NS, N2, N3, N4
K3 DA-DJ 5DA-5DH
QD, QF, QH, Q5, Q7, Q8, Q9 QQ, QR, QS, Q2, Q3, Q4
22 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.75-N1
P AND Q COMPRESSOR UNITS (STANDARD)
LD07134
ADDITIONAL OPERATING HEIGHT Q3 COMPRESSOR

CLEARANCE TO FLOOR EVAPORATOR – CONDENSER SHELL CODES
Type Of Chiller Mounting M A–A C–C D–D
Neoprene Pad Isolators 1-3/4" A 5'-1" 5'-6" 5'-6"
Spring Isolators 1" Deflection 1" B 7'-0" 7'-3 3/4" 7'-3 3/4"
Direct Mount 3/4" C 1'-3 1/2" 1'-5 1/2" 1'-5 1/2"
D 1'-3" 1'-3 1/2" 1'-3 1/2"
P7, Q7 COMPRESSOR
E 12'-0" 12'-0" 16'-0"
EVAPORATOR – CONDENSER SHELL CODES
E–E E–I F–F Q4 COMPRESSOR
A 6'-2" 7'-1 3/4" 6'-2" EVAPORATOR – CONDENSER SHELL CODES
B 8'-0 5/8" 8'-8" 7'-6 1/2" C–B C–C D–D E–E
C 1'-7 1/2" 1'-7 1/2" 1'-7 1/2" A 6'-4 3/4" 5'-6" 5'-6" 7'-0"
D 1'-5 1/2" 1'-11 3/8" 1'-5 1/2" B 7'-11 3/8" 7'-2 1/2" 7'-2 1/2" 7'-8 1/2"
E 12'-0" 12'-0" 16'-0" C 1'-5 1/2" 1'-5 1/2" 1'-5 1/2" 1'-7 1/2"
D 1'-8 7/8" 1'-3 1/2" 1'-3 1/2" 1'-5 1/2"
P8 COMPRESSOR E 12'-0" 12'-0" 16'-0" 12'-0"
G–E H–F J–J L–L Q5 COMPRESSOR
A 6'-11" 6'-11" 7'-6 1/2" 7'-6 1/2" EVAPORATOR – CONDENSER SHELL CODES
B 10'-6" 10'-6" 10'-11" 10'-11" C–C D–D E–E F–F
C 2'-0" 2'-0" 2'-1 1/4" 2'-1 1/4" A 5'-6" 5'-6" 7'-0" 7'-0"
D 1'-5 1/2" 1'-5 1/2" 1'-8" 1'-8" B 7'-10 5/8" 7'-10 5/8" 8'-5 1/2" 8'-5 1/2"
E 12'-0" 16'-0" 12'-0" 16'-0" C 1'-5 1/2" 1'-5 1/2" 1'-7 1/2" 1'-7 1/2"
D 1'-3 1/2" 1'-3 1/2" 1'-5 1/2" 1'-5 1/2"
P9 COMPRESSOR E 12'-0" 16'-0" 12'-0" 16'-0"
H–F J–J L–L Q6 COMPRESSOR
A 6'-11" 7'-6 1/2" 7'-6 1/2" EVAPORATOR – CONDENSER SHELL CODES
B 10'-3" 10'-8 1/2" 10'-8 1/2" E–E F–F
C 2'-0" 2'-1 1/4" 2'-1 1/4" A 7'-0" 7'-0"
D 1'-5 1/2" 1'-8" 1'-8" B 8'-3" 8'-3"
E 16'-0" 12'-0" 16'-0" C 1'-7 1/2" 1'-7 1/2"
D 1'-5 1/2" 1'-5 1/2"
NOTES: E 12'-0" 16'-0"
1. All dimensions are approximate.
2. For compact waterboxes (shown above), determine overall unit length by adding waterbox depth to tube sheet length.
3. Water nozzles can be located on either end of unit. Add 1/2" (13 mm) to nozzle length for flanges connections.
4. To determine overall height, add 7/8" (22 mm) for isolators.
5. Use of motors with motor hoods may increase overall unit dimensions.
Figure 11 - DIMENSIONS – P AND Q COMPRESSOR UNITS (FT–IN)
JOHNSON CONTROLS 23
FORM 160.75-N1
P AND Q COMPRESSOR UNITS (METRIC)
LD07134
Q3 COMPRESSOR
ADDITIONAL OPERATING HEIGHT CLEARANCE
Type of Chiller Mounting M A–A C–C D–D
Neoprene Pad Isolators 45 A 1,549 1,676 1,676
Spring Isolators 25mm Deflection 25 B 2,134 2,229 2,229
Direct Mount 19 C 394 445 445
D 381 394 394
P7, Q7 COMPRESSOR E 3,658 3,658 4,877
E–E E–I F–F Q4 COMPRESSOR
A 1,880 2,178 1,880 EVAPORATOR – CONDENSER SHELL CODE
B 2,299 2,642 2,299 C–C C–B D–D E–E
C 495 495 495 A 1,676 1,949 1,676 2,134
D 445 594 445 B 2,197 2,423 2,197 2,350
E 3,658 3,658 4,877 C 445 445 445 495
D 394 530 394 445
P8 COMPRESSOR E 3,658 3,658 4,877 3,658
E–E F–F G–G H–H Q5 COMPRESSOR
A 2,108 2,108 2,299 2,299 EVAPORATOR – CONDENSER SHELL CODES
B 3,200 3,200 3,327 3,327 C–C D–D E–E F–F
C 610 610 641 641 A 1,676 1,676 2,134 2,134
D 445 445 508 508 B 2,403 2,403 2,578 2,578
E 3,658 4,877 3,658 4,877 C 445 445 495 495
D 394 394 445 445
P9 COMPRESSOR E 3,658 4,877 3,658 4,877
H–F J–J L–L Q6 COMPRESSOR
A 2,108 2,299 2,299 EVAPORATOR – CONDENSER SHELL CODES
B 3,124 3,264 3,264 E–E F–F
C 610 641 641 A 2,134 2,134
D 445 508 508 B 2,515 2,515
E 4,877 3,658 4,877 C 495 495
D 445 445
NOTES: E 3,658 4,877
3. Water nozzles can be located on either end of unit. Add 13 mm (1/2 inch) to nozzle length for flanges connections.
4. To determine overall height, add 22 mm (7/8 inch) for isolators.
Figure 12 - DIMENSIONS – P AND Q COMPRESSOR UNITS (MM)
24 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.75-N1
H COMPRESSOR UNITS (STANDARD)
LD07135
ADDITIONAL OPERATING HEIGHT

CLEARANCE TO FLOOR
Type of Chiller Mounting M
Neoprene Pad Isolators 1 3/4"
Spring Isolators 1" Deflection 1"
Direct Mount 3/4"
H9 COMPRESSORS
I-K & K–K K–O M–M
A 7'-6 1/2" 8'-9 1/4" 8'-7"
B 10'-4" 10'-7 5/8" 10'-10 1/2"
C 2'-1 1/4" 2'-1 1/4" 2'-4 1/2"
D 1'-8" 2'-3 3/8" 1'-11"
E 14'-0" 14'-0" 14'-0"
NOTES:
Figure 13 - DIMENSIONS – H COMPRESSOR UNITS (FT–IN)
JOHNSON CONTROLS 25
FORM 160.75-N1
H COMPRESSOR UNITS (METRIC)
178
LD03886
ADDITIONAL OPERATING HEIGHT CLEARANCE
Type of Chiller Mounting M

Neoprene Pad Isolators 44
Spring Isolators 25mm Deflection 25
Direct Mount 19
H9 COMPRESSORS
EVAPORATOR – COND. SHELL CODES
I-K & K–K K–O M–M
A 2,299 2,673 2,616
B 3,150 3,242 3,315
C 641 641 724
D 508 695 584
E 4,267 4,267 4,267
NOTES:
4. To determine overall height, add 22 mm (7/8 inch) for isolators.
Figure 14 - DIMENSIONS – H COMPRESSOR UNITS (MM)
26 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.75-N1
K COMPRESSOR UNITS (STANDARD)
LD07136
K1 COMPRESSOR, EVAPORATOR – CONDENSER SHELL CODES ADDITIONAL OPERATING HEIGHT CLEARANCE

I-K & K–K M–M N–N P–P Q–Q Type of Chiller Mounting M
A 7'-6 1/2" 8'-7" 8'-7" 9'-1 1/2" 9'-1 1/2" Neoprene Pad Isolators 1 3/4"
B 9'-7" 11'-4" 11'-4" 11'-5 1/2" 11'-5 1/2" Spring Isolators 1" Deflection 1"
C 2'-1 1/4" 2'-4 1/2" 2'-4 1/2" 2'-5 1/2" 2'-5 1/2" Direct Mount 3/4"
D 1'-8" 1'-11" 1'-11" 2'-1 1/4" 2'-1 1/4"
E 14'-0" 14'-0" 16'-0" 14'-0" 16'-0" K3 COMPRESSOR,
K2 COMPRESSOR, EVAPORATOR – CONDENSER SHELL CODES N–N Q–Q R–R
M–M M–U N–N P–P Q–Q A 8'-7" 9'-1 1/2" 9'-9"
A 8'-7" 9'-6" 8'-7" 9'-1 1/2" 9'-1 1/2" B 10'-8" 11'-6" 11'-10"
B 11'-4" 11'-10" 11'-4" 11'-5" 11'-5" C 2'-4 1/2" 2'-5 1/2" 2'-8"
C 2'-4 1/2" 2'-4 1/2" 2'-4 1/2" 2'-5 1/2" 2'-5 1/2" D 1'-11" 2'-1 1/4" 2'-3 1/2"
D 1'-11" 2'-4 1/2" 1'-11" 2'-1 1/4" 2'-1 1/4" E 16'-0" 16'-0" 16'-0"
E 14'-0" 14'-0" 16'-0" 14'-0" 16'-0"
K7 COMPRESSOR,
K4 COMPRESSOR, EVAPORATOR – CONDENSER SHELL CODES EVAPORATOR – CONDENSER SHELL CODES
R–R S–S S–V X–T X–X W–W Z–Y Z–Z
A 9'-9" 9'-9" 10'-3" 10'-10" 11'-3" A 10'-3" 12'-7" 11'-3"
B 11'-11" 11'-11" 12'-4" 12'-4" 12'-4" B 12'-2" 14'-1 5/8" 12'-10"
C 2'-8" 2'-8" 2'-8" 2'-11 1/2" 2'-11 1/2" C 2'-8" 2'-11 1/2" 2'-11 1/2"
D 2'-3 1/2" 2'-3 1/2" 2'-5 1/2" 2'-5 1/2" 2'-8" D 2'-5 1/2" 3'-4" 2'-8"
E 16'-0" 18'-0" 18'-0" 16'-0" 16'-0" E 22'-0" 18'-0" 18'-0"
NOTES:
Figure 15 - DIMENSIONS – K COMPRESSOR UNITS (FT–IN)
JOHNSON CONTROLS 27
FORM 160.75-N1
K COMPRESSOR UNITS (METRIC)
LD07139
K1 COMPRESSOR, EVAPORATOR – CONDENSER SHELL CODES ADDITIONAL OPERATING HEIGHT CLEARANCE

I-K & K–K M–M N–N P–P Q–Q Type of Chiller Mounting M
A 2,299 2,616 2,616 2,781 2,781 Neoprene Pad Isolators 44
B 2,921 3,454 3,454 3,493 3,493 Spring Isolators 1" Deflection 25
C 641 724 724 749 749 Direct Mount 19
D 508 584 584 641 641
E 4,267 4,267 4,877 4,267 4,877 K3 COMPRESSOR,
K2 COMPRESSOR, EVAPORATOR – CONDENSER SHELL CODES N–N Q–Q R–R
M–M M–U N–N P–P Q–Q A 2,616 2,781 2,972
A 2,616 2,896 2,616 2,781 2,781 B 3,251 3,505 3,607
B 3,454 2,921 3,454 3,480 3,480 C 724 749 813
C 724 724 724 749 749 D 584 641 699
D 584 724 584 641 641 E 4,877 4,877 4,877
E 4,267 4,267 4,877 4,267 4,877
K7 COMPRESSOR,
K4 COMPRESSOR, EVAPORATOR – CONDENSER SHELL CODES EVAPORATOR – CONDENSER SHELL CODES
R–R S–S S–V X–T X–X W–W Z–Y Z–Z
A 2,972 2,972 3,124 3,302 3,429 A 3,124 3,835 3,429
B 3,632 3,632 3,759 3,759 3,759 B 3,708 4,308 3,912
C 813 813 813 902 902 C 813 902 902
D 699 699 749 749 813 D 749 1,016 813
E 4,877 5,486 5,486 4,877 4,877 E 6,706 5,486 5,486
NOTES:
4. To determine overall height, add 22 mm ( 7/8 inch) for isolators.
Figure 16 - DIMENSIONS – K COMPRESSOR UNITS (MM)
28 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.75-N1
EVAPORATOR COMPACT WATERBOXES - FT - IN (MM)
F F 2
ONE PASS EVAPORATORS, CODES

DIMENSIONS A C,D E,F G,H I,J,K,L M,N P,Q R,S,W X,Z
1'-2 1/4" 1'-3" 1'-3 1/2" 1'-3 3/4" 1'-5 1/2" 1'-11 5/8" 1'-11 5/8" 2'-0 5/8" 2'-1 3/4"
F
(362) (381) (394) (400) (445) (600) (600) (625) (654)
G
F
TWO PASS EVAPORATORS, CODES

1'-2 1/4" 1'-3" 1'-3 1/2" 1'-3 3/4" 1'-5 1/2" 1'-11 5/8" 1'-11 5/8" 2'-0 5/8" 2'-1 3/4"
F
(362) (381) (394) (400) (445) (600) (600) (625) (654)
0'-6 1/2" 0'-7" 0'-7 1/2" 0'-7 3/4" 0'-9 1/2" 1'-3 5/8" 1'-3 5/8" 1'-4 3/4" 1'-5 3/4"
G
(165) (178) (191) (197) (241) (397) (397) (425) (451)
F F
LD07619
THREE PASS EVAPORATORS, CODES

1'-2 1/4" 1'-3" 1'-3 1/2" 1'-3 3/4" 1'-5 1/2" 1'-11 5/8" 1'-11 5/8" 2'-0 5/8" 2'-1 3/4"
F
(362) (381) (394) (400) (445) (600) (600) (625) (654)
See Notes on page 14.
Figure 17 - DIMENSIONS – EVAPORATOR COMPACT WATERBOXES
JOHNSON CONTROLS 29
FORM 160.75-N1
CONDENSER COMPACT WATERBOXES - FT - IN (MM)

H H
H H
ONE PASS CONDENSERS, CODES

DIMENSIONS A C,D E,F J,K,L M,N P,Q R,S T,V,W X,Z
1'-1 7/8" 1'-1 7/8" 1'-3" 1'-4" 1'-2 7/8" 1'-4 7/8" 1'-7 3/8" 1'-7 1/2" 1'-9 3/4"
H
(352) (352) (381) (406) (378) (429) (492) (495) (552)
DOUBLE H BUNDLE HEAT RECOVERY CONDENSERS, CODES H

B J I O U Y
DIMENSIONS TOWER HEATING TOWER HEATING TOWER HEATING TOWER H HEATING TOWER HEATING
1'-6 1/2" 1'-5" 1'-7 1/2" 1'-4 3/4" 1'-9 1/2" 1'-6" 1'-10 1/4" 1'-8" 2'-4 3/4" 1'-10 1/2"
H
(470) (432) (495) (425) (546) (457) (565) (508) (730) (572)
J
H
J TWO PASS CONDENSERS, CODES

H
1'-1 7/8" 1'-1 7/8" 1'-3" 1'-4" 1'-2 7/8" 1'-4 7/8" 1'-7 3/8" 1'-7 1/2" 1'-9 3/4"
H H
(352) (352) (381) (406) (378) (429) H (492) (495) (552)
0'-5 7/8" 0'-6 1/2" 0'-7" 0'-7 1/2" 0'-7 3/4" 0'-9 1/2" 0'-11 3/4" 0'-11" 1'-1 7/8"
J
(149) (165) (178) (191) (197) (241) (298) (279) (352)
DOUBLE BUNDLE HEAT RECOVERY CONDENSERS, CODES
H H U
B I O Y
DIMENSIONS TOWER HEATING TOWER HEATING TOWER HEATING TOWER HEATING TOWER HEATING
1'-6 1/2" 1'-5" 1'-7 1/2" 1'-4 3/4" 1'-9 1/2" 1'-6" 1'-10 1/4" 1'-8" 2'-4 3/4" 1'-10 1/2"
H
(470) (432) (495) (425) (546) (457) (565) (508) (730) (572)
0'-10 1/2" 0'-9" 0'-11 1/2" 0'-8 3/4" 1'-1 1/2" 0'-10" 1'-2 1/4" 1'-0" 1'-8 3/4" 1'-2 1/2"
J
(267) (229) (292) (222) (343) (254) (362) (305) (527) (368)
H H
LD07619a
THREE PASS CONDENSERS, CODES

1'-1 7/8" 1'-1 7/8" 1'-3" 1'-3 1/2" 1'-3 3/8" 1'-5 1/2" 1'-7 3/8" 1'-7 1/2" 1'-7 3/8"
H
(352) (352) (381) (394) (197) (241) (298) (279) (492)
DOUBLE BUNDLE HEAT RECOVERY CONDENSERS, CODES

B I O U Y
DIMENSIONS TOWER HEATING TOWER HEATING TOWER HEATING TOWER HEATING TOWER HEATING
1'-6 1/2" 1'-5" 1'-7 1/2" 1'-4 3/4" 1'-9 1/2" 1'-6" 1'-10 1/4" 1'-8" 2'-4 3/4" 1'-10 1/2"
H
(470) (432) (495) (425) (546) (457) (565) (508) (730) (572)
Figure 18 - DIMENSIONS – CONDENSER COMPACT WATERBOXES
30 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.75-N1
EVAPORATORS – COMPACT WATERBOXES – A THRU L EVAPORATORS - FT - IN (MM)

FRONT
OF
2
EVAP. UNIT EVAP.
NOZZLE
A H
ARRANGEMENTS
NUMBER OF EVAPORATOR
AA AA
PASSES IN OUT
A H
1
M C C M H A
COMPRESSOR END FLOOR LINE MOTOR END
FRONT
EVAP. OF EVAP.
UNIT
B J NOZZLE
ARRANGEMENTS
C K DD
DD
BB BB
PASSES IN OUT
C B
M C C M 2
FLOOR LINE
K J
COMPRESSOR END MOTOR END
FRONT
EVAP. OF EVAP.
UNIT
F N NOZZLE
ARRANGEMENTS
DD G P DD
BB
BB
PASSES IN OUT
G N
M C C M 3
FLOOR LINE P F
LD07598a
COMPACT WATERBOXES – 150 PSI ROUND

NOZZLE PIPE SIZE IN (MM) EVAPORATOR NOZZLE DIMENSIONS FT-IN (MM)
CONDENSER
NUMBER OF PASSES 1-PASS 2-PASS 3-PASS
SHELL CODE
1 2 3 C AA5 BB5 DD5 BB5 DD5
8" 6" 4" 1'-3 1/2" 1'-10" 1'-2" 2'-6" 1'-2" 2'-6"
A
(203) (152) (101) (394) (559) (356) (762) (356) (762)
10" 8" 6" 1'-5 1/2" 2'-0" 1'-3" 2'-9" 1'-3" 2'-9"
C,D
(254) (203) (152) (445) (610) (381) (838) (381) (838)
14" 10" 8" 1'-7" 2'-2" 1'-4" 3'-0" 1'-4" 3'-0"
E,F
(355) (254) (203) (483) (660) (406) (914) (406) (914)
14" 10" 8" 2'-0" 2'-3 1/2" 1'-3 1/2" 3'-3 1/2" 1'-3 1/2" 3'-3 1/2"
G,H
(355) (254) (203) (610) (699) (394) (1,003) (394) (1,003)
16" 12" 10" 2'-1 1/4" 2'-6" 1'-5" 3'-7" 1'-5" 3'-7"
I,J,K,L
(406) (305) (254) (641) (762) (432) (1092) (432) (432)
NOTES:
1. Standard water nozzles are furnished as welding stub-outs with grooves, allowing the option of welding, flanges, or use of Victaulic
couplings. Factory-installed, class 150 (ANSI B16.5, round slip-on, forged carbon steel with 1/16" raised face), water flanged nozzles are
optional (add 1/2" to nozzle length). Companion flanges, nuts, bolts, and gaskets are not furnished.
2. One-, two- and three-pass nozzle arrangements are available only in pairs shown and for all shell codes. Any pair of evaporator nozzles
may be used in combination with any pair of condenser nozzles.
3. Evaporator and condenser water must enter the waterbox through the bottom connection to achieve rated performance.
4. Connected piping should allow for removal of compact waterboxes for tube access and cleaning.
5. Add dimension "M" as shown on the unit dimensions page for the appropriate isolator type.
6. Standard 150 PSI design pressure boxes shown.
Figure 19 - DIMENSIONS – EVAPORATOR COMPACT WATERBOXES A THRU L EVAPORATORS
JOHNSON CONTROLS 31
FORM 160.75-N1
EVAPORATORS – COMPACT WATERBOXES – M THRU Z EVAPORATORS - FT - IN (MM)

FRONT
OF
UNIT
SHELL 1 PASS
CODES IN OUT
AA HH
M–Z
HH AA
FLOOR
LINE
FRONT
OF
UNIT
SHELL 2 PASS
CODES IN OUT
CC BB
M,N,P,Q
FLOOR
LINE
KK JJ
COMPRESSOR END MOTOR END SHELL 2 PASS
CODES IN OUT
DD CC
R,S,W, EE BB
X and Z LL KK
MM JJ
FLOOR
LINE
FRONT
OF
UNIT
SHELL 3 PASS
CODES IN OUT
GG NN
M–Z
PP FF
FLOOR
LINE
LD07173a
COMPACT WATERBOXES – 150 PSI RECTANGULAR

NOZZLE PIPE SIZE IN (MM) EVAPORATOR NOZZLE DIMENSIONS FT-IN (MM)
EVAPORATOR
SHELL CODE
1 2 3 C AA5 BB5 DD5 EE BB5 DD5
18" 14" 12" 2'-4 1/2" 3'-0" 1'-8 1/2" 4'-3 1/2" 1'-8 1/2" 4'-3 1/2"
M,N -
(457) (356) (304) (724) (914) (521) (1308) (521) (1308)
18" 14" 12" 2'-5 1/2" 3'-1 1/2" 1'-10" 4'-5" 1'-10" 4'-5"
P,Q -
(457) (356) (304) (749) (953) (559) (1346) (559) (1346)
20" 16" 12" 2'-5 1/2" 3'-1 1/2" 1'-11 1/2" 4'-3 1/2" 1'-11 1/2" 4'-3 1/2"
QV, QT -
(508) (406) (305) (749) (953) (597) (1308) (597) (1308)
20" 18" 14" 2'-8" 3'-5 1/4" 2'-4 1/2" 4'-6 1/2" 0'-10 1/2" 2'-1" 4'-10"
R,S,W
(508) (457) (356) (813) (1048) (724) (1384) (267) (635) (1473)
20" 18" 14" 2'-11 1/2" 3'-9 3/4" 2'-8 3/4" 4'-10 3/4" 0'-11" 2'-2 7/8" 5'-4 5/8"
X,Z
(508) (457) (356) (902) (1162) (832) (1492) (279) (683) (1641)
Figure 20 - DIMENSIONS – EVAPORATOR COMPACT WATERBOXES M THRU Z EVAPORATORS
32 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.75-N1
CONDENSER – COMPACT WATERBOXES – STANDARD - FT - IN (MM)
FRONT
OF UNIT 2
P Q NOZZLE
ARRANGEMENTS
CC CC NUMBER CONDENSER
OF PASSES IN OUT
FLOOR
COND. LINE COND. P Q
1
Q P
M D D M
FRONT
OF UNIT
S U
NOZZLE
R T ARRANGEMENTS
DD DD NUMBER CONDENSER
BB BB OF PASSES IN OUT
FLOOR R S
COND. LINE COND. 2
T U
M D D M
FRONT
OF UNIT
W Y
NOZZLE
V X ARRANGEMENTS
BB BB
OF PASSES IN OUT
FLOOR V Y
COND. LINE COND. 3
X W
M D D M
LD07131a

NOZZLE PIPE SIZE IN (MM) CONDENSER NOZZLE DIMENSIONS FT-IN (MM)
CONDENSER
SHELL CODE
1 2 3 D CC5 BB5 DD5 BB5 DD5
10" 6" 6" 1'-3" 2'-4" 1'-9 1/2" 2'-10 1/2" 1'-9 1/2" 2'-10 1/2"
A
(254) (152) (152) (381) (711) (546) (876) (546) (876)
12" 8" 6" 1'-3 1/2" 2'-6" 1'-10 3/8" 3'-1 5/8" 1'-10 3/8" 3'-1 5/8"
C,D
(305) (203) (152) (394) (762) (568) (956) (568) (956)
14" 10" 8" 1'-5 1/2" 2'-8" 1'-11 3/4" 3'-4 1/4" 1'-11 3/4" 3'-4 1/4"
E,F
(356) (254) (203) (445) (813) (603) (1022) (603) (1022)
16" 10" 10" 1'-8" 3'-0" 2'-3" 3'-9" 2'-3" 3'-9"
J,K,L
(406) (254) (254) (508) (914) (686) (1,143) (686) (1,143)
20" 14" 10" 1'-11" 3'-6" 2'-6 3/8" 4'-5 5/8" 2'-6 3/8" 4'-5 5/8"
M,N
(508) (356) (254) (584) (1067) (772) (1,362) (772) (1,362)
20" 16" 14" 2'-1 1/4" 3'-8" 2'-7" 4'-9" 2'-7" 4'-9"
P,Q
(508) (406) (356) (641) (1118) (787) (1,448) (787) (1,448)
Figure 21 - DIMENSIONS – CONDENSER COMPACT WATERBOXES - STANDARD (MM)
JOHNSON CONTROLS 33
FORM 160.75-N1
CONDENSER – COMPACT WATERBOXES – STANDARD - FT - IN (MM)
FRONT
OF UNIT
PP QQ NOZZLE
ARRANGEMENTS
CC CC NUMBER CONDENSER
OF PASSES IN OUT
FLOOR
COND. LINE COND. PP QG
1
QQ PP
M D D M
FRONT
OF UNIT
SS UU
NOZZLE
RR TT ARRANGEMENTS
BB BB OF PASSES IN OUT
FLOOR RR SS
COND. LINE COND. 2
TT UU
M D D M
FRONT
OF UNIT
WW YY
NOZZLE
VV XX ARRANGEMENTS
BB BB
OF PASSES IN OUT
FLOOR VV YY
COND. LINE COND. 3
XX WW
M D D M
LD07131b

CONDENSER
SHELL CODE
1 2 3 D CC5 BB5 DD5 BB5 DD5
20" 18" 14" 2'-3 1/2" 3'-10 1/2" 2'-9 1/2" 4'-11 1/2" 2'-9 1/2" 4'-11 1/2"
R,S
(508) (457) (356) (699) (1181) (851) (1,511) (851) (1,511)
24" 18" 16" 2'-5 1/2" 3'-11 1/2" 2'-9" 5'-2" 2'-9" 5'-2"
T,V,W
(610) (457) (406) (749) (1207) (838) (1,575) (838) (1,575)
24" 20" 16" 2'-8" 4'-1 1/4" 2'-9 1/4" 5'-5 1/4" 2'-9 1/4" 5'-5 1/4"
X,Z
(610) (508) (406) (813) (1251) (845) (1,657) (845) (1,657)
Figure 22 - DIMENSIONS – CONDENSER COMPACT WATERBOXES - STANDARD (MM)
34 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.75-N1
CONDENSER – HEAT RECOVERY COMPACT WATERBOXES – STANDARD - FT - IN (MM)
Front
D of Unit D
1 PASS 2
Heat Heat
NOZZLE
Heat
Recovery
Recovery
EE FF Heat
Recovery
Recovery
ARRANGEMENTS
L IN OUT
Cooling Cooling
Cooling
Tower P Q Cooling
Tower HEAT EE FF
Tower Tower
K
RECOVERY FF EE
C C
L L COOLING P Q
M TOWER Q P
Compressor End Motor End
2 PASS
I Front I NOZZLE
I of Unit I
ARRANGEMENTS
IN OUT
Heat Heat
Heat
Recovery AA BB CC DD Heat
Recovery AA BB
Recovery Recovery
HEAT BB AA
Cooling
L
Cooling RECOVERY CC DD
Cooling
Tower
Tower
R S T U Cooling
Tower
Tower
DD CC
C K
C
R S
L L COOLING S R
M D D TOWER T U
Compressor End Motor End U T
Front
D of Unit D 2 PASS
NOZZLE
Heat Heat ARRANGEMENTS
Heat
Recovery GG HH Heat
Recovery
Recovery Recovery IN OUT
L
Cooling
HEAT GG HH
Cooling
Cooling
Tower V Y Cooling
Tower RECOVERY HH GG
Tower Tower
C K COOLING V Y
L C
L TOWER Y V
M
Compressor End Motor End
LD07131c
HEAT RECOVERY COMPACT WATERBOXES – 150 PSI RECTANGULAR

CONDENSER
NUMBER OF PASSES 1, 2 OR 3 PASS 2 PASS
SHELL CODE
1 2 3 D K L I
10" 8" 6" 1'-8 7/8" 1'-9 1/4" 3'-6 1/2" 0'-9 1/16"
B
(254) (203) (152) (530) (540) (1,018) (230)
14" 10" 8" 1'-11 3/8" 1'-10 1/4" 3'-8 1/8" 0'-10 1/8"
I
(355) (254) (203) (594) (565) (1,121) (257)
16" 12" 10" 2'-3 3/8" 2'-0 3/8" 4'-1 1/8" 0'-11 13/16"
O
(406) (304) (254) (695) (619) (1,248) (300)
18" 14" 10" 2'-4 1/2" 2'-11 3/16" 5'-2 13/16" 1'-0 3/8"
U
(457) (355) (254) (724) (894) (1,595) (314)
24" 20" 16" 3'-4" 3'-3 15/16" 6'-3 7/8" 1'-5 7/8"
Y
(609) (508) (406) (1,016) (1,014) (1,927) (454)
Figure 23 - DIMENSIONS – CONDENSER HEAT RECOVERY COMPACT WATERBOXES - STANDARD (MM)
JOHNSON CONTROLS 35
FORM 160.75-N1
EVAPORATOR – NOZZLE ARRANGEMENTS – STANDARD - FT - IN (MM)
EVAPORATOR
1-PASS
IN OUT
1 6
6 1
EVAPORATOR
2-PASS
IN OUT
2 3
7 8
F
EVAPORATOR
3-PASS
IN OUT
5 10 LD01342c
9 4
EVAPORATOR NOZZLE DIMENSIONS FT-IN (MM)

EVAPORATOR
1-PASS 2-PASS 3-PASS
SHELL CODE
F I F G I F I
1'-7" 0'-8 3/4" 1'-5" 0'-6 1/2" 0'-7 3/4" 1'-5" 0'-7 3/4"
A
(483) (222) (432) (165) (197) (432) (197)
1'-10 3/4' 0'-10 5/8" 1'-8 5/8" 0'-7" 0'-9 1/2" 1'-8 5/8" 0'-9 1/2"
C,D
(578) (270) (524) (178) (241) (524) (241)
2'-1 3/4" 1'-0 1/8" 1'-10" 0'-7 1/2" 0'-10 1/4" 1'-10" 0'-10 1/4"
E,F
(654) (308) (559) (191) (260) (559) (260)
2'-5 5/8" 1'-1 7/8" 2'-5 5/8" 1'-9 7/8" 1'-1 7/8" 2'-5 5/8" 1'-1 7/8"
G,H
(752) (352) (752) (556) (352) (752) (352)
2'-9 5/16" 1'-3 1/2" 2'-9 5/16" 2'-0 5/8" 1'-3 1/2" 2'-9 5/16" 1'-3 1/2"
I,J,K,L
(846) (394) (846) (625) (394) (846) (394)
2'-11" 1'-4" 2'-6" 1'-0 1/4" 1'-1 1/2" 2'-4" 1'-0 1/4"
M,N
(889) (406) (762) (311) (343) (711) (311)
3'-5" 1'-7" 3'-0" 0'-11" 1'-4 1/2" 2'-10" 1'-3 1/4"
P,Q
(1041) (483) (914) (279) (419) (864) (387)
2'-8" 1'-2 1/2" 2'-4" 1'-1 1/2" 1'-0 1/2" 2'-4" 1'-0 1/2"
QT, QV
(813) (368) (711) (343) (318) (711) (318)
2'-8" 1'-2 5/8" 2'-6" 1'-2 1/2" 1'-1 5/8" 2'-6" 1'-1 5/8"
R,S,W
(813) (371) (762) (368) (346) (762) (346)
3'-1" 1'-4 1/4" 2'-8 1/2" 1'-2" 1'-1 5/8" 2'-6 1/2" 1'-1"
X,Z
(940) (413) (826) (356) (346) (775) (330)
NOTES:
2. Standard water nozzles are Schedule 40 pipe size, furnished as welding stub-outs with grooves, allowing the option of welding, flanges,
or use of Victaulic couplings. Factory-installed, class 150 (ANSI B16.5, round slip-on, forged carbon steel with 1/16" raised face), water
flanged nozzles are optional (add 1/2" to nozzle length). Companion flanges, nuts, bolts, and gaskets are not furnished.
3. One-, two-, and three-pass nozzle arrangements are available only in pairs shown and for all shell codes. Any pair of evaporator nozzles
may be used in combination with any pair of condenser nozzles. Compact waterboxes on one heat exchanger may be used with Marine
Waterboxes on the other heat exchanger.
4. Condenser water must enter the waterbox through the bottom connection for proper operation of the sub-cooler to achieve rated
performance.
5. Add dimension "M" as shown on pages per unit dimensions page for the appropriate isolator type.
Figure 24 - DIMENSIONS – EVAPORATOR NOZZLE ARRANGEMENTS - STANDARD (MM)
36 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.75-N1
CONDENSER – NOZZLE ARRANGEMENTS – STANDARD - FT - IN (MM)

CONDENSER
1-PASS
IN OUT 2
11 16
16 11
CONDENSER
2-PASS
IN OUT
12 13
17 18
CONDENSER
3-PASS
IN OUT
LD07177
15 20
19 14
CONDENSER NOZZLE DIMENSIONS FT-IN (MM)

CONDENSER
SHELL CODE
H K H J K H K
1'-9" 0'-9 7/8" 1'-4 3/4" 0'-6" 0'-7 3/4" 1'-4 3/4" 0'-7 3/4"
A
(533) (251) (425) (152) (197) (425) (197)
1'-10 1/2" 0'-10 1/2" 1'-8" 0'-10 1/2" 0'-9 1/4" 1'-8" 0'-9 1/4"
B6
(572) (267) (508) (267) (235) (508) (235)
2'-0" 0'-11 1/8" 1'-7 1/2" 0'-6 3/8" 0'-9" 1'-7 1/2" 0'-9"
C,D
(610) (283) (495) (162) (229) (495) (229)
2'-0 1/2" 0'-11 1/2" 1'-10 1/4" 0'-7" 0'-9 7/8" 1'-10 1/4" 0'-9 7/8"
E,F
(622) (292) (565) (178) (251) (565) (251)
2'-3" 1'-0 3/4" 1'-10 1/2" 0'-11 1/2" 0'-10 1/2" 1'-10 1/2" 0'-10 1/2"
I6
(686) (324) (572) (292) (267) (572) (267)
2'-8 3/8" 1'-3 3/8" 2'-8 3/8" 0'-7 1/2" 1'-3 3/8" 2'-8 3/8" 1'-3 3/8"
J,K,L
(822) (391) (822) (191) (391) (822) (391)
2'-11" 1'-4" 2'-11" 1'-0" 1'-4" 2'-11" 1'-4"
M,N
(889) (406) (889) (305) (406) (889) (406)
2'-6 1/4" 1'-2 1/4" 2'-1 3/4" 1'-1 1/2" 1'-0" 2'-1 3/4" 1'-0"
O6
(768) (362) (654) (343) (305) (654) (305)
2'-8" 1'-2 1/2" 2'-4" 0'-9 1/2" 1'-0 1/2" 2'-4" 1'-0 1/2"
P,Q
(813) (368) (711) (241) (318) (711) (318)
2'-8" 1'-2 1/2" 2'-6" 1'-0" 1'-1 1/2" 2'-6" 1'-1 1/2"
R,S
(813) (368) (762) (305) (343) (762) (343)
3'-0" 1'-4 1/2" 2'-6" 0'-11" 1'-1 1/2" 2'-6" 1'-1 1/2"
T,V,W
(914) (419) (762) (279) (343) (762) (343)
2'-8" 1'-3" 2'-4" 1'-2 1/4" 1'-1" 2'-4" 1'-1"
U6
(813) (381) (711) (362) (330) (711) (330)
3'-5 1/2" 1'-6 1/2" 3'-0 1/2" 1'-2" 1'-4 1/4" 2'-9 1/2" 1'-2"
X,Z
(1,054) (470) (927) (356) (413) (851) (356)
3'-4 3/4" 1'-7 1/4" 3'-0 1/4" 1'-8 3/4" 1'-5" 3'-0 1/4" 1'-5"
Y6
(1,035) (489 (921) (527) (432) (921) (432)
NOTES:
2. Standard water nozzles are Schedule 40 pipe size, furnished as welding stub-outs with grooves, allowing the option of welding, flanges,
or use of Victaulic couplings. Factory-installed, class 150 (ANSI B16.5, round slip-on, forged carbon steel with 1/16" raised face), water
flanged nozzles are optional (add 1/2" to nozzle length). Companion flanges, nuts, bolts, and gaskets are not furnished.
3. One-, two-, and three-pass nozzle arrangements are available only in pairs shown and for all shell codes. Any pair of evaporator nozzles
may be used in combination with any pair of condenser nozzles. Compact waterboxes on one heat exchanger may be used with Marine
Waterboxes on the other heat exchanger.
4. Condenser water must enter the waterbox through the bottom connection for proper operation of the sub-cooler to achieve rated performance.
5. Add dimension "M" as shown on pages per unit dimensions page for the appropriate isolator type.
6. Heat recovery units offer marine waterbox option for tower (lower) bundle only.
Figure 25 - DIMENSIONS – CONDENSER NOZZLE ARRANGEMENTS - STANDARD (MM)
JOHNSON CONTROLS 37
FORM 160.75-N1
EVAPORATOR MARINE WATERBOX NOZZLE ARRANGEMENTS - FT. - IN. (MM)
LD07175a
MARINE WATERBOXES – 150 PSI ROUND

EVAP NOZZLE PIPE SIZE IN (MM)
SHELL NUMBER OF PASSES
CODE 1 2 3 C P5 P5 Q5 R P5 Q5 R
8" 6" 4" 1'-3 1/2" 3'-7" 3'-7" 0-11" 1'-3 1/4" 3'-7" 0'-11" 1'-3 1/4"
A
(203) (152) (101) (394) (1092) (1092) (279) (387) (1092) (279) (387)
10" 8" 6" 1'-5 1/2" 3'-11" 3'-11" 0'-10" 1'-6 1/2" 3'-11" 0'-10" 1'-6 1/2"
C,D
(254) (203) (152) (445) (1194) (1194) (254) (470) (1194) (254) (470)
14" 10" 8" 1'-7 1/2" 4'-3" 4'-3" 0'-11" 1'-9 1/2" 4'-3" 0'-11" 1'-9 1/2"
E,F
(356) (254) (203) (495) (1295) (1295) (279) (546) (1295) (279) (546)
14" 10" 8" 2'-0" 4'-5 1/2" 4'-5 1/2" 1'-0 1/2" 1'-11 1/2" 4'-5 1/2" 0'-11" 1'-9 7/8"
G,H
(356) (254) (203) (610) (1359) (1359) (318) (597) (1359) (279) (556)
16" 12" 10" 2'-1 1/4" 5'-0 3/8" 5'-0 3/8" 0'-10 1/2" 2'-2 1/2" 5'-0 3/8" 0'-10 1/2" 2'-2 1/2"
I,J,K,L
(406) (305) (254) (641) (1,534) (1,534) (267) (673) (1,534) (267) (673)
18" 14" 12" 2'-4 1/2" 5'-8 1/2" 5'-8 1/2" 1'-2" 2'-2 1/2" 5'-8 1/2" 1'-2" 2'-4 3/4"
M,N
(457) (356) (305) (724) (1,740) (1,740) (356) (673) (1,740) (356) (730)
18" 14" 12" 2'-5 1/2" 6'-0 1/8" 6'-0 1/8" 1'-3" 2'-6 1/2" 6'-0 1/8" 1'-3" 2'-6 1/2"
P,Q
(457) (356) (305) (749) (1,832) (1,832) (381) (775) (1,832) (381) (775)
20" 16" 12" 2'-5 1/2" 6'-0 1/8" 6'-0 1/8" 1'-4 1/2" 2'-6 1/2" 6'-0 1/8" 1'-4 1/2" 2'-6 1/2"
QT, QV
(508) (406) (305) (749) (1,832) (1,832) (419) (775) (1,832) (419) (775)
20" 18" 14" 2'-8" 6'-5 7/8" 6'-5 7/8" 1'-3 3/4" 3'-0 1/8" 6'-5 7/8" 1'-3 3/4" 3'-0 1/8"
R,S
(508) (457) (356) (813) (1,978) (1,978) (400) (918) (1,978) (400) (918)
20" 18" 14" 2'-8" 6'-5 7/8" 6'-5 7/8" 1'-3 3/4" 3'-0 1/8" 6'-5 7/8" 1'-3 3/4" 3'-0 1/8"
W
(508) (457) (356) (813) (1,978) (1,978) (400) (918) (1,978) (400) (918)
20" 18" 14" 2'-11 1/2" 6'-11 1/2" 6'-11 1/2" 2'-1 3/4" 3'-2 1/8" 6'-11 1/2" 1'-8 1/4" 3'-2 1/8"
X,Z
(508) (457) (356) (902) (2121) (2121) (654) (968) (2121) (514) (968)
Figure 26 - DIMENSIONS – EVAPORATOR MARINE WATERBOXES
38 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.75-N1
CONDENSER MARINE WATERBOX NOZZLE ARRANGEMENTS - FT. - IN. (MM)

FRONT OF UNIT FRONT OF UNIT
D D D D
IN 11 OUT 16 OUT 11 IN 16 2
S S
CL CL CL
FLOOR FLOOR
M LINE M M LINE M
COMPRESSOR END MOTOR END COMPRESSOR END MOTOR END

D D
18 OUT 13 OUT
IN
IN
S 17 12 S
T T CL
CL
FLOOR U FLOOR
M U M M M
LINE LINE
COMPRESSOR END MOTOR END COMPRESSOR END MOTOR END

D D D D
20 OUT
OUT 14
IN IN
15 S S 19
T T
CL CL CL CL
FLOOR FLOOR U
M U M M LINE M
LINE
COMPRESSOR END MOTOR END COMPRESSOR END MOTOR END LD07178a
MARINE WATER BOXES – 150 PSI ROUND

NOZZLE PIPE SIZE
CONDENSER IN (MM) NUMBER OF 1-PASS 2-PASS 3-PASS
SHELL CODE PASSES
1 2 3 D S5 S5 T5 U S5 T5 U
10" 6" 6" 1'-3" 3'-11" 3'-11" 1'-8" 1'-3 3/8" 3'-11" 1'-8" 1'-3 3/8"
A
(254) (152) (152) (381) (1,194) (1,194) (508) (391) (1,194) (508) (391)
12" 8" 6" 1'-3 1/2" 4'-3" 4'-3" 1'-8" 1'-6 1/2" 4'-3" 1'-8" 1'-6 1/2"
C,D
(305) (203) (152) (394) (1,295) (1,295) (508) (470) (1295) (508) (470)
14" 10" 8" 1'-5 1/2" 4'-7" 4'-7" 1'-10" 1'-9" 4'-7" 1'-10" 1'-9"
E,F
(356) (254) (203) (445) (1,397) (1,397) (559) (533) (1,397) (559) (533)
16" 10" 10" 1'-8" 5'-1" 5'-1" 1'-9" 1'-9 1/2" 5'-1" 1'-9" 1'-9 1/2"
J,K,L
(406) (254) (254) (508) (1,549) (1,549) (533) (546) (1,549) (533) (546)
20" 14" 10" 1'-11" 5'-9 7/8" 5'-9 7/8" 2'-4" 2'-1 1/2" 5'-9 7/8" 2'-4" 2'-1 1/2"
M,N
(508) (356) (254) (584) (1,775) (1,775) (711) (648) (1,775) (711) (648)
20" 16" 14" 2'-1 1/4" 6'-2 3/8" 6'-2 3/8" 2'-4 1/2" 2'-5 1/2" 6'-2 3/8" 2'-4 1/2" 2'-5 1/2"
P,Q
(508) (406) (356) (641) (1,889) (1,889_ (724) (749) (1,889) (724) (749)
20" 18" 14" 2'-3 1/2" 6'-7" 6'-7" 2'-6 1/2" 2'-8 1/2" 6'-7" 2'-6 1/2" 2'-8 1/2"
R,S
(508) (457) (356) (699) (2007) (2007) (775) (825) (2007) (775) (826)
24" 18" 16" 2'-5 1/2" 6'-10 1/4" 6'-10 1/4" 2'-6" 2'-10" 6'-10 1/4" 2'-6" 2'-10"
T,V,W
(610) (457) (406) (749) (2,089) (2,089) (762) (864) (2,089) (762) (864)
24" 20" 16" 2'-8" 7'-2" 7'-2" 2'-7 3/4" 2'-11 1/2" 7'-2" 2'-7 3/4" 2'-11 1/2"
X,Z
(610) (508) (406) (813) ( 2184) ( 2184) ( 806) (902) (2184 ) (806) (902)
Figure 27 - DIMENSIONS – CONDENSER MARINE WATERBOXES
JOHNSON CONTROLS 39
FORM 160.75-N1
CONDENSERS MARINE WATERBOXES HEAT RECOVERY UNITS - MAIN (TOWER) CIRCUIT ONLY
Front
D of U nit D
CONDENSER COOLING WATER

NOZZLE
OPTIONS IN OUT
Front
11 of U nit 16 11 16
D D 1 PASS
S 16 11
CL CL S
M U U M
11 16
V Front Front V
S S
D CL of U nit CL D D of U nit D
M U U M
13 V Front Front V 18
D of U nit D D of U nit D
12 17
S S
T CL CL CL CL T
T T
M U M M U M
13 C om pressor End M otor End C om pressor End M otor End 18
12 17
S CONDENSER 3-PASS
COOLING WATER S
CL CL CL
T
T NOZZLECL T
Front IN OUT Front T
OPTIONS
of U nit of U nit
M UD V M M V DU M
12 13
C om pressor End 2 PASS
M otor End C om pressor End M otor End
17 18
3-PASS
Front 20 14 Front
of U nit of U nit
D V V D
15 19
S S S
T CL CL CL CL T
T T
M U D M M D U M
C om pressor End M otor End 20 C om pressor End
14 M otor End
15 19
S S S
T CL CL CL CL T
T T
M U D M M D U M
C om pressor End M otor End C om pressor End M otor End
CONDENSER COOLING WATER

NOZZLE
OPTIONS IN OUT
15 20
3 PASS
19 14
40 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.75-N1
CONDENSERS MARINE WATERBOXES HEAT RECOVERY UNITS - MAIN (TOWER) CIRCUIT ONLY
MARINE WATER BOXES - 150 PSI (RECTANGULAR)

2
NOZZLE PIPE SIZE IN (MM)
CONDENSER 1 PASS
NUMBER OF PASSES
SHELL CODE
1 2 3 D S U
10" 8" 6" 1'-8 7/8" 1'-9 1/4" 2'-6 3/4"
B
(254) (203) (152) (530) (539) (780)
14" 10" 8" 1'-11 3/8" 1'-10 1/4" 2'-9 3/8"
I
(355) (254) (203) (593) (559) (838)
16" 12" 10" 2'-3 3/8" 2'-0 3/8" 3'-2 3/8"
O
(406) (305) (254) (695) (610) (975)
18" 14" 10" 2'-4 1/2" 2'-11 3/16" 3'-5 9/16"
U
(457) (355) (254) (723) (893) (1056)
24" 20" 16" 3'-4" 3'-3 15/16" 4'-7 9/16"
Y
(610) (508) (406) (1016) (1014) (1411)
2 PASS
1 2 3 D S T U V
10" 8" 6" 1'-8 7/8" 2'-3 7/16" 1'-1 15/16" 2'-4 3/4" 2'-7 1/8"
B
(254) (203) (152) (530) (697) (338) (730) (790)
14" 10" 8" 1'-11 3/8" 2'-4 1/2" 1'-1" 2'-5 1/8" 2'-10 5/8"
I
(355) (254) (203) (593) (723) (330) (740) (879)
16" 12" 10" 2'-3 3/8" 2'-7 1/8" 1'-1 3/8" 2'-10 1/4" 3'-4 1/2"
O
(406) (305) (254) (695) (790) (339) (870) (1029)
18" 14" 10" 2'-4 1/2" 3'-6 9/16" 1'-11 3/16" 3'-1 7/8" 3'-7 1/2"
U
(457) (355) (254) (723) (1081) (589) (962) (1105)
24" 20" 16" 3'-4" 4'-2 5/16" 1'-10 5/16" 4'-4 3/4" 4'-11 11/16"
Y
(610) (508) (406) (1016) (1278) (582) (1340) (1516)
3 PASS
1 2 3 D S T U V
10" 8" 6" 1'-8 7/8" 2'-4 1/2" 1'-5 1/2" 2'-6 3/4" 2'-6 3/4"
B
(254) (203) (152) (530) (723) (444) (780) (780)
14" 10" 8" 1'-11 3/8" 2'-5 1/2" 1'-6 3/8" 2'-9 1/8" 2'-9 1/8"
I
(355) (254) (203) (593) (749) (466) (841) (841)
16" 12" 10" 2'-3 3/8" 2'-8 3/8" 1'-7 5/8" 3'-1 7/8" 3'-1 7/8"
O
(406) (305) (254) (695) (822) (498) (962) (962)
18" 14" 10" 2'-4 1/2" 3'-8 3/16" 2'-5 15/16" 3'-0 11/16" 3'-3"
U
(457) (355) (254) (723) (1122) (760) (932) (991)
24" 20" 16" 3'-4" 4'-4 5/16" 2'-7 7/16" 4'-2 1/16" 4'-6 13/16"
Y
(610) (508) (406) (1016) (1328) (798) (1271) (1392)
NOTE: Add dimension "M" as shown on pages 27 or 28.
JOHNSON CONTROLS 41
FORM 160.75-N1
Table 2 - APPROXIMATE UNIT WEIGHT INCLUDING MOTOR FOR FLOODED EVAPORATOR UNITS -
LBS (KGS)
SHIPPING ESTIMATE
OPERATING WEIGHT
SHELLS COMPRESSOR WEIGHT REFRIGERANT
LBS (KGS)
LBS (KGS) CHARGE LBS (KGS)
A-A Q3 13,100 (5,942) 15,000 (6,804) 810 (367)
C-B Q4 18,023 (8,175) 22,323 (10,126) 1,525 (692)
C-C Q3, Q4 14,920 (6,768) 17,940 (8,138) 1,240 (562)
C-C Q5 15,330 (6,954) 18,350 (8,324) 1,240 (562)
D-D Q3, Q4 17,215 (7,809) 21,100 (9,571) 1,680 (762)
D-D Q5 17,625 (7,995) 21,510 (9,757) 1,680 (762)
E-E Q3, Q4 17,950 (8,142) 22,160 (10,052) 1,710 (776)
E-E Q5,Q6,Q7,P7 18,360 (8,328) 22,570 (10,238) 1,710 (776)
E-I Q7 23,567 (10,690) 29,384 (13,328) 1,805 (819)
F-F Q5,Q6,Q7,P7 18,720 (8,491) 23,880 (10,832) 2,175 (987)
G-E P8 20,300 (9,208) 24,200 (10,977) 1,990 (903)
H-F P8,P9 23,100 (10,478) 28,000 (12,701) 2,610 (1,184)
J-J P8,P9 24,000 (10,886) 29,100 (13,200) 2,550 (1,157)
L-L P8,P9 27,400 (12,429) 33,900 (15,377) 3,165 (1,436)
K-K H9 28,530 (12,941) 36,000 (16,329) 2,925 (1,327)
K-K K1 31,100 (14,107) 36,200 (16,420) 3,248 (1,473)
K-O H9 34,483 (15,641) 44,776 (20,310) 3,260 (1,479)
M-M H9 34,200(15,513) 43,600 (19,777) 3,665 (1,662)
M-M K1,K2 38,300 (17,373) 47,100 (21,364) 3,665 (1,662)
M-U K2 45,178 (20,493) 58,017 (26,316) 3,540 (1,606)
N-N K1,K2 28,530 (18,549) 50,800 (23,043) 4,225 (1,916)
N-N K3 48,000 (21,773) 54,100 (24,540) 4,225 (1,916)
P-P K1,K2 41,500 (18,824) 51,900 (23,542) 3,855 (1,749)
Q-Q K1,K2 45,300 (20,548) 56,800 (25,764) 4,255 (1,930)
Q-Q K3 46,000 (20,865) 60,200 (27,307) 4,255 (1,930)
R-R K3 52,800 (23,950) 70,300 (31,888) 4,660 (2,114)
R-R K4 53,000 (24,041) 70,600 (32,034) 4,785 (2,170)
S-S K4 59,000 (26,672) 76,300 (34,609) 4,940 (2,241)
S-V K4 60,100 (27,261) 81,300 (36,877) 5,500 (2,495)
X-T K4 59,200 (26,853) 80,000 (36,288) 5,125 (2,325)
X-X K4 66,000 (29,937) 87,000 (39,463) 5,625 (2,551)
W-W K7 79,500 (36,061) 104,000 (47,174) 6,900 (3,130)
Z-Y K7 95,300 (43,196) 123,015 (55,799) 6,555 (2,973)
Z-Z K7 80,500 (36,515) 105,000 (47,628) 6,275 (2,846)
NOTE: Refrigerant charge quantity and weights will vary based on tube count, configuration, and chiller performance. Use for reference only.
Refer to YORKworks Performance Page or chiller nameplate for actual charge requirement.
42 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.75-N1
Table 3 - APPROXIMATE UNIT WEIGHT INCLUDING MOTOR FOR HYBRID FALLING FILM EVAPORATOR
UNITS - LBS (KGS)
SHIPPING WEIGHT OPERATING WEIGHT EST. REFRIGERANT
SHELLS COMPRESSOR
LBS. (KGS) LBS. (KGS) CHARGE LBS. (KGS)
2
A-A Q3 12,850 (5584) 14,419 (6266) 695 (302)
C-C Q3, Q4 14,570 (6331) 16,848 (7321) 875 (380)
C-C Q5 15,000 (6518) 17,278 (7508) 875 (380)
D-D Q4 17,000 (7387) 20,051 (8713) 1,180 (513)
D-D Q5 17,410 (7565) 20,461 (8891) 1,180 (513)
E-E Q5, Q6, Q7, P7 18,700 (8126) 21,700 (9429) 1,120 (487)
F-F Q5, Q6, Q7, P7 19,220 (8352) 23,142 (10056) 1,415 (615)
G-E P8, P9 20,640 (8969) 24,036 (10445) 1,320 (574)
H-F P8, P9 23,540 (10229) 28,083 (12203) 1,775 (771)
I-K H9 28,849 (12536) 34,078 (14808) 1,820 (791)
K-K H9 28,850 (12536) 34,079 (14809) 1,820 (791)
I-K K1 31,350 (13623) 35,145 (15272) 1,820 (791)
M-M K1, K2 34,520 (15000) 46,055 (20013) 2,300 (999)
N-N K1, K2 41,273 (17935) 49,605 (21555) 2,650 (1152)
N-N K3 48,380 (21023) 52,905 (22989) 2,650 (1152)
P-P K1, K2 41,950 (18229) 51,595 (22420) 3,100 (1347)
Q-Q K1, K2 45,800 (19902) 56,545 (24571) 3,500 (1521)
Q-Q K3 46,500 (20206) 59,945 (26048) 3,500 (1521)
NOTE: Refrigerant charge quantity and weights will vary based on tube count, configuration, and chiller performance. Use for reference only.
Refer to YORKworks Performance Page or chiller nameplate for actual charge requirement.
Table 4 - EVAPORATOR MARINE WATERBOX WEIGHTS - LBS (KGS)

(TO BE ADDED TO STANDARD UNIT WEIGHTS SHOWN IN TABLES 2 AND 3)
SHIPPING WEIGHT OPERATING WEIGHT
EVAPORATOR
INCREASE - LBS (KGS) INCREASE - LBS (KGS)
CODE
1-PASS 2-PASS 3-PASS 1-PASS 2-PASS 3-PASS
924 744 978 1,468 1,288 1,522
A
(419) (337) (444) (666) (584) (690)
1,352 1,114 1,480 2,224 1,986 2,352
C,D
(613) (505) (671) (1,009) (901) (1,067)
1,878 1,260 2,080 3,378 2,760 3,580
E,F
(852) (572) (943) (1,532) (1,252) (1,624)
1,213 1,296 1,293 2,655 2,738 2,735
G,H
550 (588) (587) (1,204) (1,242) (1,241)
1,751 1,843 1,856 3,864 3,956 3,969
I,J,K,L
(794) (836) (842) (1,753) (1,794) (1,800)
4,290 2,036 4,140 7,535 3,264 6,300
M,N
(1,946) (924) (1,878) (3,418) (1,481) (2,858)
5,982 3,281 5,724 10,854 5,277 9,442
P,Q
(2,713) (1,488) (2,596) (4,923) (2,394) (4,283)
4,804 2,700 4,912 8,522 4,516 8,187
R,S,W
(2,179) (1,225) (2,228) (3,866) (2,048) (3,714)
7,088 3,660 7,244 11,552 5,507 11,243
X,Z
(3,215) (1,660) (3,286) (5,240) (2,498) (5,100)
JOHNSON CONTROLS 43
FORM 160.75-N1
Table 5 - CONDENSER MARINE WATERBOX WEIGHTS - LBS (KGS)

(TO BE ADDED TO STANDARD UNIT WEIGHTS SHOWN IN TABLES 2 AND 3)
SHIPPING WEIGHT OPERATING WEIGHT
CONDENSER
INCREASE - LBS (KGS) INCREASE - LBS (KGS)
CODE
1-PASS 2-PASS 3-PASS 1-PASS 2-PASS 3-PASS
762 566 810 1,274 1,078 1,322
A
(346) (257) (367) (578) (489) (600)
1,569 874 1,677 2,113 1,094 2,071
B
(712) (396) (761) (958) (496) (939)
946 778 1,046 1,692 1,524 1,792
C,D
(429) (353) (474) (767) (691) (813)
726 811 791 1,337 1,722 1,702
E,F
(329) (368) (359) (606) (781) (772)
2,066 1,070 2,032 3,017 1,416 2,738
I
(937) (485) (922) (1,396) (642) (1,242)
1,029 1,167 1,151 2,309 2,448 2,431
J,K,L
(467) (529) (522) (1,047) (1,110) (1,103)
2,466 1,330 2,324 4,863 2,448 4,582
M,N
(1,119) (603) (1,054) (2,206) (1,110) (2,078)
2,985 1,443 2,987 4,435 2,172 3,979
O
(1,354) (655) (1,355) (2,012) (985) (1,805)
3,700 1,858 3,752 6,561 3,132 5,991
P,Q
(1,678) (843) (1,702) (2,976) (1,421) (2,717)
3,806 1,946 3,960 6,657 3,195 6,352
R,S
(1,726) (883) (1,796) (3,020) (1,449) (2,881)
5,196 2,565 5,204 9,161 4,012 8,219
V,T,W
(2,357) (1,163) (2,361) (4,155) (1,820) (3,728)
3,641 1,893 3,609 5,350 2,556 4,770
U
(1,652) (859) (1,637) (2,427) (1,159) (2,164)
5,840 2,953 5,380 9,900 4,649 8,100
X,Z
(2,649) (1,339) (2,440) (4,491) (2,109) (3,674)
9,094 4,762 9,058 13,326 6,524 12,409
Y
(4,125) (2,160) (4,109) (6,045) (2,959) (5,465)
44 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.75-N1


Length

Pressure Drop
TEMPERATURE
Example: (45.0°F - 32°) x 0.5556 = 27.2°C
JOHNSON CONTROLS 45
P.O. Box 1592, York, Pennsylvania USA 17405-1592 800-861-1001 Subject to change without notice. Printed in USA
Copyright © by Johnson Controls 2014 www.johnsoncontrols.com ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Form 160.75-N1 (414)
Issue Date: April 30, 2014
Supersedes: 160.75-N1 (311)

TDI O&M - Chiller 2 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

TDI O&M - Chiller 2 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

TDI O&M - Chiller 2 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What safety hazards are mentioned in the document?

What safety hazards are mentioned in the document?

What symbols are used in the document and what do they represent?

What symbols are used in the document and what do they represent?

CENTRIFUGAL LIQUID CHILLERS

OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE Supersedes: 160.75-O1 (508) Form 160.75-O1 (211)

Indicates a possible hazardous situation Identifies a hazard which could lead to

Indicates a potentially hazardous situa- Highlights additional information useful

CHANGEABILITY OF THIS DOCUMENT

STYLE (Design Level)

SECTION 1 - DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM AND FUNDAMENTALS OF OPERATION........................................... 7

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT'D)

SECTION 1 - DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM AND

Figure 1 - MODEL YK CHILLER

from the refrigerant vapor, causing it to condense. The

The position of these vanes is automatically controlled

Refrigerant Flow-Thru Chiller

HOT GAS PRE-ROTATION

OPTIONAL HOT GAS

OPTIONAL LIQUID LEVEL

Refrigerant Flow-Thru Chiller

HOT GAS PRE-ROTATION

DISCHARGE OPTIONAL HOT GAS

OPTIONAL LIQUID LEVEL

SECTION 2 - SYSTEM OPERATING PROCEDURES

OIL HEATERS • If the oil level during operation is in the OVER

3. Check entering and leaving condenser water pres- Weekly

Figure 8 - LIQUID CHILLER LOG SHEETS

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

SECTION 3 - SYSTEM COMPONENTS DESCRIPTION

GENERAL C. Low speed thrust bearing (forward and re-

Figure 9 - SYSTEM COMPONENTS FRONT VIEW

Figure 10 - SYSTEM COMPONENTS REAR VIEW

THRUST COLLAR BEARING

LOW SPEED- THRUST

LOW LOW SPEED

OIL OIL SUBMERSIBLE

Figure 11 - SCHEMATIC DRAWING – (YK) COMPRESSOR LUBRICATION SYSTEM

OIL HEATER ant charge, and maintain reliable control. A specifically

REFRIGERANT FLOW CONTROL OPTIONAL HOT GAS BYPASS

SECTION 4 - OPERATIONAL MAINTENANCE

OIL RETURN SYSTEM CHANGING THE DEHYDRATOR

CHECK VALVE OIL EDUCTOR BLOCK

STOP VALVE DEHYDRATOR

Figure 12 - OIL RETURN SYSTEM

Figure 13 - CHARGING OIL RESERVOIR WITH OIL

Table 1 - OPERATION ANALYSIS CHART

TABLE 1 - OPERATION ANALYSIS CHART (CONT'D)

RESULTS POSSIBLE REMEDY

7. SYMPTOM: REDUCED OIL PUMP CAPACITY

RENEWAL PARTS To test with R-22, proceed as follows:

Figure 14 - EVACUATION OF CHILLER

Table 2 - SYSTEM PRESSURES

VACUUM TESTING DO NOT USE STEAM. A suggested method is

The temperature of the water in the test tube will drop

Figure 16 - DIAGRAM, MEGGING MOTOR WINDINGS

Minimum Insulation Resistance vs. Temperature (per IEEE Std 43)

Condensers And Evaporators General Tube Fouling

SECTION 7 - PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE